CADWorxPlantUsersGuide PDF

CADWorx
Plant User's Guide
Version 2015 SP1 (15.0)
August 2014 / February 2015
DICAS-PE-200007D-Updated
Copyright
Copyright © 2003-2015 Intergraph® Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.
Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial. The Other Documentation may
not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for any
reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
CADWorx Plant User's Guide 2

Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.
Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b. To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporation’s Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, CADWorx, and CAESAR II are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States, and other countries. Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation, and/or its affiliates. AutoCAD,
ObjectARX, and RealDWG are trademarks of Autodesk. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft 3D, L.L.C. Other brands, and product
names are trademarks of their respective owners.
CADWorx Design Review contains Autodesk® RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc., copyright © Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.
Autodesk, Inc., 111 McInnis Parkway, San Rafael, California 94903 ("Autodesk") is a third-party beneficiary to this Agreement to the
extent that the Software Product contains RealDWG, and to the extent that the provisions herein relate to Licensee’s use of the
Software Product containing RealDWG. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Autodesk, and are enforceable by
Autodesk in addition to Intergraph.

Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 16
Conventions .......................................................................................................................................... 16
Technical Support ................................................................................................................................. 17
What's New in Plant .............................................................................................................................. 20
Obsolete Commands ...................................................................................................................... 21
Online Help ........................................................................................................................................... 22
Setup ........................................................................................................................................................... 23
Startup Defaults .................................................................................................................................... 23
Support Directory .................................................................................................................................. 23
MVSetup ............................................................................................................................................... 23
Setup Size/Spec Panel .............................................................................................................................. 24

Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 25
Configuration Settings .................................................................................................................... 28
Set Specification and Size .............................................................................................................. 43
Configuration Layers ...................................................................................................................... 44
Piping Rules ................................................................................................................................... 47
Convert Legacy Drawing ................................................................................................................ 53
Specification and Size ........................................................................................................................... 57
Optional Items ....................................................................................................................................... 57
Optional Component Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 57
Size ....................................................................................................................................................... 58
Spec ...................................................................................................................................................... 58
Size-Spec .............................................................................................................................................. 59
All .......................................................................................................................................................... 59
Editor ..................................................................................................................................................... 59
Change Size.......................................................................................................................................... 59
Change the size automatically ....................................................................................................... 60
Change the size manually .............................................................................................................. 61
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically ............................................................ 61
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually ................................................................... 62
Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically.............................................. 62
Change tee sizes automatically...................................................................................................... 63
Change tee sizes manually ............................................................................................................ 64
Change Specification ............................................................................................................................ 66
Change the specification automatically .......................................................................................... 67
Change the specification manually................................................................................................. 67
Change the specification of a model with branches automatically ................................................. 68
Local Edit .............................................................................................................................................. 68
Modify a component ....................................................................................................................... 70
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 71
Component Custom Data Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 76
Global Edit............................................................................................................................................. 77

Contents
Modify multiple components ........................................................................................................... 78

Custom Data Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 78
Mode Convert........................................................................................................................................ 79
Convert a component to a different mode ...................................................................................... 80
3D Solids ........................................................................................................................................ 80
Convert Isometric ........................................................................................................................... 80
2D Double Line ............................................................................................................................... 80
2D Single Line ................................................................................................................................ 80
Convert Existing ............................................................................................................................. 81
Convert to 3D enhanced................................................................................................................. 81
Convert from project data ............................................................................................................... 81
Convert Intersected Piping ............................................................................................................. 82
CWexplode ..................................................................................................................................... 82
Socket Weld .......................................................................................................................................... 82
Threaded ............................................................................................................................................... 82
Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 83
XREF Edit ............................................................................................................................................. 83
Palettes Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 84

Spec View Palette ................................................................................................................................. 85
Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) ............................................................................. 85
Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette).................................................................................. 87
Custom Data Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) ......................................................................... 88
Line View Palette .................................................................................................................................. 89
Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) ............................................................................. 89
Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) ......................................................................................... 90
Line View Isolation Properties Manager ......................................................................................... 91
Support Modeler Palette ....................................................................................................................... 91
Insert a pipe support ....................................................................................................................... 93
Insert an elbow support .................................................................................................................. 93
Insert a tee support......................................................................................................................... 94
Insert multiple pipe supports .......................................................................................................... 95
Edit Pipe Support Features ............................................................................................................ 95
Insulation View Palette .......................................................................................................................... 97
Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) .......................................................................... 98
Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) .............................................................................. 99
Discontinuity View Palette ................................................................................................................... 101
Pipe Support Report ........................................................................................................................... 103
P&ID View Palette ............................................................................................................................... 103
Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette)............................................................................... 104
Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) .......................................................................... 106
Insert a drawing into the project ................................................................................................... 106
Clash View Palette .............................................................................................................................. 107
Options Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 108
Layers Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 109
Assembly View Palette ....................................................................................................................... 109
Create an assembly...................................................................................................................... 110
Edit an assembly .......................................................................................................................... 110
Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager ........................................................................ 111
Insert an assembly into the drawing ............................................................................................. 111

Contents
Edit an assembly path .................................................................................................................. 111
ISOGEN Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 112

ISOGEN Out ....................................................................................................................................... 113
Extract ISOGEN files .................................................................................................................... 115
Enable the Repeatability return report.......................................................................................... 115
Setup short description column for material list with text wrapping ............................................. 116
Enable curved piping in Plant isometrics...................................................................................... 117
ISOGEN Batch .................................................................................................................................... 118
Extract batch ISOGEN files .......................................................................................................... 118
ISOGEN Supplemental ....................................................................................................................... 119
Stop Sign ............................................................................................................................................. 119
ISOGEN Start Point ............................................................................................................................ 120
Offset Tap ........................................................................................................................................... 120
Place an offset tap ........................................................................................................................ 123
PCF Out .............................................................................................................................................. 123
Extract piping component files ..................................................................................................... 124
PCF In ................................................................................................................................................. 124
Tap ...................................................................................................................................................... 124
Place a tap .................................................................................................................................... 124
ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure .............................................................................................. 125
ISOGEN Information ........................................................................................................................... 125
Material List Definition .................................................................................................................. 125
SKEY Information ......................................................................................................................... 126
End Type Information ................................................................................................................... 134
OrthoGen Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 135

OrthoGen Launch ............................................................................................................................... 135
OrthoGen Out...................................................................................................................................... 135
LNum Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 137

Setup ................................................................................................................................................... 138
Line Numbering System Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 138
Set ....................................................................................................................................................... 139
Set line numbers based on a P&ID project .................................................................................. 140
Set line numbers based on the current drawing ........................................................................... 140
Set line numbers based on a component ..................................................................................... 140
Count ................................................................................................................................................... 140
Set the line count value ................................................................................................................ 141
Increment ............................................................................................................................................ 141
Decrement........................................................................................................................................... 141
Assign ................................................................................................................................................. 141
Assign line numbers ..................................................................................................................... 142
Annotate .............................................................................................................................................. 142
Label components with line numbers ........................................................................................... 142
Line ..................................................................................................................................................... 143
Set the current line number to that of a component ..................................................................... 143
Line Isolate .......................................................................................................................................... 143

Contents
Pipe BOM / DB Panel ............................................................................................................................... 144

Bill of Material Setup ........................................................................................................................... 145
Add or remove properties from BOM ........................................................................................... 146
Change the column order ............................................................................................................. 147
Change text alignment in columns ............................................................................................... 147
Change the BOM sorting and accumulation ................................................................................ 147
BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box ................................................................................ 148
Cut Pipe Bill of Material ....................................................................................................................... 148
Cut BOM using Automatic placement .......................................................................................... 149
Cut BOM using Manual placement............................................................................................... 149
Total Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................... 150
Total BOM using Automatic placement ........................................................................................ 151
Total BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................ 151
Single Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 151
Single BOM using Automatic placement ...................................................................................... 152
Single BOM using Manual placement .......................................................................................... 152
Export Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 153
Import Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 153
Delete Bill of Material .......................................................................................................................... 154
Tag Toggle Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 154
Tag Location ....................................................................................................................................... 154
Insert Tag ............................................................................................................................................ 154
Setup Live Database ........................................................................................................................... 155
Enter User Name and Password Dialog Box ............................................................................... 156
Export Pipe.......................................................................................................................................... 156
Select Item Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 157
Import Pipe .......................................................................................................................................... 158
Audit Pipe Database ........................................................................................................................... 159
Synchronize Pipe Database................................................................................................................ 159
C.G. Generator.................................................................................................................................... 161
Misc Panel ................................................................................................................................................ 163

Auto Connect ...................................................................................................................................... 164
Group On/Off....................................................................................................................................... 165
Weld Size ............................................................................................................................................ 165
Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe ............................................................................. 165
Join Pipe ............................................................................................................................................. 165
Join by Run ................................................................................................................................... 166
Join by Segment ........................................................................................................................... 166
User Shapes ....................................................................................................................................... 166
Create a user shape file ............................................................................................................... 170
Edit an existing user shape .......................................................................................................... 171
Create a user shape from points .................................................................................................. 176
Create a user shape from a polyline ............................................................................................ 178
Create a user shape from a block ................................................................................................ 180
Create a 3D user shape ............................................................................................................... 182
Create a 2D user shape ............................................................................................................... 183
Create a 2D single line user shape .............................................................................................. 185
Add a user shape to a specification ............................................................................................. 187

Contents
Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing ........................................................................... 188

Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing ..................................................................... 188
Top Works Add ................................................................................................................................... 188
Top Works Change ............................................................................................................................. 189
System Out ......................................................................................................................................... 189
Generate a CAESAR II input file .................................................................................................. 189
Break Pipe........................................................................................................................................... 191
Break by Length ........................................................................................................................... 191
Break by Number.......................................................................................................................... 191
Nozzle Generic Attach ........................................................................................................................ 191
Place a nozzle generic attachment .............................................................................................. 192
Route from a generic nozzle ........................................................................................................ 193
Change position and direction of generic nozzle ......................................................................... 193
Generic Attach .................................................................................................................................... 193
Place a generic attachment in the drawing .................................................................................. 195
Specify the Bill of Material Mark Point and the Center of Gravity Location.................................. 196
System In ............................................................................................................................................ 196
Read a CAESAR II input file ......................................................................................................... 197
Change Elevation ................................................................................................................................ 197
Change elevation by entering the elevation value ....................................................................... 198
Change elevation by Pick ............................................................................................................. 198
Change elevation by BOP ............................................................................................................ 198
Change elevation by TOP ............................................................................................................ 199
Dim Adjustment ................................................................................................................................... 199
Adjust a dimension to match a pipe ............................................................................................. 200
Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension .................................................................................. 200
Elbow Centerline ................................................................................................................................. 200
ISO Flag .............................................................................................................................................. 200
Re-associate the Components............................................................................................................ 200
System Visibility .................................................................................................................................. 201
2D Panel.................................................................................................................................................... 202
2D Representation .............................................................................................................................. 202
Create a 2D representation .......................................................................................................... 203
2D Representation Hidden .................................................................................................................. 203
Create a 2D representation with hidden lines .............................................................................. 203
Box ...................................................................................................................................................... 203
Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 204
Zoom Lock .......................................................................................................................................... 205
Turn on the zoom lock .................................................................................................................. 205
Turn off the zoom lock .................................................................................................................. 205
Zoom Factors ...................................................................................................................................... 205
Bolt ............................................................................................................................................................ 206

Auto Gasket ........................................................................................................................................ 206
Place a gasket automatically ........................................................................................................ 207
Place a gasket manually............................................................................................................... 207
Automatic ............................................................................................................................................ 207
Place stud bolts automatically ...................................................................................................... 207

Contents
Place stud bolts manually ............................................................................................................. 208

Auto Weld............................................................................................................................................ 208
Place weld gaps automatically ..................................................................................................... 209
Place weld gaps manually ............................................................................................................ 209
Weld Total ........................................................................................................................................... 209
Count weld gaps automatically ..................................................................................................... 210
Standard .............................................................................................................................................. 210
Place standard stud bolts ............................................................................................................. 210
Non Standard ...................................................................................................................................... 210
Place nonstandard stud bolts ....................................................................................................... 211
RT Panel ................................................................................................................................................... 212

Auto Route .......................................................................................................................................... 212
Start a new route .......................................................................................................................... 214
Continue Routing .......................................................................................................................... 214
Route skewed pipe ....................................................................................................................... 215
Moveline ....................................................................................................................................... 216
Router ................................................................................................................................................. 216
Router commands ............................................................................................................................... 217
Buttweld LR .................................................................................................................................. 218
Buttweld SR .................................................................................................................................. 218
Threaded ...................................................................................................................................... 219
Socket Weld ................................................................................................................................. 219
VUE Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 220

Export to VUE ..................................................................................................................................... 220
Export an entire drawing to a VUE file ......................................................................................... 220
Export selected objects to a VUE file ........................................................................................... 221
Dimension Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 222

Automatic ............................................................................................................................................ 223
Place automatic dimensions ......................................................................................................... 223
Horizontal ............................................................................................................................................ 223
Place horizontal dimensions ......................................................................................................... 223
Vertical ................................................................................................................................................ 224
Place vertical dimensions ............................................................................................................. 224
Set ....................................................................................................................................................... 224
Set the Elevation .......................................................................................................................... 224
Rotated ................................................................................................................................................ 225
Place rotated dimensions ............................................................................................................. 225
Horizontal with Tail .............................................................................................................................. 225
Place horizontal tailed dimensions ............................................................................................... 225
Vertical with Tail .................................................................................................................................. 226
Place vertical tailed dimensions ................................................................................................... 226
Change ................................................................................................................................................ 226
Change the Elevation ................................................................................................................... 226
Component.......................................................................................................................................... 227
Place component annotation ........................................................................................................ 227
Elevation ............................................................................................................................................. 227

Contents
Place component elevation annotation ........................................................................................ 228

Coordinates ......................................................................................................................................... 228
Place coordinates ......................................................................................................................... 228
Tick Mark ............................................................................................................................................. 229
Place tick marks ........................................................................................................................... 229
ISO Text .............................................................................................................................................. 229
Height .................................................................................................................................................. 229
Graphics / Pipe Ends............................................................................................................................... 230

System Prompts .................................................................................................................................. 232
Section ................................................................................................................................................ 233
Place a section graphic ................................................................................................................ 234
Detail ................................................................................................................................................... 234
Place a detail graphic ................................................................................................................... 235
Plan ..................................................................................................................................................... 235
Place a plan graphic ..................................................................................................................... 236
Instrument ........................................................................................................................................... 236
Place an instrument graphic ......................................................................................................... 237
Elevation ............................................................................................................................................. 237
Place an elevation graphic ........................................................................................................... 238
Arrow ................................................................................................................................................... 238
Place an arrow head graphic ........................................................................................................ 239
Weld .................................................................................................................................................... 240
Place a weld symbol graphic ........................................................................................................ 241
ISO ...................................................................................................................................................... 241
Place an isometric symbol graphic ............................................................................................... 243
Dots ..................................................................................................................................................... 243
Place a weld dot graphic .............................................................................................................. 244
Misc ..................................................................................................................................................... 245
Place a miscellaneous graphic ..................................................................................................... 246
Flange O.D. ......................................................................................................................................... 246
Insert a flange O.D. ...................................................................................................................... 246
Plain End ............................................................................................................................................. 246
Insert a plain end .......................................................................................................................... 247
Hidden End ......................................................................................................................................... 247
Insert a hidden end ....................................................................................................................... 247
Pipe End .............................................................................................................................................. 247
Insert a pipe end ........................................................................................................................... 247
Layers Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 248

Change Layer...................................................................................................................................... 249
Change the layer associated with an object ................................................................................. 249
Set Layer ............................................................................................................................................. 249
Set the active layer ....................................................................................................................... 249
Delete Layer ........................................................................................................................................ 249
Delete a layer ............................................................................................................................... 250
Layer Off ............................................................................................................................................. 250
Turn off a layer ............................................................................................................................. 250
Layer On ............................................................................................................................................. 250

Contents
Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer Off command .............................................................. 250
Match Layer ........................................................................................................................................ 250
Match an object's layer ................................................................................................................. 251
Isolate Layer........................................................................................................................................ 251
Display only the layer associated with an object .......................................................................... 251
Un-Isolate Layer .................................................................................................................................. 251
Turn on all layers .......................................................................................................................... 251
Previous .............................................................................................................................................. 251
Restraints Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 252

Reinforcing Pad................................................................................................................................... 253
Insert a reinforcement pad ........................................................................................................... 253
Reinforcing Saddle .............................................................................................................................. 253
Insert a reinforcement saddle ....................................................................................................... 254
Translational........................................................................................................................................ 254
Place a translational restraint ....................................................................................................... 254
Anchor ................................................................................................................................................. 255
Place an anchor............................................................................................................................ 255
Spring Hanger ..................................................................................................................................... 255
Place a spring hanger................................................................................................................... 255
Rotational ............................................................................................................................................ 256
Place a rotational restraint ............................................................................................................ 256
Snubber ............................................................................................................................................... 256
Place a snubber............................................................................................................................ 256
Guide ................................................................................................................................................... 257
Place a guide ................................................................................................................................ 257
UCS Panel................................................................................................................................................. 258

Point and Shoot UCS .......................................................................................................................... 258
Flat ...................................................................................................................................................... 260
UCS Next ............................................................................................................................................ 261
Compass ............................................................................................................................................. 261
North ................................................................................................................................................... 261
South ................................................................................................................................................... 262
West .................................................................................................................................................... 262
East ..................................................................................................................................................... 263
UCS Object ......................................................................................................................................... 263
Steel Shapes Panel .................................................................................................................................. 264

Shapes ................................................................................................................................................ 264
Wide Flange Shapes .................................................................................................................... 268
Channel Shapes ........................................................................................................................... 269
Angle Shapes ............................................................................................................................... 270
Tee Shapes .................................................................................................................................. 271
Pipe Shapes ................................................................................................................................. 272
Tube Shapes ................................................................................................................................ 273
Flat Bar Shapes ............................................................................................................................ 274
Round Bar Shapes ....................................................................................................................... 275
Channel Shape with Lip................................................................................................................ 276

Contents
Angle Shape with Lip .................................................................................................................... 277

Z Shapes ...................................................................................................................................... 278
Angle Double Shape..................................................................................................................... 279
Steel Draw Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 280

Plate .................................................................................................................................................... 281
Place plate by points .................................................................................................................... 282
Place plate by closed polyline ...................................................................................................... 282
Place plate by curves ................................................................................................................... 283
Base Plate ........................................................................................................................................... 283
Place a base plate ........................................................................................................................ 285
Place a base plate with holes ....................................................................................................... 285
Steel Bolts ........................................................................................................................................... 285
Set Size by Component ...................................................................................................................... 288
Steel - Generic Attachment ................................................................................................................. 288
User Shape ......................................................................................................................................... 290
Loft ...................................................................................................................................................... 292
Single Line Steel ................................................................................................................................. 293
Steel - Frame Creation ........................................................................................................................ 301
Create a new frame configuration ................................................................................................ 302
Edit a frame configuration ............................................................................................................ 303
Place a frame in the drawing ........................................................................................................ 303
Frame Annotation................................................................................................................................ 303
Ladder ................................................................................................................................................. 304
Place a ladder interactively .......................................................................................................... 306
Place a ladder using key-ins ........................................................................................................ 306
Place a ladder with a cage ........................................................................................................... 306
Handrail ............................................................................................................................................... 307
Place hand rail by points .............................................................................................................. 308
Place hand rail by polyline ............................................................................................................ 308
Stair ..................................................................................................................................................... 308
Steel Edit Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 311

Steel - Cope ........................................................................................................................................ 312
Miter .................................................................................................................................................... 312
Cut ....................................................................................................................................................... 313
Cut members by line..................................................................................................................... 313
Cut members by three-point plane ............................................................................................... 313
Union ................................................................................................................................................... 314
Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 314
Global Edit........................................................................................................................................... 319
Global Edit All...................................................................................................................................... 319
Annotate Component .......................................................................................................................... 321
Convert Solid....................................................................................................................................... 322
Layer Change...................................................................................................................................... 322
Select Control...................................................................................................................................... 323
Auto Cope ........................................................................................................................................... 323

Contents
Steel BOM / DB Panel .............................................................................................................................. 324

Steel BOM Setup ................................................................................................................................ 325
Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box ....................................................................... 327
Cut Steel Bill of Material ...................................................................................................................... 327
Total Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................... 329
Single Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 331
Export Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 333
Setup Live Database Steel ................................................................................................................. 334
Export Steel......................................................................................................................................... 335
Import Steel ......................................................................................................................................... 335
Audit Steel Database .......................................................................................................................... 336
Synchronize Steel Database............................................................................................................... 337
Export Steel Model .............................................................................................................................. 337
Import Steel Model .............................................................................................................................. 338
CG Generator...................................................................................................................................... 338
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel ................................................................................................................ 339

HVAC .................................................................................................................................................. 340
Add an HVAC shape to the drawing............................................................................................. 342
Modify an HVAC shape ................................................................................................................ 342
HVAC Shapes Catalog ....................................................................................................................... 342
Place an HVAC shape from the catalog ....................................................................................... 345
Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog ..................................................................................... 345
User Shape ......................................................................................................................................... 345
Place a user-defined HVAC shape ............................................................................................... 348
Modify a user-defined HVAC shape ............................................................................................. 348
Generic Attach .................................................................................................................................... 348
Place a generic attachment in the drawing .................................................................................. 349
Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 350
GC Edit ................................................................................................................................................ 350
Edit HVAC components globally .................................................................................................. 351
HVAC BOM Setup............................................................................................................................... 351
Cut HVAC Bill of Material .................................................................................................................... 354

Contents
Total HVAC Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 355

Single HVAC Bill of Material ............................................................................................................... 357
Data Remove ...................................................................................................................................... 358
Remove CADWorx data from components .................................................................................. 358
Layer Change...................................................................................................................................... 358
Change the layers associated with HVAC components ............................................................... 359
DB Generate ....................................................................................................................................... 359
Export CADWorx HVAC data ....................................................................................................... 360
DB In ................................................................................................................................................... 360
Import CADWorx HVAC data ....................................................................................................... 360
Audit HVAC Database ........................................................................................................................ 360
Audit the HVAC database ............................................................................................................ 361
Synchronize HVAC Database ............................................................................................................. 361
Synchronize the HVAC database ................................................................................................. 361
Toolbars.................................................................................................................................................... 362
Accessing and Docking the Toolbars.................................................................................................. 362
Aliases and Command Names ........................................................................................................... 363
Connecting to components ................................................................................................................. 363
Compass ............................................................................................................................................. 363
Plane versus Isometrics view modes .................................................................................................. 363
3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling ....................................................................................................... 363
Buttweld .............................................................................................................................................. 364
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 368
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 383
Flanges ............................................................................................................................................... 395
Weld Neck Flange ........................................................................................................................ 396
Slip-on Flange .............................................................................................................................. 398
Blind Flange .................................................................................................................................. 399
Socket Type Flange...................................................................................................................... 400
Threaded Flange .......................................................................................................................... 401
Lap Joint Flange ........................................................................................................................... 403
Stub End ....................................................................................................................................... 403
Long Weld Neck ........................................................................................................................... 404
Reducing Slip-on Flange .............................................................................................................. 404
Reducing Threaded Flange .......................................................................................................... 406
Reducing Weld Neck Flange ........................................................................................................ 407
Flgd/BW Valves................................................................................................................................... 409
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 411
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 420
Lined ................................................................................................................................................... 423
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 426
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 427
Fiberglass ............................................................................................................................................ 428
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 431
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 439

Contents
Sanitary ............................................................................................................................................... 446

Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 453
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 468
Victaulic ............................................................................................................................................... 481
Threaded/Socket ................................................................................................................................. 485
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 490
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 506
Thrd/SW Valves .................................................................................................................................. 518
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 520
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 530
Gaskets, Etc. ....................................................................................................................................... 532
Gasket .......................................................................................................................................... 532
Weld Gap ...................................................................................................................................... 533
Pipe Ends ............................................................................................................................................ 534
Restraints ............................................................................................................................................ 534
Misc ..................................................................................................................................................... 535
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 537
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 540
Operators ............................................................................................................................................ 542
Line Numbers ...................................................................................................................................... 542
UCS ..................................................................................................................................................... 543
Steel .................................................................................................................................................... 544
Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 546
Palettes ............................................................................................................................................... 548
Specification and Data Files ................................................................................................................... 549

Editing Component Data Files ............................................................................................................ 549
AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant ................................................................................................... 550

Modifying a User Profile ...................................................................................................................... 550
Creating a Base Profile ....................................................................................................................... 551
Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant .............................................. 551
Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database ............................................................... 553
Update History ......................................................................................................................................... 554
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 558

Preface
This document provides command reference information and workflows for CADWorx Plant.
We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at:
PPMdoc@intergraph.com.
Documentation updates for supported software versions are available from
https://smartsupport.intergraph.com (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com).
Intergraph® gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as needed for non-
commercial use at your company. You cannot print this document for resale or redistribution
outside your company.
Conventions
Before reviewing this guide, it is important to understand the terms and conventions used in the
documentation.
Use the information below to identify the convention and the type of information.
Convention Type of Information
[Product Folder] The CADWorx installation folder on your computer, for example,
C:\CADWorx. Substitute your installation folder anywhere this
notation is used.
[AutoCAD Folder] The AutoCAD installation folder on your computer, for example,
C:\AutoCAD 2000i. Substitute your installation folder anywhere
this notation is used.
[CD-DRIVE] The CD-ROM drive on your computer. Substitute your CD-ROM

drive letter anywhere this notation is used.
Command Line Items that need to be typed in or appear at the AutoCAD

command line.
User Responses User responses to command prompts.
Commands CADWorx and AutoCAD commands.
Options Command line options.
CAPITALS AutoCAD system variables or keywords.
Key + Key Key combinations for which you must press and hold down one
key and then press another, for example, CTRL+P or ALT+F4.

Preface
Technical Support
For the latest information on CADWorx Plant, visit Intergraph CADWorx and Analysis Solutions
(http://www.coade.com/).
For current on-line support information, including knowledge base, technical tips, and
downloads, visit Intergraph Smart Support (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com).
You can contact Intergraph CAS Technical Support or Sales:
 ICAS Dealer Support (http://www.coade.com/Support/Dealers.shtml) or ICAS General
Support (http://support.intergraph.com/Default.asp)
 Technical Support E-mail: ppmcrm@Intergraph.com
 Phone: 1-800-766-7701 (CADWorx Direct), 280-890-4566 (General)
 Fax: 281-890-3301
 Sales E-mail: sales.icas@intergraph.com
In order to provide technical support, Intergraph CAS needs to know what version of CADWorx,
AutoCAD, and Windows you are using. To determine this information, follow the steps outlined
for the product you are using:
CADWorx Product Steps
Plant, P&ID, fieldPipe, or Steel  Run the CADWORXABOUT command. A dialog

box opens and displays the version information.
 Close the dialog box to send the required
information to the AutoCAD command line.
 Copy the information from the command line, and
email it to Intergraph CAS.
Equipment or PV Fabricator  Run the EQUIPABOUT command. A dialog box

opens and displays the version information.
 Close the dialog box to send the required
information to the AutoCAD command line.
 Copy the information from the command line, and
email it to Intergraph CAS.
Internet Publisher Version information is displayed at the AutoCAD

command line when you start the software.
Datasheets Click Help > About to display a dialog box that contains
the required information.
In addition to the information above, the table below lists the additional files that are usually
required to assist Intergraph CAS in resolving your technical issues:

Preface
Additional Files Required by Intergraph CAS

CADWorx Product Support
CADWorx Plant (Piping, Steel, HVAC) Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.
 If the model consists of several line numbers,
indicate in the email which line numbers you are
having issues with.
 If the model consists of many drawing files with
dependent reference drawings (XREFs), use the
AutoCAD ETRANSMIT command to create a ZIP
file of all the drawings used in the master model.
CADWorx Plant (component data file Email information about the part's dimension from the
creation) manufacturer's catalog.
CADWorx ISOGEN Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files, any
isometrics generated by ISOGEN, and the ISOGEN
style files.
having issues with.
 The ISOGEN.FLS file located in the ISOGEN style
folder lists all the files used (*.OPL, *.MLS, *.FLS,
*.DDF, *.POS, *.ALT, *.DWG*.DXF, *.FDF, *.ATT).
Email all files listed in the ISOGEN.FLS file,
including the ISOGEN.FLS file.
CADWorx Equipment Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.
CADWorx Equipment to PV Elite Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) file and PV
interface Elite input file (*.PVI).
PV Fabricator Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files and PV

Elite input file (*.PVI).
CADWorx P&ID or CADWorx IP Email the complete P&ID project, which includes
Project.CFG, Database.TBL, Map.TBL, and all the
DWG, and MDB files. Usually, all of these files are
located in one folder.
 If the project has many P&ID drawing files, indicate
which P&ID drawings and components you are
having issues with.
 If you are experiencing database errors, include the
file [Product
Folder]\P&ID\System\Sql_Error_Log.TXT.
 If you are emailing MDB files, use a compression
utility such as WinZIP. Most email servers have
restrictions on transmitting MDB attachments.

Preface
CADWorx Steel Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.

 If the model consists of many components, indicate
in the model which components or location you are
having issues with.
CADWorx Datasheets Email the datasheets MDB file and any datasheet file
generated (XLS).
 If emailing MDB / XLS files, use a compression
utility such as WinZIP. Most email servers have
restrictions on transmitting MDB / XLS attachments.
CADWorx Plant to CAESAR II Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) file and
interface CAESAR II input file (*._A, *.C2).
 Run the CADWorx GETALLSPECDATAFILES
command to copy all specifications and data files
used in the model into sub-folders under where the
model drawing file is located.
 Zip the contents of these folders and email the ZIP
file to Intergraph CAS Support.
having issues with.
CADWorx Design Create Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.
having issues with.
 If the model consists of many drawing files with
dependent reference drawings (XREFs), use the
AutoCAD ETRANSMIT command to create a ZIP
file of all drawings used in the master model.
CADWorx Design Viewer Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files and the
*.CDR file.
 If you are attaching large or multiple files to your eCustomer log, use a compression utility
such as WinZIP.
 If you cannot attach your drawing files, then try to duplicate the issue in a new drawing with
as few components as possible. If the issue can be duplicated in a new drawing, attach the
duplicate drawing to Intergraph CAS.
 For hardware lock issues, first verify that you have an Intergraph CAS hardware lock.
CADWorx Plant Professional, CADWorx P&ID, CADWorx P&ID Professional, CADWorx
Plant Ductile Iron, and CADWorx Plant Sanitary use the Intergraph CAS hardware lock for
licensing. For more information, see Licensing in the CADWorx Installation Users Guide.

Preface
What's New in Plant

Version 2015 SP1 (15.0)
This user's guide has the following changes for this release.
Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2015 SP1
Software Enhancements
 You can now convert CADWorx drawing files to the .vue file format. For more information,
see VUE Panel (on page 220) and Export to VUE (on page 220).
Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2015
 You can now turn updates on or off for Layer/color in the Apply Change Data Rule. For
more information, see Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box (on page 52).
 You can now create threaded needle valves with male threaded by female threaded ends.
 You can now route mitered elbows using the Miter Elbow Buttweld elbow type or from the
component List. Component List is explained in Auto Route (on page 212). For more
information, see Auto Route (on page 212) and Continue Routing (on page 214).
 You can now insert a cross and a tee with reducers. The software bases the size of the
component on the connected branch of the other component. For more information, see
New and Edit Component Pane in the CADWorx Spec Editor Users Guide.
 You can now create skewed piping. You must set a maximum angle for the skew with the
Apply Skew Pipe Maximum Angle rule if you do not want the default 15º degree value. For
more information, see Auto Route (on page 212), Route skewed pipe (on page 215), and
Apply Skew Pipe Maximum Angle (on page 53).
 You can now use the ISOGEN Configuration Panel in I-Configure.
 When setting up a user defined material list in the ISOGEN Configuration panel you can now
use the attribute name -80 to display the short description column with text wrapping when
running ISOGEN Out . For more information, see Setup short description column for
material list with text wrapping (on page 116).
 You can now generate isometric drawings for curved piping by setting the Threshold in
ISOGEN Configuration to greater than 0. Generate these drawings by creating an adjustable
bend, setting the ISOGEN Data dialog box SKEY to PB** (** designates a valid ISOGEN
end type), and then running ISOGEN Out or ISOGEN Batch . For more information,
see ISOGEN Out (on page 113), ISOGEN Batch (on page 118), Adjustable Bend (on page
378), and Enable curved piping in Plant isometrics (on page 117).
 You can now turn visibility of TAPs on or off in the system layer with the SYSVIS command.
For more information, see System Visibility (on page 201).
 The software now allows descriptions of end types for swages. For more information on the
new end types included, see PipeDescriptionCat (on page 38).

Preface
 You have more options when you use the CHANGESIZE command to change the size of a
tee. For more information, see Change Size (on page 59), Change tee sizes automatically
(on page 63), and Change tee sizes manually (on page 64).
 You can now type a value in Default Value of the Custom Data tab in the CADWorx Spec
View palette to override the custom data from the Specification Editor. If you set up custom
data with the List option, you can select an item from the Default Value to apply it as an
override. For more information, see Spec View Palette (on page 85) and Custom Data Tab
(CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 88).
 You can select from a list of items when editing custom data in the Component Custom
Data dialog box accessed in the Component Edit dialog box. You can also do the same in
the Custom Data dialog box accessed in the Global CEdit dialog box. For more
information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box (on page 76) and Custom Data Dialog
Box (on page 78).
 You can now insert O-Lets on the tangent of a bend or elbow.
 You can now move and connect Socket and Threaded components to straight buttweld
components. The software automatically deletes all extra welds.
 You can now copy the nozzle generic attachments with the applied data.
 The software now includes the custom data fields in the MSSQL database.
 You can now use SDBAUDIT to delete all components profiles from the database. For more
information, see Audit Steel Database (on page 336).
 CADWorx now eliminates the gap that existed between the pipe supports and the pipe wall
allowing for a correct ISOGEN Out.
 You can now enable the Repeatability return report in the I-Configure ISOGEN
Configuration Panel. This feature was controlled by the RepeatFile option in the previous
version of I-Configure. Enabling the repeatability report defines start and split locations for
consecutive ISOGEN outputs. Set the ISOGENSetting variable to control the import of the
repeat file data. The number of sheets then adds to the ISOGEN Data dialog box. For more
information, see ISOGENSetting (on page 35), Enable the Repeatability return report (on
page 115), and ISOGEN Out (on page 113).
 CADWorx now supports CAESAR II 2014. For more information, see CAESARIIVersion (on
page 33).
For information on releases before 2014, see Update History (on page 554).
Obsolete Commands
These commands are no longer available in CADWorx Plant.
AUTOISO BREAKDIST CLASSICCLASH
C2ISO C2MULTI C2TEXT
CONTINUITY CONVERTCL ELEV2PLAN
ENDBREAK ENDFLG ENDHIDDEN
ENDPIPE ENDPLAIN EXIST

Preface
GEARELEV HEAD INSERTMODE
INSULATION ISOCFG ISOOUT
LEVERELEV LINEPIPE MAIN
NODEPLACE NORHTELEV OFFSETCL
OPERPLAN OSYELEV PIPEIN
PIPEOUT PUMP RECT
RED ROLLEDFLG ROLLEDPLAIN
SETANGLE SOUTHELEV SPEC
SPECCHG TANK VESSEL
VESSELOD WESTELEV 3DFOLLOW
Online Help
To access the CADWorx Help, type MANUAL on the command line, and then press ENTER.

SECTION 1
Setup
Before you begin using CADWorx Plant, you need to set options and some basic configuration
tasks.
Your project administrator needs to review and update the catalog (.cat) and project
(.prj) file in the Spec Editor before modeling begins.
In This Section
Startup Defaults ............................................................................. 23
Support Directory ........................................................................... 23
MVSetup ........................................................................................ 23
Startup Defaults
When starting CADWorx Plant for the first time, you are prompted for the system of
measurement to use in the drawing. This dialog box only displays the first time you start
CADWorx. After that, the configuration file name and location is stored in the registry. The
following options are available:
 Imperial Measurements - Imperial Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product
Folder]\Plant\System\Imperial.cfg file.
 Metric Measurements - Imperial Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product
Folder]\Plant\System\Metric.cfg file.
 Metric Measurements - Metric Pipe Sizes - Restores the [Product
Folder]\Plant\System\Metric.cfg file.
Support Directory
Drawings in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder should not be opened with CADWorx
Plant. If a drawing is started in this folder, an error displays indicating that the software should
not be run from this location. This stops CADWorx from initializing or preparing the support
drawings. Directly open AutoCAD to modify these drawings.
To create a base profile, see Creating a Base Profile (on page 551).
MVSetup
Plant menu: Utility > MVSetup
Plant uses the MVSETUP.LSP file supplied by AutoCAD. The software also supplies a simplified
version of the MVSETUP.DFS file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder. If this file is
deleted, the software recreates it.
The MVSETUP.DFS file can be modified to include additional title blocks. Plant uses these title
blocks with the Setup (on page 25) function. The MVSetup routine has options that allow you to
add and delete title blocks. Plant supplies its own title blocks for your convenience. Plant title
blocks have attributes attached for ease of labeling.

SECTION 2
Setup Size/Spec Panel

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec
Command Name Command Line
Setup - Defines all CADWorx settings within the current SETUP

drawings. For more information, see Setup (on page 25).
Main Size - Specifies the specification, and the main and SETSIZE, SETSPEC
reduction sizes. For more information, see Set Specification
and Size (on page 43).
Optional Items - Places a component when the component SPECOPTION

type in the specification has an optional component. For more
information, see Optional Items (on page 57).
Size - Sets the main and reduction size by selecting a COMP2SIZE

component. For more information, see Size (on page 58).
Spec - Sets the current specification by selecting a COMP2SPEC

component. For more information, see Spec (on page 58).
Size-Spec - Sets the main size, reduction size, and COMP2SIZESPEC

specification by selecting a component. For more information,
see Size-Spec (on page 59).
Editor - Modifies the delivered specifications and creates new SPECEDIT

specifications. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page
87).
Change Size - Modifies the size of the components selected. CHANGESIZE

For more information, see Change Size (on page 59).
Change Specification - Modifies the specification of the CHANGESPEC

components selected. For more information, see Change
Specification (on page 66).
Local Edit - Modifies the properties of an existing component. CEDIT

For more information, see Local Edit (on page 68).
Global Edit - Modifies the properties of multiple components. GCEDIT

For more information, see Global Edit (on page 77).

3D Solids - Converts selected components to 3D solid mode. CONVERTSOLID

For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 79) and 3D
Solids (on page 80).
Convert Isometric - Converts selected components to CONVERTISO

isometric mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on
page 79) and Convert Isometric (on page 80).
2D Double Line - Converts selected components to 2D CONVERTDOUBLE

double line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert
(on page 79) and 2D Double Line (on page 80).
2D Single Line - Converts selected components to 2D single CONVERTSINGLE

line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page
79) and 2D Single Line (on page 80).
Socket Weld - Sets the socket welded fitting mode for hub- —
based components. For more information, see Socket Weld
(on page 82).
Threaded - Sets the threaded fitting mode for hub-based —

components. For more information, see Threaded (on page
82).
Settings - Displays the current drawing settings. For more CURRENT

information, see Settings (on page 83).
Xref Edit - Views sizes or information within the component XCEDIT

XREF. For more information, see Xref Edit (on page 83).
Spec Change Toggle - Turns the TAG value update on or off. SPECCHGTOGGLE
Setup
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Setup
Setting toolbar: Setup

Plant menu: Setup
Command line: SETUP
Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawing. This command displays the CADWorx
Plant Setup dialog box.

CADWorx Plant Setup Dialog Box

Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawing.
Current Drawing - Displays the current default values for Specification / Size. Sets the
Colors, Drawing Mode, Fitting Mode, and Routing Mode.
 Specification / Size - Displays the current settings for the specification and size:
 Main Size - Displays the main size set for the drawing.
 Reduction Size - Displays the reduction size set for the drawing.
 Specification - Displays the specification set for the drawing.
 Colors - Sets the default colors in the drawing:
 Compass - Sets the compass color. The compass can also be turned off here.
 Dimension - Sets the dimensions color. The dimensions can also be turned off here.
 Highlight - Sets the highlight color.

 Drawing Mode - Sets the default drawing mode:

 3D Solids - Draws components in 3D mode.
 2D Double Line - Draws components in 2D with double lines mode.
 2D Single Line - Draws components in 2D with a single line mode.
 3D Enhanced - Draws components in 3D enhanced mode. Bolts, gaskets, and welds
display in their real world appearance in this mode.
You can convert the drawing to another mode. For more information, see Mode Convert
(on page 79).
 Fitting Mode - Specifies the fitting mode for hub-based components. Select one of the
following:
 Socket - Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the socket welded
section of the specification.
 Threaded - Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the threaded section
of the specification.
 Routing Mode - Specifies the mode for routing pipe in the drawing.
 Center - Specifies the component is routed using the center line to draw the
component.
 BOP - Specifies the component is routed using the bottom of pipe to draw the
component.
 TOP - Specifies the component is routed using the top of pipe to draw the component.
 Left - Specifies the component is routed using the left of the pipe to draw the
component.
 Right - Specifies the component is routed using the right of the pipe to draw the
component.
Configuration Settings - Sets the values for the configuration. For more information, see
Startup Variables (on page 28).
Specification / Size - Sets the specification and sizes of the drawing. Specification must be set
before sizes can be set. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).
Configuration Layers - Specifies drawing layers and the default names, line types, and colors
of the layers. Default layers are provided. You can add and delete layers. For more information,
see Configuration Layers (on page 44).
Piping Rules - Sets the piping rules in the drawing. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 47).
Convert Legacy Drawing - Enables you to convert a legacy drawing to 2013 components. For
more information, see Convert Legacy Drawing (on page 53).
Save As - Saves the current configuration.
Load - Loads a saved configuration.
Apply and Close - Accepts the settings and closes the dialog box. Settings are immediately
applied to the current drawing.
Cancel - Cancels the operation.
Help - Displays the CADWorx Plant Users Guide help file.

Configuration Settings
Specifies values for the selected configuration setting.
 The default drawing template, Imperial.dwt (Metric.dwt for metric) is also stored in the
registry. Each time the software is started, the default template is used.
 The drawing parameters are setup during installation for imperial or metric in the setup
profile. If you want to change the configuration setting to the drawing parameters, use the
SystemMeasure (on page 42) variable to change the drawing settings.
Configuration Settings - Displays variables to change. Change variable values in the text box
list. For more information, see Startup Variables (on page 28).
If the configuration settings permission is set to read-only, only the Cancel button is
available.
Startup Variables
Provides default drawing and component values. You can modify the variables in the
configuration setting as needed. For more information, see Configuration Settings (on page 28).
The most recent configuration settings are stored in the registry and are used the next time you
start Plant.
Topics
Drawing Prototype ......................................................................... 29
AlphaSizeControl ........................................................................... 29
AuditDataOnStartup....................................................................... 30
AutoDimensionBox ........................................................................ 30
BomBoltControl.............................................................................. 31
BomScheduleDirection .................................................................. 31
BomScheduleSpacing ................................................................... 31
BomTagGridFactor ........................................................................ 31
BomTagOptimize ........................................................................... 32
BomTagRadiusFactor .................................................................... 32
BomTagSpacingFactor .................................................................. 32
BoltRoundControl .......................................................................... 32
CADWorxMaterial .......................................................................... 32
CAESARIIMaterial ......................................................................... 33
CAESARIIMemory ......................................................................... 33
CAESARIITolerance ...................................................................... 33
CAESARIIVersion .......................................................................... 33
DataBaseCodesISOGEN .............................................................. 33
DimensionsExcludedSlope ............................................................ 34
DimensionsExistingISOGEN ......................................................... 34
ElbowCenterLine ........................................................................... 34
FittingWidth .................................................................................... 34
HVACLibraryDirectory ................................................................... 34
ISOGENDefaultStyle ..................................................................... 35
ISOGENSetting.............................................................................. 35
ISOGENContinuationGraphicsCount ............................................ 35
LanguageFile ................................................................................. 35
LayerByLineNumber ...................................................................... 36
LineNumberSystem ....................................................................... 38

LineViewIsolationSettingsFile ........................................................ 38
PipeDescriptionCat ........................................................................ 38
PipeSupportSetting ........................................................................ 39
SaveLastProfileUsed ..................................................................... 39
SingleLineWidth ............................................................................. 39
SpecificationDirectory .................................................................... 39
SpecificationDefaultProject ............................................................ 40
SpecSizeOverride .......................................................................... 40
SteelCopeBoltDistance .................................................................. 40
SteelCopeWeldDistance ................................................................ 40
SteelLibraryDirectory ..................................................................... 40
SteelNeutralAxis ............................................................................ 40
SteelPartNumberFile ..................................................................... 41
SteelRoundControl ........................................................................ 41
SteelRoundUnit.............................................................................. 41
SteelToolTipSetting ....................................................................... 41
SyncOnStartUp .............................................................................. 41
SystemMeasure ............................................................................. 42
TemplateDatabaseFile................................................................... 42
ToolTipSetting ................................................................................ 42
TopWorksSetting ........................................................................... 42
UseObjectsFromXrefs ................................................................... 43
WeldDotSize .................................................................................. 43
WeldGapToDB............................................................................... 43
Drawing Prototype
Default value: English/Inch
Allowed values: English/Inch, Metric/Inch, and Metric/Metric
Enables you to select a drawing environment type:
 English/Inch - Uses the Imperial dimensions with Imperial pipe sizes.
 Metric/Inch - Uses the Metric dimensions with Imperial pipe sizes.
 Metric/Metric - Uses the Metric dimensions with Metric pipe sizes.
AlphaSizeControl
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10
Controls the number of decimal places used in Alpha Size. Setting this variable to zero places
no decimals in Alpha Size. Setting the variable to a value from 1 to 9 places 1 to 9 decimal
places in Alpha Size. Setting this variable to 10 suppresses trailing zeros in Alpha Size.
Example with a value of 0:
 For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4 1/2" or 6" would be 6"
 For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50 or 60.3 would be 60
 For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4.500" or 6" would be 6.000"
 For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50.000 or 60.3 would be 60.300
 For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4.5" or 6" would be 6"
 For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50 or 60.3 would be 60.3
If you want decimals to display in Alpha Size in Imperial or Metric, the recommended
setting is 10.

AuditDataOnStartup
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1
Controls when CADWorx checks components for removed XDATA when opening a drawing.
 0 - Checking for removed XDATA is turned off.
 1 - Checking for removed XDATA is turned on.
See Also
 Show Removed XDATA (on page 30)
 Restore XDATA (on page 30)
Show Removed XDATA
Command line: CWSHOWNOXD
Highlights components where XDATA has been removed.
1. Type CWSHOWNOXD on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Type S on the command line or E to select the entire drawing, and then press ENTER.
3. Select the component that you want to change, and then press ENTER.
Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option in step 2.
The components with XDATA removed highlight in the drawing.
Restore XDATA
Command line: CWADDXD
Restores removed XDATA from a selected specification to a CADWorx component.
1. Type CWADDXD on the command line, and then press ENTER.
Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option in step 2.
The XDATA is added to the component(s).
To restore the xdata of a component, you must use the original specification from
that component.
AutoDimensionBox
Default value: No
Allowed values: No, Yes
Controls boxes around rolling offset automatic dimensions when using Automatic . When set
to Yes, a box is drawn for the rolling offset.
For more information, see Automatic (on page 223).

BomBoltControl
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3
Specifies bolt placement in the Plant ISOGEN bill of material schedules.
 0 - Places the quantity for a set in the pre-CADWorx 2002 format, such as:
QUANTITY = 4, ALPHA_SIZE = 3/4", LONG_DESC = (8) Studs with nuts
 1 - Places the quantity for total bolts, and strips the set number from the long description,
such as:
QUANTITY = 32, ALPHA_SIZE = 3/4", LONG_DESC = Studs with nuts
 2 - Places the quantity for a set, the alpha size based on the flange size, and appends the
bolt diameter to the long description, such as:
QUANTITY = 4, ALPHA_SIZE = 12", LONG_DESC = (8) 3/4" Studs with nuts.
 3 - Places the quantity for total bolts, strips the set number from the long description, places
the alpha size based on the flange size, and appends the bolt diameter to the long
description, such as:
QUANTITY = 32, ALPHA_SIZE = 12", LONG_DESC = 3/4" Studs with nuts
When this option is set to 1 or 3, the long description of the bolt must contain the number
of bolts in the set enclosed by parenthesis. The software uses the value in parenthesis as the
new quantity. The number is then automatically removed from the long description when
displayed in the material list.
BomScheduleDirection
Default value: Down
Allowed values: Down or Up
Specifies the direction of the bill of materials schedule.
 Up - Places the bill of materials schedule in the upward direction, with the column headings
at the bottom.
 Down - Places the bill of materials schedule in the downward direction, with the column
headings at the top.
BomScheduleSpacing
Default value: 0.25
Allowed values: Positive real
Controls the spacing on the bill of material schedule.
BomTagGridFactor
Default value: 1.0
Controls the bill of material tag grid density on the drawing.
When BomTagOptimize (on page 32) is set to 2, set this variable to 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, or 3.0.

BomTagOptimize
Default value: 2
Allowed values: 0, 1, or 2
Specifies the tagging algorithm used for the bill of material.
 0 - The tagging algorithm is off.
 1 - The algorithm is on, but does not stack any tags.
 2 - The algorithm is on. Flange, bolt, and gasket tags are stacked.
BomTagRadiusFactor
Default value: 1.25
Controls the radius of tag bubbles. Bubbles are sized using this factor multiplied by the
AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE.
BomTagSpacingFactor
Default value: 1.25
Controls how far bill of materials bubbles are spaced from the model or components within the
drawing.
BoltRoundControl
Default value: 0
Specifies the rounding for bolt length calculations.
 0 - No rounding is performed.
 1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.
 2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.
 3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.
CADWorxMaterial
Default value: No
Allowed values: No or Yes
Controls CADWorx material generation when using System In . For more information, see
System In (on page 196).
 No - The software bases component descriptions in CADWorx on the material types in
CAESAR II. The CADWorx component name is combined with the CAESAR II material type.
 Yes - The software bases component descriptions in CADWorx on the specifications.
Material types from CAESAR II are ignored.
The component name is defined in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System\Prgm.tbl file.

CAESARIIMaterial
Default value: 0
Controls CAESAR II material generation when using System Out . For more information, see
System Out (on page 189).
 0 - Provides extended material database material types in CAESAR II based on the pipe
material defined in Spec Editor . This does not apply if the component was originally
created in CAESAR II.
 1 - Provides basic material types in CAESAR II (1-17) corresponding to the component
material long description in the specification.
 2 - Provides extended material database material types in CAESAR II based on the actual
component material long description in the specification.
When using CAESAR II version 3.23, only option 1 can be used.
CAESARIIMemory
Default value: 12.0
Specifies the amount of computer RAM used when importing a large CAESAR II input model.
This variable is not required, but is helpful if the import is failing. The value is multiplied by
megabytes.
CAESARIITolerance
Default value: 0.001
Specifies the tolerance for items that are not transferring correctly to CAESAR II. For example,
hangers placed on a skewed line sometimes fail and require a larger tolerance factor.
CAESARIIVersion
Default value: 2014
Specifies the format of the CAESAR II (.c2) input file created by CADWorx. The value should
match the version of CAESAR II that you are using.
DataBaseCodesISOGEN
Default value: No
Specifies how CADWorx ISOGEN uses the DataBaseCodes system.
 No - The DataBaseCodes system is not used. CADWorx Plant creates generic item code
combinations for each run of ISOGEN, starting at 1 for each run. Components with identical
long annotation and specification file names are given the same item-code combination.
 Yes - ISOGEN uses the DataBaseCodes system.
If this option is set to Yes and a valid DataBaseCodes system is not established, bill
of material generation within ISOGEN is not correct.

DimensionsExcludedSlope
Default value: 10.0
Specifies the minimum percentage slope (rise/run) for automatic dimensioning of the vertical leg
of sloped pipe when using Automatic . If the pipe slope is under the specified value, then the
vertical leg dimension and the associated hatched graphics for the rise are not placed. The
horizontal dimension is still placed.
For more information, see Automatic (on page 223).
DimensionsExistingISOGEN
Default value: 0
Controls ISOGEN isometric representation of existing components.
 0 - Existing components are exported with dotted lines and are dimensioned.
 1 - Existing components are exported with dotted lines and are not dimensioned.
 2 - Existing components are exported with solid lines and are dimensioned.
Individual ISOGEN dimension settings override this setting. For more information, see
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 71).
ElbowCenterLine
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0 (off) or 1 (on)
Controls square elbow centerlines on elbow-type components. When set to 1, an additional
square centerline is drawn without drawing square elbow graphics. These lines appear in 2D
double line and Isometric modes only.
You can also control this variable by setting the Elbow Centerline in CADWorx Plant
menu: Utilities > Drawing Control > Elbow Centerline.
FittingWidth
Default value: 1.0
Specifies the appearance of all flanged, socket welded, and threaded fittings. When set to 1.0,
the software draws fitting hubs or flange ODs at 100% of the width specified in their data file.
This variable is useful at a value of 0.7 when drawing socket weld and threaded type hub fittings
where the hubs overlap.
HVACLibraryDirectory
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\HVAC
Allowed values: Valid directory name
Defines the location of the data files folder used for HVAC components.

ISOGENDefaultStyle
Default value: <none>
Allowed values: Full path to an Isogen.fls file
Specifies the ISOGEN style used by ISOGEN Out and ISOGEN Batch .
For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 113) and ISOGEN Batch (on page 118).
When this variable is defined, ISOGEN Out does not display the Select ISOGEN
Style dialog box.
ISOGENSetting
Default value: 0
Controls import of ISOGEN repeat file data when running ISOGEN Out (on page 113) or
ISOGEN Batch (on page 118).
ISOGEN Repeat File has to be configured in the ISOGEN Project for the repeat file
import to be active.
 0 - Turns off all settings.
 1 - Imports Mark/Sheet data from the repeat file.
 2 - Imports Spool data from the repeat file.
 3 - Imports Mark/Sheet/Spool data from the repeat file.
ISOGENContinuationGraphicsCount
Default value: 0
Displays continuation graphics based on the following selections:
 0 - Display no continuation graphics when running ISOGEN.
 1 - Display one continuation graphic when running ISOGEN.
 2 - Display two continuation graphics when running ISOGEN.
 3 - Displays three continuation graphics when running ISOGEN.
LanguageFile
Default value: English.dic
Allowed values: A valid and properly formatted language file
Specifies the language of all Plant dialog boxes and prompts. The specified file must be present
in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder for proper operation of Plant.
You must set the LanguageFile to the regional language when using a language-specific
specification. For example, if you have Chinese characters in your specification, set the
LanguageFile to Chinese_Simplified.dic. If you do not, System Out (on page 189) and
System In (on page 196) do not function correctly.

LayerByLineNumber
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4
Specifies the layers for component placement.
 0
a. Solid:
i. The layer name of the solid is based on PRJ layer entry.
ii. "_" is placed in front of the layer name: For example: 150 spec is on layer _150.
iii. The color of the solid is set according to the table below:
Component level Spec level color Spec layer color in

color PRJ PRJ model DWG file
Entity Color Set to By Same Color Same Color Same Color

Layer
Entity Color Set to Same Color Same Color Different Color

component level PRJ
Entity Color Set to By Same Color Different Color Same Color

Layer
Entity Color Set to Same Color Different Color Different Color

component level PRJ
b. Center line
i. The layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration
Layers > Cl setting.
ii. The color of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl
setting.
iii. The line type of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers >
Cl setting.
iv. Any changes to Setup > Layers > Centerline Settings changes the existing
centerlines in the DWG file.
 1
a. Solid
i. The layer name of the solid and center line is based on the Line Number name.
ii. The color of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
iii. The line type of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the
solid and center line is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer
of an existing solid and center line in the DWG file.
b. Centerline: Same implementation as Solid.

 2
a. Solid:
i. The layer name of the solid is based on the Line Number name.
ii. The color of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
iii.The line type of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing
solid in the DWG file.
b. Centerline:
setting.
Cl setting.
centerline in the DWG File.
 3
a. Solid
i. The layer name of the solid and center line is based on the Line Number name.
ii. The color of the solid and center line has the same implementation for solid color as
LayerByLineNumber = 0 setting shown in the table above.
iii. The line type of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
solid and center line is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer
of an existing solid and center line in the DWG file.
b. Centerline: Same implementation as the Solid.
 4
a. Solid:
i. The layer name for solid is based on the Line Number name.
ii. The color of the solid has the same implementation for solid color as
LayerByLineNumber = 0 setting shown in table above.
iii. The line type of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
solid in the DWG file.
b. Centerline:
setting.
Cl setting.
centerline in the DWG file.

LineNumberSystem
Default value: 1
Allowed values: 0 (off), 1 (on), or 2 (static)
Specifies the line number system.
 0 - Line numbers are manually entered.
 1 - Size, spec, and count number are used for the line number
 2 - Count number is used for the line number.
LineViewIsolationSettingsFile
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\[user-defined folder]
Allowed values: Valid file path (*.lvi)
Provides the location of the Isolation Settings File.
Sets the filter settings default file. When using the Line View Isolation Properties Manager,
the Isolation Setting File uses the file associated with the LineViewIsolationSettingsFile
variable and opens it as the default file. For more information on the Line View Isolation
Properties Manager, see Line View Isolation Properties Manager (on page 91).
PipeDescriptionCat
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0 through 6
Specifies the addition of end preps to the long description, and DataBaseCodes:
 Small-bore threaded or socket-welded pipe when using Thrd/SW Pipe . For more
information, see Thrd/SW Pipe (on page 490).
 Nipple components when using Nipple . For more information, see Nipple (on page 491).
 Small-bore pipe that is broken by an inserted component when using Router . For more
information, see Router (on page 216).
 Swage components when using the Swage reducer from CADWorx Spec View palette.
For end prep to show, you must have the end prep schema set in the description formats.
For more information, see Description Format Dialog Boxes, and Long, Short, Tag, and Part
Number Dialog Boxes in the CADWorx Spec Editor Users Guide.
The following end descriptions are provided:
 BBE - Bevel Both Ends
 BOE-TOE - Bevel One End - Threaded One End
 BOE-POE - Bevel One End - Plain One End
 PBE - Plain Both Ends
 POE-TOE - Plain One End, Threaded One End
 TBE - Threaded Both Ends
 BLE-TSE - Bevel Large End - Threaded Small End
 BLE-PSE - Bevel Large End - Plain Small End
 TLE-BSE - Threaded Large End - Bevel Small End
 TLE-PSE - Threaded Large End - Plain Small End

0 - End preps are not added to any components.

1 - End preps are added to long descriptions, DataBaseCodes, and part number for pipes,
nipples, and swages.
2 - End preps are added to long descriptions for pipes, nipples, and swages.
3 - End preps are added to long descriptions and DataBaseCodes for pipe only.
4 - End preps are added to long descriptions for pipe only.
5 - End preps are added to long descriptions and DataBaseCodes for nipples and swages.
6 - End preps are added to long descriptions for nipples and swages.
This setting works in conjunction with Apply Pipe End Prep Rule. Both must be set to
display, (Automatic for Apply Pipe End Prep Rule and 1 through 6 for PipeDescriptionCat) or
the PipeDescriptionCat does not display on the Long annotation of the Component Edit
dialog box. For more information, see Apply Pipe End Prep Rule (on page 50).
PipeSupportSetting
Default value: 1
Specifies the layer for pipe support component placement.
 0 - The pipe support is placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings.
 1 - The pipe support is placed on the same layer as the connecting pipe or elbow
component.
 2 - The pipe support is placed on a new layer. The layer name is derived by appending the
component layer name and the pipe support layer name. For example, if the pipe solid is on
layer _150, and the pipe support layer name is SUPT, then the pipe support is on new layer
_150SUPT.
SaveLastProfileUsed
Default value: No
Specifies whether CADWorx saves the last profile used on exit.
When a drawing file is double-clicked in Windows Explorer, or if AutoCAD is started using an
icon without specifying any profile, AutoCAD always loads the last profile used.
No - Prevents CADWorx from saving the last profile used.
Yes - Allows CADWorx to save the last profile used.
SingleLineWidth
Default value: 0.02
Specifies the default width for a single line pipe.
SpecificationDirectory
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec
Allowed values: Valid folder
Provides the location of the specifications folder.
This folder can be set as read-only.

SpecificationDefaultProject
Default value: Valid PRJ file
Allowed values: Valid PRJ file
Specifies the spec default project file.
Project files store specification information for all components in CADWorx. Setting a project file
here enables it to be the default project used for all modeling. This file can be opened using the
Specification Editor. When modeling, the information is accessed using this file to create the
components. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page 87).
SpecSizeOverride
Default value: Yes
Controls the ability to override component specification and size. If override is turned off, you are
not able to draw out of spec or out of size.
Yes - Overrides the specification and size limits.
No - Limits drawing to values within specification and size limits.
SteelCopeBoltDistance
Default value: 0.5 (Imperial) 15 (Metric)
Specifies the distance used when two steel beams are coped using the bolted method of Cope
. For more information, see Steel - Cope (on page 312).
SteelCopeWeldDistance
Default value: 0.0
Specifies the distance used when two steel beams are coped using the welded method of Cope
. For more information, see Steel - Cope (on page 312).
SteelLibraryDirectory
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Steel_I ([Product Folder]\Plant\Steel_M for metric)
Allowed values: Valid folder name
Locates the data file used for drawing Steel. The data files can be located anywhere on the
computer, local network, or wide area network.
This folder can be set as read-only.
SteelNeutralAxis
Default value: 0
Specifies the location of centerlines for steel channels and angles.
 0 - The centerline is drawn at the X--column value specified in the channel or angle data
files.
 1 - The centerline is drawn at the midpoint of the flange.
 2 - The centerline is drawn on the inside of the flange. Use this value if channels and angles
are coped with other members.
 3 - The centerline is drawn on the outside of the flange. Use this value if channels and
angles are mitered with other members.

SteelPartNumberFile
Default value: SamplePartNumbers.dat
Allowed values: Valid and properly formatted part number file
Specifies the file containing part numbers that can be automatically entered for a steel member
component. When a steel member is drawn, the software searches the data file for a matching
member type and member name. If found, the software then retrieves the part number and
saves it with the member component.
SteelRoundControl
Default value: 0
Specifies the rounding of values read from the steel data files.
 0 - No rounding is performed.
 1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit (on
page 41).
 2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit
(on page 41).
 3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in
SteelRoundUnit (on page 41).
SteelRoundUnit
Specifies the rounding multiple of values read from the steel data files. This variable is used with
SteelRoundControl (on page 41).
SteelToolTipSetting
Default value: 4235
Allowed values: Positive integer
Specifies the data displayed in a tooltip when the mouse hovers over a steel component. Click
the ellipsis in the value box next to SteelToolTipSetting to open the Tool Tip Data Selection
dialog box. Select the needed data to display, and click OK. The correct integer is then
displayed for those settings.
SyncOnStartUp
Default value: Turn Off Synchronize
Allowed values: Synchronize With Prompt, Synchronize Without Prompt, Synchronize With
Changes Review
Controls the synchronize option on opening a drawing with an external database:
Turn Off Synchronize - Turns off the synchronize option when a drawing is loaded into
AutoCAD.
Synchronize With Prompt - Asks if the software should synchronize the drawing with the
external database.
Synchronize Without Prompt - Synchronizes the drawing with the external database without
prompting.
Synchronize With Changes Review - Enables you to review the changes made to the
database and accept or reject the changes as needed.
When you click Synchronize , values Turn Off Synchronize and Synchronize With
Prompt provide a prompt. Synchronize Without Prompt synchronizes without any prompts.
Synchronize With Changes Review displays the Synchronize Component dialog box where
you can decide which information you want to update to your drawing from the database.

SystemMeasure
Default value: English/Inch
Allowed values: English/Inch, Metric/Inch, and Metric/Metric
Specifies the unit system:
 English/Inch - Uses the imperial system with nominal inch input.
 Metric/Inch - Uses the metric system with nominal inch input.
 Metric/Metric - Uses the metric system with metric input.
TemplateDatabaseFile
Default value: Pipe.mdb
Allowed values: Valid Microsoft Access database file name
Specifies the database file that is used with a bill of material.
ToolTipSetting
Default value: 8405
Allowed values: Positive integer
Specifies the data displayed in a tooltip when the mouse hovers over a component. Click the
ellipsis next to ToolTipSetting in Configuration Settings to open the Tool Tip Data Selection
dialog box. Select the needed data to display, and click OK. The correct integer is then
displayed for those settings.
TopWorksSetting
Default value: 1
Allowed values: 0 through 4
Specifies the layers for top works component placement.
 0 - Top works are not added to the valve even if a top works file is set in the specification
file.
 1 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is combined with the valve solid to
create one solid.
 2 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is grouped with the valve solid and
center line. The top works solid is placed on the same layer as the valve solid.
center line. The top works solid is placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings.
center line. The top works solid id placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings.
The layer name is derived by appending the valve layer name and the top works layer name.
For example, when the valve is on layer _150, and the top works layer name is TOP, the top
works solid is on layer _150TOP.

UseObjectsFromXrefs
Default value: Yes
Allows objects from Xrefs (external references) to be used during the selection process.
No - Objects from Xrefs are not used.
Yes - Objects from Xrefs are used for the current command.
WeldDotSize
Default value: 1.0
Specifies the default weld dot size on single-line, butt-welded piping components.
WeldGapToDB
Default value: Yes
Sets automatic weld gaps to database on or off.
Yes - Weld gaps are shown in the Bill of Material schedule.
No - Weld gaps are not shown in the Bill of Material schedule.
Set Specification and Size

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Setup > Specification / Size
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Main Size
Setting toolbar: Main Size
Setting toolbar: Specification
Command line: SETSIZE, SETSPEC
Displays the Set Specification and Size dialog box in which you specify a drawing specification
file, a main size, and a reduction size.
Browse - Enables you to open the project specification needed for your drawing.
Reload File - Reloads the project (.prj) selected for any changes made in the Specification
Editor. Alternatively, type RELOADPROJECTFILE on the command line, and press ENTER.
M - Sets the selected row as the main size.
R - Sets the selected row as the reduction size.
OK - Accepts the selected main and reduction sizes, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel - Cancels the operation.
 CADWorx Plant specifications are delivered to the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder. The
projects and catalogs are broken down into folders by their units of measure. CADWorx
P&ID also provides specifications delivered to the [Product Folder]\P&ID\Spec folder. If Plant
and P&ID are used together, you should select specifications from a single folder. For more
information, see SpecificationDirectory (on page 39).
 The list of available sizes is controlled by [Product Folder]\Plant\System\SetSize.Tbl
(English/inches), SetSizeA.tbl (Metric/inches), and SetSizeM.tbl (Metric/mm).

Set Specification & Size Dialog Box

1. Click Setup > Specification / Size. Alternatively, click Main Size or type SETSPEC
or SETSIZE, and press ENTER.
The Set Specification & Size dialog box displays.
2. Click Browse.
The Open window displays.
3. Navigate to the proper specification, and click Open.
The Specification list populates.
4. Select a specification from the list. This must be done before sizes can be selected.
The Main / Reduction size populates.
5. Select a main size and a reduction size from the list. They can be selected in any order.
6. Click OK.
The specification and main and reduction sizes are set.
Configuration Layers
Specifies drawing layers and the default names, line types, and colors of the layers. Default
layers are provided. You can add and delete layers.
 The default layers are mandatory for use with Plant and cannot be deleted. See the tables
below.
 Layer changes made in this dialog box affect the current drawing session similar to the
AutoCAD LAYER command.
 The commands in this dialog box are inactive if the configuration settings permission is set
to read-only.
Layer Name - Specifies the layer name. The layer name can be anything that is allowed by
AutoCAD. Wild card characters and spaces are not allowed. Click Update to change the name.
New - Adds a new layer with a default name. New layers are created when the drawing is
initialized with Plant. Access this option by right-clicking in the layer name column.
Delete - Removes the selected layer from the list. You cannot delete default layers. Access this
option by right-clicking in the layer name column.
Linetype - Specifies the line type for the selected layer. Select a value in the Select Linetype
dialog box.
Line types are defined in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support\Cfm.lin and [AutoCAD
Product Folder]\UserDataCache\Support\acad.lin files.
Color - Displays the Select Color dialog box for selecting the color of the layer.

CADWorx Plant, Plant, PV Fabricator Layers

Layer# Default Name Layer is used for
Layer1 System Non-graphical components
Layer2 Border Border drawing
Layer3 BOM BOM graphics
Layer4 Cl Centerline of piping components
Layer5 Dim1 Dimensions
Layer6 Dim2 Dimensions
Layer7 Equip Plant components
Layer8 Exist Existing components
Layer9 Graph Graphics annotations (Arrows, Section, Plan, Detail Labels)
Layer10 Steel Steel components
Layer11 Text Text annotations
Layer12 Viewl Viewports
Layer13 Cl_Steel Centerline of steel components
Layer14 HVAC HVAC components
Layer15 Cl_HVAC Centerline of HVAC components
Layer16 TopWorks Valve TopWorks solid
Layer17 Clash Clash entity
Layer18 Supports Pipe Support
Layer19 CADWorx1 Future use
Layer20 CADWorx2 Future use
Layer21 to (User Defined) (User Defined)

Layer100

CADWorx P&ID Layers

Layer# Default Name Layer is used for
Layer1 System Non-graphical components
Layer2 Border Border drawing
Layer3 Major-1 Major Process Lines 1
Layer4 Major-2 Major Process Lines 2
Layer5 Minor-1 Minor Process Lines 1
Layer6 Minor-2 Minor Process Lines 2
Layer7 Inst-1 Instrument Lines 1
Layer8 Inst-2 Instrument Lines 2
Layer9 Elec1 Electrical Lines 1
Layer10 Elec-2 Electrical Lines 2
Layer11 Equip Plant
Layer12 Text Text
Layer13 Graph Graphics
Layer14 Exist Existing
Layer15 to (User Defined) (User Defined)

Layer100
If the Cl and Cl_Steel layers are frozen or turned off, some CADWorx commands might
not function because data is stored on the centerline that is on these layers.

Piping Rules
Sets the piping rules for the drawing. These rules govern how the drawing is affected for each
piece of pipe or component drawn. The options you select affect the responses you receive from
the system.
Topics
Apply Size Rule ............................................................................. 47
Apply Specification Rule ................................................................ 47
Apply End Type Rule ..................................................................... 48
Apply Pipe Length Rule ................................................................. 48
Apply Weld Insertion Rule ............................................................. 48
Apply Gasket Insertion Rule .......................................................... 48
Apply Bolt Insertion Rule ............................................................... 49
Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule ........................................................... 49
Apply Pipe Healing Rule ................................................................ 49
Apply Branch Table Rule ............................................................... 49
Apply Flange Insertion Rule .......................................................... 49
Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule ................................................... 50
Apply Pipe End Prep Rule ............................................................. 50
Apply Auto Coupling Rule .............................................................. 50
Apply Line Number Rule ................................................................ 51
Apply Change Data Rule ............................................................... 52
Apply O-let Minimum Spacing Rule ............................................... 53
Center Line .................................................................................... 53
Apply Skew Pipe Maximum Angle ................................................. 53
Apply Size Rule

Default value: No
Allowed values: No, Automatic, Show Options
Sets the system to check the size of components when components are inserted.
No - Does not check the size of components when components are inserted.
Automatic - Checks the size of components when components are inserted.
Show Options - Displays option prompts for inserting components based on the component
being connected to.
Apply Specification Rule

Default value: No
Sets the system to check the specification of components when components are inserted.
No - Does not check the specification of components when components are inserted.
Automatic - Checks the specification of components when components are inserted.
being connected to.

Apply End Type Rule

Default value: No
Sets the system to check the connection end type between two components based on the
Matching End Types Table.
No - Does not check the connection of components when components are inserted.
Automatic - Checks the connection of components when components are inserted.
Show Options - Displays option prompts for inserting components based on the other
components connection.
Apply Pipe Length Rule

Default value: No
Sets the system to check the pipe length when pipe is inserted.
No - Does not check the pipe length of components when components are inserted.
Automatic - Checks the pipe length of components when components are inserted.
being connected to.
Apply Weld Insertion Rule

Default value: No
Allowed values: No, Automatic - Buttweld Only, Automatic - Socket Weld Only, Automatic -
Buttweld and Socket Weld
Specifies auto insert of weld gap to components.
No - Does not insert weld gaps.
Automatic - Buttweld Only - Inserts weld gaps on buttweld connections only.
Automatic - Socket Weld Only - Inserts weld gaps on socket weld connections only.
Automatic - Buttweld and Socket Weld - Inserts weld gaps on buttweld and socket weld
connections.
Apply Gasket Insertion Rule

Default value: No
Allowed values: No or Automatic
Inserts a gasket to a component automatically when needed.
No - Does not insert gaskets automatically to valves or flanges.
Automatic - Inserts gaskets automatically to valves or flanges.

Apply Bolt Insertion Rule

Default value: No
Inserts bolts to flanges automatically.
No - Does not insert bolts automatically to valves or flanges.
Automatic - Inserts bolts automatically to valves or flanges.
Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule

Default value: No
Places trimmed buttweld elbows in the drawing when using ROUTE.
No - Does not allow for trimmed buttweld elbows.
Automatic - Router allows for trimmed buttweld elbows.
Apply Pipe Healing Rule

Default value: No
Heals buttweld pipe when in-line components are erased.
No - Does not heal buttweld pipe for in-line components when erased.
Automatic - Heals buttweld pipe for in-line components when erased.
Apply Branch Table Rule

Default value: No
Sets the system to check the branch table when branch components are inserted.
No - Does not check the branch table.
Automatic - Checks the branch table when branch components are inserted.
Apply Flange Insertion Rule

Default value: No
Allowed values: No, Automatic - Use Spec Setting, Automatic - Flange Socket Weld, Automatic
- Flange Threaded, Automatic - Long Weld Neck, Automatic - Flange Weld Neck, Automatic -
Flange Slip On, Show Options
Controls the rule of automatically inserting a flange. Sets the system for automatic type and
insertion of flanges.
No - Does not allow for automatic insertion of a flange.
Automatic - Inserts selected flange type automatically.
being connected to.

Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule

Default value: Automatic - 2 Holes
Allowed values: Automatic - 1 Hole, Automatic - 2 Holes, Show Options - Specify Input Angle
Specifies the bolt hole orientation of a flange.
Apply Pipe End Prep Rule

Default value: No
Sets the end preparation of connections in conjunction with PipeDescriptionCat. The
description displays in the Long annotation of the Component Edit dialog box.
No - Does not set the end prep of components when components are inserted.
Automatic - Sets the pipe end prep of components when components are inserted.
Show Options - Displays option prompts to set or not set the pipe end prep.
 The PipeDescriptionCat must be set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule
must be set to Automatic for the pipe end preparation descriptions to appear.
 If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 0 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to
Automatic the pipe end preparation description is not set and does not display.
 If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to
No the pipe end preparation description is not set and does not display.
 If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to
Show Options you are only prompted to set the pipe end preparation when inserting single
pipe using the PIPW1 command. Selecting No does not set the pipe end preparation and
does not display a description. This is the case even with the PipeDescriptionCat set to 1
through 6. Selecting Yes displays the description unless the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 0.
 For more information, see PipeDescriptionCat (on page 38).
Apply Auto Coupling Rule

Default value: No
Allowed values: No, Automatic - Pipe Breaks Only, Automatic - All Connections, Show Options
Sets the system to insert a coupling when routing components.
No - Does not add a coupling when routing components.
Automatic - Pipe Breaks Only - Adds a coupling when routing components with socket weld or
threaded piping, when the pipe breaks at the maximum length. You must set the Apply Pipe
Length Rule to Automatic or Show Options or couplings are not added.
Automatic - All Connections - Adds a coupling at all connections while routing.
Show Options - Displays option prompts, when routing, to inset a coupling. This happens when
using socket weld or threaded piping or when the pipe breaks at the maximum length. You must
set the Apply Pipe Length Rule to Automatic or Show Options or couplings are not added.

Apply Line Number Rule

Default value: Always Inherit
Allowed values: Always Inherit, Show Options
Sets the system to check the line number of in-line components when a component is inserted
based on the setting in line number Setup and according to the table below.
Always Inherit - Automatically inherits the line number of in-line components when a
component is inserted.
Show Options - Displays option prompts for inheriting the line number on in-line components
when components are inserted.
Line Number System Setup Apply Line Number Rule Setting Effect
System Off Always Inherit No Line Number Rule is applied
Show Options No Line Number Rule is applied
System On (Dynamic Always Inherit Inherit all header/parent line

Size/Spec) number parameters except the
dynamic one such as Size and
Spec
Show Options Show 3 different options:

 1. Exact copy of parent line
number.
 2. Dynamic parent line
number (the same parent line
number except for the size
and spec).
 3. Current line number setup
as listed in the Line Number
setup.
System On (Static Size Always Inherit Inherit exact copy of

/Spec) header/parent line number
Show Options Show 2 options:

 1. Exact copy of
header/parent line number.
 2. Current line number as
shown in the Line Number
setup.
For more information about Line Number System setup, see Line Numbering System Dialog
Box (on page 138).

Apply Change Data Rule

Default value: Custom Data
Allowed values: Checked items in the Apply Change Data Rule dialog box display here
Sets the system for items that do not update when using Change Size, Change Spec, or
converting from project data.
See Also
Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box (on page 52)
Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box

Enables you to select the items that do not update when using CHANGESPEC, CHANGESIZE,
or CONVERTFROMPRJDATA.
Alpha size - Turns the alpha size update on or off. The software updates the Alpha size in the
Alpha size box in the Component Edit dialog box.
Short Description - Turns the short description update on or off. The software updates the
Short Description in the Short annotation box in the Component Edit dialog box.
Long description - Turns the long description update on or off. The software updates the Long
description in the Long annotation box in the Component Edit dialog box.
Tag - Turns the tag update on or off. The software updates the Tag in the Tag box in the
Component Edit dialog box.
Database Codes - Turns the database codes update on or off. The software updates the
Database Codes in the Code box in the Component Edit dialog box.
Custom Data - Turns the custom data update on or off. The software updates the Custom Data
in the Component Custom Data dialog box. Click Custom Data in the Component Edit dialog
box to display the Component Custom Data dialog box. You can create Custom Data in the
Specification Editor with the Custom Data options.
Line Number - Turns the line number update on or off. The software updates the Line Number
in the Line Number box in the Component Edit dialog box.
Layer/color - Turns the layer and color update on or off. When Layer/color is on, the software
updates the layer and color to the component. If Layer/color is off, the component in the model
does not change its layer or its color when you convert from the project data. Use the
LayerByLineNumber (on page 36) Configuration Setting to specify the layers for component
updates during Change Size or Change Spec.
Layer/color always updates when you use Change Size or Change Spec.
Select / deselect all - Checks or clears all check boxes in the Apply Change Data Rule dialog
box. This is useful when you want to update everything or nothing.
Change the Data Rule update

1. Select the Apply Change Data Rule ellipsis.
2. Select the items that you do not want updated. If you want to update all items, clear all
check boxes.
3. Click OK.

Apply O-let Minimum Spacing Rule

Allowed values: spacing values
Enables you to control the overlap distance between o-lets and weld gaps.
Center Line
Default value: On
Allowed values: On, Off
Indicates whether the centerline of the components displays.
Apply Skew Pipe Maximum Angle

Allowed values: angle values 1 to 179
Enables you to control the maximum angle allowed when routing skewed piping. To route
skewed piping, see Auto Route (on page 212) and Route skewed pipe (on page 215).
Convert Legacy Drawing

Default value: Off
Allowed values: Off, Automatic, Show Options
Enables you to convert legacy drawing components to smart components.
Convert Mode - Sets the software to recognize whether the drawing is a legacy drawing and
convert it. There are three options:
 Off - Indicates the software does not convert the legacy drawing when it is opened.
 Automatic - Specifies that the software automatically converts the drawing to smart
components when you open the drawing.
 Show Options - Indicates that the software prompts you to convert the drawing to smart
components when you open the drawing.
Use new spec data - Specifies whether CADWorx data is pulled from the project file or the
legacy components when a conversion is completed.
 Yes - Indicates the software pulls data from the project file during the conversion.
 No - Indicates the software pulls data from the legacy component during conversion.
Refresh all open palettes to update contents after running the
CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS command.
See Also
CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications dialog box (on page 54)

CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications Dialog Box

CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Setup > Convert Legacy Drawing and then set
Convert Mode to Show Options
Command line: CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS
Converts the components of a legacy drawing to smart components.
Available specifications in project - Specifies if there are any available specifications in the
selected project for conversion.
Legacy specification used in model - Specifies the specifications that the software uses in the
legacy model.
Match - Matches the selected specification in Available specifications in project to the
specification listed in Legacy specification used in model.
Auto Match - Automatically matches the specification used in the legacy model without
selecting a specification from the Available specifications in project box.
Backup current drawing - Creates a backup of the legacy drawing in the folder where the
legacy drawing resides.
Use new spec data - Specifies whether CADWorx data is pulled from the project file or the
legacy components when a conversion is completed. When Use new spec data is selected,
data is pulled from the selected specification in Current Project.
Current Project - Specifies the current project from which the software converts the legacy
drawings.
Browse - Enables you to select a current project.
OK - Accepts the settings and converts the model.
Cancel - Cancels the legacy conversion.
Help - Accesses the online help file.
Convert Legacy using Automatic option
 Set Convert Mode to Automatic.
The software converts the drawing into smart components when a legacy drawing is
opened.
Convert Legacy using Show Options option
1. Set Convert Mode to Show Options. For more information, see Convert Legacy Drawing
(on page 53).
The CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications dialog box displays.
2. Click Browse.
The Open dialog box displays.
3. Select a PRJ file, and click Open.
The specifications display in the Available specifications in project box.
4. Select a specification used in the model in the Legacy specification used in model box.
5. Select a specification in the Available specifications in project box, and click Match.
Clicking Auto Match automatically selects the matching specification for the drawing
based on the specification used in the legacy drawing. If you want to use a different
specification for the drawing, such as 300, you must click Match instead of Auto Match.

6. Select Backup current drawing to create a backup the drawing. This is the default option.
OR
Clear Backup current drawing so that a backup of the drawing is not created.
7. Select Use new spec data to use the spec data from the current project. This is the default
option.
OR
Clear Use new spec data to use the spec data from the legacy drawing.
8. Click OK.
The software converts the drawing into a 2013 components.
Convert Legacy using the CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS command

1. Type CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS on the command line, and press ENTER.
The CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications dialog box displays.
2. Click Browse.
3. Select a .prj file, and click Open.
The specifications display in the Available specifications in project box.
4. Select a specification used in the model in the Legacy specification used in model box.
5. Select a specification in the Available specifications in project box, and click Match.
Clicking Auto Match indicates that the software automatically selects the matching
specification for the drawing based on the specification used in the legacy drawing. If you
want to use a different specification for the drawing, such as 300, you must click Match
instead of Auto Match.
6. Select Backup current drawing to create a backup the drawing. This is the default option.
OR
Clear Backup current drawing so that a backup of the drawing is not created.
7. Select Use new spec data to use the spec data from the current project. This is the default
option.
OR
Clear Use new spec data to use the spec data from the legacy drawing.
8. Click OK.
The software converts the drawing into smart components.
 If you notice that a component does not convert to a smart component then the component
may not be listed in the specification that you have chosen.
 The software alerts you with a message if you do not have any legacy data in the drawing.
 You must convert an inch drawing to an inch specification and a metric drawing to a metric
specification.

Find Legacy Components Dialog Box

Command line: REVIEWLEGACYCOMPONENTS
Enables you to search the drawing for legacy components and display the information based on
the Search Options.
Search Options
Tag - Finds the legacy components based on the tag. Click in the Tag box to display
components filtered by tag in the Components filtered by: Tag box. You can type data in this
box to filter for specific tags.
Code - Finds the legacy components based on the code. Click in the Code box to display
components filtered by code in the Components filtered by: Code box. You can type data in
this box to filter for specific codes.
Line number - Finds the legacy components based on the line number. Click in the Line
Number box to display components filtered by line number in the Components filtered by:
Line number box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific line numbers.
Short annotation - Finds the legacy components based on the short annotation. Click in the
Short annotation box to display components filtered by short annotation in the Components
filtered by: Short annotation box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific short
annotations.
Long annotation - Finds the legacy components based on the long annotation. Click in the
Long annotation box to display components filtered by long annotation in the Components
filtered by: Long annotation box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific long
annotations.
Components filtered by: <Search Options type> - Displays the findings of the Search
Options. When the software detects a legacy component the information based on the search
option selected, displays in the box. The heading of the Components filtered by box is
dynamic and changes depending on the Search Options item you have selected. The heading
also displays the number of records for each item selected. Selecting a record displays a red
arrow indication the component containing the selected information in the drawing.
OK - Closes the Find Legacy Components dialog box.

Cancel - Cancels the Find Legacy Components dialog box.
View Log File - Displays a log file of the conversions you made when using
CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS.

Specification and Size

Sets the specification and size using the Set Specification and Size dialog box. For more
information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).
Optional Items
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Optional Items
Setting toolbar: Specification Option Toggle
Plant menu: Accessory > Specifications > Optional Items
Command line: SPECOPTION
Places a component on the drawing when the component type in the specification has an
optional component (such as when a 300 lb. orifice flange is in the 150 lb. specification).
Click the command to toggle between two methods:
1. The command line message is:
All components will be dialoged...
When a component type is selected, all components of that component type appear in the
Optional component dialog box. For more information, see Optional Component Dialog
Box (on page 57).
2. The command line message is:
Specification dialog turned off...
When a component type is selected, the default component is selected for placement on the
drawing. The Optional component dialog box does not appear unless the component size
is out of the specification range or the component is not allowed by the specification. You
can then select a component in the range. For more information, see Optional Component
Dialog Box (on page 57).
Optional Component Dialog Box

Specifies components for placement. Status, start size, end size, tag, long description, and short
description are displayed for each component.
OK - Places the selected component on the drawing.
Default - Changes the selected component to the default component.
Using SpecSizeOverride
When the SpecSizeOverride (on page 40) variable is off, sizes are restricted to the specification
range. If the selected size is not within the range, OK and Default are not available.
If SpecSizeOverride is on, the dialog box appears if the component size is not in the range. You
can then select the needed component even when it is out of range.
The following table summarizes the dialog box behavior.

Component in Size in Dialog box SpecSizeOverride Dialog box

specification? specification? appears? variable status behavior
Yes Yes No Off = 0 Normal operation.
Yes No No Off = 0 Error message.
Yes No No On = 1 Error message, but you can

override.
Yes Yes Yes Off = 0 Dialog box shows all

components including
optional components, but
does not allow override.
Yes No Yes Off = 0 Dialog box shows all

components but OK is not
available for components
not in size range.
Yes No Yes On = 1 Dialog box shows all

components and allows
override.
No n/a No Off = 0 Error message.
You can use the Spec Editor to change components to optional components. For
more information, see Spec Editor (on page 87).
Size
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Size
Setting toolbar: Size
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Size
Command line: COMP2SIZE
Specifies the main and reduction size by selecting a component with the needed sizes.
Reduction size is not set if it has not been set on the selected component. You can optionally
reverse the main and reduction sizes.
Spec
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Spec
Setting toolbar: Spec

Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Spec
Command line: COMP2SPEC
Specifies the current specification by selecting a component using the needed specification.

Size-Spec
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Size-Spec
Setting toolbar: Size-Spec

Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Size-Spec
Command line: COMP2SIZESPEC
Specifies the main size, reduction size, and specification by selecting a component with the
needed values. Reduction size is not set if it has not been set on the selected component. You
can optionally reverse the main and reduction sizes.
All
Setting toolbar: All
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > All
Command line: COMP2ALL
Specifies the main size, reduction size, specification, and line number by selecting a component
with the needed values.
This option requires that you set the LineNumberSystem (on page 38) variable to 2. This is the
same as having the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System
dialog box selected. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page
138).
Editor
Creates, views, and modifies specifications. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page
87).
Change Size
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Change Size
Command Line: CHANGESIZE
Changes the size of the selected components based on available sizes. Sizes are based on the
specification project you choose when initially setting up the drawing. This command has two
main functions Automatic or Manual.
Automatic - Automatically changes the entire component to the chosen size.
The Change Size command only changes the size of the line until it reaches a
reducer. The software provides two options to replace a reducer to match the size change. The
pipeline on the other side of the reducer maintains its size. The only way to change the size of
the pipeline on both sides of a reducer is to select the reducer itself.
Manual - Changes only the selected components to the chosen size.
When using the manual option, the software forces you to select reducers for
adjacent components that are not the same size. The manual option does not stop size changes
at any point based on another component. However, unless the line on the other side of a
reducer is selected it is not changed.

Large - Changes the large side of the component and anything attached to that side. This is
only an option when using Automatic.
Small - Changes the small side of the component and anything attached to that side. This is
only an option when using Automatic.
Both - Changes both sides of the component and anything attached to those sides. This is only
an option when using Automatic.
Change current component - Changes the component to match the size change.
add Reducing component - Displays a list of reducing components.
add Reducer at branch - Adds a reducer to a branch component. This option is available when
changing the size of a branch component.
BOP - Places the changed size piping at the bottom of pipe.
TOP - Places the changed size piping at the top of pipe.
Current - Places the changed size piping at the current location.
caNcel - Does not change the size and cancels out.
When you change size of a pipe attached to a pipe support, the pipe support also
changes size to coincide with the piping.
What do you want to do?

 Change the size automatically (on page 60)
 Change the size manually (on page 61)
 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically (on page 61)
 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually (on page 62)
 Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically (on page 62)
 Change tee sizes automatically (on page 63)
 Change tee sizes manually (on page 64)
Change the size automatically

1. Click Change Size . Alternatively, type CHANGESIZE on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Press ENTER for automatic.
3. Select a component.
4. Select a size from the list that displays.
If a size is not available in the catalog for a component, the process stops, forcing
you to start over.
5. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish.
 If prompted select, the BOP, TOP, or Current after selecting the piping to keep the position.
 The software continues to prompt you for selection of a component until you press ENTER
to finish.
The entire drawing changes its size.

Change the size manually

When using the manual option, you must select similar components with like sizes, or the
process does not work.
ENTER.
2. Type M for manual.
3. Select the components whose size you want to change, and press ENTER when finished.
4. Select a size from the list that appears.
The next prompt only displays if you have selected pipe lines that do not connect to
each other but have a component in-between. If you do not receive the following prompt
skip step 6 and continue.
5. Select the reducers as needed.

The specific components change size and add the reducers if needed.
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically

ENTER.
3. Select a reducer.
4. Type Large, Small, or Both on the command line, and press ENTER.
5. Select a size from the list that displays. This is based on the choice you make in step 4.
If a size is not available in the catalog for a component the process stops, forcing
you to start over.
Until you press ENTER to finish the software continues to prompt you for selection of
a component.
If you change the size of a pipe on the small end of a reducer to the same size as the
pipe on the large end of the reducer, the software gives you the option to change the
component. If you do not change the component the process fails.

Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually

Use this option when you want to change the size of more than one reducer and the pipe
lines to multiple sizes.
ENTER.
3. Select one or more reducers and press ENTER.
If you select more than one, you might not be prompted for the sides of the reducer.
This depends on the location of the chosen reducers.
4. If applicable, type Large, Small, or Both on the command line, and then press ENTER.
5. Select a size from the list. This list continues to show up for as many components as you
selected.
If a size is not available in the catalog for a component the process stops, forcing
you to start over.
a component.
The selected components change size.
If you change the size of a pipe on the small end of a reducer to the same size as the
pipe on the large end of the reducer, the software gives you the option to change the
component. If you do not change the component the process fails.
Change the size of a model with branch connections

automatically
ENTER.
you to start over.
5. Select all the branches in the model.
If you do not select all the branches the software prompts you to change the
component. If you select No, the process fails. You may also be prompted if the size does
not exist.
6. Select a component, or press ENTER to finish.
7. If prompted to fix the pipe by BOP, TOP, or Current, type an option, and press ENTER.
a component.
The selected system changes size.

Change tee sizes automatically

ENTER.
2. Type A for automatic.
3. Select a line with a tee component to change, and then press ENTER.
5. You are now prompted to select the branch or press ENTER.
 If you select the branch, the software prompts you for the size of the branch. The
prompts you receive are then determined on the size you select for the branch and the
main.
 If you do not select the branch, the prompts are determined by the size you select for
the main.
 Prompts vary depending on the options you choose.
 For instance, large versus small pipe, selecting the branch or not selecting the branch,
using Change current component or add Reducer at branch, each choice produces
a different outcome. However, the software produces the same result of changing the
size of the tee component.
 These options were designed so that you could change the tee as needed for any
scenario. For more information, see Change Size (on page 59).
6. Follow the prompts to select the best option for your model.
In most instances the following prompt displays.
The software displays the following prompt when a line is not going to change size
and requires a reducer. This happens when you select a tee and you do not select the lines
next to the tee. This can also happen when you select a tee and you do not select the
branch line of the tee. The software prompts for a reducer for any line that does not require
a size change.

7. Select the reducers as required.

The line with the tee changes size and a reducer is added to the branch.
 If the software displays the prompt The model cannot change size, then there is an issue
with the model components. For instance, this can happen if you select a tee and the line
requires a reducer be inserted, but the pipe next to the tee is too short for the software to
accommodate the reducer. If this happens, check the lengths of the piping and make sure
there is room to accommodate the added components, and then run Change Size again.
 If you select a single component and change to a small size, the software takes you
immediately to Step 7.
 It is possible to receive the following prompt when changing the size of a tee. The software
provides a list of available components to change to if the size of the reducing tee does not
exist or if a component change is needed.
Change tee sizes manually

If you have the Apply Branch Table Rule set to Automatic some of the prompts are not
received. In this scenario, the software reads the branch table in the specification. To review the
branch table, open the project, select the specification, and then select the Branch tab on the
Edit component pane.
ENTER.
3. Select a line with a tee component to change, and then press ENTER.
If you select more than one component and a small size, the software prompts you to
select the sizes for each component. When you finish, the reducer prompt displays. If you
select more than one component and a large size, the software prompts you with Change
current component and add Reducer at branch. The prompts following your selections
depend on the other components you select.

5. Follow the prompts to select the best option for your model.
In most instances the following prompt displays.
The software displays the following prompt when a line is not going to change size
and requires a reducer. This happens, when you select a tee and you do not select the lines
next to the tee. This can also happen, when you select a tee and you do not select the
branch line of the tee. The software prompts for a reducer for any line that does not require
a size change.
6. Select the reducers as required.

The tee changes size.
 If the software displays the prompt The model cannot change size, then there is an issue
with the model components. For instance, this can happen if you select a tee and the line
requires a reducer to be inserted. However, the pipe next to the tee is too short for the
software to accommodate the reducer. If this happens, check the lengths of the piping and
make sure there is room to accommodate the added components, and then run Change
Size again.
 If you select a single tee and change to a small size, the software takes you immediately to
step 6.
 It is possible to receive the following prompt when changing the size of a tee. The software
provides a list of available components if the size of the reducing tee does not exist or if a
component change is needed.

Change Specification
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Change Spec
Command Line: CHANGESPEC
Changes the specification of the selected components. The software determines the change
specification based on the size and type of the selected component. The Change Spec
command has two modes either Automatic or Manual.
Automatic - Changes all the components on the selected line to the chosen specification
automatically, depending on the following conditions.
The Automatic option only changes the specification assigned to the system until it
reaches another specification.
 If there is only one matching default component in the chosen specification, the software
chooses the default component.
 If there are multiple default components matching the component in the chosen
specification, the software provides a list of all the default components.
 If there is only one optional component matching the component in the chosen specification
and no matching default components, the software selects the optional component.
 If there are multiple matching optional components in the chosen specification and no
matching default components, the software displays a list of optional components for you to
choose. When the list displays, the component highlights in the drawing.
 If there are default and optional components of the same type, you must use the Manual
option to select an optional component.
Manual - Changes only the selected components to the chosen specification. If there is only one
matching component in the chosen specification, the software selects the default. If there is only
one optional component in the chosen specification and no default component, the software
selects the optional component. If there is more than one matching component in the chosen
specification, the software provides you a list of the components. The software changes any
component you select to the component information you select from the list. When the list
displays, the component highlights in the drawing.

 Change the specification automatically (on page 67)
 Change the specification manually (on page 67)
 Change the specification of a model with branches automatically (on page 68)

Change the specification automatically

1. Click Change Spec . Alternatively, type CHANGESPEC on the command line, and press
ENTER.
3. Select a pipeline.
4. Select a specification.
The software selects the default component if there is only one default component.
OR
The software selects the optional component if there is no default and only one optional.
OR
A list of components displays.
This list only displays when there are multiple components matching the component
in the chosen specification. Automatic option only displays the default components if there
are matching default components found, even if matching optional components exist. The
default component takes higher priority. The only time the software displays an optional
component (or list of components) is when there are no matching default components found
in the chosen specification. If the software selects the only available default component, skip
to step 6.
5. Select the component you need.
The software continues to prompt you for selection of a component until you press
ENTER to finish.
The software changes the specification for the selection.
Change the specification manually

ENTER.
3. Select the components whose specification you want to change, and press ENTER when
finished.
The software selects the default component if there is only one matching default component
and no matching optional components.
When you use the Manual option, you can select a single component or more than
one component. If you select more than one component, it is possible to get both responses
in step 4. One component could only have one default, but another component could have a
multitude of matching components.
OR
This list only displays when there are multiple matching components. For instance, if
you have five of the same type of pipe but with different schedules, the software displays all
the matching pipes to choose from. If this list does not display, skip to step 6.
ENTER to finish.
The specification to the selected components is changed.

Change the specification of a model with branches

automatically
ENTER.
3. Select a pipeline.
The software selects the default component if there is only one default component.
OR
The software selects the optional component if there is no default and only one optional.
OR
This list only displays when there are multiple components matching the component
in the chosen specification. Automatic option only displays the default components if there
are matching default components found, even if matching optional components exist. The
default component takes higher priority. The only time the software displays an optional
component (or list of components) is when there are no matching default components found
in the chosen specification. If the software selects the only available default component, skip
to step 6.
6. Select the branches.
If you do not select the branches in step 6 the specification changes only for the tee
or cross components. It does not change for the branch piping.
ENTER to finish.
The specification assignment for the selected system is changed. If there is a reducer in the
system, the new specification assignment only applies up to and including the reducer, not
the pipeline on the other side of the reducer.
Local Edit
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Local Edit
Setting toolbar: Component Edit
Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Local Edit
Command line: CEDIT
Modifies the properties of an existing component on the drawing. This command displays the

Component Edit Dialog Box

Specifies properties for a component.
Alpha size - Specifies a size-only description of the component.
Short annotation - Specifies a short description of the component.
Long annotation - Specifies a long description of the component.
Line number - Specifies the line number of the component.
Tag - Specifies a tag for the component.
Code - Specifies a code for the component.
Weight - Specifies the weight per unit of a pipe component.
Sort sequence - Specifies the sort sequence of the component in the bill of material.
Length - Specifies a length for the component.
Component type - Displays the type of the component.
Specification - Displays the specification used by the component.
 The bolt length, bolt diameter, and end prep part numbers display in the Code box when the
BOLT_DIAMETER_PTN, BOLT_LENGTH_PTN, and the END_PREP_PTN schemas are
set in the Part Number Format description dialog box in the Specification Editor. For more
information, see Description Format Dialog Box, How to display the bolt length part number
in CADWorx Plant, How to display the bolt diameter part number in CADWorx Plant, and
How to display the end prep part number in CADWorx Plant in the CADWorx Spec Editor
Users Guide.
 If Setup is used to create an external database, Synchronize can be used to

change the specification in the database. For more information, see Setup Live Database
(on page 155) and Synchronize Pipe Database (on page 159).
 If using a live database the Alpha Size, Short annotation, Long annotation, Line number,
Tag, Code, Weight, Sort sequence, and any Custom Data are updated when you click
Synchronize . If you make a change in the database and the SyncOnStartUp (on page
41) is set to Synchronize With Changes Review, then the Synchronize Component
dialog box displays and enables you to review the changes to the database and reject or
accept the changes. For more information, see Synchronize Pipe Database (on page 159).
Coordinates
World - Calculates pipe length based on the pipe component centerline. This option only affects
pipe, nipple, flanged pipe, and tubing components. It does not affect fixed-size components such
as elbows or flanges. If a pipe component is stretched, trimmed, or broken, the positions of the
components are automatically updated along with the pipe length.
Iso - Specifies the value of Length as the pipe length. The length does not change the drawing
graphics, but appears in the bill of material. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 200).
Miscellaneous
Existing - Specifies that the component is not included in the bill of material. The component
symbol is also moved to the Exist layer. In ISOGEN isometric drawings, the component is
shown as dotted and dimensioned.

Insulation or CAESAR II - Specifies that this component either has CAESAR II pipe stress
analysis information or insulation attached.
BOM Item Type
Fabrication - Specifies a fabrication type of bill of material item.
Erection - Specifies an erection type of bill of material item.
Offshore - Specifies an offshore type of bill of material item.
Misc - Specifies a miscellaneous type of bill of material item.
 The selected item type appears on the bill of materials when the FLAG column is added
using Pipe BOM / DB > Setup . For ISOGEN, you must also sort by the FLAG column to
group by type. For more information, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 145) and BOM Sort
Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 148).
 If Misc is selected when using ISOGEN, then ISOGEN treats the weld gap as a field-fit weld.
Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase the cut piece add-on allowances for field-fit
welds.
OK - Saves modifications and closes the dialog box.
Cancel - Cancels the operation without saving modifications, and closes the dialog box.
ISOGEN - Specifies data for the component in an ISOGEN drawing. Opens the ISOGEN Data
dialog box.
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 71)
Custom Data - Specifies custom data created in the Specification Editor and enables you to edit
the value. This data can be isolated in the Line View palette.
 For more information on creating custom data, see New Field Dialog Box in the CADWorx
Spec Editor Users Guide.
 Click the link for more information on the Component Custom Data Dialog Box (on page 76).
Remove - Removes CADWorx database attributes from a component, converting it to generic
AutoCAD geometry.
Many commands in CADWorx use xdata in the components and do not function if the
data is removed.
You can double-click a component to open the Component Edit dialog box.
Modify a component
1. Click Local Edit .
2. In the drawing, select a component.
The Component Edit dialog box appears.
3. Modify properties as needed.
4. Click OK.

ISOGEN Data Dialog Box

Specifies ISOGEN properties for a component.
Symbol Information
 Identifier - Specifies the identifier used by ISOGEN for the component. For more
information, see SKEY Information.
 Overwrite - Overwrites the default value of ISOGEN Identifier used by CADWorx and uses
the value specified in Identifier.
 SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for the component. For more information, see
SKEY Information.
 Overwrite - Overwrites the default value of ISOGEN SKEY used by CADWorx and uses the
value specified in SKEY.
Message - Specifies the message displayed with the component on the isometric drawing.
 Type - Specifies the type of graphic enclosing the message.
Message Types

Type Graphic
None No text or graphic
Unboxed Text only
Square
Pointed
Round
Circle
Triangle
Diamond
Double Circle
Ellipse
 Text - Specifies the message text.

Spindle / Flat / Support Direction - Specifies a valve spindle direction, an eccentric reducer flat
direction, or support direction.
 Direction - Specifies the direction. Select North, South, East, West, Up, or Down.
 Mark - Specifies a text message with details on the direction.
ISOGEN option switch 80 (dimension to valve centers) is only available if the valve has a
spindle direction set.
Flow Arrow - Specifies how flow arrows are displayed for valves.
 As drawn - Displays the flow arrow in the direction that the pipe was drawn.
 Opposite - Displays the flow arrow in the opposite direction.
 View - Displays a preview of the flow arrow on the drawing.
ISOGEN option switch 17 controls the display of flow arrows.
Miter Pipe Export Options - Specifies how miter pipe is exported to ISOGEN.

 Pipe with Welds - Exports each straight pipe run in the component as a linear pipe piece
with mitered ends and welded connections.
Pipe with Welds Example
 Bend - Exports all pipe segments in the component as a single miter bend.
 Bend with Length - Exports all pipe segments in the component as a single miter bend.
The length of the component is also added to the Long Annotation of the component,
allowing two bends with different lengths to have separate marks in the bill of material.

Bend with Length Example
Other
 Spool - Specifies the spool identification. This value overrides the default spool value
created by ISOGEN. Type the required alpha or numeric character.
 Sketch - Specifies a .dwg detailed sketch to display with the isometric drawing. For more
information on detailed sketches, see the Information Notes.pdf and Detailed Sketches.pdf
files in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils folder.
 Dim Status - Specifies the dimensioning of individual components. Select Default,
Dimensioned, Dotted Dimensioned, or Dotted Undimensioned.
 Sheet # - Specifies the sheet number of an ISOGEN drawing. Type the required alpha or
numeric character.
 Mark - Specifies the mark number for a component. Type the required alpha or numeric
character.

End Connections and Conditions - Specifies a set of conditions for up to four ends (End 1,
End 2, End 3, and End 4).
 Connection Type - Specifies the type of connection on the end
Connection Types
Connection Types Description Default Condition
Default
BS Ball and Socket Male
BW Butt Weld Unspecified
CL Clamped Male
CP Compression Female
FA Flared Male
FL Flanged Unspecified
GF Gland Female
GL Glued Female
LC Liner (Clamped) Male
LR Liner (Reducing ) Male
LN Liner (Nut) Male
MP Male Part Hygienic Male
PF Push Fit Female
PL Plain End Male
SC Screwed Female
SW Socket Weld Female
 View - Displays a red arrow at the selected end on the drawing.

 Male, Female, Unspecified, or None - Specifies the end condition of the selected condition
type. These options are only available when the end condition of the connection type can be
changed. For example, SC, SW, CP, GL, and PF allow either male or female end conditions.
Unspecified is used for welded and flanged end conditions.

Reference Dimensions - Specifies dimension to use as reference for the component.

 On - Turns on reference dimensions.
 Primary - Defines reference dimensions relative to the primary axes of the model.
 Skewed - Defines reference dimension relative to the defined reference points.
 Pick points - Allows you to select reference points in the drawing.
 View - Displays the reference points in the drawing.
 Message - Specifies text for the reference dimensions.
 SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for the reference dimensions. For more
information, see SKEY Information.
 Start Point - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the start point. You can only edit Start
Point when editing user shapes.
 Reference Point 1 - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the first reference point.
 Reference Point 2 - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the second reference point.
Component Custom Data Dialog Box

Specifies the Custom Data available in the current specification for the selected component.
The custom data information comes from any user-defined field created using the Custom Data
option in the Specification Editor for that component. For more information on creating custom
data, see New Field Dialog Box in the CADWorx Spec Editor User Guide.
Field Title - Specifies the title of the field that you entered when creating the custom data in the
Specification Editor.
Field Description - Specifies the description you entered when creating the custom data in the
Field Value - Specifies the value you entered in the custom data in the Specification Editor. You
can edit this box for the four types of data: Integer, Real, Text, and List. These types must be
set up when the custom data is created.
1. Click Local Edit .
2. Select a component. Alternatively, double-click a component with custom data.
This can also be opened using Generic Attach (on page 193).
The Component Edit dialog box displays.
3. Click Custom Data.
The Component Custom Data dialog box displays.
4. Double-click in the Field Value box.
5. Change the value. If the Field Value contains a list, you can only select an item from that
list.
The field is updated on the Component Custom Data dialog box.
6. Click OK.

Global Edit
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Global Edit
Setting toolbar: Global Component Edit
Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Global Edit
Command line: GCEDIT
Modifies the properties of multiple components. This command displays the Global CEdit dialog
box.
Global CEdit Dialog Box
Specifies properties for multiple components.
Each property initially shows no value. Any value modified for a property is changed for all
selected components. Properties that are not modified are not changed in the selected
components.
Coordinates
Miscellaneous
BOM Item Type

OK - Saves modifications and closes the dialog box.

 Click the link for more information on the Custom Data Dialog Box (on page 78).
Remove - Removes CADWorx database attributes from the selected components, converting
them to generic AutoCAD geometry.
Modify multiple components

1. Click Global Edit .
2. In the drawing, select two or more components.
The Global CEdit dialog box appears.
3. Define properties as needed.
4. Click OK.
The command line prompt indicates the number of updated components.
Custom Data Dialog Box
Specifies the Custom Data available in the current specification for the selected components.
The custom data information comes from any user-defined field created using the Custom Data
option in the Specification Editor for that component. For more information on creating custom
data, see New Field Dialog Box in the CADWorx Spec Editor User Guide.
Show All Fields - Shows all fields created for custom data.
Show Common Fields - Shows only the fields that the selected components have in common.
Field Title - Specifies the title of the field that you entered when creating the custom data in the
Field Description - Specifies the description you entered when creating the custom data in the
Field Value - Specifies the value you entered in the custom data in the Specification Editor. You
can edit this box for the four types of data: Integer, Real, Text, and List. These types must be
set up when the custom data is created.
1. Click Global Edit .
2. Select a group of components.
The Global CEdit dialog box displays.
3. Click Custom Data.
The Custom Data dialog box displays.
4. Double-click in the Field Value box.
5. Change the value. If the Field Value contains a list, you can only select an item from that
list.
The field is updated on the Custom Data dialog box.
6. Click OK.
The custom data is updated for all components that were selected in the first step.

Mode Convert
Mode convert commands change a piping component from one mode to another mode. The
existing component is deleted and replaced with a component in the new mode.
Many possibilities exist, such as:
 2D double line to 3D solids
 3D solids to 2D double line
 2D single line to 2D double line
 2D double line, flat to 2D double line, north
 Converting to different planes
 Rebuilding an existing component in the same mode or plane
The specification layer name determines the layer to delete and replace. This layer name is
prepended with an underscore, such as _150. Objects on other layers (without an underscore in
their names) are not changed.
You can convert from one plane to another by changing planes and converting the component
mode.
Example
The following tee was drawn once, copied to three other locations, then converted to different
planes.
Topics
Convert a component to a different mode ..................................... 80
3D Solids ....................................................................................... 80
Convert Isometric........................................................................... 80
2D Double Line .............................................................................. 80
2D Single Line ............................................................................... 80
Convert Existing............................................................................. 81
Convert to 3D enhanced ................................................................ 81
Convert from project data .............................................................. 81
Convert Intersected Piping ............................................................ 82
CWexplode .................................................................................... 82

Convert a component to a different mode

1. Select 3D Solids , Convert Isometric , 2D Double Line , or 2D Single Line .
2. Select the piping components to convert.
3. Press ENTER.
3D Solids
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 3D Solids
Setting toolbar: Solids

Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 3D Solids
Command line: CONVERTSOLID
Converts selected components to 3D solid mode.
Convert Isometric
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Convert Isometric
Setting toolbar: Isometric

Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > Isometric
Command line: CONVERTISO
Converts selected components to isometric mode.
2D Double Line
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 2D Double Line
Setting toolbar: Double Line
Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 2D Double Line
Command line: CONVERTDOUBLE
Converts selected components to 2D double line mode.
2D Single Line
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 2D Single Line
Setting toolbar: Single Line

Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 2D Single Line
Command line: CONVERTSINGLE
Converts selected components to 2D single line mode.

Convert Existing
Command line: CONVERTEXISTING
Stops external data (xdata) from appearing in the bill of material or removes xdata from the
components. After xdata is prevented or removed, the component is moved to the EXIST layer.
You can also execute this command in Global Edit or Local Edit . For more
information, see Global Edit (on page 77) and Local Edit (on page 68).
If you use the CONVERTEXISTING command and you select Yes, you cannot change
the components back. To change components in the existing layer, back and forth, you must
select No when using this command.
1. Type CONVERTEXISTING on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Select Yes to remove all data from the components.
OR
Select No to not remove all data.
You can also do this in the Global Edit or Local Edit dialog boxes.
3. To convert all objects on the drawings, select All objects.
OR
To convert a specific component, select Components only.
4. Press ENTER to finish.
The components selected are converted.
Convert to 3D enhanced
Command line: CONVERTENHANCED
Converts the selected components to 3D enhanced mode.
1. Type CONVERTENHANCED on the command line, and the press ENTER.
2. Select the components you want to convert to 3D enhanced mode, and then press ENTER.
The components convert to 3D enhanced.
Convert from project data

Command line: CONVERTFROMPRJDATA
Converts the selected components to the project data changes made to the specification in the
Spec Editor.
1. Type CONVERTFROMPRJDATA on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Select the objects you want to convert from previous data to the new project data, and then
press ENTER.
The project data of the selected components is updated.

Convert Intersected Piping

Command line: CONVERTINTERSECTEDPIPINGS
Converts the intersected piping components based on your selection from the offered list. This
usually happens automatically when crossing components. However, if this does not happen,
use this command to convert the intersected piping.
1. Type CONVERTINTERSECTEDPIPINGS on the command line, and the press ENTER.
2. Select the intersecting components, and then press ENTER.
A list of available components displays.
3. Select a component from the list, and then select the specific component from the expanded
list.
The component changes to connect the piping.
CWexplode
Command line: CWEXPLODE
Changes the CADWorx component to an AutoCAD 3D solid with xdata included.
1. Type CWEXPLODE on the command line, and then press ENTER.
3. Select the component you want to change, and then press ENTER.
Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option.
The components are converted to AutoCAD 3D solids with xdata included.
Socket Weld
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Socket Weld
Setting toolbar: Socket Weld

Specifies the socket welded fitting mode for hub-based components. Dimensions and
engagement properties are based on the socket welded section of the specification.
You can also define the fitting mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. For more
information, see Setup (on page 25).
Threaded
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Threaded
Setting toolbar: Threaded

Specifies the threaded fitting mode for hub-based components. Dimensions and engagement
properties are based on the threaded section of the specification.
You can also define the fitting mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. For more

Settings
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Settings
Setting toolbar: Current Settings

Plant menu: Utility > Settings
Command line: CURRENT
Displays the current drawing settings, such as main and reduction sizes, text and dimension
sizes, line and drawing modes, and specifications. This command displays the Current
Settings dialog box.
Most of these settings are changed using Setup . For more information, see Setup (on
page 25).
XREF Edit
Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Xref Edit
Command line: XCEDIT
Settings toolbar: Xref Edit

Views sizes or information within the component Xref. This command works in a similar fashion
to the CADWorx CEDIT functionality. For more information, see Local Edit (on page 68). This
function uses the same dialog box as Local Edit, but it does not allow you to modify any of the
values. If a modification to a component is required from within an Xref, use the AutoCAD
REFEDIT command to open that part of the Xref. Then use the Local Edit command to make
any modifications necessary. After the required modification is completed, close the Xref with
the REFCLOSE command.

SECTION 3
Palettes Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette
Spec View - Filters the available components based on the SPECVIEW

size and specification settings. For more information, see
Spec View Palette (on page 85).
Line View - Isolates components based on their line LINEVIEW

number or their specification. For more information, see
Line View Palette (on page 89).
Pipe Support Modeler - Inserts pipe and elbow support PIPESUPPORTVIEW

components. For more information, see Support Modeler
Palette (on page 91).
Insulation View - Creates a data file in which you can add, INSULATIONVIEW
modify, and remove insulation configurations that can be
applied to CADWorx components. For more information,
see Insulation View Palette (on page 97).
Discontinuity View - Checks for different types of DISCONTINUITYVIEW

modeling issues. For more information, see Discontinuity
View Palette (on page 101).
Pipe Support Modeler Report - Generates a report of all PIPESUPPORTREPORT

pipe supports found in the selection or in the entire model.
For more information, see Pipe Support Report (on page
103).
P&ID View - Links data between the Plant and P&ID table PIDVIEW
in a project database. For more information, see P&ID View
Clash View - Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD CLASHVIEW

3D solids in the current drawing as well as any attached
XREF drawings. For more information, see Clash View
Assembly View - Creates an assembly for use in a ASSEMBLYVIEW

drawing. For more information, see Assembly View Palette
(on page 109).

Palettes Panel
Spec View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palettes > Spec View
Palettes toolbar: Spec View

Plant menu: Palettes > Spec View
Command line: SPECVIEW
Filters the available components based on the size and specification settings. SpecView also
provides a quick way to change the line number settings. Plant components are typically drawn
using toolbars, or by typing the command name at the AutoCAD command prompt. The
CADWorx Spec View palette provides an alternate method of inserting CADWorx components.
Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 85)
Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 87)
Custom Data Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 88)
Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette)

Sets up the filter for the available components.
Main - Specifies the main size of the component.
Reduction - Specifies the reduction size of the component.
Specification - Specifies the specification associated with the component. The list is based on
the SpecificationDirectory (on page 39) in the current configuration settings.
Set Spec and Size - Displays the Set Specification & Size dialog box. For more
Start Spec Editor - Displays the Spec Editor software. For more information, see Spec
Editor (on page 87) or the CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide book.
Line Numbering Setup - Displays the Line Numbering System dialog box. For more
information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 138).
Line Number Drop Down Setup - Displays the Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup
dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup Dialog Box (on
page 87).
Set size, spec, and line number by component - Sets the main size, reduction size,
current specification, and line number to match a component that you select. For more
information, see All (on page 59).
Reload *.prj File - Refreshes the changes made to the open .prj file in the Specification
Editor.
Help - Displays the help file.

Palettes Panel
Main - Specifies the selected main size. This can be changed.

Reduction - Specifies the selected reduction size. This can be changed.
Specification - Specifies the selected specification. This can be changed.
Line Numbering System - Specifies the line numbering format. This can be changed using
Line Numbering Setup .
Components List - Lists the components that can be inserted into the drawing based on the
Specification, Main, and Reduction.
If you draw a valve with multiple ratings in CADWorx Plant and then attach a flange, the
software prompts you when the flange and the valve rating do not match. You can select Yes to
override and insert the flange. Optionally, select No, and then insert a flange with a matching
rating.
Draw pipe components

1. Select the pipe spec to use from the list.
The software uses the default type (Buttweld).
2. If necessary, right-click and change the type.
3. Follow the prompts on the command line to place the pipe.

The software draws the pipe using the specified type.
Draw non-pipe components

1. Select the non-pipe component type to use from the list.
The software draws the component in plan view based on the current UCS.
2. Follow the prompts on the command line to place the component.
The software draws the component using the specified insertion option.

Palettes Panel
Spec Editor
CADWorx Plant I Tab: Setup and Size/Spec Panel > Editor
Spec View Palette > Start Spec Editor
Command Line: SPECEDIT
Modifies the delivered specifications and creates new specifications.
Spec Editor can also be used as standalone software and can be copied to any
computer. It does not require a hardware lock (ESL) or a license manager.
CADWorxSpecEditor.exe is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec Editor folder.
When opening the Spec Editor from CADWorx, the software loads the specification that you
have specified in Plant. If you want to open a different specification, then select the specific spec
in Project Data.
The Spec Editor stores all the components delivered with CADWorx. If you want to
add a size for a component, you must first add it in the Data Table and the EndType Table in
the Specification Editor. You cannot use a component size that has not been added to the
catalog for the specification. CADWorx uses the SpecificationDefaultProject (on page 40) to
locate the project file and access the components.
Optional components can be manipulated and created in the spec editor.
For more information, see the CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide delivered with CADWorx.
Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for adding items to the line numbering list that appears with the line
numbering system. These values are stored in the DropDownList.TXT file. This file is located in
the same folder as the current configuration settings.
Available Categories - Lists the categories for which you can assign dropdown items. Select an
item from the list to make it the active category.
Dropdown Values - Lists the assigned dropdown items for the active category.
Add - Adds an item to the Dropdown Values list.
Remove - Removes the selected item from the Dropdown Values list.
Remove All - Removes all of the items from the Dropdown Values list.
Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette)

Controls parameters for customizing the appearance of the CADWorx Spec View palette.
View Options
Show optional components - Displays optional components in the CADWorx Spec View
palette. If you select this option, always use the CADWorx Spec View palette to draw
components. If you start the component placement from outside of the CADWorx Spec View
palette, such as with a command line, SPACE to run last command, or a toolbar, CADWorx
uses the default component based on the current size setting. This may not be the same
component that was selected in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Show all components - Displays all components listed in the specification file regardless of the
current size set. If you select this option, always use the CADWorx Spec View palette to draw
components. If you start the component placement from outside of the CADWorx Spec View
palette, such as with a command line, SPACE to run last command, or a toolbar, CADWorx
uses the default component based on the current size setting. This may not be the same
component that was selected in the CADWorx Spec View palette.

Palettes Panel
Show socket weld - Displays socket-welded components in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Show threaded - Displays threaded components in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Show tag - Displays tags in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Show long description - Displays long descriptions in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Show short description - Displays short descriptions in the CADWorx Spec View palette.
Tree Options
View 1 (No tree or categories) - Lists components in numerical order based on the Sort
Sequence set for the component in the specification file.
View 2 (One level tree with more categories) - Creates a category for each type of
component. For example, butt-welded and socket-welded tees are listed in separate categories.
View 3 (One level tree with less categories) - Creates fewer categories than View 2. For
example, all tees are listed in a single category.
View 4 (Two level tree with Spec Editor style view) - Displays a two-level tree that is
arranged in the same sequence as the Spec Editor application.
Color Options
Main Size component - Specifies the color associated with main size components.
Main Size optional component - Specifies the color associated with main size optional
components.
Reducing Size component - Specifies the color associated with reducing size components.
Reducing Size optional component - Specifies the color associated with reducing size
optional components.
Level 1 category - Specifies the color associated with level 1 category components.
Level 2 category - Specifies the color associated with level 2 category components.
Custom Data Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette)

Enables you to overwrite the default value of the custom data in the CADWorx Spec View
palette without having to change or update the custom data in the Specification Editor.
Field Title - Displays the field title of the custom data. You specify this title when you create
custom data in the Specification Editor. You cannot edit this value. You must change this value
in the Specification Editor.
Description - Displays the description of the custom data. You specify this description when
you create custom data in the Specification Editor. You cannot edit this value. You must change
this value in the Specification Editor.
Default Value - Specifies a new value for the custom data in the drawing. The value you enter
here displays in the custom data for your component. You can only change the Default Value in
the Custom Data tab here. The change you make does not update the Specification Editor with
any new value. Any change to this value overwrites the default value from the Specification
Editor. The overwrite you make only applies to this drawing. If you open a new drawing and use
the same custom data, the default value of your component pulls the original default value from
the Specification Editor. When you draw a component after entering a new Default Value, the
new value displays for those components. When using the List option, the Default Value
displays the following: *VARIES*. You cannot type in a new value if the Type of custom data is
set to List. In that case, you must select and existing item from the list.

Palettes Panel
Line View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palettes > Line View
Palettes toolbar: Line View

Plant menu: Palettes > Line View
Plant menu: Utility > Line Isolate Palette
Command line: LINEVIEW
The Line View palette isolates components based on their line number, specification, or custom
data. It also lets you locate components based on their description information.
Line View does not process any entities on locked layers.
Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 89)
Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 90)
Line View Isolation Properties Manager (on page 91)
Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette)

Controls parameters for isolating components based on their line number, specification, or
custom data. You can isolate an entire line number, isolate one line number and include
surrounding buildings or equipment, or isolate based on any custom data you have created.
 If components have been hidden using the Line Isolate tab, those components are not
listed in the Find tab.
 For isolation of multiple field selections in the list of the Line View palette, the following logic
is being applied:
 OR within the same column.
 AND within the same row.
 AND between different columns.
Refresh List - Refreshes the line number list in the palette. Use this option if new line
numbers do not appear in the list.
Show All Components - Makes all objects in the drawing visible.
Select Line Number by Component - Select a component in the drawing. The software
uses the line number of this component to isolate the model.
Isolate Based on Selection - Isolates the selected items in the list.
Invert Isolation - Isolates the reverse of the selected item in the list.
Set Layer Options - Displays the Line View Layer Selection dialog box so that you can
include or exclude certain layers when Isolate Type is set to Layer Isolate. For more
information, see Layers Dialog Box (on page 109). By default, all layers are visible for line
isolate.

Palettes Panel
Filter Settings Manager - Displays the Line View Isolation Properties Manager which
enables you to manage isolations in the drawing. For more information, see Line View Isolation
Properties Manager (on page 91).
Help - Displays on-line help.

Right-clicking the line number list displays the Isolate Selected Items, Invert Isolate
Selected Items, Show All Components, Set Layer Options, Refresh List, Sort Ascending,
and Sort Descending options.
Isolate Type
Full - Displays the selected CADWorx components, and hides all non-CADWorx components
such as buildings, equipment, and dimensions.
Partial - Displays the selected CADWorx components and all non-CADWorx components.
Layer - Displays the selected CADWorx components and hides all non-CADWorx components
based on the layer setup.
Filter - Enter a wildcard filter to limit the items available in the list. The filter is case sensitive.
For wildcard character details, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 157).
Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette)

Controls parameters for locating components based on their description information.
Click the edit boxes to refresh the list of components. Type in the boxes to dynamically filter the
list of available components.
If components are hidden using the Line Isolate tab, those components are not listed in
the Find tab.
Tag - Type tag text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text
displays.
Code - Type code text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the associated text
displays.
Line number - Type line number text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the
associated text displays.
Short annotation - Type short annotation text to refine the search. If you select an item from
the list, the associated text displays.
Long annotation -- Type long annotation text to refine the search. If you select an item from the
list, the associated text displays.
Id Count - Type ID count text to refine the search. If you select an item from the list, the
associated text displays.
Right-Click Menu
Zoom - Zooms the current model space view to the component. Double clicking in the list of
components also zooms to the component. Zoom does not work with XREFs that have been
inserted into the base drawing with a rotation.
CEdit - Displays the appropriate Component Edit dialog box. CEdit on an XREF component
does not allow any changes to the component descriptions.
Refresh - Refreshes the list in the dialog box. Use this option if new components do not appear
in the list.

Palettes Panel
Line View Isolation Properties Manager

Enables you to manage isolations in a drawing.
Isolation Setting File - Specifies the selected isolation file. Isolation setting files are created
using New, and then saved using Save As.
You can set a default isolation setting file by selecting a created file through the
LineViewIsolationSettingsFile variable.
Load - Enables you to load an isolation setting file.
Selected Items - Specifies the items from the Live View palette and enables you to select them
individually for isolation. These selections can be saved.
Isolation Setting List - Specifies the name of the isolation setting you created using New.
New - Enables you to create a new Isolation Setting to manage an isolation group.
 Click New, type a name in the New Name dialog box, and then click OK.
Delete - Enables you to delete an Isolation Setting.
Rename - Enables you to rename an Isolation Setting.
 Select a List Name, click Rename.
The Rename dialog box displays.
 Type a new name, and then click OK.
OK - Enables you to isolate a selected item from Selected Items.
 Select an item, and then click OK.
Save - Saves the new Isolation Setting you created for the management of this isolation.
Save As - Enables you to save an isolation setting file.
Select / deselect all - Enables you to select or clear all items in Selected Items.
Support Modeler Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palettes > Pipe Support Modeler
Palettes toolbar: Pipe Support Modeler

Plant menu: Palettes > Pipe Support Modeler
Command line: PIPESUPPORTVIEW
Inserts pipe and elbow support components.
You must have both the Pipe Support Assembly in a project and the PipeSupport
category in a catalog for the pipe supports to be inserted. For more information, see Pipe
Support Assembly and PipeSupport in the CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide.
Start Spec Editor - Displays the Spec Editor software. For more information, see Spec
Editor (on page 87) or the CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide.
Replace Pipe Support - Enables you to replace a pipe support. For more options and
information on replacing the pipe support, see Edit Pipe Support Features (on page 95).

Palettes Panel
Regenerate Pipe Support - Regenerates the pipe support from the updated data when a
change is made to the data of a pipe support already contained in the drawing. For more
information, see Edit Pipe Support Features (on page 95).
View Settings - Displays the View Settings dialog box.
Reload *.prj File - Refreshes the changes made to the open .prj file in the Specification
Editor.

Main Size - Specifies the main size for the pipe support components.
Assembly - Specifies the assembly file associated with the project.
The directory location for the project containing the pipe support data is listed below Main
Size and Assembly. The components for the pipe supports are listed and can be selected from
the box below the directory.
Insert Options
Multiple - Inserts multiple supports onto the pipe. You specify the start point, end point, and
spacing between the supports. This option is only available for pipe supports.
Detect Steel - Detects CADWorx Steel components to set the correct size for the beam clamp if
the beam clamp is used as the last component in the pipe support assembly.
Repeat Insert - Repeats the insert command for pipe type supports.
Type INSERTSUPPORT on the command line to insert the last selected pipe support or
the start procedure of the last selected component.
Right-click menu for INSERTSUPPORT
poinT distance - Enables you to specify a point on the pipe or component to move the selected
component.
Component distance - Displays the distance from the selected component to the selected
piping or component. The distance measured to a specifically selected component can be
changed by using Point.
 Point - Enables you to change the distance from the selected component to another
component on the same linear pipe.
Pipe end point distance - Displays the distance measurement from the selected component to
the end of the pipe. Repeating the command changes the direction of the measurement to the
opposite end of the piping, where it connects to the next component.
View Settings Dialog Box
View 1 - Sets the software to display each pipe support.
View 2 - Sets the software to display the pipe supports based on type.
Pipe Support Color - Specifies the color of the piping support. To change the color, click the
color to open the Color dialog box, select a color, and then click OK.
Tee Support Color - Specifies the color of the tee support. To change the color, click the color
to open the Color dialog box, select a color, and then click OK.
Elbow Support Color - Specifies the color of the elbow support. To change the color, click the
color to open the Color dialog box, select a color, and then click OK.

Palettes Panel
Pipe Support Data Dialog Box

Enables you to enter the length of certain parts and select a different size of a specific
component on a pipe support when available.
Nominal Size - Specifies the nominal size for the pipe support. This size is based off the Main
Size selection when a specification is selected.
Name - Specifies the name of the pipe support.
Length - Specifies the length of the pipe support. This can be changed.
Data Table - Specifies the values from the data table selected for that pipe support. Click the
ellipsis to select a different size for the part from the list. This ellipsis is only available for certain
parts. The list contains information pertaining to the specific pipe support part, such as Nominal
Size, Pipe OD, Thickness, Length, Width, and Weight.
Insert a pipe support

1. Set a specification. For more information, see Set Specification & Size Dialog Box (on page
44).
The pipe support list populates with the pipe support information from the specification.
2. If needed, change the size of a pipe support using Main Size.
3. Select an Assembly, or use the default.
4. Select a pipe support from the list.
5. Select the pipe from the model.
6. Select the location on the pipe to insert the support.
OR
The Pipe Support Data dialog box displays. This dialog box only displays when optional
items are available.
Specify the data for the pipe support, and then click OK.
7. Specify an insertion point and rotation around the pipe.
The software places the pipe support in the model.
Insert an elbow support

When inserting an elbow support, the following options are available for a new start point:
A - Places the support at the A point in the drawing. A could be either the Top of Pipe or the
Bottom of Pipe.
B - Places the support at the B point in the drawing. B could be either the Top of Pipe or the
Bottom of Pipe.
Corner (C) - Places the support at the corner of the elbow.
miDpoint (D) - Places the support at the midpoint of the elbow.
E - Places the support at the E point in the drawing. E could be either the Top of Pipe or the
Bottom of Pipe.
F - Places the support at the F point in the drawing. F could be either the Top of Pipe or the
Bottom of Pipe.

Palettes Panel
44).
3. Select an Assembly or use the default.
4. Select an elbow support from the list.
5. Select the elbow from the model.
6. Specify the end point, the rotation around the pipe, and the length of the support.
OR
Specify the data for the pipe support, and then click OK.
7. Specify an insertion point and rotation around the pipe.
Insert a tee support

44).
3. Select an Assembly, or use the default.
The assembly must contain a tee support. To add a new tee support, see Add
Support Component in the CADWorx Spec Editors User's Guide.
4. Select a tee support from the list.
5. Select the tee in the model.
The tee support displays.
6. Orient the support as need.
OR
The Pipe Support Data dialog box displays. This dialog box only displays when additional
input is required.
7. Specify the length for the pipe support, change Data Table selection if needed, and then
click OK.

Palettes Panel
Insert multiple pipe supports

44).
3. Select an Assembly or use the default.
4. Under Insert Options, select the Multiple check box.
6. Specify a start point on the pipe.
7. Specify an end point on the pipe.
OR
Specify the data, and then click OK.
8. Specify the distance between each pipe support by entering the value on the command line,
and then press ENTER.
9. Specify a rotation around the pipe and the length of the pipe support.
The software places the pipe supports in the model.
Edit Pipe Support Features

Change a pipe support type in the drawing with Replace Pipe Support
1. Click Replace Pipe Support .
2. Select a pipe support.
The pipe support selection list displays.

The pipe support in the drawing changes.
4. Adjust the rotation as needed.

Palettes Panel
Change a pipe support type in the drawing with a plus grip

1. Insert a pipe support on a pipe.
2. Select a pipe support.
3. Click the plus grip point .

The pipe support selection list displays.

The pipe support in the drawing changes.
5. Adjust the rotation as needed.
Regenerate a pipe support in the drawing

1. Click Regenerate Pipe Support .
2. Select the pipe support, and then press ENTER.
The pipe support in the drawing updates.
Move a pipe with a pipe support attached.

1. Select the pipe you want to adjust.
The grip points display.
2. Select a grip point .
3. Move the piping as needed.
The pipe support adjusts with the movement of the piping.
 The grip point at the end of the pipe support enables you to rotate and change the length
of the rod of the pipe support.
 The grip point at the top of the pipe support where it connects to the piping, enables you
to move the pipe support along the pipe. The pipe support cannot move around corners,
such as elbows or tees.

Palettes Panel
Change the size of a pipe inside a pipe support

1. Insert a pipe support on a pipe.
ENTER.
you to start over.
 If prompted select, the BOP, TOP, or Current after selecting the piping to keep the position.
 The software continues to prompt you for selection of a component until you press ENTER
to finish.
Insulation View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Insulation View
Palettes toolbar: Insulation View
Plant menu: Utility > Insulation Palette
Plant menu: Palettes > Insulation View
Command line: INSULATIONVIEW
Creates a data file with an extension .INU. In this file, you can add, modify, and remove
insulation configurations. After you create the insulation configuration data file you can apply
these configurations to selected components.
Model Insulation
Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) (on page 98)
Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) (on page 99)

Palettes Panel
Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette)

Controls parameters for creating a data file with an .INU extension. In this file, you can add,
modify and remove insulation configurations that can be applied to CADWorx components.
Save - Saves the data in the Configuration Setup grid to the configuration file.
Save As - Displays the Save As Insulation Data dialog box to save the current data in the
Configuration Setup grid to a new file.
Open - Displays the Open Insulation Data dialog box to load an insulation data file. The data
contained in that file is displayed in the Configuration Setup grid and listed individually in the
drop down categories.
Configuration Setup
Add to drawing - Saves the selected grid rows to the current AutoCAD drawing. If similar data
already exists in the current drawing, it is not overwritten. All configurations that have been
added, appear in the Apply tab of the palette.
Options - Displays the Insulation Options dialog box. For more information, see Insulation
Options Dialog Box below.
Configuration Setup - Grid - Displays the content of the insulation data file in grid form.
Thickness - Specifies the actual insulation thickness value. Type a numeric value greater than
zero. You can also select an existing value. This parameter is required to create an insulation
configuration.
 In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), type a value in inches.
 In mixed metric units (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions), type a value in inches or
millimeters based on the setting from the Insulation Options dialog box. If you type inch
values, the software automatically converts to millimeters when the insulation solid is
created in the model. If you type a millimeter value, no conversion is done.
 In metric units (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), type a value in millimeters.
Density - Specifies the insulation density value. Type numeric values greater than zero. You
can also select an existing value. The density is used to calculate the insulation weight by
multiplying it with the insulation volume. This parameter is required to create an insulation
configuration.
 In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), this value has units of lb / in3.
 In mixed metric (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) the value has units of g / cm3.
 In metric (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), the value has units of g / cm3.
Mastic - Specifies the mastic description. This is an optional value.
Heat Tracing - Specifies the heat tracing description. This is an optional value.
Insulation - Specifies the insulation description. This is an optional value.
Jacketing - Specifies the jacketing description. This is an optional value.
User - Specifies the user description. This is an optional value.
Add - Adds the current values from the boxes to the grid. If similar data exists, the value is not
added to the grid.
Modify - Modifies the currently selected row in the grid using the values currently shown in the
boxes. Each box corresponds to a column in the grid.
Remove - Deletes the currently selected row in the grid.
Add, Modify, and Remove only change the data currently displayed in the grid. The data
in the insulation file is not updated until you click Save or Save As.

Palettes Panel
Insulation Options Dialog Box

Controls parameters for insulation options.
Insulation
Append "_I" to layer name - Adds the characters _I to the layer name to create the insulation
layer name. For example, if the solid is on layer 1"-150-CWS, the insulation solid is on 1"-150-
CWL_l. The insulation solid is grouped with the component solid and center line.
New Layer Name - Indicates that the software creates a new layer.
Name - Specifies the layer name for the insulation solids.
Color - Displays the standard AutoCAD color selection dialog box. Select the default layer color
for the insulation.
Graphics
Show Graphics for Gasket - Indicates whether gasket insulation graphics display. This works
only for enhanced mode.
Show Graphics for Weld gap - Indicates whether weld gap insulation graphics display. This
works only for enhanced mode.
Show Graphics for User Shapes - Indicates whether user shape insulation graphics display.
Metric/Inch Units system
Millimeter - Indicates that you can enter thicknesses in millimeters in mixed metric units
(Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) situations.
Inch - Indicates that you can enter thicknesses in inches in mixed metric units (Imperial pipe
size / metric dimensions) situations.
Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette)

Controls parameters for applying configurations to CADWorx components.
For most CADWorx components, insulation is approximated with the use of single or
multiple AutoCAD cylindrical components.
Available Configuration - Displays the currently saved insulation configurations in the current
AutoCAD drawing.
Remove - Removes the highlighted row in the grid from the current drawing.
Select Mode
Select on screen - Indicates that you will select components in the drawing window.
Line number - Indicates that you will select components by line numbers.
Insulation Mode
Data/Graphics - Adds both the insulation graphic and data.
Data Only - Adds only the insulation data and no graphics.
Insulation
Add - Adds the insulation currently selected in the Available Configuration grid to components
in the drawings. You are prompted to select CADWorx components. If any of the selected
components are already insulated, this action is skipped.

Palettes Panel
Modify - Modifies existing insulation graphics and data.

Remove - Removes existing insulations graphics and data.
Refresh - Generates the graphics from the insulation data stored in the component's centerline.
Use this option if insulation graphics were deleted or lost.
Graphics
Add - Adds insulation graphics to components that have had their graphics removed. The data
previously stored in the components is used to generate the graphics.
Remove - Removes the graphics from the selected components. The insulation data remains.
These components do not show the insulation solid even if you later click Refresh.
Visibility
Isolate - Isolates insulation graphics by either selecting components on screen or by selecting
line numbers from the list.
Hide/Show - Hides or shows the insulation graphics by selecting components on screen or by
selecting line numbers from the list.
Show All - Shows all objects that have been previously hidden in the current drawing.
Report - Creates a complete report, in HTML format, about all of the insulation components in
the model. The report is itemized by the different types of insulation data and calculates the total
weight, volume, and length.
Filter - Filters the list of line numbers using wild cards. For example, type *25-1B* to limit the
line number list to line numbers with 25-1B as part of the name. The text filter occurs regardless
of where the text is in the line number name.
Edit - Displays the Insulation Global Edit <number> Objects dialog box so that you can edit
the insulation data for all components having the selected insulation configuration.
Right-Click Menu
In Line Number selection mode, a right-click menu is available with additional options. The right-
click menu changes what displays in the edit box.
Select All / Clear All - Selects or clears all line numbers in the list.
List Insulated Line Numbers - Lists only insulated line numbers.
List Un-Insulated Line Numbers - Lists only uninsulated line numbers.
List Data Only Line Numbers - Lists line numbers that have insulation data but no insulation
graphics.
List Un-Insulated Components - Lists only uninsulated components.
List All - Refreshes the list.
Modify - Replaces the selected insulation data with the highlighted insulation in the Available
Configuration grid. This change applies to all components in the selected line number.
Remove - Removes the insulation from all components in the selected line number.
Insulation Global Edit <number> Objects Dialog Box

Controls parameters for editing the insulation data on multiple objects. This dialog box applies
the settings to all of the selected objects.

Palettes Panel
Thickness - Displays the insulation thickness value. You cannot edit this value.
Density - Specifies the insulation density value. Type numeric values greater than zero. You
can also select an existing value. The density is used to calculate the insulation weight by
multiplying it with the insulation volume. This parameter is required to create an insulation
configuration.
 In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), this value has units of lb / in3.
 In mixed metric (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) the value has units of g / cm3.
 In metric (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), the value has units of g / cm3.
Mastic - Specifies the mastic description. This is an optional value.
Heat Tracing - Specifies the heat tracing description. This is an optional value.
Insulation - Specifies the insulation description. This is an optional value.
Jacketing - Specifies the jacketing description. This is an optional value.
User - Specifies the user description. This is an optional value.
Discontinuity View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Discontinuity View
Palettes toolbar: Discontinuity View

Plant menu: Palettes > Discontinuity View
Command line: DISCONTINUITYVIEW
Checks for different types of modeling issues, such as disconnected, un-connected, overlapped,
and not on line.
Refresh - Refreshes the data in the grid.
Show All Types - Displays all issues in the grid.
Show Disconnected Only - Displays only disconnected and un-connected issues in the
grid.
Show Not On Line Only - Displays only not-on-line issues in the grid.
Show Overlap Only - Displays only overlap issues in the grid.
Tolerance Settings - Displays the tolerance settings.
Color Settings - Displays the color and Auto Refresh settings.
Remove Selected Overlaps - Deletes the selected overlaps from the model .DWG file.
Export to File - Exports all data from the palette to a Microsoft Excel (*.CSV) file

Palettes Panel
Tolerance Min - Specifies the minimum connection tolerance. Two components that are
separated by a distance greater than the minimum tolerance, but less than the maximum
tolerance are considered disconnected.
Tolerance Max - Specifies the maximum connection tolerance. Two components that are
separated by a distance greater than the maximum tolerance are considered un-connected.
Color Arrow - Specifies the color for arrows.
Color Text - Specifies the color for text.
Auto Refresh - Indicates whether the software automatically updates the grid when you open
the drawing.
# - Displays a number from the palette that coincides with the highlighted number in the drawing.
The arrow and text color setting is used for the graphics drawn in the model.
Line Number - Displays the line number of the component.
Type - Displays the discontinuity type for the component.
 Disconnected - Displays components that are not connected within the minimum tolerance.
 Un-connected - Displays components that are not connected with in the maximum
tolerance.
 Overlap - Displays components that are duplicated at the same location. The number in
parenthesis (n) is the number of overlapping components at this location.
 Not on line - Displays components that are not connected to the pipe centerline (typically
OLET type components).
Gap - Displays the distance between the two components. This value is 0.0 for overlapping
components.
Long Description - Displays the long description of the component.
Category - Displays the category of the component.
Component Type - Displays the command named used to draw the component.
(X,Y,Z) - Displays the global X-, Y-, Z-coordinates of the component center point.
 Pressing CTRL or SHIFT while left-clicking lets you select multiple items from the list.
 Left-click to zoom in to the location of the issue.
 Right-click to change the AutoCAD view to the location of the issue without zooming.

Palettes Panel
Pipe Support Report

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palettes > Pipe Support Modeler Report
Command line: PIPESUPPORTREPORT
Generates a report of all pipe supports found. You can report on the pipe supports found on a
selected item, or the entire model.
The software saves the report to a .CSV file which you can use with Microsoft Excel.
Single item - Reports on a selected item.
Total length - Reports on the total length of the pipe support.
Cut length - Reports on the cut length of the pipe support.
1. Click Pipe Support Modeler Report .

2. Select Single item, Total length, or Cut length.
3. Select the pipe support or supports, and then press ENTER.
4. Save the pipe support file.
5. You can open the saved file with Excel from Windows Explorer.
P&ID View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > PID View
Palettes toolbar: P&ID View

Plant menu: Palettes > P&ID View
Command line: PIDVIEW
Links data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project database.
You must set up the following items to use this palette:
1. Create a CADWorx P&ID project that uses the P&ID live database system.
2. Create a CADWorx Plant project that uses the Plant live database system.
3. With Microsoft Access, you must write database tables used by Plant and P&ID to the same
Access file. With SQL Server and Oracle, you must write database tables used by Plant and
P&ID to the same database.
4. Create associations between in-line components and the main process line in the P&ID
drawings with the Combine Process command. For more information, see "Combine
Process" in the CADWorx P&ID User's Guide.
Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) (on page 104)
Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) (on page 106)

Palettes Panel
Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette)

Controls parameters for linking matched data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project
database.
Select Configuration File
The current configuration file (Project.CFG) displays.
Browse - Select a different Project.CFG file
Options - Displays available options.
Available Line Numbers - Displays line numbers that are in both the P&ID database and the
Plant database.
Select - Specifies a component in the current Plant model drawing. The software sets the line
number of this component to the current line number for P&ID View.
Component Type - Displays the component tables from the P&ID database.
Link - Links or unlinks P&ID and Plant components.
Help - Displays on-line help.
P&ID Data
P&ID ID_Count - Lists the P&ID ID_COUNT from the P&ID database.
Line Number - Lists the line number for the P&ID component.
Tag - Lists the tag for the P&ID component.
Size - Lists the size for the P&ID component.
Spec- Lists the spec for the P&ID component.
Drawing - Lists the drawing for the P&ID component.
Right-Click Menu
Insert in model - Reads the size, spec, and component type from the P&ID database and
inserts the component into the Plant model.
View P&ID drawing - Displays a preview of the P&ID drawing.
To zoom inside the viewer, use the two arrow buttons on the left side of the dialog box. Zooming
inside the viewer can also be done by holding down the left mouse button while rotating the
mouse scroll wheel. The viewer dialog box closes when you switch between drawings in the
same session of AutoCAD. The dialog box must be started with every new AutoCAD session.

Palettes Panel
Left-click an item to update the P&ID drawing viewer dialog box if it is active.
Double-click an item to run the Insert in model command.
Refresh - Refreshes the P&ID Data and Plant Data lists.
Options - Displays the Options dialog box so that you can set the colors of the items displayed
in the P&ID and Plant data.
Plant Data
P&ID ID_Count - Displays the ID_COUNT of the P&ID component if a link between the P&ID
component and the Plant component is made. The Plant database (PIPE table) saves the P&ID
ID_COUNT in the RESERVE_10 column.
Line Number - Displays the line number of the plant component.
Tag - Displays the tag of the plant component.
Size - Displays the size of the plant component.
Spec - Displays the spec associated with the plant component.
Drawing - Displays the drawing associated with the plant component.
Description - Displays the description of the plant component.
Right-Click Menu
CEdit - Displays the appropriate Component Edit dialog box.
Zoom - Zooms and highlight the component in the model.
List data from all drawings - Lists plant data from all drawings that have the line number.
List data from current drawing - Lists plant data from the open drawing.
Refresh - Refreshes the P&ID Data and Plant Data lists.
Options Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting the colors of the items displayed in the P&ID Data and Plant
Data lists on the P&ID View palette.
Color Options
Unlinked components - Specifies the color for unlinked components.
Linked components - Specifies the color for linked components.
Highlight - Specifies the highlight color.
Auto load last Project.cfg file - Indicates whether the last-used configuration file is
automatically loaded.

 Link components (on page 106)
 Unlink components (on page 106)

Palettes Panel
Link components
1. Select the check box next to an item in the P&ID Data list and an item in the Plant Data list.
2. Click Link.
The P&ID ID_Count value in the Plant Data list updates.
Vales, reducers, and nozzles can be linked. Instrument components cannot be linked.
Unlink components
1. Select two linked components.
Link changes to Unlink.
2. Click Unlink.
The software removes the link between the two components.
Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette)

Controls parameters for unmatched data between the Plant and P&ID table in a project
database.
Line number from P&ID table with in-line components - Displays line numbers from the
P&ID database that do not have corresponding line numbers in the Plant database.
Line numbers from Pipe table with in-line components - Displays line numbers from the
Plant database (PIPE table) that do not have corresponding line numbers in the P&ID database.
Line numbers from P&ID table with no in-line components - Displays line numbers from the
P&ID database that do not have any P&ID components associated with them in the P&ID
database.
Export - Exports all data from the Unmatched tab to a report. The report is written to the same
folder as the Project.CFG file. The file names of the reports are P&IDViewUnmatched1.HTML,
P&IDViewUnmatched2.HTML, and P&IDViewUnmatched3.HTML.
Refresh - Refreshes the data presented in the Unmatched tab.
Line numbers - Displays line number information from the P&ID and Plant databases.
In-line components - Displays in-line component information from the P&ID and Plant
databases.
Insert a drawing into the project

When a Plant drawing is opened from the current project, Plant attempts to insert it into the
project. The Insert Drawing into Project Database dialog box opens to confirm this action.
When Insert Into DB is clicked, rows are added to the appropriate tables within the database.
Plant drawings created without a database have xdata attached to each component that allows
the software to automatically add rows into the appropriate tables.

Palettes Panel
Clash View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Clash View
Palettes toolbar: Clash View

Plant menu: Palettes > Clash View
Plant menu: Utility > Clash
Command line: CLASH or CLASHVIEW
Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD 3D solids in the current drawing and any attached
XREF drawings.
Settings
Clash On - Turns the clash system on.
Clash Off - Turns the clash system off.
Show Clashes - Displays clash entities that exist in the model.
Options - Displays the Options dialog box. For more information, see Options Dialog Box (on
page 108).
Layers - Displays the Layers dialog box. For more information, see Layers Dialog Box (on page
109).
Refresh - Updates the clash list.
Export - Writes the clash list to a text file. The file is exported to the same folder as the model
drawing file. The name of the file is the drawing name with _Clash.TXT appended.
Display by Status
New - Displays new clashes in the list.
Active - Displays active clashes in the list.
Resolved - Displays resolved clashes in the list.
Approved - Displays approved clashes in the list.
All - Displays all clashes in the list.
Clash List
# - Displays the number assigned to each clash.
Component 1 - Displays the CADWorx data for the first component.
Component 2 - Displays the CADWorx data for the second component.
Status - Displays the clash status.
Type - Indicates whether the clash was from a CADWorx Insulation View-created component.
 You can set the color of the grid items using the Options dialog box. For more information,
see Options Dialog Box (on page 108).
 Left-clicking an item in the list generates the clash entity in the model and zooms to the
clash.

Palettes Panel
Right-Click Menu
Clash Status New - Changes the status of a clash to New.
Clash Status Active - Changes the status of a clash to Active.
Clash Status Resolved - Changes the status of a clash to Resolved.
Clash Status Approved - Changes the status of a clash to Approved.
Clash Zoom To - Zooms to the clash point.
Clash Viewer - Displays a dialog box with the two clashing components.
Clash Isolate Selected - Isolates the selected clash.
Clash Isolate All - Creates clash entities for all clashes, and isolates them. To remove all clash
entities from the model, run the command CLASHDELETEALLOBJECTS.
Clash Show All - Shows all components in the drawing.
Options Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting options on clash objects.
Start up - Indicates whether clash detection runs on drawing start up.
 On - Clash detection is always on for every drawing.
 Off - Clash detection is off for every drawing.
Display Prompt - The software prompt you every time a drawing opens.
On clash detection - Indicates what happens when a clash is detected.
 Do Not Report - The software does not notify you if a clash is detected.
 Show Tray Notification - The software notifies you through the tray bubble notification that
a clash has occurred.
 Show Palette - The software displays the Clash View palette every time a clash is
detected.
Ignore connected steel - Indicates whether the clash detection system checks for connecting
steel members. If this option is selected, steel members that are touching each other are
ignored.
Detect clashes within blocks - Indicates whether the software detects clashes inside blocks. If
this option is selected, the system detects clashes within any blocks in the current drawing.
Synchronize clashes from XREFs - Indicates whether the software checks for clash data
inside external reference drawings and updates the master drawing data for that clash. Only
New clashes in the master drawing which are from an XREF drawing have the status updated to
match the status that is saved in the XREF drawing.
Synchronize layers from XREFs - Indicates whether the system checks for clash layer data
inside externally reference drawings and updates the master drawing clash layer data to match.
If a layer in an XREF is excluded from clash detection, the XREF layer is also excluded in the
master drawing.
Ignore insulation clashes - The system ignores all clashes generated from components
created with the CADWorx Insulation View palette.
Connectivity tolerance - Specifies the tolerance for checking component connectivity. If two
components are connected, a clash is not reported, even if the actual solids intersect.
Clash zoom factor - Specifies the zoom factor used during clash.
Color Options - Specifies the color of the clash entity and the color of the list.

Palettes Panel
Layers Dialog Box

Controls parameters for including or excluding certain layers from clash detection. By default, all
layers are considered for clash detection. XREF layers are also displayed.
Layers - Displays the available layers. Select the check box next to the layer name to include
that layer in clash detection.
Select all - Selects all of the layers in the list.
Clear all - Clears the selection of all of the layers in the list.
Assembly View Palette

CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette > Assembly View
Palettes toolbar: Assembly View

Plant menu: Palettes > Assembly View
Command Line: ASSEMBLYVIEW
Creates assemblies for placement in a model. The Assembly Manager has four options:
create, edit, delete, and insert.
Create Assembly - Creates a new assembly. For more MAKEASSEMBLY

information, see Create an assembly (on page 110).
Edit Assembly Selected - Edits the selected assembly. For

more information, see Edit an assembly (on page 110).
Delete Assembly Selected - Deletes the selected assembly.

For more information, see Delete an assembly from the
Assembly Manager (on page 111).
Insert Assembly Selected - Inserts the selected assembly INSERTASSEMBLY

into the model. For more information, see Insert an assembly
into the drawing (on page 111).
Help - Opens the help file.
Edit Assembly Paths - Edits the path folder location of the ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS
assembly. For more information, see Edit an assembly path
(on page 111).
Project File - Specifies the project file selected for the assembly.
Global File - Specifies the global assembly file associated with the assembly. Click Browse to
change the global assembly file.

Palettes Panel
Right- Click Menu

Insert Assembly - Inserts an assembly.
View Assembly - Opens the Assembly Viewer and displays the assembly. The assembly can
be zoomed and rotated for a 360-degree view.
a. Wireframe - Displays the model in wireframe view.
b. Hidden - Displays the model in hidden view.
c. Shaded - Displays the model with shaded view.
Modify Assembly - Enables you to edit an assembly.
New - Creates a new assembly.
Rename - Renames an assembly.
Delete - Deletes an assembly.
Copy - Copies an assembly.
Paste - Pastes an assembly.
Reload Global File - Reloads the global assembly file.
Edit File Paths - Edits the path folder location of the assembly.
You can close the Assembly Manager at anytime by typing ASSEMBLYCLOSE on the
command line.
Create an assembly
1. Click Assembly View . Alternatively, type ASSEMBLYVIEW on the command line, and
press ENTER.
2. Click Create Assembly .
3. Select all the components necessary for the assembly, and press ENTER
4. Pick a point where you want to connect.
5. Type a name on the command line, and press ENTER.
The assembly appears in the Assembly Manager.
Edit an assembly
press ENTER.
2. Click Edit Assembly Selected .

3. Make the changes to the drawing as needed.
4. Click Close Assembly Editor.
5. Click Yes to save the changes.
To close the Assembly Editor without saving any changes, click No.
The change is saved.

Palettes Panel
Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager

press ENTER.
2. Select an assembly for deletion.
3. Click Delete Assembly Selected .
4. Click OK to delete.
If you do not want to delete the object, click Cancel.
The assembly disappears from the Assembly Manager.
Insert an assembly into the drawing

press ENTER.
2. Select an assembly from the Assemblies box.
3. Click Insert Assembly Selected .

4. Select a component to connect to.
5. Select a direction.
The assembly appears in the drawing.
If an assembly is built with a reducer and then attached to a component of a larger size
you are prompted to change the size of the reducer. The assembly usually takes on the size and
the specification of the component to which it is attached.
Edit an assembly path

then press ENTER.
2. Type ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS on the command line, and then press ENTER.
3. Select Project and then the name of the assembly from the popup.
OR
Select Global Assembly and then the name of the assembly from the popup.
4. Enter the subdirectory for the user shape path, and then press ENTER.
OR
Type B on the command line for the user shape path, press ENTER to open the Browse for
Folder window, select the new folder location, click OK, and then press ENTER.
5. Enter the subdirectory for the Topworks path, and then press ENTER.
OR
Type B on the command line for the Topworks path, press ENTER to open the Browse for
Folder window, select the new folder location, click OK, and then press ENTER.
The assembly paths are updated.

SECTION 4
ISOGEN Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN
ISOGEN Out - Generates an isometric drawing. For more ISOGENOUT

information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 113).
ISOGEN Batch - Generates isometrics using ISOGEN for ISOGENBATCH

one or more line numbers. For more information, see
ISOGEN Batch (on page 118).
ISOGEN Supplemental - Places supplemental ISOGEN ISOGENSUPL

blocks in the drawing. For more information, see ISOGEN
Supplemental (on page 119).
Stop Sign - Places ISOGEN stop sign symbols in the STOPSIGN

drawing. For more information, see Stop Sign (on page
119).
ISOGEN Start Point - Places ISOGEN start point symbols ISOGENSTARTPT

in the drawing. For more information, see ISOGEN Start
Point (on page 120).
Offset Tap - Creates offset tap connections for use by OTAP

ISOGEN. For more information, see Offset Tap (on page
120).
PCF Out - Creates a piping component (PCF) file from PCFOUT

components selected in the drawing. For more information,
see PCF Out (on page 123).
PCF In - Imports components into the current drawing from PCFIN

a piping component (PCF) file. For more information, see
PCF IN (on page 124).
Tap Connection - Creates tap connections for use by TAP

ISOGEN. For more information, see Tap (on page 124).

ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN Out
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Out
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Out
Command line: ISOGENOUT
Generates an isometric drawing. The components you select to use with this command must be
generated with an authorized ISOGEN hardware lock, or this function cannot process them. The
selection process has different options that allow you to perform more detailed selections.
 You can resubmit ISOGEN drawings after you make changes to your CADWorx drawing.
The software displays the drawings in their previous isometric layout with the added
components. You must define the Repeatability return report in I-Configure for resubmitted
drawings to display. To set the ISOGEN repeatability feature, see Enable the Repeatability
return report (on page 115).
 If you delete an ISOGEN start or stop point, the software permanently
removes the points. This can affect the repeatability output.
 Use ISOGENRESET to remove the sheet and part numbers, and all Start/Stop signs from
component iso information.
 ISOGEN drawings can be created for curved piping by using ISOGEN Out on an
Adjustable Bend (on page 378). Before you run ISOGEN Out , make sure to set the
SKEY in the ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 71) to PB** (** designates a valid ISOGEN
end type). Select the Overwrite check box to enter the new SKEY. To setup curved piping in
isometrics, see Enable curved piping in Plant isometrics (on page 117).
Select ISOGEN Style Dialog Box
Controls parameters for selecting ISOGEN projects, styles, and names of the automatically-
generated isometrics. See ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure (on page 125) for more in
information on creating and managing these projects and styles.
Directory - Specifies the directory of the ISOGEN project.
Project - Specifies the active project. The list contains all of the available projects. See ISOGEN
Project Manager / I-Configure (on page 125) for information on creating these projects.
Style - Specifies the active style. The list contains all of the available styles in the project.
File Name - Specifies the name of the file. This allows you to name an isometric file if none of
the components selected contain a line number. If the selected components contain line number
information, the line number from the last component selected is used as the isometric file
name.
Path - Displays the Isometric folder that is used by the ISOGEN style.
Select - Displays the Select Isogen Style Directory dialog box so that you can select an
ISOGEN Style (ISOGEN.FLS) file. Use this command to select an ISOGEN style that is in a
shared network folder. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 113).
Settings - Displays the ISOGEN Settings dialog box so that you can transpose the system by
an X, Y, and Z offset distance. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 113).
Use ISOGENRESET to remove the sheet and part numbers and all Start/Stop signs from
component iso information.
The DXF edit box enables you to name a portion of the output file. The name appends a series
of numbers. ISOGEN might break up the selected components into multiple sheets which would
require this numbering sequence.

ISOGEN Panel
Enable the RepeatFile for I-Configure 2012

1. Open I-Configure, select an isometric drawing style, and then select the Detail tab.
2. Expand Supplementary in the list, and then select RepeatFile.
3. In the Property panel, set Enabled value to True.
Select ISOGEN Style Directory Dialog Box
Controls parameters for selecting an ISOGEN style directory file.
Look in - Specifies the folder in which the file resides.
File name - Specifies the style directory file name.
Files of type - Specifies the file type (extension).
ISOGEN Settings Dialog Box
Controls parameters for transposing the system by X, Y, and Z offsets. The whole system can
be rotated by any angle. This allows any user-defined north arrow direction.
X - Specifies the X-direction offset.
Y - Specifies the Y-direction offset.
Z - Specifies the Z-direction offset.
Angle - Specifies the north arrow direction:
 90 = World positive Y-axis as north direction. This is the default value.
 180 = World positive X-axis as north direction.
 270 = World negative Y-axis as north direction.
 0 = World negative X-axis as north direction.
ISOGEN Project Data Setup Dialog Box
Controls parameters for setting position text (POS) that can be displayed on the isometric
drawing file. Review the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils\POS_Help.pdf file to locate
the POS number associated with each item. These values are stored with the configuration file
and are used when an isometric is exported. For I-Configure projects, this is the only option for
setting these values. For Project Manager projects, these values can be set from the Project
Manager > Project Default dialog boxes or with this dialog box.
After typing a value, click the Use check box to store the value in the configuration file. To delete
a value from the configuration file, clear the Use box. The values that have the Use box selected
display at the top of the dialog box the next time it displays.
ISOGEN Results Dialog Box

Controls parameters for reviewing the results of the ISOGEN extraction.
The dialog box displays the success or failure of the extraction in a text box.
Open Plot Files - Opens all the generated ISOs in the current session of AutoCAD. The
AutoCAD SDI setting must be set to 0 for the option to be available.
View Message File - Opens Notepad to display a message file that provides information that
could be used when an error was produced. The text file that displays is an .MES file. For more
information, read the ISOGEN documentation.

 Extract ISOGEN files (on page 115)
 Enable the Repeatability return report (on page 115)
 Setup short description column for material list with text wrapping (on page 116)
 Enable curved piping in Plant isometrics (on page 117)

ISOGEN Panel
Extract ISOGEN files

1. Click ISOGEN Out . Alternatively, type ISOGENOUT on the command line, and press
ENTER.
The Select ISOGEN Style dialog box displays.
2. Set up the parameters to meet your requirements.
3. Click OK on the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box.
Enter an option [Line number/Select component] <Select component>.
4. Select Line Number to select components using line numbers.
Enter an option [List/Select component] <Select component>.
5. Choose List to select the line number from a list. For more information, see Select Item
or
Choose Select component to select the components by crossing, window, or any other
preferred method. You can select components that are from an XREF if the
UseObjectsFromXrefs (on page 43) is set to 1.
Processed 164 component(s) to file.
The components must have been generated with a valid ISOGEN authorized hardware
lock. If not, a message similar to the following displays:
Could NOT process 17 component(s) due to permissions failure...
Only components drawn with the ISOGEN interface are allowed...
No components were written to file...
The ISOGEN Results dialog box displays.
Enable the Repeatability return report

1. Click Start > All Programs > CADWorx > ISOGEN > I-Configure > I-Configure.
I-Configure opens.
2. In the Project View panel, select the appropriate isometric directory and project.
3. Under the active project, select the appropriate isometric drawing style.
4. Click Edit in the Properties panel.
The ISOGEN Configuration Home screen displays.
5. Click Reports in the Drawing Manager pane.
The Configuration view opens and displays the Reports panel.
6. Expand Report Types.
7. Double-click Repeatability return to open the data grid.
The Reports panel displays the Repeatability return options.
8. Expand File Formatting.
The File Formatting properties display.

ISOGEN Panel
9. Select Revised ASCII from the Content list.

10. Use the Part Numbers, Split Points, Start Point, and Weld Numbers check boxes control
the information that displays in the drawing.
11. Set Spool Identifier to Numeric or Alphabetic.
12. In the Report Location box, type the name and full path location of the report file.
Alternatively, click the Report Location browse button and navigate to the appropriate
file.
13. Click to update the active style file with the new property settings.
14. Select Home in the menu to return to the Home screen.

15. Close ISOGEN Configuration.
16. Verify the Reports displays in the Properties panel, and that Value is set to
REPEATABILITY-RETURN.
For more information on Reports, see Report Definition Panel in the ISOGEN
Configuration User's Guide.
17. Click Export Style on the I-Configure horizontal toolbar.
18. Open a drawing, and then click Setup .

19. Select Configuration Settings.
20. Set ISOGENContinuationGraphicsCount to 1, 2, or, 3. For more information, see
ISOGENContinuationGraphicsCount (on page 35).
21. Run ISOGEN Out . For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 113).
Setup short description column for material list with text

wrapping
I-Configure opens.
5. Click Drawing Material List in the Materials pane.
The Configuration view opens and displays the Drawing Material List panel.
6. Expand User Defined Columns.
7. Click Show to open the data grid.

The User Defined Columns properties list displays.
8. Verify that there is a -80 value in the Attribute column. If there is none, select -80 from the
Attribute list.

ISOGEN Panel
9. Verify the offset value. If you created a new -80 attribute, then you must also add an offset
value.
10. Verify the Maximum Characters value. If you created a new -80 attribute, then you must
also add a Maximum Characters value.
12. Select Home in the menu to return to the Home screen.

13. Click Drawing File in the Drawing Manager pane.
The Configuration view opens and displays the Drawing File panel.
14. Expand Template File.
15. Verify that Format is set to Smart DWG (DWG).
16. Type the full path location and file name of the template file that contains the correct
material list information in the Path box. Alternatively, click the browse button and
navigate to the appropriate file.
The template file displays in the Path box.
Your material list now displays with the short description and the lines do not overlap, but
are text wrapped.
Enable curved piping in Plant isometrics

I-Configure opens.
5. Click Piping Components and Features in the Dimensions pane.
The Configuration view opens and displays the Piping Components and Features panel.
6. Expand Curved Pipe.
7. Type a value greater than zero in the Threshold box.
The bend radius (inches) is divided by the nominal size (pipe diameter in inches). If
the result is lower than the Threshold setting, normal bends are drawn. If the result is
greater than the Threshold setting curves are drawn.
8. Click outside the Threshold box to set the new value.
To use this feature you need to draw an adjustable bend using the BENT command. You
also need to update the SKEY of the new bend to PB** (** designates a valid ISOGEN end
type) in the ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 71). For more information, see Adjustable Bend
(on page 378).

ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN Batch
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Batch
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Batch
Command line: ISOGENBATCH
Generates isometrics using ISOGEN for one or more line numbers. The command uses the
default settings from the ISOGEN Project Manager. For more information, see ISOGEN Project
Manager / I-Configure (on page 125).
ISOGEN drawings can be created for curved piping by using ISOGEN Batch on an
Adjustable Bend (on page 378) with SKEY in the ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 71) set to
PB** (** designates a valid ISOGEN end type). You need to check the Overwrite check box to
enter the new SKEY. To setup curved piping in isometrics, see Enable curved piping in Plant
isometrics (on page 117).
ISOGENBATCH also exports line number continuation information to ISOGEN.
Extract batch ISOGEN files

1. Click ISOGEN Batch . Alternatively, type ISOGENBATCH on the command line, and
press ENTER.
The software displays the Select Item dialog box which lists all the line numbers available in
the model.
2. Select one or more from the available line numbers. For more information, see Select Item
CADWorx sends each line number to ISOGEN for processing. ISOGEN might break up the
selected line numbers into multiple sheets.
ISOGENBATCH log file written to: C:\Drawings\Model_ISOGEN.log
The components must be generated with a valid ISOGEN authorized hardware lock. If
not, a message similar to the following displays.
Could NOT process 17 component(s) due to permissions failure...
Only components drawn with the ISOGEN interface are allowed...
No components were written to file...
As each line is processed, any errors encountered are displayed on the screen, and a log
file is created.
The ISOGEN Results dialog box displays. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page
113).

ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN Supplemental
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Supplemental
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Supplemental
Command line: ISOGENSUPL
Places supplemental ISOGEN blocks in the drawing. There are several types of block available
for export to ISOGEN:
 ISOGEN_Arrow
 ISOGEN_Wall
 ISOGEN_Floor
 ISOGEN_Instrument
 ISOGEN_BreakIn
Arrow, wall, and floor blocks must be inserted along the center line of a pipe component.
Instrument blocks must have the instrument line connected to the end of an olet component,
TAP component, or a weld gap component.
Break in (Tie in) points must be connected to the end point of a component.
To add other blocks to this menu, see Introduction. The block name must contain
ISOGEN_Arrow, ISOGEN_Instrument, ISOGEN_Wall, ISOGEN_Floor, or ISOGEN_BreakIn
for export to ISOGEN. For example, to add another instrument type, you could name the block
ISOGEN_Instrument_4, and add it to the menu.
If you are placing a flow arrow on a sloped line, align the UCS to the slope before
inserting the arrow.
ISOGEN Supplemental Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing supplemental ISOGEN blocks in the drawing.
The folder containing the ISOGEN supplemental blocks displays at the top of the dialog box.
List - Displays the available ISOGEN supplemental blocks.
Preview - Displays a preview of the selected block.
Stop Sign
CADWorx Plant I tab: Stop Sign
Misc toolbar: Stop Sign
Command line: STOPSIGN
Places stop sign symbols in the drawing. This symbol is used for designating the starting and
ending locations for automatically-generated isometric output. For more information, see
ISOGEN Out (on page 113). Stop signs must be at a weld or connection point on the piping
system. You place these designators on the drawing and then export them to the database. This
could occur manually with Export Pipe (on page 156) or automatically with Setup Live Database
(on page 155).

ISOGEN Panel
If stop signs are present when using the Database option of the ISOOUT command, you are
asked if stop signs should be used in generating the ISOs.
Use Stop Signs [Yes/No] <Yes>:
If you select Yes, continuity is checked and the ISOs are broken at each stop sign. If there are
no line numbers or stop signs present in the database, the following prompt displays.
Database does not have any line number or stop signs...
When exporting with the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box isometric generator (ISOGEN
Out (on page 113) or ISOGEN Batch (on page 118)), stop signs are used, if selected.
ISOGEN Start Point

CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN Start Point
Command line: ISOGENSTARTPT
Places start point symbols in the drawing.
Offset Tap
CADWorx Plant I tab: Offset Tap
Command line: OTAP
Creates offset tap connections for use by ISOGEN. Offset taps are for use with large branches.
After you create an offset tap connection for a component, you can route piping from that point.
Use offset taps for all major branches of the main pipeline. Offset tap is more robust at
processing branches then tap connection. Use an offset tap connection if ISOGEN reports
discontinuity or tap connection does not produce the necessary results.
Verify that the main size is set to the size of the tap before drawing this component.
The OTAP command allows several types of pipe-to-pipe connections. The default connection
for OTAP is TANGENTIAL (TTSO). To change to another type of connection, change the
symbol key (SKEY) value on the ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 71) for the OTAP
component.
SKEY Connection Type
TTSO TANGENTIAL
TTRF TANGENTIAL REINFORCED
TOSO OFFSET
TORF OFFSET REINFORCED
TSSO STUB IN
TSRF STUB IN REINFORCED
TESO SET ON
TERF SET ON REINFORCED

ISOGEN Panel
If the OTAP connects two pipes that are the same size, using the following SKEY produces the
following results:
TERF, TESO, TSRF, TSSO:
 The length of pipe for the cut list increases to include the OTAP length.
 The dimension includes OTAP length.
If the OTAP connects two pipes that are the same size, using the following SKEY produces the
following results:
TORF, TOSO, TTRF, TTSO:
 The actual length of pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
 The dimension does not include OTAP length.
If the OTAP connects two pipes that are of different sizes (reduction), ISOGEN Option Switch 2
is used for cut length calculation.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Centre Line of Main Run option with SKEYs: TERF, TESO, TSRF,
TSSO:
 The length of pipe for the cut list is increased to include the OTAP length.
 The dimension includes the OTAP length.

ISOGEN Panel
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Centre Line of Main Run option with SKEYs: TORF, TTRF, TTSO,
TOSO:
 The actual length of pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
 The dimension does not include the OTAP length.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point option with SKEYs: TERF, TESO, TSRF,
TSSO:
 The actual length of the pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
 The dimension includes the OTAP length.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point option with SKEYs: TORF, TTRF, TTSO:
 The length of the pipe for the cut list is adjusted based on the diameter of the main and
reduction pipe sizes.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point setting with SKEYs: TOSO:
 The actual length of the pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
Option switch 77 Generate PAD Item Code and Show Symbol on Iso option shows a
reinforcement pad on OTAP connections with SKEYs: TTRF, TORF, TERF. A CADWorx
reinforcement pad does not have to be drawn in the model for these three SKEYs.
For all other SKEYs, a CADWorx reinforcement pad must be drawn in the model for it to appear
in the ISO drawing.

ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN option switch 77 No Extra Welds added at Reinforcement Pads, One Extra Weld
added at Reinforcement Pads, and Two Extra Welds added at Reinforcement Pads settings
control weld numbering at the reinforcement pads. Extra welds are only shown for the following
SKEYs: TTRF, TORF, TERF.
Place an offset tap

1. Click Offset Tap . Alternatively, type OTAP on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select a point for the tap. This point is normally the inner most endpoint of the tapping
component.
3. Select a point on the center line of the component that is being taped.
The software places the offset tap.
PCF Out
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > PCF Out
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > PCF Out
Command line: PCFOUT
Creates a piping component (PCF) file from components selected in the drawing.
This command displays the standard file selection dialog box and prompts for a file name.

ISOGEN Panel
Extract piping component files

1. Click PCF Out . Alternatively, type PCFOUT on the command line, and press ENTER.
The Create dialog box displays.
2. Type the name of the PCF file in the File name box, and click Save.
or
Choose Select component to select the components by crossing, window, or any other
preferred method. You can select components that are from an XREF if the
UseObjectsFromXrefs (on page 43) is set to 1.
The software processes the components.
PCF In
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > PCF In
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > PCF In
Command line: PCFIN
Imports components into the current drawing from a piping component (PCF) file. The PCF file
is usually produced from some other plant design system. This command requires that proper
CADWorx specification and data files exist. If the PCF file uses a specification that does not
match the CADWorx specification exactly, the model created by PCF In does not function as
expected.
The function displays a standard file selection dialog box. There is an intervention level. For
more information, see System In (on page 196).
Tap
CADWorx Plant I tab: Tap
Command line: TAP
Creates tap connections for use by ISOGEN. The tap connections are used for small branches.
After creating a tap connection for a component, piping can be routed from that point. The
CADWorx ISOGEN interface automatically processes numerous types of taps without needing a
tap connection. Only use a tap connection if ISOGEN reports a discontinuity.
Verify that the main size is set to the size of the tap before drawing this component.
Place a tap
1. Click Tap . Alternatively, type TAP on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select a point for the tap. This point is normally the inner most endpoint of the tapping
component.
3. Select a point on the center line of the component that is being taped.
The software places the tap.

ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure

Generates isometrics. All of the software included with ISOGEN is supplied with an Adobe
Acrobat Portable Document Format (PDF) file. This PDF file can be printed or viewed from the
computer. The PDFs can be accessed from the program group that is created during
installation. We suggest reading the PDF manual prior to contacting for technical support.
ISOGEN is installed in a subfolder of CADWorx. There is not an option to install it anywhere
else. The program group created during installation provides shortcuts to all the software within
these folders. It also provides shortcuts for all the documentation.
The information supplied in the CADWorx help file is for general use only.
The Isogen_Utils folder contains all the editors that are used to control the format of the
automatically generated isometrics. These utilities include the options editor, symbols editor,
and others. These applications are required to control the appearance of the ISOGEN isometric.
All of the applications have shortcuts in the program group.
There are two applications available for creating and maintaining ISOGEN Styles: Project
Manager and I-Configure.
Project Manager and I-Configure are both installed with CADWorx ISOGEN and are located in
the [Product Folder]\Plant\ISOGEN folder.
CADWorx can use ISOGEN styles created by Project Manager or I-Configure.
ISOGEN Information
The following topics provide general ISOGEN information.
Material List Definition

The Material List Definition (MLD) file allows you to customize the ISOGEN material list. The
following table shows how CADWorx data is exported to an ISOGEN material list for use with
the MLD file.
CADWorx data (as listed in ISOGEN MLD
component edit dialog box)
Alpha size Not exported ('N.S.' in the MLD is based on the size stored within
the component data.)
Short annotation 'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2'
Short annotation -80
Long annotation 'DESCRIPTION'
Line Number Not available as an MLD item.
Tag 'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3'
Code 'ITEM-CODE'
(If DataBaseCodesISOGEN (on page 33) = Yes in current
configuration settings)
Code 'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4'
(If DataBaseCodesISOGEN (on page 33) = No in current
configuration settings)
Weight 'WEIGHT'
Sort sequence Not exported
Length 'QTY'
Specification 'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1'

ISOGEN Panel
SKEY Information
The following ISOGEN SKEYs can be used by CADWorx when creating an isometric.
ISOGEN SKEY definitions and symbol shapes are available in the ISOGEN Symbol Key
(SKEY) Definitions Reference Guide. You can access this document with the Help > Printable
Guides command in I-Configure.
PRGM # CADWorx Name ISOGEN Identifier SKEY
1 PIPE PIPE (Blank)
2 ELBOW 90 LR BUTTWELD ELBOW ELBW
3 ELBOW 90 SR BUTTWELD ELBOW ELBW
4 ELBOW 90 REDUCING BUTTWELD ELBOW-REDUCING ERBW
5 ELBOW 45 BUTTWELD ELBOW ELBW
6 BEND 180 LR RETURN BUTTWELD ELBOW EUBW
7 BEND 180 SR RETURN BUTTWELD ELBOW EUBW
8 TEE STRAIGHT BUTTWELD TEE TEBW
9 TEE REDUCING BUTTWELD TEE TEBW
10 REDUCER CONCENTRIC BUTTWELD REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RCBW
11 REDUCER ECCENTRIC BUTTWELD REDUCER-ECCENTRIC REBW
12 CAP BUTTWELD CAP KABW
13 STRAIGHT CROSS BUTTWELD CROSS CRBW
14 REDUCING CROSS BUTTWELD CROSS CRBW
15 LATERAL BUTTWELD TEE TSBW
16 STUB END BUTTWELD LAPJOINT-STUBEND FLSE
17 LONG WELD NECK FLANGE / NOZZLE FLWN /

NZFS
18 FLANGE WELD NECK FLANGE FLWN
19 FLANGE SLIP ON FLANGE FLSJ
20 FLANGE BLIND FLANGE-BLIND FLBL
21 FLANGE LAP JOINT FLANGE FLLB
22 FLANGE SOCKET WELD FLANGE FLSW
23 FLANGE THREADED FLANGE FLSC

ISOGEN Panel
24 BOLT BOLT (Blank)
25 GASKET GASKET (Blank)
26 NIPPLE COUPLING NRSC
27 CONCENTRIC SWAGE REDUCER-CONCENTRIC CSPL
28 ECCENTRIC SWAGE REDUCER-ECCENTRIC ESPL
29 90 LR ELBOW SOCKET WELD ELBOW ELSW
30 90 STREET ELBOW SOCKET WELD ELBOW ELSW
31 90 REDUCING ELBOW SOCKET WELD ELBOW-REDUCING ERSW
32 45 ELBOW SOCKET WELD ELBOW ELSW
33 STRAIGHT TEE SOCKET WELD TEE TESW
34 REDUCING TEE SOCKET WELD TEE TESW
35 LATERAL SOCKET WELD TEE TSSW
36 STRAIGHT CROSS SOCKET WELD CROSS CRSW
37 REDUCING BUSHING SOCKET WELD REDUCER-ECCENTRIC RBSC
38 CAP SOCKET WELD CAP KASW
39 COUPLING SOCKET WELD COUPLING COSW
40 HALF COUPLING SOCKET WELD OLET HCSW
41 UNION SOCKET WELD UNION UNSW
42 BLEED RING MISC-COMPONENT RP
43 90 LR ELBOW THREADED ELBOW ELSC
44 90 STREET ELBOW THREADED ELBOW ELSC
45 90 REDUCING ELBOW THREADED ELBOW-REDUCING ERSC
46 45 ELBOW THREADED ELBOW ELSC
47 STRAIGHT TEE THREADED TEE TESC
48 REDUCING TEE THREADED TEE TESC
49 LATERAL THREADED TEE TSSC
50 STRAIGHT CROSS THREADED CROSS CRSC
51 REDUCING BUSHING THREADED REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RBSC
52 CAP THREADED CAP KASC

ISOGEN Panel
53 COUPLING THREADED COUPLING COSC
54 HALF COUPLING THREADED OLET HCSC
55 UNION THREADED UNION UNSC
56 PLUG THREADED MISC-COMPONENT PL
57 SOCKET WELD ELL-O-LET ELBOLET CESW
58 THREADED ELL-O-LET ELBOLET CESC
59 WELD ELL-O-LET ELBOLET CEBW
60 SOCK-O-LET OLET SKSW
61 THREAD-O-LET OLET THSC
62 WELD-O-LET OLET WTBW
63 BALL VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE VBFL or

VBBW
64 BALL VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VBSW
65 BALL VALVE THREADED VALVE VBSC
66 BUTTERFLY VALVE FLANGED or VALVE VYFL or

BUTTWELD VYBW
67 CHECK VALVE FLANGED or VALVE CKFL or

BUTTWELD CKBW
68 CHECK VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE CKSW
69 CHECK VALVE THREADED VALVE CKSC
70 GATE VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE VTFL or

VTBW
71 GATE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VTSW
72 GATE VALVE THREADED VALVE VTSC
73 GLOBE VALVE FLANGED or VALVE VGFL or

BUTTWELD VGBW
74 GLOBE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VGSW
75 GLOBE VALVE THREADED VALVE VGSC
76 PLUG VALVE FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE VPFL or

VPBW
77 PLUG VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VPSW

ISOGEN Panel
78 PLUG VALVE THREADED VALVE VPSC
79 RELIEF VALVE FLANGED or VALVE-ANGLE ARFL or

BUTTWELD ARBW
80 RELIEF VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE-ANGLE ARSW
81 RELIEF VALVE THREADED VALVE-ANGLE ARSC
82 NEEDLE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VNSW
83 NEEDLE VALVE THREADED VALVE VNSC
84 3-WAY VALVE FLANGED or VALVE-3WAY V3FL or

BUTTWELD V3BW
85 3-WAY VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE-3WAY V3SW
86 3-WAY VALVE THREADED VALVE-3WAY V3SC
87 4-WAY FLANGED or BUTTWELD VALVE-4WAY V4FL or

V4BW
88 4-WAY SOCKET WELD VALVE-4WAY V4SW
89 4-WAY VALVE THREADED VALVE-4WAY V4SC
90 CONTROL VALVE FLANGED or INSTRUMENT CVFL

BUTTWELD
91 CONTROL VALVE SOCKET WELD INSTRUMENT CVSW
92 CONTROL VALVE THREADED INSTRUMENT CVSC
93 STRAINER FLANGED or BUTTWELD FILTER FIFL
94 STRAINER SOCKET WELD FILTER FISW
95 STRAINER THREADED FILTER FISC
96 ANGLE VALVE FLANGED or VALVE-ANGLE AVFL or

BUTTWELD AVBW
97 ANGLE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE-ANGLE AVSW
98 ANGLE VALVE THREADED VALVE-ANGLE AVSC
99 GAGE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VKSW
100 GAGE VALVE THREADED VALVE VKSC
101 SPECTACLE BLIND MISC-COMPONENT SB
102 EXPANSION BELLOWS MISC-COMPONENT EXFL

ISOGEN Panel
103 to Symmetrical user shapes: NCFL MISC-COMPONENT NCFL or

107 Non-symmetrical users shapes with two (NCFL) or XVFL
points: NCFL MULTI-PORT-
Non-symmetrical users shapes three or COMPONENT (XVFL)
more points: XVFL
108 ELBOW 22.5 BUTTWELD ELBOW ELBW
109 ELBOW 11.25 BUTTWELD ELBOW ELBW
110 WYE BW TEE TSBW
111 REDUCER CONCENTRIC WITH REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RCSW

SOCKET WELD HUB
112 REDUCER CONCENTRIC WITH REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RCSC

THREADED HUB
113 REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH SOCKET REDUCER-ECCENTRIC RESW

WELD HUB
114 REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH REDUCER-ECCENTRIC RESC

THREADED HUB
115 FLANGE REDUCING SO FLANGE-REDUCING- FLRC

CONCENTRIC
116 FLANGE REDUCING THREADED FLANGE-REDUCING- FLRC

CONCENTRIC
117 FLANGE REDUCING WN FLANGE-REDUCING- FLRC

CONCENTRIC
118 COUPLING SOCKET WELD COUPLING COSW
119 COUPLING THREADED COUPLING COSC
120 LATERAL-O-LET SOCKET WELD OLET LASW
121 LATERAL-O-LET THREADED OLET LASC
122 LATERAL-O-LET WELD OLET LABW
123 NIP-O-LET THREADED OLET NISC
124 NIP-O-LET PLAIN OLET NIPL
125 PIPE FLANGED PIPE-FIXED FPFL
126 ELBOW 90 LR FLANGED ELBOW ELFL
127 ELBOW 45 FLANGED ELBOW ELFL
128 TEE STRAIGHT FLANGED TEE TEFL

ISOGEN Panel
129 REDUCER CONCENTRIC FLANGED REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RCFL
130 REDUCER ECCENTRIC FLANGED REDUCER-ECCENTRIC REFL
131 WYE FLANGED TEE TSFL
132 DIAPHRAGM VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VDSW
133 DIAPHRAGM VALVE THREADED VALVE VDSC
134 DIAPHRAGM VALVE FLANGED or VALVE VDFL or

BUTTWELD VDBW
135 ROTARY VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VRSW
136 ROTARY VALVE THREADED VALVE VRSC
137 ROTARY VALVE FLANGED or VALVE VRFL or

BUTTWELD VRBW
138 DUAL CHECK VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE CKSW
139 DUAL CHECK VALVE THREADED VALVE CKSC
140 DUAL CHECK VALVE FLANGED or VALVE CKFL or

BUTTWELD CKBW
141 XBODY GATE VALVE SOCKET WELD VALVE VTSW
142 XBODY GATE VALVE THREADED VALVE VTSC
143 XBODY GATE VALVE BW VALVE VTFL
144 ELBOW 90 WITH SPECIAL END ELBOW EL**

TYPES
145 ELBOW 90 REDUCING WITH SPECIAL ELBOW-REDUCING ER**

END TYPES
146 ELBOW 45 WITH SPECIAL END ELBOW EL**

TYPES
147 TEE STRAIGHT WITH SPECIAL END TEE TE**

TYPES
148 TEE REDUCING WITH SPECIAL END TEE TE**

TYPES
149 CROSS WITH SPECIAL END TYPES CROSS CR**
150 CROSS REDUCING WITH SPECIAL CROSS CR**

END TYPES
151 LATERAL WITH SPECIAL END TYPES TEE TE**

ISOGEN Panel
152 REDUCER CONCENTRIC WITH REDUCER-CONCENTRIC RC**

SPECIAL END TYPES
153 REDUCER ECCENTRIC WITH REDUCER-ECCENTRIC RE**

SPECIAL END TYPES
154 STUB WITH SPECIAL END TYPES CONNECTOR MPBW
155 WYE WITH SPECIAL END TYPES TEE TS**
156 CAP WITH SPECIAL END TYPES CAP KA**
157 NUT WITH SPECIAL END TYPES NUT (BNUT) or CLAMP BNUT or
(CLMP) CLMP
158 BALL VALVE WITH SPECIAL END VALVE VB**

TYPES
159 BUTTERFLY VALVE WITH SPECIAL VALVE VY**

END TYPES
160 CHECK VALVE WITH SPECIAL END VALVE VC**

TYPES
161 GATE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END VALVE VT**

TYPES
162 GLOBE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END VALVE VG**

TYPES
163 PLUG VALVE WITH SPECIAL END VALVE VP**

TYPES
164 3-WAY VALVE WITH SPECIAL END VALVE-3WAY V3**

TYPES
165 ANGLE VALVE WITH SPECIAL END VALVE-ANGLE AV**

TYPES
166 MULTIPORT 1 VALVE WITH SPECIAL VALVE, VALVE-ANGLE, ZG**, 2Z**,

END TYPES VALVE-3WAY 3Z**
167 MULTIPORT 2 VALVE WITH SPECIAL VALVE-MULTIWAY MZ**

END TYPES
168 MULTIPORT 3 VALVE WITH SPECIAL VALVE-MULTIWAY MZ**

END TYPES
169 ELBOW 22.5 WITH SPECIAL END BEND BE**

TYPES
170 ELBOW 11.25 WITH SPECIAL END BEND BE**

TYPES

ISOGEN Panel
171 LATERAL REDUCING WITH SPECIAL TEE TE**

END TYPES
172 U-BEND WITH SPECIAL END TYPES Not exported Not

exported
173 WELD GAP WELD WW
174 to 197 (Future Components)
198 GENERIC INSERT Not exported Not

exported
199 WELD GAP WELD WW
200 BEND PIPE ELBOW, BEND ELBW,

BUBW,
PBBW,
201 MITER PIPE GAP (Blank)
202 ROLLED PIPE MISC-COMPONENT FXBW
203 RESTRAINTS SUPPORT SKID
204 PAD or SADDLE REINFORCEMENT-PAD (Blank)
205 RIGID ELEMENT GAP (Blank)
206 SKIPPED ELEMENT GAP (Blank)
207 SPECIAL RIGID GAP (Blank)
208 TUBING PIPE or BEND (PB) (Blank) or

PB
209 STOP SIGN ISO-SPLIT-POINT (Blank)
210 TAP CONNECTION TAP-CONNECTION (Blank)
211 OFFSET TAP CONNECTION TEE-SET-ON TTSO
212 ISOGEN START POINT START-CO-ORDS (Blank)

ISOGEN Panel
End Type Information

CADWorx special end type components are written to the PCF based on the end type used in
the data file.
CADWorx End Type ISOGEN End Type
0 PL
1 BW
2 FL
3 LN
4 LN
5 MP
6 MP
7 MP
8 MP
9 CL
10 CL
11 CL
12 CL
13 CL
14 SW
15 SC

SECTION 5
OrthoGen Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: OrthoGen
The CADWorx Plant tab is only available in CADWorx Plant Professional.
CADWorx Steel tab: OrthoGen
OrthoGen Launch - Launches the OrthoGen application. ORTHOGENLAUNCH

For more information, see OrthoGen Launch (on page
135).
OrthoGen Out - Generates OrthoGen drawings from a ORTHOGENOUT

script file created using the OrthoGen application. For more
information, see OrthoGen Out (on page 135).
OrthoGen Launch
CADWorx Plant I tab: OrthoGen > OrthoGen Launch
CADWorx Steel tab: OrthoGen > OrthoGen Launch

Command line: ORTHOGENLAUNCH
Launches the OrthoGen application, which enables you to create an OrthoGen script (SCR) file
to be used in rendering an OrthoGen drawing.
For additional information about OrthoGen see the OrthoGen Help files.
See Also
OrthoGen Out (on page 135)
OrthoGen Out
CADWorx Plant I tab: OrthoGen > OrthoGen Out
CADWorx Steel tab: OrthoGen > OrthoGen Out

Command line: ORTHOGENOUT
Generates OrthoGen drawings from a script (SCR) file created using the OrthoGen application.
OrthoGen annotates pipe lines, steel, equipment, HVAC, and more. Annotations are based on
styles created using the OrthoGen application.

OrthoGen Panel
1. Open a drawing, and then click Layout or create your own layout.
2. Click OrthoGen Out on the OrthoGen panel. Alternatively, type ORTHOGENOUT on the
command line, and then press ENTER.
3. Select a script file created from OrthoGen, and then click Open.
The OrthoGen script file produces the label and dimensional information on the
Orthographic drawing.
See Also
OrthoGen Launch (on page 135)

SECTION 6
LNum Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum
You can create and store line numbers in different configuration files for various requirements in
a variety of formats. There can be any number of categories within a line number.
When you start a new drawing, the line number system is not active by default.
Click Setup to automatically assign line numbers when you place components. After you set
the line number in the current drawing, it remains set until you change it.
Setup - Modifies line number configurations. For more NUMBERSETUP

Set - Sets line number from three different sources: a P&ID NUMBERSET
project, the current drawing, or a component that you
select. For more information, see Set (on page 139).
Count - Sets the present line number count value. For NUMBERCOUNT
more information, see Count (on page 140).
Increment - Increases the line number count value. For NUMBER+

more information, see Increment (on page 141).
Decrement - Decreases the line number count value. For NUMBER-

more information, see Decrement (on page 141).
Assign - Assigns new or different line numbers to existing NUMBERASSIGN

components. For more information, see Assign (on page
141).
Annotate - Labels components with existing line numbers. NUMBERANNOTATE

For more information, see Annotate (on page 142).
Line - Sets the current line number to match that of a COMP2LINE

component that you select. For more information, see Line
(on page 143).
Line Isolate - Isolates components based on their line LINEISOLATE

numbers or their specifications. For more information, see
Line Isolate (on page 143).

LNum Panel
Setup
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Setup
Line Number toolbar: Setup

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Setup
Command line: NUMBERSETUP
Modifies any line number configuration. You can turn the line numbering system on or off. If the
system is on, it can operate in a static or dynamic mode.
In the dynamic mode, CADWorx adjusts the line number according to the size or specification.
In the static mode, you must manually change the size and specification. Static is useful when
all components and sizes of a particular piping run are required to have the same line number
(such as, the 3/4” vent on an 8” process line needs a line number of 8”-150-2001-N). Static line
numbering is also useful when selecting runs of piping for other functions with CADWorx. For
more information, see LineNumberSystem (on page 38).
This system also works with a CADWorx P&ID setup configuration file. You can change the
configuration file location in SETUP to use the same project configuration as any P&ID project.
For more information, see Setup (on page 25). Click Add in the Category group in this dialog
box to select additional fields located in the process lines table of a typical P&ID project
database. When using a P&ID project, changes made to a line number configuration within
CADWorx reflect within the P&ID project.
If the system is not using a CADWorx P&ID setup configuration file, the additional fields are
obtained from the DATABASE.TBL file located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. You
must manually edit this file for any modifications required of the existing fields within the default
line number system.
Line Numbering System Dialog Box

Controls parameters for line numbering systems. The name of the current configuration file
displays at the top of the dialog box. You can also use a P&ID project configuration file.
Category - Specifies the active process line item. The list contains the process line items from
the Database.TBL file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. You can add these items to
any line number system. After you select an item, click Add to place it in the Category list.
Highlight the item in the right list box, and then click Delete to remove it from the line number
system. You can also type in a value, and then click Add.
Add - Adds the item from the Category box to the Category list.
Delete - Removes the selected item from the Category list.
Separator - Specifies a separator character. Type an alphanumeric value (including special
characters such as -, ~, #, or SPACE). Click Add to place it in the Category list. Highlight the
item in the Category list, and then click Delete to remove it from the line number system.
Add - Adds the separator character to the Category list.
Delete - Removes the separator character from the Category list.
Default Value - Adds any default value to any category included in the Category list. The size
and specification are disabled if the system is set to the dynamic mode.
System Off - Indicates that line numbers are not placed in the drawing.

LNum Panel
System On (Dynamic Size/Spec) - Indicates that each component placed in the drawing
receives a line number. When this option is cleared, the line number is not placed on the
component.
System On (Static Size/Spec) - Indicates that the line number system uses the value in the
Default value box, including the size and specification. This allows you to type anything for the
size and specification.
Preview - Displays the line number based on the selected categories. The line number added to
components looks similar to the Preview value.
Move Up - Moves the selected item higher in the Category list. The new order also displays in
the Preview box.
Move Down - Moves the selected item lower in the Category list. The new order also displays
in the Preview box.
Set
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Set
Line Number toolbar: Set

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Set
Command line: NUMBERSET
Sets the line number from one of three sources: a P&ID project, the current drawing, or a
selected component.
P&ID - Requires a valid CADWorx P&ID project using an Access database. If the configuration
file is the same as an existing P&ID project, this option automatically supplies all the line
numbers within that project from the process lines table. The line numbers supplied are of the
same format as the project. If the configuration file is not the same, a standard file dialog box
displays requesting the location of the database to use.
Current Drawing - Sets the line numbers based on the current drawing. This option searches
the entire drawing and displays all the line numbers in the Select Item dialog box. This option
requires that the LineNumberSystem (on page 38) variable is set to 2. This is the same as
selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box.
For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 138).
Component - Sets the line numbers based on a component that you select from the current
drawing. This option searches the entire drawing and displays all the line numbers in the Select
Item dialog box. This option requires that the LineNumberSystem (on page 38) variable is set to
2. This is the same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line
Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box
(on page 138).
Select Item Dialog Box (on page 157)
 Set line numbers based on a P&ID project (on page 140)
 Set line numbers based on the current drawing (on page 140)
 Set line numbers based on a component (on page 140)

LNum Panel
Set line numbers based on a P&ID project

1. Click Set . Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line and press ENTER.
2. Type P on the command line and press ENTER, or select Process drawings from the
popup menu.
The Select Database File dialog box displays.
3. Select the P&ID Access database file.
4. Click Open on the Select Database File dialog box.
The software sets the line numbers.
Set line numbers based on the current drawing

1. Click Set . Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line and press ENTER.
2. Type D on the command line and press ENTER, or select current Drawing from the popup
menu.
The Select Item dialog box displays.
3. If needed, use the Filter box to limit the items that display.
4. Select the item to use from the list.
5. Click OK.
Set line numbers based on a component

1. Click Set . Alternatively, type NUMBERSET on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Type C on the command line and press ENTER, or select Component from the popup
menu.
3. Select the component in the drawing.
Count
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Count
Line Number toolbar: Count

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Count
Command line: NUMBERCOUNT
Sets the present line number count value.
same as selecting the System On (Dynamic Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering
System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page
138).

LNum Panel
Set the line count value

1. Click Count . Alternatively, type NUMBERCOUNT on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Type the line count value on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software sets the line count number.
Increment
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Increment
Line Number toolbar: Increment

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Increment
Command line: NUMBER+
Increases the line number count value. For example, if the current line count value is 0001, then
this increments it to 0002.
Decrement
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Decrement
Line Number toolbar: Decrement

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Decrement
Command line: NUMBER-
Decreases the line number count value. For example, if the current line count value is 0002, this
decrements it to 0001.
Assign
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Assign
Line Number toolbar: Assign

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Assign
Command line: NUMBERASSIGN
Assigns new or different line numbers to existing components. In the static mode, the line
number is replaced exactly as it is previewed in the Setup dialog box. This means that a 3/4”
line can be assigned an 8”-150-2001-N line number. When in dynamic mode, the line number is
automatically adjusted and the 3/4” line receives a line number of 3/4”-150-2001-N. This is
based on the present size and specification listed within the component's data.
When selecting a component with a line number already attached, a message appears. Select
Yes to assign the component the new line number. You can make your selection by window,
fence, or by individually selecting a component. During the process, a rubberband cursor
appears indicating which component is being assigned the new line number.

LNum Panel
Assign line numbers

1. Click Assign . Alternatively, type NUMBERASSIGN on the command line, and press
ENTER.
Current line number is 4"-150-HWS-3001-N.
2. Select all the components requiring a new number.
3. Press ENTER to finish the selection process.
If the component already has a line number, a prompt appears confirming replacement.
Component has existing line number of 4"-150-HWS-3001-N
Replace with line number of 2"-150-HWS-3001-N
4. Type N on the command line and press ENTER, or select No from the popup menu to leave
the line numbers as they are.
Type Y on the command line and press ENTER, or select Yes from the popup menu to
replace the line numbers.
Type A on the command line and press ENTER, or select yes to All from the popup menu
to skip all future prompts and replace the line numbers.
The software assigns the line numbers.
Annotate
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Annotate
Line Number toolbar: Annotate

Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Annotate
Command line: NUMBERANNOTATE
Labels components with existing line numbers. The text size is based upon the AutoCAD
environment variable TEXTSIZE and is placed on the default text layer. You can select
individual components to annotate. During the labeling process, a rubberband cursor appears
indicating which component is being labeled.
Label components with line numbers

1. Click Annotate . Alternatively, type NUMBERANNOTATE on the command line, and
press ENTER.
2. Select the components to annotate.
3. Select the point for the annotation.
4. Select the direction for the annotation, or type the angle for the annotation on the command
line and press ENTER.
The software places the annotation.

LNum Panel
Line
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Line
Setting toolbar: Line

Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Line
Command line: COMP2LINE
Sets the current line number by selecting a component with the required line number. Any
components created after running this command use the new line number.
same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System
dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 138).
Set the current line number to that of a component

1. Click Line . Alternatively, type COMP2LINE on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select a component in the drawing.
CADWorx displays the line number.
Line Isolate
Plant menu: Utility > Line Isolate
Command line: LINEISOLATE
Isolates components based on their line numbers or their specifications. You can use this
command to isolate an entire line number or to isolate one line number and include surrounding
buildings or equipment. It can also turn off any isolation of components or surrounding
equipment and building.
Isolate - Isolates only components with particular specifications or line numbers. This option
hides all objects including non-CADWorx objects in the drawing. To make them visible again,
run this command again and select the Show all option.
Partial isolate - Works similar to the Isolate option, except that it leaves the surrounding
graphics (building, equipment, dimensions, and so on) visible. This option has the same
additional options as Isolate.
Show all - Turns off any isolation and makes all objects in the drawing visible.
Spec - Lists all specs used in the model. You can select one or more specifications to isolate.
Line number - Lists all line numbers used in the drawing. You can select one or more line
numbers to isolate.
List - Displays a dialog box listing either the specifications or line numbers within the drawing.
You can select one or more items using the standard Windows selection methods.
Select component - Select a component in the drawing.

SECTION 7
Pipe BOM / DB Panel

CADWorx Plant I tab > Steel BOM DB Panel
Command Description Command line
BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style BOMSETUP
or layout that you need. For more information, see Bill of Material
Setup (on page 145).
Cut BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece BOMCUT
of pipe with a length and a tag. For more information, see Cut Pipe
Bill of Material (on page 148).
Total BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for BOMTOTAL
a total length of pipe in each size. For more information, see Total
Pipe Bill of Material (on page 150).
Single BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each BOMSINGLE

selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see Single
Pipe Bill of Material (on page 151).
Export BOM - Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an BOMEXPORT

external file format that you specify. For more information, see
Export Pipe Bill of Material (on page 153).
Import BOM - Imports a database into a Bill a Material schedule. BOMIMPORT

For more information, see Import Pipe Bill of Material (on page
153).
Delete BOM - Deletes all entities designated for Bill of Material. BOMDELETE
For more information, see Delete Bill of Material (on page 154).
Tag Toggle - Turns on and off the placement of tags. For more TAGTOGGLE
information, see Tag Toggle Bill of Material (on page 154).
Tag Location - Moves a tag. For more information, see Tag TAGRELOCATE
Location (on page 154).
Insert Tag - Places a tag on the drawing without having to run a TAGINSERT
Bill of Material. For more information, see Insert Tag (on page
154).
Setup Live Database - Links the drawing to an external database. LIVEDB

For more information, see Setup Live Database (on page 155).

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Export Pipe - Exports CADWorx component information to a DBFGEN

Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For more information, see
Export Pipe (on page 156).
Import Pipe - Imports and draws CADWorx components from a DBFIN

Import Pipe (on page 158).
Audit Pipe Database - Maintains the database for each DBAUDIT

component in the drawing that has data attached. For more
information, see Audit Pipe Database (on page 159).
Synchronize - Checks all components in the drawing and updates SYNC

them according to the current value in the database. For more
information, see Synchronize Pipe Database (on page 159).
C.G. Generator - Calculates the center of gravity for selected pipe CG

members. For more information, see C.G. Generator (on page
161).
Bill of Material Setup

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Setup
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Setup
Plant menu: Bill of Material > Setup
Command line: BOMSETUP
Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style or layout that you need. Using this dialog
box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide user
specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of over 30
different entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order.
Bill of material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT.
Use the Tag Toggle Bill of Material (on page 154) command to turn the tags on and off in the
schedule.
Bill of Material Setup Dialog Box
Defines or edits the Bill of Material (BOM) schedule template. The template is stored in the
configuration file listed at the top of the dialog.
Database Columns Available - Lists all the information that you can include in the BOM. These
columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.
There are six special columns: USER1, USER2, USER3, USER4, USER5, UNIT. These
columns are blank in the BOM. You can manually enter data after the BOM is generated.
Custom Data created in the Specification Editor can be added to any schedule template in any
order using Add. Find the custom data field name in the Database Columns Available to add it
to BOM Columns Selected.
PT4_X, PT4_Y and PT4 _Z are the world coordinate system location of the approximate center
point of the component.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected and their order of
appearance in the schedule from left (top of list box) to right (bottom of list box). Use Sort Order
to set the order by which these columns are sorted.
Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the Database Columns Available and
BOM Columns Selected lists. You can also move a column to the other list by double-clicking
the column name in the list.
Alignment - Specifies the text alignment for the selected column.
Grow Direction - Specifies whether the schedule should start at the top and work its way down
or start at the bottom and work its way up.
Move Up and Move Down - Defines the column order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM
Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to place the column further left in the BOM.
Click Move Down to place the selected column further right in the BOM.
Move Up and Move Down do not set the sort order of the BOM, only the placement of
the columns. Use Sort Order to define the sort order.
Column title - Specifies the text heading for the selected column.
Column width - Specifies the width for the selected column.
Sort Order - Controls the sort order and accumulation of pipe components in the BOM. For
more information, see BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 148).

 Add or remove properties from BOM (on page 146)
 Change the column order (on page 147)
 Change text alignment in columns (on page 147)
 Change the BOM sorting and accumulation (on page 147)
Add or remove properties from BOM

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Setup .
You can also type BOMSETUP in the command line.
The Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays.
2. To add a property to the BOM, double-click the property in the Database Columns
Available list.
Use the Column title and Column width boxes to define the column heading text and
the column width respectively.
3. To remove a property from the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns
Selected list.
4. Click OK.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Change the column order

2. Select the column to move in the BOM Columns Selected list.
3. Use Move Up and Move Down to change the column order. The column order in the list top
to bottom is the column order in the BOM from left to right.
4. Click OK.
Change text alignment in columns

2. Select the column to edit in the BOM Columns Selected list.
3. Select Left, Center, or Right to control the vertical text justification in the selected column.
4. Select Downward or Upward to control the horizontal alignment of the text in the selected
column.
5. Click OK.
Change the BOM sorting and accumulation

2. Click Sort Order.
The BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Control Setup dialog box displays.
3. Move the columns that you want to sort with to the BOM Columns Selected list.
4. Use Move Up and Move Down to specify which columns are sorted first in the BOM.
5. Select a column and use the Ascending and Descending options to control how
information in that column is sorted. Ascending means sorting from small numbers to larger
numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z. Descending is large number to smaller (100 to 1) and Z
to A.
6. Click OK on the BOM Sort Order dialog box.
7. Click OK on the Bill of Material Setup dialog box.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box

Controls the sort order of the BOM. Columns that you place in the BOM Columns Selected list
are used to sort the BOM starting with the top column, then the second column, and so forth.
Use Move Up and Move Down to change the order in which the BOM is sorted.
This dialog box also controls the accumulation of piping components. If two valves have different
TAG values and you do not want these to accumulate, then you need to add TAG to the BOM
Columns Selected list.
Database Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can use to
sort the BOM. These columns can be used to sort using Add.
BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected for sorting and their
sort order from top to bottom.
Add and Remove - Moves selected columns between the BOM Columns Available and BOM
Columns Selected lists. You can also move a column to the other list by double-clicking on the
column name in the list.
Column Sort - Controls additional sorting on each selected column.
 Ascending - Sorts from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z.
 Descending - Sorts from large numbers to small numbers (100 to 1) and from Z to A.
If you want the BOM to sort from large size piping to small size piping, use Descending for
MAIN_NOM and RED_NOM.
Move Up and Move Down - Defines the sort order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM
Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to sort that column before other columns. Click
Move Down to sort the column after columns higher in the list.
When you add the line number (LINE_NUM) to BOM Columns Selected, the bill of
material export options (BOMCUT, BOMTOTAL, and BOMEXPORT) calculates the
components by the line number rather than the total number of the selected components.
Cut Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Cut
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Cut
Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Cut
Command line: BOMCUT
Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece of pipe with a length and a tag. Identical
items are accumulated in the quantity column.
Counter - Select this option to start the tag counter at any positive nonzero integer. When set,
the command resumes requesting that you pick Manual placement or Automatic placement of
tags.
Manual placement - Select to insert tags manually. You are prompted for the tag location. The
software adds a rubber band line attached to the component extending to the specified tag
location. You must continue specifying locations until the last component’s tag has been placed.
Automatic placement - Select to have CADWorx insert tags automatically. In model space,
CADWorx places the tag in the direction (tag to component) provided. In paper space, this
prompt does not appear if the tag optimization is on. For more information, see
BomTagOptimize (on page 32).

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
The schedule's text size is based on the AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE. If this text size is larger
than the schedule spacing, the following message appears and the Bill of Material generation
stops. The schedule spacing is controlled by the BomScheduleSpacing (on page 31) variable in
the Configuration Settings.
A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the
height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The
text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.
CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only.
This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the
BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding
this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 32).

 Cut BOM using Automatic placement (on page 149)
 Cut BOM using Manual placement (on page 149)
Cut BOM using Automatic placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Cut .
You can also type BOMCUT in the command line.
2. Select the Automatic placement option.
3. Enter the placement angle for the tag.
4. Specify a point in the drawing for the upper right corner of the BOM schedule.
5. Select the pipe components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you
are finished.
The BOM is generated.
Cut BOM using Manual placement
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Cut .
You can also type BOMCUT in the command line.
2. Select the Manual placement option.
are finished.
5. Specify the tag location for each component you selected.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Total Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Total
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Total

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Total
Command line: BOMTOTAL
Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of pipe in each size. Identical
long annotation items are accumulated in the length column.
Bill of Material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT.
tags.

 Total BOM using Automatic placement (on page 151)
 Total BOM using Manual placement (on page 151)

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Total BOM using Automatic placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Total .
You can also type BOMTOTAL in the command line.
are finished.
Total BOM using Manual placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Total .
You can also type BOMTOTAL in the command line.
are finished.
Single Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Single
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Single

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Run > Single
Command line: BOMSINGLE
Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each selected object having its own line in the
schedule.
tags.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel

 Single BOM using Automatic placement (on page 152)
 Single BOM using Manual placement (on page 152)
Single BOM using Automatic placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Single .
You can also type BOMSINGLE in the command line.
are finished.
Single BOM using Manual placement

1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Single .
You can also type BOMSINGLE in the command line.
are finished.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Export Pipe Bill of Material

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Export
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Export

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Export
Command line: BOMEXPORT
Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. The
schedule for the Bill of Material is defined using Bill of Material Setup (on page 145). CADWorx
can export the Bill of Material schedules to:
 Access file (*.mdb)
 Excel file (*.xls)
 Text file (*.txt)
 HTML file (*.htm)
When exporting data to Microsoft Excel, numeric data is exported as text and is preceded by a
single quote. This single quote prevents you from totaling the column in Excel. To correct this in
Excel, select the column and then select Data > Text To Columns. Step through the wizard
selecting the Delimited option and Tab as the Delimiter check box. This changes the data from
text to numbers. In Imperial/Inch settings, length is exported in feet and inches, which cannot be
totaled in Excel. To export length in decimal format, change the current AutoCAD Dimension
Style settings Primary Units format to decimal.
An additional command called BOMEXTERNAL is available to export a project database
to a file based on the columns chosen in the BOMSETUP.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Export .

You can also type BOMEXPORT in the command line.
2. Specify if you want a Cut, Total, or Single BOM.
3. Select the objects to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.
4. In the Save as type box, select the file format that you want.
5. Type the file name, and specify the folder location.
6. Click Save.
Import Pipe Bill of Material

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Import
Command line: BOMIMPORT
Imports a database into a Bill of Material schedule on the present drawing. The schedule is
generated using the BOMSETUP parameters, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 145). You can
import only Access files (*.mdb) formats created with the DBFGEN command. For more
information, see Export Pipe (on page 156).
This command cannot be used to import data from the files generated with the BOMEXPORT
command because BOMEXPORT exports only partial field information. BOMIMPORT command
expects all the fields to be present.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Import.

You can also type BOMIMPORT in the command line.
2. Specify if you want a Cut length, Total length, or Single item BOM.
3. Select to use the current database or to select another database. The current database
displays in the command line area.
4. Select the upper right corner location of the Bill of Material in the drawing.
Delete Bill of Material

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Delete
Command line: BOMDELETE
Deletes all entities that are on the layer designated for Bill of Materials in the current
configuration settings. This option cannot be used for deleting partial tags or for deleting the
schedule only.
1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Delete.
You can also type BOMDELETE in the command line.
Tag Toggle Bill of Material

Plant menu: Bill of Material > Tag > Toggle
Command line: TAGTOGGLE
Toggle Bill of Material tags in the schedule on and off.
1. Select Plant > Bill of Material > Tag > Toggle.
You can also type TAGTOGGLE in the command line.
Tag Location
Plant menu: Utilities > Nozzle Schedule > Tag > Location
Command line: TAGRELOCATE (EQUIPTAGRELOCATE in CADWorx Equipment)
Relocates a tag. This command is useful when tags are placed on top of each other. Optionally,
this command deletes the connector line from the item mark to the component. This is useful
when multiple items are required for one location, such as gaskets and bolts associated with a
flange.
Tags and the associated leader lines are grouped. This makes them easier to
manipulate. You can use the AutoCAD Group command to un-group the items and manually
rearrange them.
Insert Tag
Plant menu: Utilities > Nozzle Schedule > Tag > Insert
Command line: TAGINSERT (EQUIPTAGINSERT in CADWorx Equipment)
Places tags on the drawing without having to run the main Bill of Material generator. The tag is
scaled according to the present text size.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Setup Live Database

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Setup
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Setup
Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Setup
Command line: LIVEDB
CADWorx supports a fully functional live external database. Use this command to define the
database settings that are saved to the configuration file listed. When a drawing is opened and a
configuration file is located in the same folder, the drawing initializes according to that
configuration file using a live database or not.
 When a component is deleted from the drawing and there is a live database active, that
component is marked for deletion in the database. When the drawing is closed, if the
drawing is not saved the item is not deleted from the database. If the drawing is saved, then
the item is deleted from the database.
 When a component or a group of components are copied from a drawing to a new drawing
that uses the same live database, the copied components are duplicated in the live database
with the new drawing name.
 When a component or a group of components are cut from a drawing and placed in another
drawing that uses the same live database, the components duplicate in the live database
with the new drawing name. When the old drawing is saved and closed any duplicate items
from the first drawing are deleted from the live database because they are no longer on the
first drawing.
 All changes to live database settings take effect in the next drawing session.
On/Off - Turns the live database system on and off. When on, all components drawn are
updated instantaneously to the database. Changes can be made in the drawing or in the
database. When off, all CADWorx component information is stored only within the drawing.
Database Type - Select the type of database to use as the live database. Depending on the
type chosen, the path to the database or schema is displayed.
Access Path - Defines the Microsoft Access database information. Click Create Table to create
the PIPE table in the database when creating a new database. Click Select File to specify an
existing database.
SQL Server Database Name and Schema - Defines the Microsoft SQL Server database
information. You must have already created the ODBC schemas (refer to the installation guide
for help). Type the database name in the Database box. Type the ODBC schema name in the
Schema box, either Plant_SQL_SERVER or Steel_SQL_SERVER.
Oracle Schema - Defines the Oracle database information. Type the ODBC schema name in
the Schema box.
Startup Dialog Options - Sets the database option on CADWorx startup.
 No dialog (new drawings are in Live DB) - Select to place new drawings automatically in
the database. Selecting this option requires that a new drawing be named and saved
immediately on creation. Drawings that use a live database must be in the same folder with
the appropriate configuration file.
 No dialog (new drawings are not in Live DB) - Select to not add new drawings to the
database. You can add drawings to the live database later using this command.
 Show dialog - Select to display a dialog box on which you can choose to use a database or
not.
Existing components in drawings can be added to the database by using DBFGEN for
Pipe or SDBFGEN for Steel. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 156).

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Enter User Name and Password Dialog Box

Enables you to access the system by entering a user name and password when required.
User Name - Specifies your user name for the system.
Password - Type the password, if your system requires a password.
Database : Schema - Displays the database name and schema from the Enter Value dialog
box. For Oracle, only the schema displays from the Enter Schema dialog box.
Export Pipe
CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Export
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Export

Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Export
Command line: DBFGEN
Exports CADWorx component information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
When using live database, this command updates the appropriate database setup for the
drawing.
Database Type - Select Access to write to a Microsoft Access file, or select Excel to write to a
Microsoft Excel file.
Browse - Click to define the file name and folder location. The disabled boxes at the bottom of
the dialog display the file name and folder in use.
Append/Sync - Synchronizes the drawing and the database file by removing entries from the
database that no longer exist in the drawing and updating components in the database
according to the drawing. You can use this command once a day or five times an hour to
maintain the database according to the drawing. Many users can append to the same database
file at the same time.
New - Creates a new database file based on the chosen folder and database type.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Export .

You can also type DBFGEN in the command line.
or
Choose Select component to select the needed components by crossing, window, or any
other preferred method.
4. Select the components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when you
are finished.
The Select Database Type dialog box displays.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
5. Select Access or Excel to define the file type.

6. Click Browse, and define the folder and file name.
7. Select New if you are creating a new file.
or
Select Append/Sync if you want to synchronize an existing file.
8. Click OK.
If live database is being used, the prompt Continue to update live database? [Yes/No]
<Yes>: displays.
9. Click Yes to update the database.
or
Click No to stop updating the live database.
Select Item Dialog Box

Lists all the line number or specifications in the drawing (or database). You can select multiple
items using the CTRL or SHIFT keys.
Filter - Enter a wildcard filter to limit the items available in the list. The filter is case sensitive.
Wildcards
Character Used to
# (pound) Matches any single numeric digit
@ (at) Matches any single alphabetic character
. (period) Matches any single non-alphanumeric character
* (asterisk) Matches any character sequence, including an empty one, and it can
be used anywhere in the search pattern: beginning, middle, or end
? (question mark) Matches any single character
~ (tilde) If it is the first character in the pattern, it matches anything except the
pattern
[...] Matches any one of the characters enclosed
[~...] Matches any single character not enclosed
- (hyphen) Used inside brackets to specify a range for a single character
, (comma) Separates two patterns
` (reverse quote) Escapes special characters (reads next character literally)

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
In the example below, lines with 2C or A1 display for selection.
Import Pipe
CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Import
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Import

Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Import
Command line: DBFIN
Imports and draws CADWorx components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. This
command is not available when you are using a live database.
You can select one or more drawings to import. CADWorx then draws the imported components
in single line mode. These can be converted to any other modes using the Mode Convert (on
page 79) tools available.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Import .

You can also type DBFIN in the command line.
2. Browse to and select the file to import.
3. Click Open.
The Select Item dialog box displays.
4. Select the drawings in the file to import into the active drawing.
5. Click OK.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Audit Pipe Database

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Audit
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Audit

Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Audit
Command line: DBAUDIT
Maintains the database for each component in the drawing that has data attached. Use this
command whenever the drawing or the database has any problems. If a problem is found in the
drawing, for example a component in the database is not present in the drawing, you have the
option to delete this component in the database or to simply ignore it.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Audit .
You can also type DBAUDIT in the command line.
2. Browse to and select the file to audit against the drawing.
3. Click Open.
The message Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database displays.
4. If no problems are found, the message Audit completed displays.
5. If a problem is found, you are prompted to delete the row from the database. Select Yes to
delete the row. Select No to ignore the row.
Synchronize Pipe Database

CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Synchronize
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Synchronize

Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Synchronize
Command line: SYNC
Checks all components in the drawing and updates them according to the current value in the
database. This command does not write new records to the database for new components that
are in the model but are not in the database. You need to use Setup Live Database (on page
155) before using this command.
When a drawing has a live database attached, you can open the database and edit the
ALPHA_SIZE, SHORT_DESC, LONG_DESC, TAG, LINE_NUM, DB_CODE, WEIGHT, and any
Custom Data values in the PIPE table. Changing any other column value does not have any
effect on the drawing.
The external database does not update newly created custom data if the database itself
is opened in a separate session.
If the SPEC_FILE column value is changed, the values in the other columns listed above are
ignored. The SPEC_FILE column value must be changed to an existing valid specification. The
column values listed above are updated according to the information derived from the
specification. When a specification is changed, it must match the base rating of the specification.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
For example, changing a component from a 150 lb rated specification to a 300 lb rated
specification causes discontinuity within the drawing. This discontinuity does not present itself
until a mode convert is performed on the component.
After data is changed and you run Synchronize , the data is updated. The Synchronize
command now works in conjunction with the SyncOnStartUp (on page 41) variable in
Configuration Settings (on page 28). Setting the SyncOnStartUp variable to Synchronize With
Changes Review displays the Synchronize Component dialog box that enables you to review
the changes made to a database and decide which ones to accept or reject. These changes
also include the custom data fields created in the Specification Editor.
Synchronize Component Dialog Box

Enables you to review the changes made in a live database and accept or reject the changes.
The Field Name includes information from the Component Edit dialog box including the
custom data. For more information, see Local Edit (on page 68).
Field Name - Specifies the database information name, as they pertain to the database and the
corresponding information in the Component Edit dialog box fields. When SyncOnStartUp (on
page 41) is set to Synchronize With Changes Review while using a live database, the editable
boxes in the Component Edit dialog box display for review in this window. You can then update
the changes in the Synchronize Component dialog box, by clicking Accept Changes.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Database Values - Specifies the changed information value for the Field Name when a change
was made. If no change was made, the Database Values keep the same value as the
Component Values indicating no change takes place when the changes are accepted.
Component Values - Specifies the original database information values for the Field Name.
Field Name, Database Values, and Component Values display in red when a change
has been made to the database.
select / deselect all - Enables you to select or clear all changes made to the database.
Accept Changes - Accepts the selected changes made to the database and updates the
Reject Changes - Rejects the changes to the database and returns them to their original value.
Each component changed displays the Synchronize Component dialog box separately.
You must except or reject each change individually.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize .

You can also type SYNC in the command line.
2. Click Yes to confirm that you want to synchronize the drawing with the database.
OR
The Synchronize Component dialog box displays.
Review the information, and accept or reject the changes.
If you reject the changes, the changes you made in the database file are reset to the
previous information.
C.G. Generator
CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > C.G. Generator
Plant menu: Accessory > C.G. Generator
Command line: TCG
Calculates center of gravity for all components drawn in X,Y planes (2D plans) or in X,Y,Z
planes (3D Model). You can use a generic attach (from Plant > Toolbars > Misc) which
provides the center of gravity location and weight. For more information on specifying a center of
gravity location for a generic attach, see Generic Attach (on page 193) or Steel - Generic
Attachment (on page 288).
Selection can be done by crossing, window, or selecting individual component.
Total Center of Gravity Calculation Dialog Box

Calculates the total center of gravity for all components.
Selected Components
Select - Enables you to select items to calculate the total center of gravity for that item.
Piping - Enables piping to be calculated for the total center of gravity. Reports the selected
component counters in the corresponding box.

Pipe BOM / DB Panel
Piping Insulation - Enables piping insulation to be calculated for the total center of gravity.
Reports the selected component counters in the corresponding box.
Steel - Enables steel to be calculated for the total center of gravity. Reports the selected
HVAC - Enables HVAC to be calculated for the total center of gravity. Reports the selected
Equipment - Enables equipment to be calculated for the total center of gravity. Reports the
selected component counters in the corresponding box.
You must have a material set for the equipment, and then run EQUIPCG before you
can get a center of gravity calculation for equipment in CADWorx Plant.
Report Options
Title - Specifies a title for the report that prints when CG is calculated.
Path - Specifies the location of the report file. Click the Path ellipsis to change the location and
save the file.
Print report to command line - Prints the total center of gravity report to the command line.
View Report - Indicates that the software opens the report after the center of gravity calculates.
Insert drawing marker - Inserts a drawing marker for the total center of gravity.
1. Click C.G. Generator on the Pipe BOM / DB panel in the CADWorx Plant I tab.
Alternatively, type TCG on the command line and then press ENTER.
The Total CG Calculation dialog box displays.
2. Select the type of components to calculate center of gravity.
3. Enter a title for the report in the Title box.
4. Select whether you want the report to print on the command line, view the report, or whether
you want to insert a marker.
5. Click Select.
 Before you can get a center of gravity calculation for equipment in CADWorx Plant, you
must have a material set for the equipment, and then you must run EQUIPCG.
 When selecting equipment to calculate the center of gravity, you have the following
choices:
 Select all.
 Zoom to the small white cross and select it.
6. Select the components, and then press ENTER.
The center of gravity calculates and the Total CG Calculation dialog box redisplays with
the selected component counters in the corresponding boxes.
7. Click OK.
A center of gravity reference point and a report display.

SECTION 8
Misc Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc
Auto Connect - Turns automatic connection on or off. For CONNECTOG

more information, see Auto Connect (on page 164).
Group On/Off - Turns on or off the grouping of the GROUPTOG

centerline of the component with the accompanying
graphics. For more information, see Group On/Off (on page
165).
Weld Size - Sets the default size of the weld dots that WELDSIZE
accompany single line components. For more information,
see Weld Size (on page 165).
Join Pipe - Changes segmented piping to non-segmented JOINPIPE

piping. For more information, see Join Pipe (on page 165).
Create - Creates symmetrical or non-symmetrical user USERCREATE

shape components. For more information, see User
Shapes (on page 166).
Top Works Add - Adds top works to a valve already drawn TOPWORKSADD
in the model. For more information, see Top Works Add (on
page 188)
Top Works Change - Changes the orientation of or TOPWORKSCHANGE

deletes top works already associated with a valve. For
more information, see Top Works Change (on page 189).
System Out - Creates a CAESAR II input file. For more C2OUT

information, see System Out (on page 189).
Break Pipe - Changes non-segmented piping to BREAKPIPE

segmented piping. For more information, see Break Pipe
(on page 191).
Nozzle Generic Attach - Attaches nozzle information to ENGENERIC

any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. For more
information, see Nozzle Generic Attach (on page 191).
Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic GENERIC

AutoCAD object in the drawing. For more information, see
Generic Attach (on page 193).
System In - Reads a CAESAR II input file. For more C2IN

information, see System In (on page 196).

Misc Panel
Change Elevation - Changes the elevation of a selected CHANGEELEVATION

pipe in the drawing. For more information, see Change
Elevation (on page 197).
Elbow Centerline - Turns on or off elbow centerlines for ELBOWCL

use with isometrics. For more information, see Elbow
Centerline (on page 200).
ISO Flag - Sets a flag in the component indicating that the ISOFLAG
present stored length should be used regardless of what
type of length modifications are made to the pipe
component. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page
200).
Dim Adjustment - Adjusts a dimension when the pipe DIMADJUST

segments of a particular run have been adjusted or
modified with the ISO flag command. For more information,
see Dim Adjustment (on page 199).
Re-associate the Components - Enables you to re- REASSOCIATEMODEL

associate disconnected components. For more information,
see Re-associate the Components (on page 200).
System Visibility - Turns on or off visibility of components SYSVIS

usually located on the system layer. For more information,
see System Visibility (on page 201).
Auto Connect
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Auto Connect
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Connect
Settings toolbar:
Command line: CONNECTTOG
Turns automatic connection on or off. Auto connection provides minimum prompts and makes
certain assumptions.
 The last component placed in the drawing provides the starting point for the next
component. The direction of the last component indicates the direction of the new
component.
 If you select a component which requires a second direction, such as an elbow, or tee, there
are additional prompts requesting the direction.
 Typical elbow - Prompts you for a direction.
 Pipe with an arbitrary length - Prompts you for an end point.
 Elbow pointing up or down - Prompts you for a direction.
This is useful for placing components down a line. It can dramatically decrease the time required
to place components in assemblies, such as control valve bypass loops.
If you have run any type of mode conversion, the last point is not available. The software
prompts you to pick the starting point.
Auto Connect does not work in conjunction with Router (on page 216).

Misc Panel
Group On/Off
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Group On/Off
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Group On/Off
Settings toolbar:
Command line: GROUPTOG
Turns on or off the grouping of the centerline of the component with the accompanying graphics.
This is useful for selecting any piece of the component rather than only the centerline. By
default, grouping is turned on.
Weld Size
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Weld Size
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Weld Size
Command line: WELDSIZE
Specifies the default size of the weld dots that accompany single line components. This
command also allows for the change of weld dots already placed in the drawing.
Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe

1. Click Weld Size . Alternatively, type WELDSIZE on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Type the new weld size on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software changes the weld dot size.
Join Pipe
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Join Pipe
Command line: JOINPIPE
Changes segmented piping to non-segmented piping.
Run - Joins the entire run of pipe.
Segment - Joins the selected segments of pipe.

 Join by Run (on page 166)
 Join by Segment (on page 166)

Misc Panel
Join by Run
1. Click Join Pipe on the Misc panel in the CADWorx Plant I tab.
2. Type R on the command line, and then press ENTER.
3. Select the pipe to join.
The software joins all segments along the selected piping.
The JOINPIPE command for the Run option does not work around elbows. To join
the piping on the other side of the elbow select it during step 3.
Join by Segment
1. Click Join Pipe on the Misc panel in the CADWorx Plant I tab.
2. Type S on the command line, and then press ENTER.
3. Select the segments to join.
The software joins the selected segments.
User Shapes
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Create
Misc toolbar: Create

Command line: USERCREATE
Creates symmetrical or nonsymmetrical user shape components. Symmetrical shapes require
you to draw an outline that can be used to create the user component. Non-symmetrical shapes
require a block or an object completely drawn in 2D and 3D that represents the complete
component. A symmetrical object can be converted from 2D to 3D Mode, or vice versa, using
the mode convert (on page 79) commands. It does not allow double-line to single-line
conversion in 2D mode. Non-symmetrical shapes can only convert between isometric and solids
(Convert Isometric (on page 80) or 3D Solids (on page 80)).
1. Create the component.
2. Modify the specification.
3. Click Create , or type USERCREATE on the command line and press ENTER.
The Define User Shape dialog box displays.
Each dialog box option is explained below.
User shape components can also be tagged as optional components in the specification. This
allows for an infinite number of additional components.
For symmetrically shaped components, draw a 2D polyline indicating the outline of the shape.
The symmetrical shape is limited to straight lines between vertices in the polyline. In other
words, there cannot be a fillet radius on any corner of the polyline. If fillets exist, the routine
draws them with chamfered corners. Draw only half of the shape on one side of the centerline.
We recommend preparing an outline before trying to draw the polyline. For example, draw the
component using standard AutoCAD methods or CADWorx components, and then draw a
polyline around the contour.
For symmetrical shapes, the polyline may overlap as shown in the example below for 2D
solids (drawn to each indicated point, PT1, PT2, and so on). For use with 3D solids, the polyline
cannot overlap (there cannot be a PT4 or PT7). If the polyline overlaps, an ACIS error occurs
indicating the object cannot be revolved.

Misc Panel
For non-symmetrically shaped components, you must first create a 2D and 3D representation.
This representation needs to show all the required details of the component. The 3D
representation is used when in the 3D drawing mode. It can be used for orthographic and
model-type representation. The 2D representation is used when in the 2D isometric drawing
mode.
After the polyline or components are complete, click Create . This creates a data file in the
required folder with the required file name. For non-symmetrically shaped components, it also
creates two drawing files: one 2D and one 3D. The drawing names have appended in square
brackets, the size and drawing mode (for example, [4.0-3D]). The file name must be unique.
User Shapes are stored in Product Folder]\Plant\Spec. You can change were User Shapes are
stored under Folder Setting in the Define User Shape dialog box.
Make sure to set a default size and specification first. Create must be run multiple times for
creating components with different sizes.
Component Setup
Name - Specifies the name of the user shape. There is a 20 character limit.
Number - Specifies the number of the user shape. Select a number in the range of 1 to 5.
Specification - Sets the specification for the user shape.
Assign to Spec - Assigns the user shape to other specifications.
Save to Catalog - Saves the user shape to the catalog.
Folder Settings
Folder - Defines the save location for the user shape.
Browse - Enables you to search the computer folders for a specific location.
Define Size and Geometry

Type - Sets the type selection for the user shape.
 Block - Specifies a block to form the shape. If the component is created on layer 0, it
inherits the specification color when inserted. This option requires a fully developed
component drawn to the correct size with AutoCAD or CADWorx. The software removes
any attached extended entity data. This option is used with non-symmetrical
components.
 Select Polyline - Specifies a polyline to form the shape. The software automatically
extracts all the points from the selected polyline. You must first select the reference and
end points. This option is used with symmetrical components.
 Pick Point - Specifies each point required to form the shape. You must first select the
reference and end points (PT1 and PT37 in the following figure). This option is used
with symmetrical components. Press ENTER to end the sequence.

Misc Panel
Main Size - Sets the main size of the user shape.

Reduction Size - Sets the reduction size of the user shape.
Select 3D Solid - Creates 3D user shapes.
Select 2D Double Line - Creates 2D double line user shapes.
Select 2D Single Line - Creates 2d single line user shapes.
Define Connections - Defines the end type connection for the user shape. You can select
Buttweld, Socket, Threaded, or Flanges. The user shape must have been previously selected
with either Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line.
If the component is less than 1/16" long (2 mm when in metric mode), the associated xdata is in
an inserted block named XATB. It is located on the default layer named SYSTEM instead of the
CL layer so that it does not plot or display while this layer is turned off.
If the component is non-symmetrical, there is an inserted block named NATB located at the start
point. This block, like the XATB block, contains all the associated xdata and acts as any other
component.
When a 2D representation of a non-symmetrical component is not present (that is, only the 3D
representation option is used) and the component is converted to the 3D mode, the NATB
remains. This block can be converted to 2D but does not have any graphics in the 3D mode.
The NATB and XATB blocks can be moved and controlled just as any other CADWorx
component.
Spec Properties
BOM Type - Sets the bill of material type for the user shape.
Color - Sets the color of the user shape.
Layer - Sets the layer for the user shape. This setting defaults to the layer named as the
specification in the Define User Shape dialog box.
Material - Sets the material type of the user shape.
Density - Sets the density of the user shape.
Weight - Sets the weight of the user shape
Length - Sets the length of the user shape.
Sort Sequence - Sets the sort sequence of the user shape.
Optional Component - Sets the user shape as an optional component.
With the use of optional components, a specification file can have an unlimited number of
user shapes.
Description
Long - Describes the component in long format.
Short - Describes the component in short format.
Tag - Tags the user shape with the entered information.
Notes - Sets other information about the user shape.

Misc Panel
Isogen Symbol Information

Identifier - Identifies the isogenic information for the component.
SKEY - Sets the SKEY for the user shape.
Rating
Component Class - Sets the specification class for the user shape.
Temperature Rating - Sets the highest temperature allowed for the user shape.
Pressure Rating - Sets the highest pounds per square inch allowed for the component.
Define User Shape Dialog Box buttons

OK - Creates the user shape.
Cancel - Cancels creation of the user shape.
Help - Displays the online help file.
When placing non-symmetrical user shapes
Up - Rolls the component by 90 degrees. This option turns the component up if the non-
symmetrical component has a branch-like extrusion.
Down - Rolls the component by –90 degrees. This option turns the component down if the non-
symmetrical component has a branch-like extrusion.
Roll - Allows the non-symmetrical user shape to be rolled at any angle. When the component
has been flipped with one of the mirror options, the angle may need to be negative. If the rolled
angle input is incorrect, retype the angle as a negative to correct it. When the component has
been turned up or down with one of the options above, rolling is from that location.
mirrorX - Mirrors the non-symmetrical user shape along the X-axis. After a shape has been
mirrored, it has an effect on all the options above. Run this option again to place the component
back in its original position.
mirrorY - Mirrors the nonsymmetrical user shape along the Y-axis. After a shape has been
mirrorZ - Mirrors the nonsymmetrical user shape along the Z-axis. After a shape has been
<Pick rotation> - Rotates the nonsymmetrical user shape by the angle you specify. This option
causes the command to exit, and the options above become unavailable. This should be the last
option chosen.
 Create a user shape file (on page 170)
 Edit an existing user shape (on page 171)
 Create a user shape from points (on page 176)
 Create a user shape from a polyline (on page 178)
 Create a user shape from a block (on page 180)
 Create a 3D user shape (on page 182)
 Create a 2D user shape (on page 183)
 Create a 2D single line user shape (on page 185)
 Add a user shape to a specification (on page 187)
 Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 188)
 Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 188)

Misc Panel
Create a user shape file

1. Click Create . Alternatively, type USERCREATE on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Type the name of the user shape in the Name box.
3. Select a user shape number in the Number list. The available numbers are 1 through 5.
4. Select a specification in the Specification list.
5. If you want the user shape saved in the catalog then select the Save to catalog check box.
This is the default setting.
6. Select the type of the user shape in the Type list.
7. Select the main size in the Main Size list.
8. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box.
The Reducing Size list becomes available.
9. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list.
Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file.
10. Click Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line and follow the
prompts.
11. Click Define Connections.
Pick direction.
12. Select a direction in the drawing.
Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End
Type>.
13. Select an end type for the user shape.
Pick connection 1 or <Enter to finish>.
14. If you have more than one connection point select each one as prompted and then press
ENTER when finished.
Connection points indicate where other equipment or components attach to the
nonsymmetrical user shape. These points are very important when exporting the model and
affect the scaling if not properly selected.
15. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list.
16. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list.
17. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box.
18. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list.

Misc Panel
19. Type the density of the component in the Density box.

20. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box.
21. Type the length of the component in the Length box.
22. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box.
23. Select Optional Component to make this component an optional component.
24. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file.
25. Type the short description in the Short box.
26. Type the tag information in the Tag box.
27. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.
The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or
use the information as needed.
28. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box.
29. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list.
30. Type the component class in the Component Class box.
31. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box.
32. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box.
33. Click OK.
The software creates the user shape.
The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 535) toolbar. For more information
on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 188) or
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 188).
Edit an existing user shape

ENTER.
2. Select the name of the user shape, you want to modify, in the Name box.
The software auto-populates the boxes with the information you used when you initially
created the shape.
3. Change any other data as needed.
4. When finished making changes to the file, click OK.
The software updates the user shape.

Misc Panel
Edit by redefining connection points

Command line: EDITUSERSHAPE
Enables you to redefine connection points on user shapes.
When you import legacy user shape data, the software may not map the connection
points. Use EDITUSERSHAPE to define the user shape connection points.
1. Type EDITUSERSHAPE on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Select the user shape to edit.
3. Select connection points for each point you want to change, and then select an end type.
4. Changing the connections points and end types, and then press ENTER to finish.
The connection points update in the drawing and the catalog, with routing points added to
the user shape.
ISOGEN Export Options

Select connection points based on the images below, where one is the first pick, two is the
second pick, and so on.
PCF Identification Valid SKEY Connection Connection Points Order

Points
NUT BNUT 1
CAP KA** 2

Misc Panel
MISC- BR** 2
COMPONENT-
RETURN
TEE TE**, TS** 3
REDUCER- CT** 3
CONCENTRIC-
TEED

Misc Panel
REDUCER- EX** 3
ECCENTRIC-
TEED
VALVE-3WAY V3** 3
VALVE-4WAY V4** 4

Misc Panel
MISC- BA** 3
COMPONENT-
ANGLE
CROSS CR** 4
MISC- BO** 4
COMPONENT-
OFFSET*^

Misc Panel
VALVE- MD** 7
MULTIWAY-
***
VALVE- MD** 9
MULTIWAY-
***
*^For MISC-COMPONENT-OFFSET, point 1 and point 2 are required. Point 3 and Point 4 are
optional.
Create a user shape from points

ENTER.

Misc Panel
6. Select Pick Points in the Type list.
7. Click Select.
Pick point.
8. Select points on the drawing based on the following graphic.
Pick insertion point.

Select an insertion point on the shape.
Pick end point.
9. Select an end point on the drawing.
If reducing is selected as the insertion point you receive the following prompt. If not skip to
step 12.
Set start connection as reducing [Yes/No]<No>.
10. Select the required option.
Set End Type at start connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld end type>.
Set End Type at end connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld end type>.
16. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list. For more information, see User Shapes
(on page 166).

Misc Panel
24. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component.
34. Click OK.
Create a user shape from a polyline

ENTER.
6. Select Polyline in the Type list.

Misc Panel
7. Click Select.
Select polyline.
8. Select the polyline that defines the shape.
The Selection dialog box displays.
Pick insertion point.
10. Select the insertion point on the model.
Pick end point.
11. Select the end point on the model.
The prompt below only displays if you have a reducing component in the user shape.
Set start connection as reducing [Yes/No]<No>.
Set End Type at start connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End
Type>.
Set EndType at end connection:[Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End Type>.

Misc Panel

35. Click OK.
The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 535) toolbar. For more
information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing
(on page 188) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 188).
Create a user shape from a block

ENTER.
6. Select Block from the Type list.
10. Click Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line and follow the
prompts.
Pick direction.
Type>.

Misc Panel
13. Select an end type for the connection.

14. Select a connection point on the drawing.
Pick direction.
Type>.
16. Select an end type for the connection.
36. Click OK.

Misc Panel
Create a 3D user shape

ENTER.
8. If the component reduces, click the Reducing check box.
10. Click Select 3D Solid.
Select 3D solid representation.
11. Click a point in the upper left of the drawing, drag the mouse, and then click in the lower
right of the drawing to select the entire user shape to create. Press ENTER to finish
selection.
Pick insert point.
12. Select an insertion point on the component.
Pick direction.
Type>.
16. If you have more than one connection point select each one as prompted, and then press

Misc Panel
35. Click OK.
Create a 2D user shape

ENTER.

Misc Panel

10. Click Select 2D Double Line.
Select 2D double line representation.
selection.
Pick insert point.
Pick direction.
Type>.
16. If you have more than one connection point, select each one as prompted, and then press

Misc Panel

35. Click OK.
Create a 2D single line user shape

ENTER.
10. Click Select 2D Single Line.
Select 2D single line representation.
selection.
Pick insert point.

Misc Panel

Pick direction.
Type>.
16. If you have more than one connection point, select each one as prompted, and then press
35. Click OK.

Misc Panel
Add a user shape to a specification

Adds a user shape to the specification.
If Spec Editor is already displayed skip to step 2.
1. Click Start Spec Editor on the spec view palette. Alternatively, click Spec Editor on the
desktop.
The Specification Editor software opens.
2. Click File > Open.
The Open File dialog box displays.
3. Select a catalog, and then click Open.
The Catalog Data window displays.
4. Click the (+) sign on the Data Tables folder.
The Data Tables list displays.
5. Right-click User Shapes, and select Add Data Table .

The New Usershape Table displays.
6. Type the name of the table in the Name box.
7. Select a user type in the Type list.
8. Select a size table in the Size Table list.
You can select and clear multiple sizes by clicking the Size Table ellipsis.
9. Select the Reducing Component check box if you want this to be a reducing component.
10. Type the user shape folder name in the Usershape Folder box.
11. Type the part number in the Part Number box.
12. Type the description of the user shape in the Description box.
13. Click OK.
The user shape file appears under the User Shape category in the Data Tables folder, and
also to the right of Catalog Data, in the Main Table List View.
14. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.
You can now enter information for the specifics of the user shape that you have
added to this specification catalog. For more information, see Add a new data table in
CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide.

Misc Panel
Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing

1. Click and hold Create on the Misc toolbar.
A list of numbered buttons displays.
2. Click the numbered button associated with the shape to place.

3. Select a point in the drawing.
4. Select a direction in the drawing, or type Up or Down.
The software places the shape in the drawing.
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing

1. Click and hold Create on the Misc toolbar.
A list of numbered buttons displays.
2. Click the numbered button associated with the shape to place.

3. Select the start point for the shape in the drawing.
4. Select the rotation option that meets your requirements.
Top Works Add

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Top Works Add
Operators toolbar: Top Works Add

Command line: TOPWORKSADD
Adds top works to a valve already drawn in the model.

Misc Panel
Top Works Change

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Top Works Change
Operators toolbar: Top Works Change
Command line: TOPWORKSCHANGE
Changes the orientation of or deletes top works already associated with a valve.
System Out
CADWorx Plant I tab: MISC > System Out
Plant menu: Accessory > CAESAR II > System Out
Command line: C2OUT
Creates a CAESAR II input file. This input file can then be used in CAESAR II without any
modification. Components selected in the drawing convert to the appropriate elements for the
stress model. For example, a tee connected to pipe in all directions is represented with one
node at the intersection instead of four (three at the ends and one at the intersection). This
provides the stress analyst a model that is ready for use. All pertinent information is transferred
(weights, wall thickness, and so on).
The selection process in the drawing environment is available in two ways. The first requires
selecting the components with the standard selection processes in AutoCAD. This can include
selection by crossing, window or any other preferred method. The second selection process
allows the selection by line number or selecting a component with an existing line number. The
database option is not available with this command.
System In (on page 196) do not function correctly. For more information, see LanguageFile (on
page 35).
Generate a CAESAR II input file

1. Click System Out . Alternatively, type C2OUT on the command line, and press ENTER.
The CAESAR II Output File dialog box displays.
2. Specify the location and file name for the file, and click Save.
Enter an option [Database/Line number/Select component] <Select component>.
or
Choose Select component to select the needed components by crossing, window, or any
other preferred method.
Provide start locations [Yes/No] <No>
5. Select Yes to provide a start and direction, or select No to process all of the components.
6. Press ENTER to finish the selection.

Misc Panel
Example
1. Select the starting point at node 10.
2. Select anywhere along the centerline toward node 90 for a direction.
3. Select the intersection at 30, and then select a direction toward 50.
4. Select a point at 40 and then select a direction toward 50.
5. Select the intersection at 50 and then select a direction toward 70.
6. You could let CAESAR II automatically node the rest of the model, or you could finish by
manually selecting the next point at 30 and then selecting a direction toward 90.
Make sure Ortho is off, and use OSnap NEArest to pick along centerlines for directions.

Misc Panel
Break Pipe
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Break Pipe
Command line: BREAKPIPE
Changes non-segmented piping to segmented piping.
Length - Specifies breaking the segments by length of the segments.
Number - Specifies breaking the segments by the number of segments.

 Break by Length (on page 191)
 Break by Number (on page 191)
Break by Length
1. Click Break Pipe on the Misc panel in the CADWorx Plant I tab.
2. Type L on the command line, and then press ENTER.
3. Type the length on the command line, and then press ENTER.
4. Select the pipe to break.
The piping breaks into segments based on the value entered for Length.
Break by Number
1. Click Break Pipe on the Misc panel in the CADWorx Plant I tab.
2. Type N on the command line, and then press ENTER.
3. Type the number of segments on the command line, and then press ENTER.
4. Select the pipe to break.
The piping breaks into segments based on the value entered for Number.
Nozzle Generic Attach

CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Nozzle Generic Attach
Command line: ENGENERIC
Draws a generic nozzle object in the drawing. You can use the information later in bill of material
extraction, labeling, and so forth. A project, a specification, and a Main size must be set before
you can draw a generic nozzle.
Description - Specifies the description of the nozzle generic attachment.
Equipment Name - Specifies the name of the equipment nozzle generic attachment that you
are creating or editing.
Size - Specifies the nominal size of the generic nozzle. You can edit the size with the list.

Misc Panel
Flange Rating - Specifies the flange rating for the nozzle generic attachment that you are
creating or editing.
Flange Thickness - Specifies the flange thickness for the nozzle generic attachment that you
are creating or editing.
Flange Type - Specifies the flange type for the nozzle generic attachment that you are creating
or editing.
Layer - Specifies the layer for the generic nozzle.
Color - Specifies the color for the generic nozzle. You can use the Select Color option from the
list to open the AutoCAD Color Index, and select any color.
Points List - Enables you to select the face end and buttweld end points for the nozzle generic
attachment.
 Face end - Specifies the face end point with a red arrow on the nozzle generic attachment.
 Buttweld end - Specifies the buttweld end point with a green arrow on the nozzle generic
attachment.
Specify On-Screen - Enables you to specify the face end and buttweld end points on the nozzle
generic attachment on screen by the X, Y, and Z. These coordinates can also be entered
manually. Specifying the end and middle points sets those points for the routing point for the
next nozzle.
Remove – Removes the existing xdata from the generic nozzle. Alternatively, you can use
ENGENERICREMOVE to remove data from any generic nozzle.

 Place a nozzle generic attachment (on page 192)
 Route from a generic nozzle (on page 193)
 Change position and direction of generic nozzle (on page 193)
Place a nozzle generic attachment

1. Click Nozzle Generic Attach . Alternatively, type ENGENERIC on the command line,
and press ENTER.
2. Select the nozzle flange face point in the drawing.
3. Select the nozzle buttweld end point in the drawing.
The Nozzle Generic Attach (Edit) dialog box displays.
4. Type a description in the Description box.
5. Type an equipment name in the Equipment Name box.
6. Select a size from the Size list if needed. Main size must be set before you can draw a
generic nozzle.
7. To change the flange rating, select a rating from the Flange Rating list. A project and
specification must be set before you can draw a generic nozzle.
8. Type the thickness of the flange in the Flange Thickness box. This must be higher than
zero.
9. Select a Flange Type from the list.
10. Select a layer from the Layer list, or leave the default.
11. Select a color from the Color list, or leave the default.
12. Click OK.
 A red arrow indicates the end point. The start and end points can be re-specified after the
nozzle generic attachment is drawn.
 To edit the generic nozzle, double-click it in the drawing.

Misc Panel
Route from a generic nozzle

1. Select the generic nozzle in the drawing.
A plus grip displays.

3. Route pipe as needed in any direction, or select an option.
Change position and direction of generic nozzle

1. Select the generic nozzle in the drawing.
A grip point displays.
2. Select one of the two grip points to define the nozzle direction or position.
Generic Attach
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Generic Attach
Misc toolbar: Generic Attach

Command line: GENERIC
Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. You can use the information
later in bill of material extraction, labeling, and so forth. After manually constructing a
component, use this routine to attach xdata information.
Generic Attach Dialog Box

Specifies the details for the generic attach.
Length - Specifies a length for the component.
Component type - Displays the type of the component.
Specification - Displays the specification used by the component.
Coordinates

Misc Panel
Miscellaneous
BOM Item Type
 The selected item type appears on the bill of materials when the FLAG column is added
using Pipe BOM / DB > Setup . For ISOGEN, you must also sort by the FLAG column to
group by type. For more information, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 145) and BOM Sort
Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 148).
 If Misc is selected when using ISOGEN, then ISOGEN treats the weld gap as a field-fit weld.
Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase the cut piece add-on allowances for field-fit
welds.
ISOGEN - Specifies data for the component in an ISOGEN drawing. Opens the ISOGEN Data
dialog box.
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 71)
 Click the link for more information on the Component Custom Data Dialog Box (on page 76).
Remove - Removes CADWorx database attributes from a component, converting it to generic
AutoCAD geometry.
Many commands in CADWorx use xdata in the components and do not function if the
data is removed.
BOM/CG Point - Displays the Get BOM/CG Location dialog box, which enables you to specify
the bill of material location and the center of gravity location.
Attach - Saves modifications and closes the dialog box.
Get BOM/CG Location Dialog Box

BOM Mark Point - Shows the drawing coordinate location at which the information was
attached.

Misc Panel
Specify On-screen - Click the location in the model view to specify the bill of material mark
point.
View - Displays the BOM Mark Point.
X - Specifies the X-location for the bill of material mark point. This value defaults to zero.
Y - Specifies the Y-location for the bill of material mark point. This value defaults to zero.
Z - Specifies the Z-location for the bill of material mark point. This value defaults to zero.
CG Location - Shows the center of gravity location at which the information was attached.
Specify On-screen - Click the location in the model view to specify the generic attach center of
gravity point.
View - Displays the CG Location.
X - Specifies the X-location for the generic attach center of gravity location. This value defaults
to zero.
Y - Specifies the Y-location for the generic attach center of gravity location. This value defaults
to zero.
Z - Specifies the Z-location for the generic attach center of gravity location. This value defaults
to zero.
You cannot attach information to a CADWorx object or component.
To pinpoint the center of gravity locations use the Osnap commands. For example, to place
information on a beam and have it correctly reflect the center of gravity, draw a centerline and
pick MIDpoint, NEArest to the end of the centerline, or the exact location.
Place a generic attachment in the drawing

1. Click Generic Attach . Alternatively, type GENERIC on the command line, and press
ENTER.
The Generic Attach dialog box displays.
2. Alpha Size auto-populates with the main size already selected when you set up the
drawing. Type the alpha size in the Alpha size box, if you need to change it.
3. Type an abbreviated description, such as PUMP 2X1X8, in the Short annotation box.
4. Type a complete description, such as PUMP, INGERSOLL-RAND, MODEL HOC, 2X1X8, in
the Long annotation box.
5. Type a line number in the Line number box, if you want to assign a line number to the
component.
6. Type the tag in the Tag box.
7. Type the code in the Code box, if you want to assign a code to the component.
9. Type the sort sequence number for the bill of material schedule location in the Sort
sequence box.
11. Change the Coordinates if available and needed.
12. Select Existing in the Miscellaneous column, if needed.
13. Change the BOM Item Type, if needed.
14. Click Attach.
15. Select the object to attach the information.
The software attaches the information to the object, and a red arrow displays indicating the
BOM Mark Point.
16. Press ENTER.

Misc Panel
Specify the Bill of Material Mark Point and the Center of

Gravity Location
1. Double-click the entity.
2. Click BOM/CG Point.
3. Click Specify On-screen under BOM Mark Point.
4. Select a point on the object to specify the mark point.
A red arrow displays indicating the point.
5. Click Specify On-screen under CG Location.
A green arrow displays indicating the location.
7. Click OK.
System In
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > System In
Plant menu: Accessory > CAESAR II > System In
Command line: C2IN
Reads a CAESAR II input file. You must select the necessary ._A or .C2 file. This is the input file
created by CAESAR II or the output facility in CADWorx. After you select the input file, a dialog
box indicating that the file was read displays.
Make sure that the CAESARIIVersion (on page 33) startup variable is set to match your
CAESAR II installation. If this variable is set to 3.2, and the C2IN command is issued on a file
created or modified with CAESAR II 4.40, then an error message displays indicating that the
valid file is corrupt.

Misc Panel
The next prompt requires that a specification be set. Although, there might be an existing
specification set, confirmation or a new specification is required. The specification might not be
used. The input facility in CADWorx attempts to determine the proper specification for the
component being input from data in the CAESAR II input file. The input facility or the data in the
input file does not always indicate a specification. Therefore, a default specification needs to be
set for these components.
Caesar - Derives the descriptive information within any new components from the material
passed back from CAESAR II and the name of the purposed component located in the
PRGM.TBL file. This file is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. The system
automatically assigns all the required paths for data files which might be used later for
reconstruction (such as mode conversion). If the material was not supplied in CAESAR II, then
this option uses the description from the specification but does not populate the line number.
Environment - Assigns the component information based on the default specification. It also
assigns a line number if there is a current line numbering system setup. You are responsible for
the correct line number being set before importing. This option overrides any material sent from
CAESAR II. For example, if A-133-B material type was chosen in CAESAR II, and the default
specification above dictated A-106-B as the material type, this option would override the A-333-
B grade and place A-106-B in the component. The full description would be from the default
specification set above.
System In (on page 196) do not function correctly. For more information, see LanguageFile (on
page 35).
Read a CAESAR II input file

1. Click System In . Alternatively, type C2IN on the command line, and press ENTER.
The CAESAR II Input File dialog box displays.
2. Select the file to read, and click Open.
3. Set the default specification, or press ENTER to use the current specification.
The software reads the CAESAR II input file.
4. Select the option that meets your requirements.
The software writes the CAESAR II components in the drawing.
Change Elevation
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Change Elevation
Command line: CHANGEELEVATION
Changes the elevation of a selected pipe in the drawing.
Pick - Enables you to select the location for the change in the elevation.
 BOP - Changes the elevation location to the bottom of pipe after specifying the elevation
change.
 TOP - Changes the elevation location to the top of pipe after specifying the elevation
change.
 Current - Keeps the center of the pipe as the current location after specifying the elevation
change.

Misc Panel
BOP - Enables you to change the elevation to the bottom of pipe.

TOP - Enables you to change the elevation to the top of pipe.

 Change elevation by entering the elevation value (on page 198)
 Change elevation by Pick (on page 198)
 Change elevation by BOP (on page 198)
 Change elevation by TOP (on page 199)
Change elevation by entering the elevation value

1. Click Change Elevation on the Misc panel in the CADWorx Plant I tab.
2. Select the pipe requiring an elevation change.
3. Type the elevation value on the command line, and then press ENTER.
4. Select the location option (BOP, TOP, Current) to specify where to locate the changed
piping.
The piping elevation changes and places at the new location.
Change elevation by Pick

3. Type P on the command line, and then press ENTER.
4. Select a point in the drawing to move the piping elevation.
The length of pipe must exist in the specification or you get a response that the
piping length does not exist.
5. Select the location option (BOP, TOP, Current) to specify where to locate the changed
piping.
The piping elevation changes and places at the new location.
Change elevation by BOP

3. Type B on the command line, and then press ENTER.
The piping elevation changes to the bottom of the pipe.

Misc Panel
Change elevation by TOP

3. Type T on the command line, and then press ENTER.
The piping elevation changes to the top of the pipe.
Dim Adjustment
Plant menu: Utility Dim Adjustment
Command line: DIMADJUST
Adjusts a dimension when the pipe segments of a particular run have been adjusted or modified
with the ISO flag command. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 200). This command
works with the associate dimensioning setvar DIMASSOC on. The command also adjusts the
pipe’s stored xdata length. This is performed by using the dimension to adjust the pipe’s xdata.
You can adjust the pipe with Dimension option, or adjust the dimension with Pipe option. Both
options of this command read and write fractional characters used with the dimension routines.
Options
Dimension - Adjusts the pipe to match an existing dimension. Select the dimension, then select
the pipe’s centerline.
Pipe - Adjusts the dimension to match the stored length in the pipe’s xdata.
Line - Adjusts the pipe distance to match the length of a line that you select. AutoCAD
dimension lines stop at the back of the arrow, so they are not typically a good choice for this
option.
Pick reference points - Adjusts the pipe distance based on two reference points that you
select. This is the most commonly used option and can be used to pick each end of a pipe.
For this option, the following prompts requests the selection of the pipe(s) that were adjusted.
Selection can be made by crossing, window or individually selecting the centerlines. Other
components which might have been selected with crossing or window are simply ignored. This
only detects adjusted pipe.

Misc Panel
Adjust a dimension to match a pipe

1. Click Plant > Utility > Dim Adjustment. Alternatively, type DIMADJUST on the command
line, and press ENTER.
2. Select Pipe.
3. Select the reference points for the pipe. Press ENTER to finish.
Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension

1. Click Plant > Utility > Dim Adjustment. Alternatively, type DIMADJUST on the command
line, and press ENTER.
2. Select Dimension.
3. Select the dimension text. Press ENTER to finish.
Elbow Centerline
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Elbow Center Line
Command line: ELBOWCL
Turns on or off elbow centerlines for use with isometrics. When toggled on, it provides square
elbow centerlines which can be used for dimensioning. This also produces attractive isometrics.
ISO Flag
Plant menu: Utility > ISO Flag
Command line: ISOFLAG
Sets a flag in the component indicating that the present stored length should be used regardless
of what type of length modifications are made to the pipe component. This command only
affects pipes and nipples. This is useful when adjusting a pipe which is to be used in an
isometric. For example, if you use this command before stretching a pipe which was 120'-0" long
to 5'-0" long, the Bill of Material generator reflects a 120'-0" long piece of pipe.
The component’s xdata is flagged when using the CEDIT dialog box.
Re-associate the Components

CADWorx fieldPipe - CloudWorx Interface Palette: Re-associate the Components
Command line: REASSOCIATEMODEL
If you have not purchased fieldPipe, you can only enter the command on the command
line.
Enables you to re-associate disconnected components.
Entire drawing - Re-associates the entire drawing.
Select components - Re-associates only the selected components.

Misc Panel
Re-associate the Entire drawing

1. Click Re-associate the Components on the on the CADWorx fieldPipe - CloudWorx
Interface palette. Alternatively, type REASSOCIATEMODEL on the command line, and
then press ENTER.
2. Select Entire drawing.
The entire drawing is re-associated.
Re-associate the Select components

1. Click Re-associate the Components on the on the CADWorx fieldPipe - CloudWorx
Interface palette. Alternatively, type REASSOCIATEMODEL on the command line, and
then press ENTER.
2. Select Select components.
3. Select the components you want to re-associate.
The components in the drawing are re-associated.
System Visibility
Command line: SYSVIS
Turns on or off visibility of components usually located on the system layer. The command
affects the components listed below.
 Weld gaps
 Pads / Saddles
 Bolts
 Gaskets
 TAPs

SECTION 9
2D Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D
2D Representation - Creates a 2D representation. For 2DREP
more information, see 2D Representation (on page 202).
2D Representation Hidden - Creates a 2D representation 2DREPH
with hidden lines. For more information, see 2D
Representation Hidden (on page 203).
Box - Creates views based on a picked box. For more VIEWBOX
information, see Box (on page 203).
Edit - Edits a views box. For more information, see Edit (on VIEWEDIT
page 204).
Zoom Lock - Allows zooming in paper space only. For more ZOOMLOCK
information, see Zoom Lock (on page 205).
Zoom Factors - Zooms an Mview to a specified scale. For ZOOMF
more information, see Zoom Factors (on page 205).
2D Representation
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > 2D Representation
This ribbon option is only available in CADWorx Plant Professional.
Plant menu: Accessory > 2D Representation (Utility > 2D Representation in CADWorx
Equipment)
Command line:2DREP (EQUIP2DREP in CADWorx Equipment)
Creates a two-dimension representation from a three-dimensional model. This command
removes hidden lines and retains layer and color information. It can work in model or paper
space. In model space, the 2D representation is created as a block.
An alternate command, 2DREPH (EQUIP2DREPH in CADWorx Equipment), is also available.
This command exports the hidden lines from solids to the 2D representation. All other features
of this command are similar to the 2DREP command.
Solids - Generates 2D representations of native AutoCAD 3D solids.
Centerlines - Copies selected CADWorx Piping and Steel center lines to the 2D representation.
Lines - Copies selected AutoCAD 3dPolyline, Arc, Circle, Ellipse, Leader, Line, Polyline, Spline
and Helix to the 2D representation. This includes CADWorx Piping and Steel center lines.
This command only processes native AutoCAD solid and line entities that are typically
created by CADWorx. This command does not process any custom solid or line entities that are
created by other add-on AutoCAD applications.

 Create a 2D representation (on page 203)
 Create a 2D representation with hidden lines (on page 203)

2D Panel
Create a 2D representation
1. Type 2DREP (EQUIP2DREP in CADWorx Equipment).
2. Select the objects to include in the 2D representation.
3. Select the filter option that meets your needs.
If you are in paper space, the software asks if you want the viewports to be turned off.
4. Type Yes to turn off the viewports, or type No to leave the viewports on.
This option is useful when there are changes made to the model and the 2D
representation needs to be updated. You can turn on the viewport again using the AutoCAD
Properties dialog box, and then run the command again.
2D Representation Hidden
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > 2D Representation Hidden
Plant Menu: Accessory > 2D Representation
Command line: 2DREPH
Creates a 2D representation with hidden lines. This command exports the hidden lines from
solids to the 2D representation. All other features of this command are similar to the 2DREP
command. For more information, see 2D Representation (on page 202).
Create a 2D representation with hidden lines

1. Type 2DREPH (EQUIP2DREPH in CADWorx Equipment).
2. Select the objects to include in the 2D representation.
3. Select the filter option that meets your needs. For more information, see 2D Representation
(on page 202).
If you are in paper space, the software asks if you want the viewports to be turned off.
4. Type Yes to turn off the viewports, or type No to leave the viewports on.
This option is useful when there are changes made to the model and the 2D
representation needs to be updated. You can turn on the viewport again using the AutoCAD
Properties dialog box, and then run the command again.
Box
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Box
Plant menu: Utility > View > Box
Command line: VIEWBOX
Displays the View Creation dialog box. This dialog box creates clipped views by defining a 3D
box. This command is useful in creating layout drawings in paper space.

2D Panel
View Creation Dialog Box

View set name - Specifies the overall set name for the views. Each view created is named
based on this name.
First corner point
Specify On-screen - Select a point in the model as the first corner point of the view box.
Selecting a point in the model automatically fills in values for the X, Y, and Z boxes.
X - Specifies the X-axis value for the view box.
Y - Specifies the Y-axis value for the view box.
Z - Specifies the Z-axis value for the view box. The Z-axis value must be different for the first
and second corner points.
Second corner point
Specify On-screen - Select a point in the model as the second corner point of the view box.
Selecting a point in the model automatically fills in values for the X, Y, and Z boxes.
X - Specifies the X-axis value for the view box.
Y - Specifies the Y-axis value for the view box.
Z - Specifies the Z-axis value for the view box. The Z-axis value must be different for the first
and second corner points.
Views
View Type - Indicates the orientation of the view.
Name - Specifies the view name. The default name is a combination of the View set name
value and the View Type. After you create the view set, the views display in the AutoCAD View
dialog box.
Available - Indicates whether the view is included in the set. Select the checkbox to include the
view. Clear the checkbox to exclude the view.
Select All - Selects all of the check boxes in the Available column.
Delete All - Deletes all of the AutoCAD views that were previously created with this view set,
and close the dialog box.
Set Current - Sets the AutoCAD window to the selected view.
Isolate Box - Hides all AutoCAD entities outside the view box. Entities that cross the boundaries
of the view box are not hidden.
Show All - Shows all of the entities in the drawing.
Edit
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Edit
Plant menu: Utility > View > Edit
Command line: VIEWEDIT
Edits the box created with the VIEWBOX command. Double-clicking an existing view box runs
this command. For more information, see Box (on page 203).

2D Panel
Zoom Lock
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Zoom Lock
Plant menu: Utility > Zoom Lock
Settings toolbar:
The Settings toolbar Zoom Lock option is only available in CADWorx Plant
Professional.
Command line: ZOOMLOCK
Locks the AutoCAD ZOOM command to allow zooming in paper space only. This means that
while you are in paper space with the MSPACE command activated (the cursors are in the
Mview), you can zoom without resizing the model space viewport. Instead, this command
intercepts the ZOOM command and changes to paper space before zooming. When you are
finished zooming, the command returns the cursor and environment back to the Mview.
This command simplifies working on CADWorx isometrics.

 Turn on the zoom lock (on page 205)
 Turn off the zoom lock (on page 205)
Turn on the zoom lock

 Type ZOOMLOCK.
Paperspace zoom lock toggled on.
Turn off the zoom lock

 Type ZOOMLOCK.
Paperspace zoom lock toggled off.
Zoom Factors
Plant menu: Utility > Zoom Factors
This menu option is only available in CADWorx Plant Professional.
Command line: ZOOMF
Zooms an Mview to a specified scale. This command zooms to a perfect scale for your current
Mview. If you use this command from model space (tilemode 1), it displays a warning that
tilemode has to be set to 0 (paper space). After selecting the scale from one of the menus, a
prompt displays requesting the center of the view.

SECTION 10
Bolt
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt
Auto Gasket - Place gaskets automatically after the last AUTOGASKET

flange face drawn. For more information, see Auto Gasket (on
page 206).
Automatic - Sizes and places stud bolts automatically at each AUTOBOLT

gasket. For more information, see Automatic (on page 207).
Auto Weld - Places weld gaps automatically after the last butt AUTOWELD
weld drawn. For more information, see Auto Weld (on page
208).
Weld Total - For more information, see Weld Total (on page WELDTOTAL
209).
Standard - Places standard stud bolts at the selected STDBOLT

location. For more information, see Standard (on page 210).
Non Standard - Places nonstandard stud bolts at the selected NONSTDBOLT

location. For more information, see Non Standard (on page
210).
Auto Gasket
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Auto Gasket
Plant Menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Gasket
Command line: AUTOGASKET
Places a gasket on flange sets, and valves.
Automatic - Places a gasket into the drawing automatically.
Manual - Places a gasket into the drawing manually.
This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 47).

Bolt
Place a gasket automatically

1. Click Auto Gasket . Alternatively, type AUTOGASKET on the command line, and then
press ENTER.
2. Press ENTER for Automatic.
3. Select the flange set or flange and valve set.
4. Select the branches to add gaskets, or press ENTER to finish.
5. Select a component to keep the position, or press ENTER to finish.
The gasket is placed.
Place a gasket manually

1. Click Auto Gasket . Alternatively, type AUTOGASKET on the command line, and then
press ENTER.
2. Type M on the command line, and press ENTER.
3. Select the flange set or flange and valve set.
5. Select a component to keep the position, or press ENTER to finish.
The gasket is placed.
Automatic
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Automatic
Command line: AUTOBOLT
Assigns stud bolt sets with similar sizes and specifications to all gaskets within the current
selection set. Gaskets of different sizes and specifications are automatically handled.
Automatic - Places a bolt into the drawing automatically.
Manual - Places a bolt into the drawing manually.
When the Bolt Insertion rule is turned on and you place a flange in the drawing it
does not have a bolt until you place a flange or a valve on the other side. Only then is the bolt
automatically inserted into the drawing when necessary.
This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 47) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 49).
Place stud bolts automatically

1. Click Automatic . Alternatively, type AUTOBOLT on the command line, and then press
ENTER.
3. Select a flange set or flange and valve set.
The bolt is placed.

Bolt
Place stud bolts manually

1. Click Automatic . Alternatively, type AUTOBOLT on the command line, and then press
ENTER.
3. Select a flange set or flange and valve set.
The bolt is placed.
Auto Weld
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Auto Weld
Plant Menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Weld
Command line: AUTOWELD
Places weld gaps on every end of any butt weld and socket weld component or only on every
end of any butt weld when the component is selected. Three different scenarios can occur when
the weld gaps are placed:
1. When a weld gap is automatically placed on the end of a butt weld or socket weld
component, do one of the following to place the next component:
 Press ENTER to place the component at the weld gap.
 Pick the end point of the weld gap symbol.
2. When a component, such as a tee, is inserted into a pipe, and the weld gaps are placed at
each end of the tee, the weld gaps automatically break and cut back the pipe on both sides
of the tee. If one exists, the branch connection pipe is also broken.
3. When a component is placed against another component that cannot be cut back, a weld
gap must already exist. For example, if you are placing a flange against an elbow, the elbow
must have an existing weld gap. If not, the software places the flange against the elbow
without any gap. In this scenario, it is your responsibility to place a weld gap before placing
the flange.
Automatic - Places a weld gap into the drawing automatically.
Manual - Places a weld gap into the drawing manually.
 This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 47) and Apply Weld Insertion Rule (on page 48).
 Setting BOM Item Type to Misc causes ISOGEN to process weld gaps as field fit welds. For
more information about the options on the Component Edit dialog box, see Local Edit (on
page 68). Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase cut piece add-on allowances for field fit
welds.

Bolt
Place weld gaps automatically

1. Click Auto Weld . Alternatively, type AUTOWELD on the command line, and then press
ENTER.
3. Select the piping components where you want welds placed, and press ENTER when
finished.
4. Select branches to add welds, or press ENTER to finish.
The software displays the number of welds added.
Place weld gaps manually

1. Click Auto Weld . Alternatively, type AUTOWELD on the command line, and then press
ENTER.
3. Select the piping components where you want welds placed, and press ENTER when
finished.
The software displays the number of welds added.
Weld Total
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Weld Total
Command line: WELDTOTAL
Counts weld gaps on a drawing for estimating purposes.
 An example of the typical output is shown below. You can copy this information and paste it
into a text file or to a Microsoft Excel workbook.
Qty. Spec. Nominal Actual Thk. Linear Lg.
5 A0 2.000 2.375 0.154 37.310

4 A0 3.000 3.500 0.216 43.980
14 A1 10.000 10.750 0.365 472.810
1 A1 14.000 14.000 0.375 43.980
150 A1 2.000 2.375 0.154 1119.190
 The ability to export the drawing to a database using the DBFGEN or LIVEDB command
can also help manage weld gaps.
 Setting BOM Item Type to Misc causes ISOGEN to process weld gaps as field fit welds. For
more information about the options on the Component Edit dialog box, see Local Edit (on
page 68). Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase cut piece add-on allowances for field fit
welds.

 Count weld gaps automatically (on page 210)

Bolt
Count weld gaps automatically

1. Click Weld Total . Alternatively, type WELDTOTAL on the command line, and then
press ENTER.
2. Select the objects you want to have automatically counted, and then press ENTER.
The software displays a prompt showing the total number of welds in the drawing.
Standard
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Standard
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Standard
Command line: PLACEBOLT
Inserts stud bolt sets into the drawing environment for Bill of Materials extraction. You can insert
a stud bolt set anywhere in the drawing. However, stud bolt sets must be attached to a flange
set or flange valve set to be placed on the model. Size and specification must be set
accordingly.
If the bolt Weight equals 0.0 in the Stud Bolts data table, the software calculates the weight
using the Density value from the Material Table and the AutoCAD solid volume of the whole
set of bolts.
If the bolt Weight is greater than 0.0 for flange-to-flange components, then the software assigns
the weight to the bolt set without performing any other calculations. However, when there is a
component between the flanges, such as a bleed ring, the software uses the Density and solid
volume calculation.
This option is set when the bolt piping rule is set. For more information, see Piping Rules
(on page 47) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 49). If you need to change the bolt set by
the bolt piping rule, delete the bolt placed and place a bolt using this option.
Place standard stud bolts

1. Click Standard . Alternatively, type PLACEBOLT on the command line, and then press
ENTER.
The bolts display in the drawing.
Non Standard
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Non Standard
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Non Standard
Command line: NONSTDBOLT
Inserts a stud bolt set anywhere. However, nonstandard bolt sets must be attached to a flange
set or flange valve set to be placed on the model. You can also insert special bolts. Size and
specification must be set accordingly.
This option is set when the bolt piping rule is set. For more information, see Piping Rules
(on page 47) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 49). If you need to change the bolt set by
the bolt piping rule, delete the bolt placed and place a bolt using this option.

Bolt
Place nonstandard stud bolts

1. Click Non Standard . Alternatively, type NONSTDBOLT on the command line and then
press ENTER.
2. Type the required text. For example, you can type NON STD STUD BOLTS.
3. Type the required description. For example, you can type STUD BOLTS W/ DOUBLE
NUTS & WASHERS.
4. Type the stud diameter. You must enter the value as a real number, such as 5/8".
5. Type the length. You must enter a real number, such as 7.25 or 7-1/4".
6. Type the required stud value.
7. Type the required weight.
8. Type a string, a real number, or press ENTER to accept the default.
9. Type the value, or press ENTER to accept the default.
11. Use the compass to pick a direction in the drawing, and click to finish.
The bolt is placed in the drawing.

SECTION 11
RT Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT
Auto Route - Provides the ability to draw components AUTOROUTE, ROUTE

continuously without selecting them from the toolbar or
palette. For more information, see Auto Route (on page
212).
Router - Provides routing lines with various options such as ROUTER

slope and elevation changes. For more information, see
Router (on page 216).
Buttweld LR - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected ROUTEBWLR

routing line. For more information, see Buttweld LR (on page
218).
Buttweld SR - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected ROUTEBWSE

routing line. For more information, see Buttweld SR (on
page 218).
Threaded - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected ROUTETRHD

routing line. For more information, see Threaded (on page
219).
Socket Weld - Attaches elbows and piping to a selected ROUTESW

routing line. For more information, see Socket Weld (on
page 219).
Auto Route
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Auto Route
Command Line: AUTOROUTE, ROUTE
You can also use the PIPW command to start routing pipe.
Starts the ROUTE in the X-Y plane as needed. This command can be used to route pipe from
one component to another without accessing the pipe, or elbow commands. The command is
best used to start a new route of pipe, but it also works to continue routing a previous section of
pipe. However, the most useful way to continue routing pipe is to use the + sign on the ends and
middle of the pipe. For more information on continuing routing, see Continue Routing (on page
214).

RT Panel
last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component.
component List - Displays a list of available components to place in the drawing. All
components available display in the list based on the main size you have set.
Slope - Starts the pipe in a slope direction.
 Meter - Places the slope rise or drop in the degrees entered based on meters.
 Foot - Places the slope rise or drop in the degrees entered based on feet.
 Rise - Places the slope rise or drop based on the degrees entered.
sKew - Places the pipe at a skewed angle and allows you to continue piping. To finish or end
the running of skewed piping, you must press ENTER. sKew works in conjunction with the
Apply Skew Pipe Maximum Angle rule. CADWorx does not allow the piping to be placed at a
greater angle then set in the piping rule. For more information on the rule, see Apply Skew Pipe
Maximum Angle (on page 53).
 component List - Displays a list of available components to place in the drawing at the
skewed point.
 Plane - Starts the component in the XYZ plane plotting based on the UCS. Type P on
the command line, and then press ENTER to reorient the compass direction.
 Undo - Takes you back to the previous step in your process.
Elevation - Starts the pipe perpendicular to the plane for routing.
Plane - Starts the component in the XYZ plane plotting based on the UCS. Type P on the
command line and press ENTER to reorient the compass direction.
Reference - Starts the line at a distance based on the reference point chosen.
Fitting mode - Starts the pipe as Buttweld, Socket Weld, Threaded, Flanged, or Special
Endtype fitting mode, depending on your selection.
elBow type - Enables you to select the elbow types based on the fitting mode you have
selected. For instance, with Buttweld the list would be Long Radius Buttweld, Short Radius
Buttweld, or Miter Elbow Buttweld. However, for Socket Weld the list would be Elbow
Socket Weld and Miter Elbow Socket Weld. You can change the fitting mode of the router in
the CADWorx Spec View palette. For more information, see Draw pipe components (on page
86).
Undo - Undoes the last piece of routed pipe.
Connect - Connects to a component or other piece of pipe.
 Components - Displays all possible connecting directions to the component or pipe
using an image of piping.
 Lines - Displays specific lines in a box form for connecting to the component or pipe.
Toggle length - Toggles the dimension of the pipe from the start point.
Alignment - Starts the pipe at a chosen alignment.
 Center - Center of pipe
 BOP - Bottom of pipe
 TOP - Top of pipe
 Left - Left of pipe
 Right - Right of pipe
TOP - Places the pipe along the top of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
BOP - Places the pipe along the bottom of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.

 Start a new route (on page 214)
 Continue Routing (on page 214)
 Route skewed pipe (on page 215)
 Moveline (on page 216)

RT Panel
Start a new route

1. Click Auto Route . Alternatively, type AUTOROUTE, or ROUTE on the command line,
and press ENTER.
2. Select a start point.
3. Select an end point, or select one of the options in the list.
CADWorx lets you continue routing pipe as needed, using the component List and other
options to allow you to route to components as needed.
4. When finished routing pipe, press ENTER.
The new pipe is inserted in the drawing.
Continue Routing
This procedure does not require a command to start. However, the ROUTE command used to
start new piping, can also be used to continue routing pipe.
The options below display when selecting the middle grip point on a pipe to insert a
component in an already routed piece of piping. If you select the grip point at the end of a piping
run the run just continues as a normal pipe with the options listed in Auto Route (on page 212).
List - Displays a list of available components to place in the drawing.
poinT distance - Enables you to specify a point on the pipe or component to move the selected
component.
Component distance - Displays the distance from the selected component to the selected
piping or component. The distance measured to a specifically selected component can be
changed by using Point.
 Point - Enables you to change the distance from the selected component to another
component on the same linear pipe.
Pipe end point distance - Displays the distance measurement from the selected component to
the end of the pipe. Repeating the command changes the direction of the measurement to the
opposite end of the piping, where it connects to the next component.
insertion Justification - Changes the justification of a selected component from the end of the
piping. Justification for the component is left, right, or center. Use the Pipe end point distance
option by typing P on the command line, which enables you to change the justification from
either end of the piping.
Change connection - Enables you to change the direction of a component. This option is only
available on certain components when using the List or component List option.
 Turning on Auto Connect (on page 164) allows you to continue routing from your last point
without having to click the grip point or without pressing ENTER. Turn off Auto Connect to
start from a different point, or to start a new point in the drawing.
 You can move components by typing MOVECOMPONENT on the command line. The above
options, as well as the TAB key, are available with the MOVECOMPONENT command. You
can move more than one component at a time with MOVECOMPONENT. You can also
move components around to the other side of an elbow.
 TAB key - Allows components to jump over other components in the piping after they
have been selected using the MOVECOMPONENT command.
 Piping can be moved and lengthened by using the MOVELINE command. For more
information, see Moveline (on page 216).

RT Panel
Route from a grip point

1. In a model, click on the component you want to route from.

3. Continue to route pipe as needed in any direction, or select an option.
 As you click, the pipe stops at that point, and allows you to go in any other direction. Do not
click on the screen unless you want the pipe to stop.
 You can change a tee to a cross by selecting the plus grip point on the main at the
opposite side of the branch.
 You can add a pipe branch or nipple to a reducer with the plus grip point on the side.
Route mitered elbows

1. Click Auto Route . Alternatively, click the plus grip point to continue routing.
2. Right-click, and then select elBow type.
The elbow type list displays.
3. Select Miter Elbow Buttweld. This selection is determined by the router type. Right-click
Pipe in the CADWorx Spec View palette to change the router type. For more information,
see Draw pipe components (on page 86).
4. Route the piping.
The software routes mitered elbows.
If you stop routing and then start routing again on the same line, the software continues
to route mitered elbows. However, if you stop routing and start a new route from a different
location, the software resets the elbow type. If you want to only route one mitered elbow, then
you can use the component List and place an elbow from Elbows > Mitered Elbow.
Route skewed pipe

1. Click Setup .
The CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box displays.
2. Select Piping Rules.
3. Select Apply Skew Pipe Maximum Angle.
4. Type an angle in the text box.
You can type a value of 1 to 179 for the angle. For more information, see Apply Skew
Pipe Maximum Angle (on page 53).
5. Click Auto Route . Alternatively, type AUTOROUTE, or ROUTE on the command line,
and then press ENTER.
The routing options display on the command line.

RT Panel
7. To skew a pipe, type K or SKEW on the command line, and then press ENTER.
The skewed piping options display on the command line. For more information, see Auto
Route (on page 212).
Turn off the AutoCAD ORTHO Mode in order for the piping to move in a 360 degree
direction.
8. Click the end point of the pipe to place the skewed piping.
The software inserts the skewed pipe in the drawing.
You cannot skew pipe larger than the angle set in the Apply Skew Pipe Maximum
Angle rule. If you do, the following message displays: The skew pipe does not allow an angle
bigger than the maximum value of 15.0000°...
Moveline
Enables you to move, lengthen, or change the elevation of the piping in the plane.
Elevation - Enables you to move the elevation of the piping.
 Pick - Select the elevation point in the drawing to place the piping.
 BOP - Places the piping in the elevation based on the Bottom of Pipe.
 TOP - Places the piping in the elevation based on the Top of Pipe.
1. Select the piping.
The grip points display.
2. Select a grip point .
3. Move the piping as needed.
To move the piping in the elevation, type E on the command line and then follow the
prompts. The prompt options are listed above.
If an item is unable to move, a message displays on the command line.
Router
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Router
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Router
Command line: ROUTER
Draws a 3D polyline for the previous welded, threaded, and socket automatic routing routines.
 If you are using known 3D points, the UCS must be at the world position: Type UCS on the
command line, and press ENTER.
 Unlike a normal 3D polyline, the elevation must be controlled with the Elevation option of
the Router command or the UCS position.

RT Panel
Slope - Specifies the known slope or drop per foot to the next point in degrees (positive or
negative). Alternatively, use one of the options listed below to define the slope. This option does
not take effect until the next point is selected. For example, select the Slope option and then
select the next point of the 3D polyline for a change to the new position.
 Meter - Defines the rise or drop in millimeters per meter.
 Foot - Defines the rise or drop in inches per foot.
 Drop - Defines the drop to the next point as a real number, such as 1'-8
 Rise - Defines the rise to the next point as a real number, such as 2'-9.
 Continuous - Turns constant sloping on or off.
Position - Starts the 3D polyline at an elevated position. This option does not take effect until
the next point is selected. For example, select the Position option and then select the next point
of the 3D polyline for a change to the new position.
 Nominal - Determine the present size used by the BOP or TOP option.
 Size - Determines the present size used by the BOP or TOP option.
 BOP - Draws the 3D polyline one-half the present set size upward.
 TOP - Draws the 3D polyline one-half the present set size downward.
 Centerline - Default when starting this routine. You can change to the bottom of pipe BOP
option, then change back with this option.
Reference - Starts the line at a given distance from a reference point. After you provide this
reference point, you must provide relative/polar coordinates with an @ location.
Elevation - Changes the elevation in conjunction with the present UCS coordinate system. The
elevation change can be expressed using a positive or a negative number.
 World - Specifies the elevation in the world coordinate system.
 Pick - Establishes the working elevation based on a point selected in the drawing. You can
use object snap, if necessary.
Undo - Removes the last 3D polyline segment, and prompts you to enter the next point.
Specify next point - Selects the next point along the 3D polyline segment. Press ENTER to end
the selection.
Router commands
The CADWorx Plant auto route commands listed below provide a quick and effective way of
drawing pipe. You can draw long radius, short radius, threaded, or socket weld pipe.
 Buttweld LR (on page 218)
 Buttweld SR (on page 218)
 Threaded (on page 219)
 Socket Weld (on page 219)
All commands have the same options.

RT Panel
Buttweld LR
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Buttweld LR
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Buttweld LR
Command line: ROUTEBWLR
Draws a long radius pipe.
Elbows only - Draws only elbows on a particular pipe run.
Pick points - Draws pipe and elbows on a particular pipe run. The software first prompts you to
select a starting point. Afterwards, you select a location point for each elbow you want to place,
followed by an ending location. Press ENTER to finish the command. Pipe and elbows are
drawn along each construction point.
 An elbow is not placed at the starting and ending locations.

 The Elbows only and Pick points options allow you to select location points only, not
polylines.
Select polyline - Builds pipe and elbows based on polyline selection. This option also provides
rolling offsets.
For information on 3D polyline construction, see Router (on page 216).
Buttweld SR
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Buttweld SR
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Buttweld SR
Command line: ROUTEBWSR
Draws a short radius pipe.

polylines.
rolling offsets.

RT Panel
Threaded
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Threaded
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Threaded
Command line: ROUTETHRD
Draws threaded pipe.

polylines.
rolling offsets.
Socket Weld
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Socket Weld
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Socket Weld
Command line: ROUTESW
Draws socket weld pipe.

polylines.
rolling offsets.

SECTION 12
VUE Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: VUE
Command Name Command line
Export to VUE - Exports CADWorx drawings to a .vue file EXPORTVUEFORMAT

format. For more information, see Export to VUE (on page 220).
Export to VUE
CADWorx Plant I tab: VUE > Export to VUE
Command line: EXPORTVUEFORMAT
Exports CADWorx drawings to VUE file format.
The software exports the following objects as polymesh when you run Export to VUE :
 classic CADWorx objects (rolled pipe, some reducing elbows)
 steel without data
 any other object enabler 3D solid types
Entire Drawing - Exports entire drawing to a VUE file.
Select Objects - Exports selected objects to a VUE file.
Export an entire drawing to a VUE file
1. Click Export to VUE .

2. Select Entire Drawing.
3. Type a file name.
4. Click Save.
The software creates a .vue, a .drv, a .log, and a .txt file. 3D geometry exports to the .vue
file, applicable component data exports to the .drv file, and the .log or .txt files list feedback
on the success or failure of the conversion, including Number of objects successful,
Number of objects failed, and Total number of objects.
To open the other files, go to the location where you saved the VUE file and open the
remaining files, as needed.

VUE Panel
Export selected objects to a VUE file

1. Click Export to VUE .
2. Select Select Objects.
3. Select the objects to export, and then press ENTER.
4. Type a file name.
5. Click Save.
The software creates a .vue, a .drv, a .log, and a .txt file. 3D geometry exports to the .vue
file, applicable component data exports to the .drv file, and the .log or .txt files list feedback
on the success or failure of the conversion, including Number of objects successful,
Number of objects failed, and Total number of objects.
To open the other files, go to the location where you saved the VUE file and open the
remaining files, as needed.

SECTION 13
Dimension Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions
Automatic - Automatically creates dimensions for a set of AUTODIM
components that you select. For more information, see
Automatic (on page 223).
Horizontal - Places horizontal dimensions. For more DIMH
information, see Horizontal (on page 223).
Vertical - Places vertical dimensions. For more information, DIMV
see Vertical (on page 224).
Set - Sets the elevation. For more information, see Set (on ELEV
page 224).
Rotated - Places rotated dimensions. For more information, DIMR
see Rotated (on page 225).
Horizontal with Tail - Places tailed horizontal dimensions DIMTAILH
on objects from a user-selected reference point. For more
information, see Horizontal with Tail (on page 225).
Vertical with Tail - Places tailed vertical dimensions on DIMTAILV
objects from a user-selected reference point. For more
information, see Vertical with Tail (on page 226).
Change - Changes the elevation. For more information, see CHANGEELEV
Change (on page 226).
Component - Places component annotation. For more ANOTCOMP
information, see Component (on page 227).
Elevation - Places component elevation annotation. For ANOTELEV
more information, see Elevation (on page 227).
Coordinates - Places coordinates in either a user DIMCOORD
coordinate system or a world coordinate system. For more
information, see Coordinates (on page 228).
Tick Mark - Shows which side of the dimension extension TICK
line the gasket is on. For more information, see Tick Mark
(on page 229).
ISO Text - Creates 0, 30, and 330 oblique angled text in
paper space when working with isometrics. For more
information, see ISO Text (on page 229).
Height - Changes the height of selected text by matching it TEXTHEIGHT
with other text. For more information, see Height (on page
229).

Dimension Panel
Automatic
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Automatic
Plant menu: Dimension > Automatic
Command line: AUTODIM
Automatically creates dimensions for a set of components that you select. Options to set the
offset distance and whether to include flanges are also provided.
Options
Flange - Dimensions flange faces. You specify whether flange dimensioning is turned On or
Off.
Offset - Specifies the distance from the dimension line to the component.
Selection - Starts the dimensioning process.
Place automatic dimensions

1. Click Automatic . Alternatively, type AUTODIM on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Type S on the command line, and press ENTER to select objects to dimension.
3. Select the objects to dimension. Press ENTER when you are finished.
4. Select the centroid for the dimensions. For example, if you selected two pieces of parallel
pipe with elbows attached to each end to dimension, and then selected a point between the
two pieces of pipe, the software would place the dimension lines to the outside.
The software displays the dimensions.
If you try to place automatic dimensions on two pieces of parallel pipe with no elbows, an
error code displays. Combined components must have at least one turn.
Horizontal
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Horizontal
Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Horizontal
Command line: DIMH
Places horizontal dimensions. You are prompted for the points to dimension. To end the
sequence, you must type D for dimension line.
Place horizontal dimensions

1. Click Horizontal . Alternatively, type DIMH on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select the origin location for the first extension line.
3. Select the origin location for the second extension line.
The software continues to prompt you for extension lines.
4. Type D on the command line, and press ENTER to end the sequence.
5. Select a location for the dimension line.
6. Press ENTER, or type a new value for the dimension.
The software displays the dimension.

Dimension Panel
Vertical
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Vertical
Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Vertical
Command line: DIMV
Places vertical dimensions. You are prompted for the points to dimension. To end the sequence,
you must type D for dimension line.
Place vertical dimensions

1. Click Vertical . Alternatively, type DIMV on the command line, and press ENTER.
Set
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Set
Plant menu: Utility > Elevation > Set
Command line: ELEV
Places piping at a preset elevation. This is the standard AutoCAD Elev command. When using
this option, remember to place the elevation back to 0'-0" for the proper elevation placement of
all future components. Use this command with caution. An alternative is to use the Flat (on page
260) command built into CADWorx (VIEWFLAT).
Refer to the AutoCAD documentation for complete details regarding this command (ELEV).
Set the Elevation

1. Click the CADWorx Plant II tab, and then click Set on the Dimensions panel.
Alternatively, type ELEV on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select a point in the drawing to specify a new elevation.
3. Select a second point in the drawing.
4. Enter a thickness value.
Piping is now at the new elevation.
Remember to set it back to 0'-0" when you are finished with the new elevation.

Dimension Panel
Rotated
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Rotated
Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Rotated
Command line: DIMR
Places rotated dimensions. You are prompted for the angle of rotation and the points to
dimension. To end the sequence, you must type D for dimension line.
Place rotated dimensions

1. Click Rotated . Alternatively, type DIMR on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Type the dimension angle, or select two points to indicate the angle.
Horizontal with Tail

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Horizontal with Tail
Plant menu: Dimension > Tailed > Horizontal
Command line: DIMTAILH
Places tailed horizontal dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. To end this
sequence, press ENTER or SPACE.
Place horizontal tailed dimensions

1. Click Horizontal with Tail . Alternatively, type DIMTAILH on the command line, and
press ENTER.
2. Select the reference point for the dimension.
3. Select the origin point, or press ENTER to end.
4. Select the location for the dimension.
5. Press ENTER to end the sequence.
When you run this command a second time, you have the option to either reselect the
reference point or use the previous reference point.

Dimension Panel
Vertical with Tail

CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Vertical with Tail
Plant menu: Dimension > Tailed > Vert
Command line: DIMTAILV
Places tailed vertical dimensions on objects from a user-selected reference point. To end this
sequence, press ENTER or SPACE.
Place vertical tailed dimensions

1. Click Vertical with Tail . Alternatively, type DIMTAILV on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Select the reference point for the dimension.
3. Select the origin point, or press ENTER to end.
4. Select the location for the dimension.
5. Press ENTER to end the sequence.
When you run this command a second time, you have the option to either reselect the
reference point or use the previous reference point.
Change
CADWorx Plant II: Dimensions > Change
Command line: CHANGELEV
Moves all selected entities (blocks, lines, polylines and so on) to a new elevation in reference
with the world coordinate system. You can also change a component elevation to 1/2 its actual
outside diameter.
Arbitrary - Places the component anywhere in the drawing.
BOP Correction - Aligns the pipe bottom with the center of the connected piece.
Change the Elevation

1. Click the CADWorx Plant II tab, and then click Change on the Dimensions panel.
Alternatively, type CHANGEELEV on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Press ENTER to select the default.
3. Select a point in the drawing, or enter a numerical value.
5. Select the needed objects for elevation, and press ENTER.
The component appears at the new elevation.

Dimension Panel
Component
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Component
Plant menu: Text > Annotate > Component
Command line: ANOTCOMP
Places component annotation.
Options
Tag - Annotates the component with its tag.
Long - Annotate the component with its long description and appends the size to the front.
Short - Annotates the component with its short description and appends the size to the front.
Justify - Allows five different justifications according to the AutoCAD standards. For more
information please refer to the AutoCAD documentation.
Leader - Adds a leader to the text.
Start point - Specifies the starting point for the text.
Place component annotation

1. Click Component . Alternatively, type ANOTCOMP on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Select the annotation type.
3. Select the component to annotate.
4. Select the start point, or set up the leader line and justification.
5. Type the rotation angle, or select two points to specify the angle.
The software displays the annotation.
Elevation
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Elevation
Plant menu: Text > Annotate > Elevation
Command line: ANOTELEV
Places component elevation annotation.
Options
BOP - Labels the bottom of the pipe elevation.
TOP - Labels the top of the pipe elevation.
Centerline - Labels the centerline elevation.
Justify - Allows five different justifications according to the AutoCAD standards. For more
information please refer to the AutoCAD documentation.
Leader - Adds a leader to the text.
Start point - Specifies the starting point for the text.

Dimension Panel
Place component elevation annotation

1. Click Elevation . Alternatively, type ANOTELEV on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. Select the component to annotate elevation.
3. Specify the elevation option to use.
The software displays a rubber band to the selected component.
4. Select the start point, or set up the leader line and justification.
5. Type the rotation angle, or select two points to specify the angle.
The software displays the annotation.
Coordinates
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Coordinates
Plant menu: Dimension > Coordinates
Command line: DIMCOORD
Places coordinates in either a user coordinate system or a world coordinate system. You can
place the text at the coordinate with or without a leader.
TEXTSIZE is controlled by DIMSCALE and DIMTXT.
Options
Leader - Places a leader.
Other point - Places the dimension text in an alternate location without a leader.
Same point - Places the dimension text at the same location which is picked without a leader.
Centerline - Places the dimension text either with a north or east designation. This option labels
a vertical dimension as east and a horizontal dimension as north.
The following AutoCAD setvars affect the dimensioning routines: DIMALT, DIMALTD,
DIMALTF, DIMASZ, DIMBLK, DIMEXE, DIMEXO, DIMLFAC, DIMTXT, DIMZIN, DIMSCALE,
LUNITS, LUPREC, and UNITMODE.
Place coordinates
1. Click Coordinates . Alternatively, type DIMCOORD on the command line, and press
ENTER.
2. If necessary, press ENTER, or type Y on the command line and press ENTER, to change to
the world coordinate system.
3. Select an extension line point.
4. Select an option.
5. Follow the prompts to place the coordinates.
The coordinates display.

Dimension Panel
Tick Mark
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Tick Mark
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Tick Mark
Command line: TICK
Shows which side of the dimension extension line the gasket is on.
This command is dependent upon the DIMSCALE being set properly. For example; if the gasket
thickness was set to 1/8" and the scale of the drawing was set to full, the distance from the
extension line to the tick mark would be 1/8". If the scale of the drawing was set to 3/4"=1'-0",
the distance from the tick mark to the extension line would be 3/8". This insures that the tick
mark is visible on a plotted drawing.
The initial prompt allows you to set the thickness, but does not appear again during the single
drawing session. Changing the thickness is allowed in the next prompt.
Place tick marks

1. Click Tick Mark . Alternatively, type TICK on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Type the thickness, or press ENTER to accept the default.
3. Type C on the command line, and press ENTER if you need to change the thickness.
4. Type a value for the thickness.
5. Select the point.
6. Select a direction parallel with the extension line.
7. Select the gasket side.
8. Select the extension line.
9. Select a direction parallel with the extension line.
10. Select the gasket side.
The software displays the tick mark.
ISO Text
Plant menu: Text > ISO Text
Creates 0, 30, and 330 oblique angled text in paper space when working with isometrics. These
commands are similar to the AutoCAD DTEXT command.
Height
Plant menu: Text > Height
Command line: TEXTHEIGHT
Changes the height of selected text by matching it with other text. This is useful when you are
zoomed to an unknown factor in paper space.
Options
Entire drawing - Chooses all text on the drawing.
Layer - Specifies a layer for selection. CADWorx’s default text layer is TEXT.
Selection - Matches the height of text that you select.

SECTION 14
Graphics / Pipe Ends

CADWorx Plant II tab: Graphics / Pipe Ends
Section - Opens the Sections dialog box in which you can SECTIONS
select a section graphic to place on the drawing. For more
information, see Section (on page 233).
Detail - Opens the Details dialog box in which you can select DETAILS
a detail graphic to place on the drawing. For more information,
see Detail (on page 234).
Plan - Opens the Plan dialog box in which you can select a PLANS
plan graphic to place on the drawing. For more information,
see Plan (on page 235).
Instrument - Opens the Instruments dialog box in which you INSTRUMENTS

can select an instrument graphic to place on the drawing. For
more information, see Instrument (on page 236).
Elevation - Opens the Elevations box in which you can select ELEVATIONS
an elevation graphic to place on the drawing. For more
information, see Elevation (on page 237).
Arrow - Opens the Arrows dialog box in which you can select ARROWS
an arrow head graphic to place on the drawing. For more
information, see Arrow (on page 238).
Weld - Opens the Weld Symbols dialog box in which you WELDS
select a weld symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For
more information, see Weld (on page 240).
ISO - Opens the Isometric Symbols dialog box in which you ISOS
can select an ISO symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For
more information, see ISO (on page 241).
Dots - Opens the Dots dialog box in which you can select a DOTS
weld dots graphic to place on the drawing. For more
information, see Dots (on page 243).
Misc - Opens the Miscellaneous dialog box in which you can MISC
select a miscellaneous symbol graphic to place on the
drawing. For more information, see Misc (on page 245).
Flange O.D. - Inserts a graphical representation of a flange ENDFLG

O.D. For more information, see Flange O.D. (on page 246).

Plain End - Inserts a graphical representation of the plain end ENDPLAIN

of a pipe. For more information, see Plain End (on page 246).
Hidden End - Inserts a graphical representation of the hidden ENDHIDDEN

end of a pipe. For more information, see Hidden End (on page
247).
Pipe End - Inserts a graphical representation of the pipe end ENDPIPE

of a pipe. For more information, see Pipe End (on page 247).
Fitting Width - Controls the appearance of all flanged, socket FITTINGWIDTH

weld, and threaded fittings. For more information, see Fitting
Width.
Single Line Width - Specifies the line width for single-line LINEWIDTH
components. For more information, see Single Line Width.
Each of the Graphics commands opens a related dialog box, which is used to preview and
select a graphic for placement in the drawing. A drawing file is used to display the preview
graphic in the dialog box. These graphic drawing files are delivered to the [Product
Folder]\Support folder. They can be modified to meet your specific project requirements.
A modified graphic drawing file must contain the same number of attributes as are
currently in the drawing.
Adding preview graphics
If necessary, you can add more graphics to any of the graphics dialog boxes by modifying the
contents of the Pipe_alt.dat file. This file contains the definitions for each graphic type. The
example below shows the graphics group in the Pipe_alt.dat file that is referenced in the
Sections dialog box.
[Sections]
s1s.dwg Head graph1 “s1” 1
s2s.dwg Head w/ Attrib graph1 “s2” 2
s3s.dwg Head w/ 2 Attrib graph1 “s3” 3
s4s.dwg End w/ Attrib graph1 “s4” 4
Columns must start at positions 1, 40, and 75 and define the information outlined below.
 COL1 (Position 1) - Drawing used in the dialog box for preview image.
 COL2 (Position 40) - Name displayed in the dialog box for graphic name.
 COL3 (Position 75) - Function used to draw the graphic in the drawing with
arguments.
 Before you modify the Pipe_alt.dat file, make a backup copy.

 If the columns are not at the required positions, the drawing function fails.
 There must not be any blank lines located within a section.
 There must be a blank line at the beginning and at the end of a section.
 The scale of the graphics inserted into the drawing, excluding isometric symbol graphics, is
based upon the value of the AutoCAD setvar DIMSCALE. If DIMSCALE is set to 0, as is
required for paper space, the software inserts graphics at a scale of 1. Isometric symbol
graphics are inserted at a scale of 1 regardless of the DIMSCALE setting.

System Prompts
The system prompts required to draw the graphic types delivered with the software are outlined
in the table below.
Function System Response
Prompt 1 Pick left justified insertion point: pick a point in the drawing
Rotation angle: pick a direction or enter angle
Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER
Prompt 2 Pick left justified insertion point: pick point in the drawing
Rotation angle: pick direction or enter angle
Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER
Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER
Prompt 3 Pick left justified insertion point: pick a point in the drawing
Rotation angle: pick a direction in the drawing or enter angle
Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: A)
Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106)
Enter scale: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 3/8"=1'-0")
Prompt 4 Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing

Section direction: pick a direction in the drawing
Projection direction: pick a direction in the drawing

Projection direction: pick a direction in the drawing
Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER ( ex: 106)

Projection or other direction: pick a direction in the drawing
Prompt 7 Pick object to mark: pick an object in the drawing

Pick mark location: pick point in the drawing
Prompt 8 Pick object to mark: pick an object in the drawing

Pick mark location: pick a point in the drawing
Enter drawing: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106)
Prompt 9 Pick left end point: pick a point in the drawing

Pick right end point: pick a point in the drawing
Enter title: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: ELEVATION NORTH)
Enter scale: enter a string (ex: 3/8"=1'-0")
Prompt 10 Pick instrument to label: pick a point in the drawing

Enter first level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: SDV)
Enter second level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 1)
Prompt 11 Pick instrument to label: pick a point in the drawing

Enter first level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: PI)
Enter second level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 106)
Enter third level label: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: B)

Function System Response
Prompt 12 Pick center insertion point: pick a point in the drawing

Rotation angle: pick a direction or enter angle

Pick direction: pick a direction
Prompt 15 Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing (not center insertion, outside edge)
Pick direction: pick a direction in the drawing
Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 101)Weld
Prompt 16 Pick leader start point: pick a point in the drawing

Pick intermediate point: pick a point in the drawing
Pick direction for tail: pick a direction in the drawing

Pick rotation: pick a direction in the drawing
Prompt 19 Pick insertion point on line: pick a point in the drawing

Pick rotation: pick a direction in the drawing
Prompt 20 Pick location: pick a point in the drawing

Pick rotation or [Up/Down/Roll/mirrorX/mirrorY/mirrorZ]: select an option or pick the rotation
Section
CADWorx Plant II tab: Section
Plant menu: Graphics > Section
Command line: SECTIONS
Opens the Sections dialog box, which allows you to select a section graphic for placement in
the drawing.
Sections Dialog Box

Displays the sections graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Preview - Displays a graphical representation of the selected graphic.
Each section graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit your
specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the
dialog box. For more information, see Graphics / Pipe Ends (on page 230).
The table below lists the section graphics that display in the Sections dialog box by default. The
table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical representation,
as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific
set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more
information, see System Prompts (on page 232).

Sections Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name
Head S1S.dwg Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib S2S.dwg Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib S3S.dwg Prompt 3
End w/ Attrib S4S.dwg Prompt 4
End w 2Attrib S5S.dwg Prompt 5
End S6S.dwg Prompt 6
Middle S7S.dwg Prompt 6
Place a section graphic

1. Click Section . Alternatively, type SECTIONS on the command line and then press
ENTER.
In CADWorx Steel Professional, click Steel > Graphics > Section.
The Sections dialog box appears.
2. Select the required graphic in the list.
The Preview box shows a graphical representation of the selected graphic.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box, and return to the drawing.
4. Follow the system prompts to define the placement of the selected graphic in the current
drawing.
The system prompts vary depending on the graphic you have selected.
Detail
CADWorx Plant II tab: Detail
Plant menu: Graphics > Details
Command line: DETAILS
Opens the Details dialog box, which allows you to select a detail graphic for placement in the
drawing.

Details Dialog Box

Displays the detail graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each details graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the detail graphics that display in the Details dialog box by default. The
table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation,
Detail Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name
Head D1S.dwg Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib D2S.dwg Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib D3S.dwg Prompt 3
Mark w/ Attrib D4S.dwg Prompt 7
Mark w 2Attrib D5S.dwg Prompt 8
Place a detail graphic

1. Click Detail . Alternatively, type Details on the command line and then press ENTER.
In CADWorx Steel Professional, click Steel > Graphics > Detail.
The Details dialog box appears.
drawing.
Plan
CADWorx Plant II tab: Plan
Plant menu: Graphics > Plans
Command line: PLANS
Opens the Plans dialog box, which allows you to select a plan graphic for placement in the
drawing.

Plans Dialog Box

Displays the plan graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each plan graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the plan graphics that display in the Plans dialog box by default. The table
also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical representation, as well
as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries with it a specific set of
prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing. For more information,
see System Prompts (on page 232).
Plan Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name
Head P1S.dwg Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib P2S.dwg Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib P3S.dwg Prompt 3
Place a plan graphic

1. Click Plan . Alternatively, type PLANS on the command line and then press ENTER.
In CADWorx Steel Professional, click Steel > Graphics > Plan.
The Plans dialog box appears.
drawing.
Instrument
CADWorx Plant II tab: Instrument
Plant menu: Graphics > Instruments
Command line: INSTRUMENTS
Opens the Instruments dialog box, which allows you to select an instrument graphic for
placement in the drawing.

Instruments Dialog Box

Displays the instrument graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each instrument graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the instrument graphics that display in the Instruments dialog box by
default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical
representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function carries
with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the drawing.
For more information, see System Prompts (on page 232).
Instrument Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name
2 Attrib Local F1S.dwg Prompt 10
3 Attrib Local F2S.dwg Prompt 11
2 Attrib Board F3S.dwg Prompt 12
Place an instrument graphic

1. Click Instrument . Alternatively, type INSTRUMENTS on the command line and then
press ENTER.
In CADWorx Steel Professional, click Steel > Graphics > Instrument.
The Instruments dialog box appears.
drawing.
Elevation
CADWorx Plant II tab: Elevation
Plant menu: Graphics > Elevations
Command line: ELEVATIONS
Opens the Elevations dialog box, which allows you to select an elevation graphic for placement
in the drawing.

Elevations Dialog Box

Displays the elevation graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each elevation graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the elevation graphics that display in the Elevations dialog box by default.
The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that define the graphical
Elevation Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name
Head E1S.dwg Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib E2S.dwg Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib E3S.dwg Prompt 3
Generic Head L1S.dwg Prompt 9
Place an elevation graphic

1. Click Elevation . Alternatively, type ELEVATIONS on the command line and then press
ENTER.
In CADWorx Steel Professional, click Steel > Graphics > Elevation.
The Elevations dialog box appears.
drawing.
Arrow
CADWorx Plant II tab: Arrow
Plant menu: Graphics > Arrows
Command line: ARROWS
Opens the Arrows dialog box, which allows you to select an arrow head graphic for placement
in the drawing.

Arrows Dialog Box

Displays the arrow head graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each arrow head graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files
are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit
your specific project requirements. You can also create additional graphics, and add them to the
The table below lists the arrow head graphics that display in the Arrows dialog box by default.
The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical
Arrow Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name
North N1S.dwg Prompt 14
Prevailing N2S.dwg Prompt 12
Model Iso North N3S.dwg Prompt 12
Paper Iso North N4S.dwg Prompt 14
Small A1S.dwg Prompt 12
Medium A2S.dwg Prompt 12
Large A3S.dwg Prompt 12
Place an arrow head graphic

1. Click Arrow . Alternatively, type ARROWS on the command line and then press ENTER.
In CADWorx Steel Professional, click Steel > Graphics > Arrow.
The Arrows dialog box appears.
drawing.

Weld
CADWorx Plant II tab: Weld
Plant menu: Graphics > Weld
Command line: WELDS
Opens the Weld Symbols dialog box, which allows you to select a weld symbol graphic for
placement in the drawing.
Weld Symbols Dialog Box

Displays the weld symbol graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each weld symbol graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files
are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit
The table below lists the weld symbol graphics that display in the Weld Symbols dialog box by
default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the graphical
Weld Symbol Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name
Leader W1X.dwg Prompt 16
Fillet W2X.dwg Prompt 17
Weld Around W3X.dwg Prompt 18
Field Weld W4X.dwg Prompt 17
Back W5X.dwg Prompt 17
Square W6X.dwg Prompt 17
V Groove W7X.dwg Prompt 17
Bevel W8X.dwg Prompt 17
U Groove W9X.dwg Prompt 17
J Groove W10X.dwg Prompt 17
V Flare W11X.dwg Prompt 17

Flare Bevel W12X.dwg Prompt 17
Flush Small W14X.dwg Prompt 17
Flush Large W15X.dwg Prompt 17
Convex Small W16X.dwg Prompt 17
Convex Medium W17X.dwg Prompt 17
Convex Large W18X.dwg Prompt 17
Backing W19X.dwg Prompt 19
Spacer W20X.dwg Prompt 19
Plug W13X.dwg Prompt 17
Place a weld symbol graphic

1. Click Weld . Alternatively, type WELDS on the command line and then press ENTER.
In CADWorx Steel Professional, click Steel > Graphics > Weld.
The Welds dialog box appears.
drawing.
ISO
CADWorx Plant II tab: ISO
Plant menu: Graphics > ISO
Command line: ISOS
Opens the Isometric Symbols dialog box, which allows you to select an isometric symbol
graphic for placement in the drawing.

Isometric Symbols Dialog Box

Displays the isometric symbol graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each isometric symbols graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing
files are delivered to [Product Folder]\Support. You can modify any graphical representation to fit
The table below lists the isometric symbol graphics that display in the Isometric Symbols
dialog box by default. The table also includes the name of the AutoCAD drawing that defines the
graphical representation, as well as the name of the function used for placement. Each function
carries with it a specific set of prompts that you must follow to place the specific graphic in the
drawing. For more information, see System Prompts (on page 232).
Isometric Symbol Display Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name
Adjustable Base Ell Adjustable_Base_Ell.dwg Prompt 20
Angle Angle.dwg Prompt 20
Arrow1 Arrow1.dwg Prompt 20
Base Support Base_Support.dwg Prompt 20
Channel Channel.dwg Prompt 20
Column Column.dwg Prompt 20
Column Knee Brace Column_Knee_Brace.dwg Prompt 20
DummyLeg DummyLeg.dwg Prompt 20
Floorwall Penetration Floorwall_Penetration.dwg Prompt 20
Grating Penetration1 Grating_Penetration_1.dwg Prompt 20
Hanger Clamp Hanger_Clamp.dwg Prompt 20
Hanger Clamp 1 Hanger_Clamp_2.dwg Prompt 20
Hanger Clevis Hanger_Clevis.dwg Prompt 20

Hanger Clevis 1 Hanger_Clevis_1.dwg Prompt 20
Insulation Saddle Insulation_Saddle.dwg Prompt 20
Knee Brace Knee_Brace.dwg Prompt 20
Pipe Clamp Pipe_Clamp.dwg Prompt 20
Pipe Shoe Extrude Pipe_Shoe_Extrude.dwg Prompt 20
Pipe Shoe Faced Pipe_Shoe_Faced.dwg Prompt 20
Spring Hanger Clamp Spring_Hanger_Clamp.dwg Prompt 20
T Support T_Support.dwg Prompt 20
Ubolt Ubolt.dwg Prompt 20
Ubolt 1 Ubolt_2.dwg Prompt 20
Wide Flange Beam WFlange_Beam.dwg Prompt 20
Place an isometric symbol graphic

1. Click ISO . Alternatively, type ISOS on the command line and then press ENTER.
In CADWorx Steel Professional, click Steel > Graphics > ISO.
The Isometric Symbol dialog box appears.
drawing.
Dots
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dots
Plant menu: Graphics > Dots
Command line: DOTS
Opens the Dots dialog box, which allows you to select a weld dot graphic for placement in the
drawing.

Dots Dialog Box

Displays the weld dot graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each weld dot graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the weld dot graphics that display in the Dots dialog box by default. The
Dots Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name
Head S1.dwg Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib S2.dwg Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib S3.dwg Prompt 3
End w/ Attrib S4.dwg Prompt 4
End w 2Attrib S5.dwg Prompt 5
End S6.dwg Prompt 6
Middle S7.dwg Prompt 6
Place a weld dot graphic

1. Click Dots . Alternatively, type DOTS on the command line and then press ENTER.
In CADWorx Steel Professional, click Steel > Graphics > Dots.
The Dots dialog box appears.
drawing.

Misc
CADWorx Plant II tab: Misc
Plant menu: Graphics > Misc
Command line: MISC
Opens the Miscellaneous dialog box, which allows you to select a graphic for placement in the
drawing.
Miscellaneous Dialog Box

Displays the set of miscellaneous graphics that are currently defined in the software.
Each listed graphic is based on an AutoCAD drawing file. Graphics drawing files are
The table below lists the graphics that display in the Miscellaneous dialog box by default. The
Sections Graphic Name AutoCAD Drawing Name Function Name
Small Circle M1S.dwg Prompt 15
Small Hexagon M2S.dwg Prompt 15
Small Square M3S.dwg Prompt 15
Small Rev M4S.dwg Prompt 15
Large Circle M5S.dwg Prompt 15
Large Hexagon M6S.dwg Prompt 15
Large Square M7S.dwg Prompt 15
Large Rev M8S.dwg Prompt 15

Place a miscellaneous graphic

1. Click Misc . Alternatively, type MISC on the command line and then press ENTER.
In CADWorx Steel Professional, click Steel > Graphics > Misc.
The Miscellaneous dialog box appears.
drawing.
Flange O.D.
CADWorx Plant II tab: Flange O.D.
Pipe Ends toolbar: Flange O.D.

Command line: ENDFLG
Draws a circle around the diameter of the selected flange at the size and specification currently
defined for the drawing. The circle, which represents the end view of a flange, is placed at the
center of the selected point.
The resulting circle has centerlines that are on the default CL layer.
Insert a flange O.D.

1. Click Flange O.D. . Alternatively, type ENDFLG on the command line and then press
ENTER.
Pick point for 4"-150 flange O.D.
2. Pick a point in the drawing.
The software places a flange O.D. symbol at the specified location.
3. Repeat step 2 as necessary. When finished, press ENTER to exit the command.
Plain End
CADWorx Plant II tab: Plain End
Pipe Ends toolbar: Plain End
Command line: ENDPLAIN
Draws a circle around the diameter of the selected pipe at the size and specification currently
defined for the drawing. The circle, which represents the end view of a pipe, is placed at the
center of the selected point.

Insert a plain end

1. Click Plain End . Alternatively, type ENDPLAIN on the command line and then press
ENTER.
Pick point for 4"-150 baseball.
The software places a plain end symbol at the specified location.
Hidden End
CADWorx Plant II tab: Hidden End
Pipe Ends toolbar: Hidden End
Command line: ENDHIDDEN
Draws a circle around the diameter of the selected pipe at the size and specification currently
defined for the drawing. The circle, which represents the end view of a pipe, is drawn with a
hidden line type and placed at the center of the selected point.
Insert a hidden end

1. Click Hidden End . Alternatively, type ENDHIDDEN on the command line and then press
ENTER.
The software places a hidden end symbol at the specified location.
Pipe End
CADWorx Plant II tab: Pipe End
Pipe Ends toolbar: Pipe End
Command line: ENDPIPE
Places a baseball at the center of the selected point. The size and the layer of the baseball are
determined by the current defined specification.
Insert a pipe end

1. Click Pipe End . Alternatively, type ENDPIPE on the command line and then press
ENTER.
The software places a pipe end symbol at the specified location.

SECTION 15
Layers Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers
Change Layer - Changes an object’s layer to the layer LAYERCHANGE

associated with another object that you select. For more
information, see Change Layer (on page 249).
Set Layer - Sets the current layer to that of an object that LAYERSET
you select. For more information, see Set Layer (on page
249).
Delete Layer - Removes all of the entities on the layer LAYERDELETE

associated with an entity that you select. For more
information, see Delete Layer (on page 249).
Layer Off - Turns off the layer associated with an entity LAYEROFF
that you select. For more information, see Layer Off (on
page 250).
On - Turns a layer back on that was turned off with the LAYERON
Layer Off command. For more information, see Layer On
(on page 250).
Match Layer - Changes an object’s properties to match MATCH

those of another object that you select. For more
information, see Match Layer (on page 250).
Isolate Layer - Turns off all layers except for the layer LAYERISOLATE
associated with an entity that you select. For more
information, see Isolate Layer (on page 251).
Un-isolate Layer - Turns all of the layers back on that LAYERUNISO

were turned off with the Isolate Layer command. For more
information, see Un-Isolate Layer (on page 251).
Previous - Sets the current layer back to the previous layer LAYERRESTORE
when you have placed dimensioning or text. For more
information, see Previous (on page 251).

Layers Panel
Change Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Change Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Change
Command line: LAYERCHANGE
Changes an object’s layer to the layer associated with another object that you select. You can
select the objects to change individually or with a fence.
Change the layer associated with an object

1. Click Change Layer .
2. Select the objects whose layer you want to change.
3. Select additional object to change layers, or press ENTER to end the selection process.
4. Select an object on the layer to which you want to move the objects.
The software moves the selected object to the new layer.
Set Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Set Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Set
Command line: LAYERSET
Sets the current layer to that of an object that you select. You must select an individual object.
Set the active layer

1. Click Set Layer .
2. Select the objects whose layer you want to be the active layer.
The software sets the active layer to that of the selected object.
Delete Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Delete Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Delete
Command line: LAYERDELETE
Removes all of the entities on the layer associated with an entity that you select. For example,
you can delete all the entities, such as lines, text, and so on, on layer 0. You must select an
individual entity.
If you select the VIEWL layer, the software displays a warning message. Deleting the VIEWL
layer deletes a block named CPM which the software inserts when beginning a new drawing.
This block contains information (sizes, specification, and so on) that are used when opening an
existing drawing. If you delete this layer, this information is not available for the next drawing
session. You can re-enter this information.

Layers Panel
Delete a layer
1. Click Delete Layer .
2. Select the object whose layer you want to delete.
The software deletes the layer associated with the selected object.
Layer Off
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Layer Off
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Off
Command line: LAYEROFF
Turns off the layer associated with an entity that you select. You must select an Individual entity.
Turn off a layer

1. Click Layer Off .
2. Select the object whose layer you want to turn off.
The software turns off the display of the layer associated with the selected object.
Layer On
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Layer On
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > On
Command line: LAYERON
Turns a layer back on that was turned off with the Layer Off command. For more information,
see Layer Off (on page 250). No selection is required.
Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer Off command

 Click Layer On .
The software redisplays the layer.
Match Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Match Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Match
Command line: MATCH
Changes an object’s layer to match that of another object that you select.

Layers Panel
Match an object's layer

1. Click Match Layer .
2. Select the objects whose layer you want to change. Press ENTER to end the selection.
3. Select an object on the layer that you want to match.
The software changes the layer of the objects.
Isolate Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Isolate Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Isolate
Command line: LAYERISOLATE
Turns off all layers except for the layer associated with an entity that you select.
Display only the layer associated with an object

1. Click Isolate Layer .
2. Select an object on the layer to isolate.
The software turns off all layers except for the layer associated with the selected object..
Un-Isolate Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Un-Isolate Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Un-Isolate
Command line: LAYERUNISO
Turns all of the layers on. No selection is required.
Turn on all layers

 Click Un-Isolate Layer .
The software turns on display for all layers.
Previous
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Previous
Command line: LAYERRESTORE
Sets the current layer back to the previous layer when you have placed dimensioning or text.
This command is only available after these two items are placed. This command does not
restore a previous layer that has been changed with the Layer or Ddlmodes commands.

SECTION 16
Restraints Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints
The types of restraints used with CADWorx Plant are listed in the table below.
Reinforcing Pad - Inserts intelligent information indicating a REINFPAD
reinforcement pad. For more information, see Reinforcing Pad
(on page 253).
Reinforcing Saddle - Inserts intelligent information indicating REINFSAD
a reinforcement saddle. For more information, see Reinforcing
Saddle (on page 253).
Translational - Creates a translational-type restraint. For TRANSLATIONAL
more information, see Translational (on page 254).
Anchor - Creates an anchor-type restraint. For more ANCHOR
information, see Anchor (on page 255).
Spring Hanger- Creates a spring hanger-type restraint. For SPRING
more information, see Spring Hanger (on page 255).
Rotational - Creates a rotational-type restraint. For more ROTATIONAL
information, see Rotational (on page 256).
Snubber - Creates a snubber-type restraint. For more SNUBBER
information, see Snubber (on page 256).
Guide - Creates a guide-type restraint. For more information, GUIDE
see Guide (on page 257).
Restraints appear on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify the symbol shape that
appears on the output drawing by editing the restraint drawing file. These drawing files are
delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. If necessary, a restraint symbol can be re-
drawn as a three-dimensional shape. In these instances, you must maintain the base of the
restraint at 0,0,0 and the direction of the restraint at 0 degrees.
The restraint is used in the bi-directional link with CAESAR II. The position of the restraint is
important for the evaluation of the stress model within CAESAR II. For example, you can
position a rotational restraint at any vector.
 The CAESARIITolerance (on page 33) variable is useful when the bi-directional process
encounters a problem locating a restraint along a pipe line, especially if the pipe line is
sloped.
 All supports drawn using the Restraint commands in CADWorx Plant are exported as guides
to ISOGEN. To export a different symbol to ISOGEN, use the ISOGEN Data dialog box (on
page 71) to change the SKEY. Acceptable SKEY values are ANCH, DUCK, GUID, SKID,
SPRG, and HANG. For information about the sample ISOGEN shapes used with these
SKEYS, see the ISOGEN Symbol Keys Reference Guide, which is delivered as a PDF file to
the [Product Folder]\ISOGEN\Isogen_Utils folder.
 You can also use the ISOGEN Data dialog box to change the support direction.

Restraints Panel
Reinforcing Pad
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Reinforcing Pad
Misc toolbar: Reinforcing Pad

Command line: REINFPAD
Attaches a reinforcement pad to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement pad is
represented by the alpha-identifier P. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that is used in
Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.
For information about showing reinforcement pads on an ISOGEN isometric drawing, see
Offset Tap (on page 120).
Insert a reinforcement pad

1. Click Reinforcing Pad on the Restraints panel.
3. Select the branch pipe component.
4. Type the thickness of the reinforcement pad on the command line, and press ENTER.
5. Type the required value on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software places the reinforcement pad and notates the drawing with the reinforcing pad
alpha-identifier.
Reinforcing Saddle
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Reinforcing Saddle
Misc toolbar: Reinforcing Saddle

Command line: REINFSAD
Attaches a reinforcement saddle to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement
saddle is represented by the alpha-identifier S. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that
is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.

Restraints Panel
Insert a reinforcement saddle

1. Click Reinforcing Saddle on the Restraints panel.
3. Select the branch run of the component.
4. Type the thickness of the reinforcement saddle on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software places the reinforcement saddle and notates the drawing with the reinforcing
saddle alpha-identifier.
Translational
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Translational
Restraints toolbar: Translational

Command line: TRANSLATIONAL
Creates a translational-type restraint.
This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format.
Place a translational restraint

1. Click Translational on the Restraints panel.
2. Click where you want the transitional placed.
4. Type a numerical value on the command line, and press ENTER.
The transitional is placed in the drawing.

Restraints Panel
Anchor
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Anchor
Restraints toolbar: Anchor

Command line: ANCHOR
Creates an anchor-type restraint.
Place an anchor
1. Click Anchor on the Restraints panel.
2. Click where you want the anchor placed.
The anchor is placed in the drawing.
Spring Hanger
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Spring Hanger
Restraints toolbar: Spring Hanger

Command line: SPRING
Creates a spring hanger-type restraint.
Place a spring hanger

1. Click Spring Hanger on the Restraints panel.
2. Click where you want the spring hanger placed.
The spring hanger is placed in the drawing.

Restraints Panel
Rotational
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Rotational
Restraints toolbar: Rotational

Command line: ROTATIONAL
Creates a rotational-type restraint.
Place a rotational restraint

1. Click Rotational on the Restraints panel.
2. Click where you want the restraint placed.
The restraint is placed in the drawing.
Snubber
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Snubber
Restraints toolbar: Snubber

Command line: SNUBBER
Creates a snubber-type restraint.
Place a snubber
1. Click Snubber on the Restraints panel.
2. Click where you want the snubber placed.
The snubber is placed in the drawing.

Restraints Panel
Guide
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Guide
Restraints toolbar: Guide

Command line: GUIDE
Creates a guide-type restraint.
Place a guide
1. Click Guide on the Restraints panel.
2. Click where you want the guide placed.
The guide is placed in the drawing.

SECTION 17
UCS Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS
Flat - Places the current user coordinate system in the flat VIEWFLAT
position. For more information, see Flat (on page 260).
Next - Places the current user coordinate system in the next UCSNEXT
position. For more information, see UCS Next (on page
261).
Compass - Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates COMPASS

the Point and Shoot orientation. For more information, see
Compass (on page 261).
North - Places the current user coordinate system in the VIEWNORTH

north position. For more information, see North (on page
261).
South - Places the current user coordinate system in the VIEWSOUTH

south position. For more information, see South (on page
262).
East - Places the current user coordinate system in the east VIEWEAST
position. For more information, see East (on page 263).
West - Places the current user coordinate system in the VIEWWEST

west position. For more information, see West (on page
262).
UCS Object - Orients the current user coordinate system UCS

according to an object that you select. For more information,
see UCS Object (on page 263).
Point and Shoot UCS

AutoCAD allows you to manipulate the X, Y, Z coordinate system UCS (user coordinate
system). You must be familiar with the Point and Shoot system of manipulating the UCS.
The UCSICON option needs to be On (visible) and set to Origin. This lets you see exactly
where the icon is at all times. Although it isn’t necessary, it is highly recommended that it be
somewhere on the centerline of the components you are drawing. This keeps everything in the
same plane. If you must turn into another plane, use the UCS NEXT command, or choose the
appropriate plane (North, South, East, West, or Flat) and place the icon on the centerline of the
new plane.

UCS Panel
If you cannot see the rubber band effect, or if it doesn’t appear correctly, you are out of plane.
Pay attention to the icon as it shows where you are. If the broken pencil icon appears, and there
are strange lines on the screen instead of pipe and components, your current plane is
perpendicular to the viewpoint. Use the Undo command, or change the viewpoint.
When dimensioning or annotating an isometric or 3D model, place the UCS icon on a node or a
centerline on the run you are working on. The text has the same orientation as the icon.
Xtext - Rotates the UCS 180 degrees along the X-axis. When you view a model from the bottom
side using a view point with a negative angle from the X-Y plane, text and dimension placement
is upside down and backwards. This option rotates the X-axis of the UCS to remedy this. Text
and dimensions are then placed in the proper orientation for viewing and plotting. If you change
from a negative to positive angle from the X-Y view point, you must replace the text for the
proper orientation.
Ztext - Rotates the UCS 180 degrees along the Z-axis. When viewing a model from the back
side using a view point with a 0 to 180 degree angle in the X-Y plane from the X axis, text and
dimension placement is upside down and backwards. This option rotates the Z-axis of the UCS
to remedy this. Text and dimensions are then placed in the proper orientation for viewing and
plotting. If you change to a rear view position (180 - 360 degree angle in the X-Y plane from the
X-axis), you must replace the text for the proper orientation.
Elevation - Sets the elevation to the present UCS. This command does not set the depth in a
North, South, East, or West plane. Setting an elevation of 10' (when the present elevation is 0')
raises the UCS to 10' regardless of the position.
Rotate - Rotates the present UCS around the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. For example, rotating the UCS
to 45 degrees after inserting a 45 degree elbow allows you to place other components in line
with the 45 degree elbow.
COordinate - Specifies an exact X, Y, Z-coordinate in relation to the WCS (world coordinate
system).
CLip - Clips the view at the present plane set by the UCS. This plane can be established with
the Point and Shoot UCS options or any three-point UCS position. The plane can be skewed at
any angle.
On - Turns on view clipping with clipping distances as set by the Back and Front options.
Off - Turns off view clipping.
Back - Sets the distance to the back of the clipping area. This value must be a negative number.
If this value is positive, it can clip past the front clipping area and leave nothing in the view.
Front - Sets the distance to the front of the clipping area. This value must be a positive number.
If this value is negative, it can clip past the back clipping area and leave nothing in the view.
The CLip option is also available as the command VIEWCLIP.
Pick point - Moves the 0,0,0 user base to a point you select. Press Enter to keep the UCS at
the same origin but switch to a new plane. For example, press Enter to change from the north
plate to a west plane.

UCS Panel
You must enter other UCS positions with AutoCAD’s UCS command. Two extremely useful
options in this command are the OBject and 3 Point. Leave the UCSICON on and set to origin
when using any method of rearranging the UCS.
If you select a point close to the screens edge, and the UCS icon is on and set to origin,
the icon may not remain at this point. AutoCAD requires that the whole icon be visible and
places the icon in the lower left corner of the screen. If this happens, zoom out a little or pan
toward the new UCS position.
Flat
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > Flat
UCS toolbar: Flat
Plant menu: UCS > Flat
Command line: VIEWFLAT
Places the current user coordinate system in the flat position.

UCS Panel
UCS Next
UCS toolbar: Next
Plant menu: UCS > UCS Next
Command line: UCSNEXT
Toggles through each of the Point and Shoot UCS positions.
Compass
UCS toolbar: Compass
Command line: COMPASS
Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates the Point and Shoot orientation. The symbol
displays at the point you select.
As the display's orientation changes, the symbol changes accordingly.

The aliases VF, VN, VS, VE, and VW are also available.
North
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > North
UCS toolbar: North

Plant menu: UCS > North
Command line: VIEWNORTH
Places the current user coordinate system in the north position.

UCS Panel
South
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > South
UCS toolbar: South
Plant menu: UCS > South
Command line: VIEWSOUTH
Places the current user coordinate system in the south position.
West
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > West
UCS toolbar: West

Plant menu: UCS > West
Command line: VIEWWEST
Places the current user coordinate system in the west position.

UCS Panel
East
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > East
UCS toolbar: East
Plant menu: UCS > East
Command line: VIEWEAST
Places the current user coordinate system in the east position.
UCS Object
UCS toolbar: UCS Object
Plant menu: UCS > UCS Object
Command line: UCS
Orients the UCS according to an object that you select. Please refer to the AutoCAD
documentation on the UCS (User Coordinate System) for more detail.
This command is useful for rearranging dimensions in the model space (MSPACE) of a
CADWorx isometric model. Run this command, and then select the dimension. The software
places the UCS according to the position of the dimension allowing it to be stretched and
moved.

SECTION 18
Steel Shapes Panel

CADWorx Steel: Steel Shapes
Shape Name Command Line
Wide Flange WSHAPE
Channel CSHAPE
Angle LSHAPE
Tee TSHAPE
Pipe PSHAPE
Tube TSSHAPE
Flat Bar FBSHAPE
Round Bar RBSHAPE
Channel with Lip CLIPSHAPE
Angle with Lip LLIPSHAPE
Z ZSHAPE
Double Angle 2LSHAPE
Shapes
CADWorx Steel tab > Steel Shapes panel
Plant menu: Steel > Shapes
Command line: STEEL
Draws many different steel shapes in the drawing. When placing steel shapes, you can:
 attach steel shapes to lines or you can specify the end points.
 place members into the current UCS.
 define the location of the centerline and the angle about the centerline.
 place steel on arcs.
 copy, stretch, or edit the size with the edit function.

Steel Shapes Panel
Draw Steel Dialog Box

Select Type - Select the shape to place. The drop down lists each folder defined by the
SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.ini file specifying the
member type in that folder (W, T, TS, and so forth).
Select Data File - Select the data file that contains the component to place. All the data files
located in the folder defined by the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable display
for selection. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder. CADWorx
automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units.
Select Member - Specifies the member to use. The delivered data files have members in
alphabetical order. You can edit the data files to have the members in any order.
Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline. You can select 0, 90, 180,
270, or type the needed rotation angle. Do not use AutoCAD commands (ROTATE, MIRROR,
3DROTATE) to change the rotation angle of the shape. The rotation angle of the shape can only
be set from the Draw Steel dialog box.
Pick Insertion Location - Click to select the insertion point. The red box indicates the active
location.
Centerline location - Select the top, center, or bottom location of the centerline relative to the
component shape. The centerline location can only be along the three locations on the Y-axis of
the component.
Use UCS - Select to use the current UCS as the XY plane. For example, if the UCS is located in
the same plane as a slope roof, components are easily added at this angle if you select this
option. Select two points within the plane to determine the rotation automatically.
Flip Flange - Select to flip the flange to the opposite side on a steel component. This option is
only available and only displays if the steel component has a flange that can flip, such as a
channel.
Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate.
Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component. The default value is
the text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The default value is
the text in the MEMBER column of the data file.
Description - Defines the component description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION="
value in the data file header.
Part Number - Specifies the part number for the component. You can enter the part number
yourself or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page
41) startup variable.
Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the "MATERIAL="
Pick Points - Click to define the component by two points on the screen.
Select Lines - Click to select lines in the drawing to place the component. The length and
position of the line define the component.
Properties - Activates the Properties dialog box that you can use to edit the shape properties
before placement. For more information, see Properties Dialog Box.
User Input - Activates the User Input dialog box that you can use to create a custom-
dimensioned shape. Select a shape that is close to the size you need before clicking User
Input. For more information, see User Input Dialog Box.

Steel Shapes Panel
Properties Dialog Box

Displays the available properties of the selected member.
The reference data file path and file name is shown at the top.
Weight - Displays the weight of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the weight
yourself.
Length - Displays the length of the component. Select Manual Update to enter the length
yourself. The component length is calculated based on the shape of the solid, not the length of
the centerline. For example, if one end of the component is cut 45 degrees, the full length would
be to the very end of the 45 degree cut, not the centerline length.
The top grid displays the required properties to place the shape. Do not add to or edit the order
of these properties in the data file or the component does not place correctly in the drawing.
The bottom grid displays the optional properties. You can add or remove properties in the data
file as needed. For example, you might want to add a column in the data file for the gage
distance.
User Input Dialog Box

Defines custom dimensioned components.
Dimensions - Displays the dimensions that you can define. Refer to the figure for a key of
which dimension is which.
Rotation Angle - Select the component rotation about the centerline or base point. You can
select 0, 90, 180, 270, or type the needed rotation angle.
Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the component.
Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the component. The thickness, length,
and width dimensions are appended to the long annotation as the component is drawn and
placed.
Description - Defines the component description.
Density - Defines the material density for the component.
Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define the data files location
associated with the steel software. The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I
contains imperial unit data files using inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top
of each data file is an entry that defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software
reads this entry in the data file and determines if the units need to be converted. For example,
when SystemMeasure (on page 42) is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you
want to use an imperial data file from Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file
values from inches into millimeters. Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory
variable.
Steel channel and angle shapes cannot be modified using the AutoCAD MIRROR
command. Use Flip Flange in the dialog to mirror channel and angle shapes.

Steel Shapes Panel
When editing shape data files, remember these rules:

 Columns have to be separated by two or more spaces.
 First column has to be called "MEMBER". The member name cannot have two consecutive
spaces.
 Required columns have to in the exact order listed for each type of steel shape to generate
the AutoCAD solid.
 All columns after the required columns are optional. These optional columns display in the
Properties dialog box for reference. The Ix (Inertia about X-axis), Iy (Inertia about Y-axis),
and J (torsion) columns might be used by the SEXPORT command when export to CAESAR
II Steel (*.str) files.
 The cross sectional area (AREA) and fillet radius (R) columns are required in the data file
but are not used by the software to generate the AutoCAD solid shape. These values are not
stored with the component.
 For imperial sizes:
 Weight (WGT) column is in pounds per foot (lbs/ft)
 Area (AREA) column is in square inches (in2)
 All other required columns are in inches (in)
 For metric sizes:
 Weight (WGT) column is in kilograms per meter (kg/m)
 Area (AREA) column is in square centimeters (cm2)
 All other required columns are in millimeters (mm)

Steel Shapes Panel
Wide Flange Shapes

Data file sample (TYPE=W)
Required columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
DEPTH - Depth
WEB_THK - Web Thickness
FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width
FLG_THK - Flange Thickness
R - Fillet Radius (not used)

Steel Shapes Panel
Channel Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=C)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
WEB_THK - Web Thickness
X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0)

Steel Shapes Panel
Angle Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=L)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
LEG2 - Leg 2 length
THK - Thickness
Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)

Steel Shapes Panel
Tee Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=WT)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
DEPTH - Depth
STEM_THK - Stem Thickness

Steel Shapes Panel
Pipe Shapes
Data file sample (Type=P)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
OD - Outside Diameter
WALL_THK - Wall Thickness (not used)

Steel Shapes Panel
Tube Shapes
Data file sample (Type=TS)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
SIDE1 - Side 1 length
SIDE2 - Side 2 length
THK - Thickness

Steel Shapes Panel
Flat Bar Shapes

Data file sample (TYPE=FB)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
WIDTH - Width
THK - Thickness

Steel Shapes Panel
Round Bar Shapes

Data file sample (Type=RB)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
OD - Outside Diameter

Steel Shapes Panel
Channel Shape with Lip

Data file sample (TYPE=C_LIP):
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
DEPTH - Web Thickness
THK - Thickness
LIP - Lip Length

Steel Shapes Panel
Angle Shape with Lip

Data file sample (TYPE=L_LIP):
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
THK - Thickness
LEG2 - Leg 2 length
LIP - Lip Length

Steel Shapes Panel
Z Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=Z):
Columns:
WEIGHT - Weight
HEIGHT - Height
THK - Thickness
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
LIP1 - Lip 1 length (optional)
LEG2 - Leg 2 length (optional)
LIP2 - Lip 2 length (optional)
THK_LEG1 - Leg 1 thickness (optional)
THK_LEG2 - Lip 1 thickness (optional)
THK_LIP1 - Leg 2 thickness (optional)
THK_LIP2 - Lip 2 thickness (optional)

Steel Shapes Panel
Angle Double Shape

Data file sample (TYPE=2L)
Required Columns:
WGT - Weight
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
LEG2 - Leg 2 length
THK - Thickness

SECTION 19
Steel Draw Panel

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw
Plate - Places plates in the drawing. For more information, SPLATE

see Plate (on page 281).
Base Plate - Places base plates in free space or at the SBPLATE

end of a member. For more information, see Base Plate
(on page 283).
Steel Bolt - Places a bolt in the drawing. For more BTSHAPE

information, see Steel Bolts (on page 285).
Set Size by Component - Sets the steel size by selecting COMP2STEEL

an existing component in the model. For more information,
see Set Size by Component (on page 288).
Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic SGENERICD

Steel - Generic Attachment (on page 288).
User Shape - Places a component using a custom user SUSER

shape. For more information, see User Shape (on page
290).
Loft - Creates loft steel components. For more SLOFT

information, see Loft (on page 292).
Steel Single Line - Places steel single line components in SLS

the drawing. For more information, see Single Line Steel
(on page 293).
Frame Creation - Creates intelligent frames that they can SFRAME

use to build structural steel models. For more information,
see Steel - Frame Creation (on page 301).
Annotate - Annotates and dimensions frame lines. For SFRAMEANOT

more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 303).
Ladder - Places ladders, with or without cages, in the SLADDER

drawing. For more information, see Ladder (on page 304).
Hand Rail - Places hand rails in the drawing. For more SHRAIL
information, see Handrail (on page 307).
Stair - Places stairs in the drawing. For more information, SSTAIR

see Stair (on page 308).

Steel Draw Panel
Plate
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Plate
Steel toolbar: Plate
Plant menu: Steel > Plate

Command line: SPLATE
Creates plates in the model using existing shapes or by specifying a minimum of three plate
corners. You define the extrusion direction after selecting the shape or defining the corners.
Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define plate data files location.
The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I contains imperial unit data files using
inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top of each data file is an entry that
defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software reads this entry in the data file and
determines if the units need to be converted. For example, when SystemMeasure (on page 42)
is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you want to use an imperial data file from
Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file values from inches into millimeters.
Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory variable.
Draw Plate Dialog Box

Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the
text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
in the MEMBER column of the data file.
Description - Defines the plate description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in
the data file header.
Part Member - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself
or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 41) startup
variable.
Material - Specifies the material for the plate. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the
data file header.
Length - Displays the length of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate
aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the
long segment of the polyline used to create the plate.
Width - Displays the width of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate
Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself.

Steel Draw Panel
Manual Update - Select this option to manually specify the plate weight in the Weight box.
Clear this option to have the software compute the plate weight using the shape and the weight
defined in the data file.
Insert Location - Select the centerline location for the plate. This option is only available when
editing an existing plate in the model.
Pick Points - Click to define the plates by its corners.
Select Lines - Click to define the plate using an existing closed polyline shape.
Select Curves - Click to define the plate using an existing closed curved shape.

 Place plate by points (on page 282)
 Place plate by closed polyline (on page 282)
 Place plate by curves (on page 283)
Place plate by points

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Plate .
You can also type SPLATE in the command line.
The Draw Plate dialog box displays.
2. In the Select Data File box, select Structural Plate.
3. Select the plate to place in the Select Member list.
4. Edit the Details boxes as needed.
5. Click Pick points.
6. Define the first corner location of the plate.
7. Continue to define the corners of the plate. When you are finished, right-click and then
select Enter on the menu.
8. Select Positive or Negative from the context menu.
You can also press ENTER for positive Z direction or press N for negative.
Place plate by closed polyline

5. Click Select line(s).
6. Select an existing closed polyline shape in the model.
7. Right-click and, then select Positive or Negative from the context menu.
You can also press ENTER for positive Z direction or press N for negative.

Steel Draw Panel
Place plate by curves

5. Click Select curve(s).
6. Select the existing curves in the model.
7. Right-click.
8. Enter the width distance for the plate.
9. Click in the model to indicate which direction to apply the width.
10. Select Bottom, Center, or Top for the insertion location.
Base Plate
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Base Plate
Steel toolbar: Base Plate
Plant menu: Steel > Base Plate
Command line: SBPLATE
Places base plates in open space or attached to the end of a steel member. CADWorx
automatically copes the steel member with the base plate.
Base Plate Dialog Box
Details
Short annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
Part number - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself
variable.

Steel Draw Panel
data file header.
Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. The software automatically subtracts the material
weight removed by any holes from the plate weight. Select Manual Update to enter the value
yourself.
Plate Dimensions
Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle for the plate placement.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset from the plate centroid.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset from the plate centroid.
Hole Dimensions
On/Off - Select this option to place holes in the base plate. Clear this option to place a plate
without holes.
Row count - Enter the number of hole rows.
Row spacing - Enter the distance between the hole rows measured from the center of the
holes.
Column count - Enter the number of hole columns.
Column spacing - Enter the distance between the hole columns measured from the center of
the holes.
Diameter - Enter the diameter of the hole.
Rotation - Enter the angle at which to rotate the hole rows and columns within the base plate.
Slotted length - Enter a distance to create an elongated hole. This distance is measured from
the hole center.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Pick Point - Click to place the base plate.

 Place a base plate (on page 285)
 Place a base plate with holes (on page 285)

Steel Draw Panel
Place a base plate

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Base Plate .
You can also type SBPLATE in the command line.
The Steel Base Plates dialog box displays.
5. Edit the Plate dimensions boxes as needed.
6. Clear the On/Off option to place the base plate without holes.
7. Click Pick point.
The prompt Specify center base point displays.
8. Define the location for the base plate center.
9. Continue to define the locations for addition base plates as needed.
Place a base plate with holes

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Base Plate .
You can also type SBPLATE in the command line.
The Steel Base Plates dialog box displays.
5. Edit the Plate dimensions boxes as needed.
6. Select the On/Off option to place the base plate with holes.
7. Enter the values for the hole dimensions and locations.
8. Click Pick point.
The prompt Specify center base point displays.
9. Define the location for the base plate center.
10. Continue to define the locations for addition base plates as needed.
Steel Bolts
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Steel Bolts
Command line: BTSHAPE
Draws bolts in the drawing. You can place bolt shapes on lines, or you can specify the end
points.

Steel Draw Panel

location.
the component.
channel.

Steel Draw Panel

yourself.
distance.

placed.
Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) startup variable to define the data files location
associated with the steel software. The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I
contains imperial unit data files using inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top
of each data file is an entry that defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software
reads this entry in the data file and determines if the units need to be converted. For example,
when SystemMeasure (on page 42) is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you
want to use an imperial data file from Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file
values from inches into millimeters. Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory
variable.

Steel Draw Panel
Set Size by Component

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Set Size by Component
Steel toolbar: Set Size by Component
Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Set Size by Component

In CADWorx Steel Professional, Set Size by Component is located under Steel menu >
Utility > Set Size by Component.
Command line: COMP2STEEL
Sets the steel size by selecting an existing component in the model.
1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Set Size by Component .
2. Select an existing component in the model that has the size that you want to use.
Steel - Generic Attachment

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Generic Attach
Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Generic Attach
In CADWorx Steel Professional, Generic Attach is located under Steel menu > Utility >
Generic Attach.
Command line: SGENERICD
information on a beam and have it reflect the CG correctly, draw a centerline and pick MIDpoint
or NEArest to the end of the centerline or the exact known location.
Generic Attach (Create/Edit) Dialog Box

Controls parameters for attaching information to generic AutoCAD objects.
Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation for the component, such as W6X25.
Description - Specifies the description for the component, such as Wide Flange.
Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the component, such as W6.
Part number - Specifies the part number for the component, such as 12345.
Material - Specifies the material for the component, such as ASTM A-36.
Length - Specifies the length of the component. Any real number is valid.
Weight - Specifies the weight of the component. Any real number is valid.
attached.

Steel Draw Panel
point.
gravity point.
to zero.
to zero.
to zero.
1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Generic Attach .

You can also type SGENERICD in the command line.
The Generic Attach (Create) dialog box displays.
2. Enter the information to attach in the appropriate boxes.
3. Click Attach.
4. Select the non CADWorx object to attach the information.
After the information is attached you can use the Specify On-screen options for BOM
Mark Point and COG Location to indicate those points on the object. These options help to
determine the Center of Gravity.
Specify the Bill of Material Mark Point and the Center of Gravity Location
The Generic Attach (Edit) dialog box displays.
6. Click OK.

Steel Draw Panel
User Shape
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > User Shape
Plant menu: Steel > User Shape
Command line: SUSER
Places a component using a custom user shape. You select the component to draw based on
the user shape DWG file that you previously created. The extrusion direction and distance is
based on points picked or line selected in the drawing. You can edit Roll angle along with the
standard annotations.
User Shapes Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing user-defined shapes in the drawing.
Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the shape. The default value comes from
the drawing file that contains the user shape.
Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape. The default value
comes from the drawing file that contains the user shape.
Description - Specifies the description for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing
file that contains the user shape.
Part Number - Specifies the part number for the shape. The default value comes from the
drawing file that contains the user shape.
Material - Specifies the material for the shape. The default value comes from the drawing file
that contains the user shape.
Length - Specifies the length of the shape.
Weight - Specifies the weight of the shape.
Roll Angle - Specifies the roll angle about the placement line for the shape. Do not use
AutoCAD commands (ROTATE, MIRROR, 3DROTATE) to change the roll angle of the shape.
The roll angle of the shape can only be set from the User Shapes dialog box.
Pick points - Places the shape between two points that you identify in the drawing.
Select line - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the
drawing. This option is disabled for all other shapes.
For user shapes to work, an ASCII file named Type.ini must be in the same folder as the user
shape drawing files. The Type.ini must have TYPE=USER as the first line in the file. The folder
..\CADWorx (version)\Steel_I\User Shape is used to store the user shape drawing files.

Steel Draw Panel
The figure below shows the parameters stored in a user created DWG file that can be used to
create a roof purlin user shape.
After selecting the user shape from the dialog, you pick points or select a line to define the
extrusion length. See the figure below.
1. On the Steel Draw panel, click User Shape .

You can also type SUSER in the command line.
The User Shapes dialog box displays.
2. In the Select Member box, select the user shape to use.
3. Enter values in the Details boxes as needed.
4. Click Pick points to place the component by defining the two end locations.
-or-
Click Select line to select an existing line in the drawing on which to place the component.

Steel Draw Panel
Loft
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Loft
Command line: SLOFT
Creates lofted steel components. You must have two cross sections and the path curve between
them defined in the drawing before using this command. The cross sections define the shape of
the resulting steel component. The path curve must intersect all planes of the cross sections.
1. Draw the two cross sections and the path curve in the drawing.
2. On the Steel Draw panel, click Loft .

You can also type SLOFT in the command line.
3. Enter the material density.
4. Select the first cross section.
5. Select the second cross section.
6. Right-click to indicate you are finished selecting cross sections.
7. Select the path curve.
8. Define the annotations, descriptions, part number, and material.

Steel Draw Panel
Single Line Steel

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Single Line Steel
Steel menu: Utility > Single Line Palette
This menu option is only available in CADWorx Steel Professional.
Command line: SLS
Using the Steel Single Line program

1. Generate the 3D model of the steel in Model Space.
2. Create viewports in the Layouts.
3. Configure the object settings on the General tab. (see below).
4. Generate the viewports.
5. Apply new settings to objects.
6. Configure the dimension settings on the Dimension tab (see below).
7. Dimension the viewport.
This feature is only part of CADWorx Steel Professional Plus or CADWorx Plant
Professional.
Using the Steel Drawing Manager

The palette can be resized, docked and hidden like any AutoCAD palette. The command
SLSSHOWPALETTE shows the palette if it is hidden. The column line between the field labels
and the settings can be moved left or right to resize the columns.

Steel Draw Panel
General Tab

Steel Draw Panel
Tools
Save Settings to File - Save your set of settings to an external file for use in another
drawing
Load Settings From File - Load a saved set of settings from a file into the drawing. Any
existing named settings are lost when a new set is loaded from the file.
Add Setting - Add a name to a set of settings you want to reuse.
Delete Setting - Delete a named setting from the list.
Match Settings - Apply settings from one object to other objects.
Turn off Vertical symbols - Used to turn off vertically places symbols representing Z-Axis
objects.
Generate - Generate the steel member drawing objects in a viewport.
Set to Object - Apply new settings to a viewport or individual steel components already
drawn.
Update - Updates the existing objects to match changes made to the model
Reset Settings - Resets individual member objects back to the viewport settings and link
them back to the view port.
Archive drawings - Detaches all intelligence from the drawing objects. Underlying
models can be removed.
Turn of Vertical Symbols - Used to turn on vertically places symbols representing Z-Axis
objects previously turned off.
Settings List Box - Choose the named settings.

Steel Draw Panel
Line Settings
Layer - AutoCAD Layer for New Steel

Color - AutoCAD object color for New Steel
Linetype - Loaded AutoCAD linetype for New Steel
Weight - AutoCAD line weight for New Steel
Layer Exist - AutoCAD Layer for Existing Steel
Color Exist - AutoCAD object color for Existing Steel
Weight Exist - AutoCAD line weight for Existing Steel
Gap Style - Used to set either Manual gap distance or automatic gap distance
 Automatic uses the steel member end gap type to gap the lines set by the Gap Distance
setting
 Manual applies the Gap Distance to all ends regardless of gap type
Gap Distance - This is a paper space distance for the coping gaps
Tag Settings
Layer - AutoCAD Layers

Color - AutoCAD object colors
Text Style - Loaded text styles
Text Height - Paper space text height

Steel Draw Panel
Offset - Set an offset above the line / symbol for the tag to be placed
Justification - AutoCAD text justifications
Style - Short or Long descriptions
Display - Display of the tag, on or off
Symbol Settings
Layer Main - AutoCAD Layers for visible parts of the symbol

Color Main - AutoCAD object colors for visible parts of the symbol
Linetype Main - Loaded AutoCAD linetypes for visible parts of the symbol
Layer Minor - AutoCAD Layers for hidden parts of the symbol
Color Minor - AutoCAD object colors for hidden parts of the symbol
Linetype Minor - Loaded AutoCAD linetypes for hidden parts of the symbol
Scale - Width scale based on the actual visual width in the viewport
Length - Paper space length
Offset - Set the distance between parallel elements for visual effect
Display - Display of the symbol, on or off

Steel Draw Panel
Dimension Tab
Tools
Save Settings to File - Save your set of settings to an external file for use in another
drawing.
Load Settings from File - Load a saved set of settings from a file into the drawing. Any
existing named settings are lost when a new set is loaded from the file.
Add Named Style - Add a name to a set of settings you want to reuse.

Steel Draw Panel
Delete Named Style - Delete a named setting from the list.
Generate Plan Dimension - Generate the plan style dimensions of a selected viewport.
Generate Elevated Dimension - Generate the elevation style dimensions of a selected

viewport.
Clear Dimensions - Remove all dimensions of a selected viewport.
Update Dimensions - Update existing dimensions of a selected viewport.

Settings List Box - Used to choose the named settings.
Dimension Level - Select how many dimension levels to use.
Dimension Settings
Layer - AutoCAD Layers

Dim Style - AutoCAD Dimension Styles
Dim Type - Select the dimension type.
 Baseline Type
 Continue Type
 Ordinate Type
Offset - The distance from the edge of the viewport to place the first level dimensions
Elevation Value - The relative elevation of the selected origin point
Elevation Prefix - Prefix for the elevation dimensions

Steel Draw Panel
Tag Settings
Display - To display the column tags on the plan dimensions

Layer - AutoCAD Layer of the column tags and text
Color - AutoCAD color of the column tags and text
Style - Text style for the column tags and text
Height - Text height for the column tag text
Balloon Size - Diameter of the column tags
Orientation - The order of the automatic numbering of the column tags.
 LR-BT left to right, bottom to top
 LR-TB left to right, top to bottom
 RL-BT right to left, bottom to top
 RL-TB right to left, top to bottom
Vertical - Vertical column tag numbering start and style
 Letter (A)
 Letter + Number (A1)
 Number (1)
 Number + Letter (1A)
Horizontal - Horizontal column tag numbering start and style.
 Letter (A)
 Letter + Number (A1)
 Number (1)
 Number + Letter (1A)
Vertical Inc - The increment value of the tag number
 Increments the second value of a combination tag
 Value = 1 then "A" to "B" or "A1" to "A2"
Horizontal Inc - The increment value of the tag number
 Increments the second value of a combination tag
 Value = 1 then "A" to "B" or "A1" to "A2"

Steel Draw Panel
Steel - Frame Creation

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Frame Creation
Steel toolbar: Frame Creation
Plant menu: Steel > Frame > Creation

Command line: SFRAME
Create intelligent frames that you can use to build structural steel models.
Frame Creation Dialog Box

Name - Specifies the name for the current frame. The frame name is required only when you
create more than one frame in the same drawing. If you do not specify a name and you save the
frame configuration, the software uses the file name as the frame name.
Specify On-screen - Select this option to specify the frame insertion point with your mouse.
Clear this option to use the coordinate location specified in the X, Y, and Z boxes as the frame
insertion location.
Repeat Rows/Columns - Select this option to repeat the same rows and columns as the first
plan for all subsequent plans. This option provides a quick way to create large frames without
repeatedly entering the same information. The setting of this option is saved with the frame
configuration.
Create Clipped Views - Select this option to create clipped views for each plan, row, and
column. These views can then be accessed using the View command in AutoCAD. The views
are clipped in the front and back making them excellent to use in annotation layouts. You need
to select the Update Layer option in the View command dialog for the view to be set correctly.
The setting of this option is saved with the frame configuration.
Rotation Angle - Enter the rotation angle for the entire frame. The rotation is about the
specified insertion point. The rotation angle is saved with the frame configuration.
Draw Sloped Vertical Lines - Select this option to make the vertical lines sloped according to
each plans X and Y offsets. This option is useful when creating platform frames and requires
that each plan have the same number of rows and columns. The setting of this option is saved
with the frame configuration.
Plan - Defines the plans for the current frame. Specify the distance from one plan to the next in
the Distance column for each plan. You can also specify X and Y offset values from the
insertion point before the row and column lines for this plan are created.
CADWorx automatically creates labels for each plan based on the distance specified. The
elevation label default setting is defined in [Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl with the
PLAN_LABEL_START setting. Clear the Auto label option to define the label text yourself. The
label is saved with the frame after it is drawn and is available for the Frame Annotation
command. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 303).
Click Add to add a new plan to the current frame. Click Remove to delete the selected plans
from the current frame. If Repeat Rows/Columns is not selected, Remove deletes all rows and
columns associated with the plan that is being removed.
Row - Defines the rows for the current frame. You can specify the distance from one row to the
next in the Distance column for each row. If Repeat Rows/Columns is selected, the rows are
for the currently selected plan.

Steel Draw Panel
CADWorx automatically creates labels for each row. The row label default setting is defined in
[Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl. The [ROW] section contains the characters used in
making the label. If there are more rows and available characters, the labels are concatenated.
For example, A, B, C......X, Y, Z, AA, AB, AC and so on. Clear the Auto label option to define
the label text yourself. This label is saved with the frame after it is drawn and is available for the
Frame Annotation command. For more information, see Frame Annotation (on page 303).
Columns - Defines the columns for the current frame. You can specify the distance from one
column to the next in the Distance column for each column. If Repeat Rows/Columns is
selected, the columns are for the currently selected plan.
CADWorx automatically creates labels for each column. The column label default settings is
defined in [Product Folder]\System\FrameSetup.tbl. The [COLUMN] section contains the
characters used in making the label. If there are more columns than available characters, the
labels are concatenated. For example, A, B, C......X, Y, Z, AA, AB, AC and so on. Clear the
Auto label option to define the label text yourself. This label is saved with the frame after it is
drawn and is available for the Frame Annotation command. For more information, see Frame
Annotation (on page 303).
New - Click to create a new frame. You are prompted to save any changes to the current frame.
Save - Click to save the current frame to a file. You are prompted to enter a name and specify
the location to save the frame configuration.
Save As - Click to save the current frame under a different file name.
OK - Click to draw the frame in the current drawing. You are prompted to save any changes to
the current frame.

 Create a new frame configuration (on page 302)
 Edit a frame configuration (on page 303)
 Place a frame in the drawing (on page 303)
Create a new frame configuration

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Frame Creation .
You can also type SFRAME in the command line.
The Frame Creation dialog box displays.
2. Define the insertion point for the frame.
3. Define the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove.
4. Click Save As.
5. Enter the frame name, and specify of folder location.
6. Click Save.

Steel Draw Panel
Edit a frame configuration

2. Click Browse, and then open the frame to edit.
3. Edit the frame options and insertion point as needed.
4. Edit the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove.
5. Click Save.
Click Save As to save the frame to a different file.
Place a frame in the drawing
2. Click Browse, and then open the frame to place.
3. Edit the frame options and insertion point as needed.
4. Edit the plans, rows, and columns using Add and Remove as needed.
5. Click OK.
You are prompted to save any edits that you have made to the frame.
Frame Annotation
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Frame Annotation
Plant menu: Steel > Frame > Annotation

Command line: SFRAMEANOT
Annotates and dimensions frame lines. This command can also create the dimensions in call
outs in paper space.
Dimensions only - Draws only the dimension for the selected frame line. You are prompted to
pick the dimension side. The distance the dimensions are offset from the frame line is controlled
by the AutoCAD setvar DIMDLI. This option respects the current DIMSCALE setting.
Call outs only - Creates the call out and places the label of the selected frame line in a block
with attribute. The M5 block located in the [Product Directory]\Support folder is used for the call
out. You are prompted to pick the call out location.
Both - This option creates both dimensions and call outs.
1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Frame Annotation .

You can also type SFRAMEANOT in the command line.
2. Select the frame line in the drawing.
3. Select Dimensions only, Call outs only, or Both.
4. Select the side of the frame line to place the annotation.
5. Pick the location of the annotation.

Steel Draw Panel
Ladder
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Ladder
Steel toolbar: Ladder
Plant menu: Steel > Ladder

Command line: SLADDER
Creates ladders by specifying the start and end points of the ladder and rotation angle of the
ladder. Click Browse to load a predefined ladder into the dialog box. Use Save As to save a
ladder configuration for use later.
Position Tab
Start point / End point - Defines the location of the ladder.
Specify On-screen - Select this option to specify the start and end ladder locations interactively
in the model. Clear this option to define the locations using the X, Y, and Z coordinate boxes.
Rotation angle - Defines the rotation angle for the entire ladder. Select Specify On-screen to
define the rotation interactively in the drawing. Clear the option to use the rotation value
specified in the Angle box.
Dimension Tab
Sloped ladder - Select to allow the ladder to be sloped. The slope is determined by the
difference between the X or Y start and end locations in the Position Tab.
Rail width - Enter the inside distance from rail to rail.
Above platform - Enter the distance the ladder rails (offset extension of rail) are to extend
above the top rung.
Rail top exit width - Enter the inside to inside distance of the ladder opening above the
platform.
Rung spacing - Enter the center to center distance of the ladder rungs.
Offset (+/-) - Enter the distance the ladder is offset from the platform.
Cage Tab
Cage ladder - Select to place a cage on the ladder if the height of the ladder is over the
minimum distance.
Curved - Select to connect the hoop bars to the ladder using a curved connection.
Max. hoop spacing - Enter the distance from center to center of the intermediate hoops.
Cage bar spacing - Enter the distance from the center to center of the vertical bars on the
cage.
Bottom hoop clearance - Enter the distance from the base elevation or grade to the bottom
hoop.
Distance to middle - Enter the distance from the ladder rungs to the center of the cage.

Steel Draw Panel
Small hoop radius - Enter the radius of the hoop bar at the ladder rail location. This box is
available only when Curved is selected.
Connection distance - Enter the distance of the hoop bar at the ladder rail location. This box is
available only when Curved is not selected.
Top hoop radius - Enter the radius of the top hoop from the center of the cage.
Intermediate hoop radius - Enter the radius of the intermediate hoop from the center of the
cage.
Bottom hoop radius - Enter the radius of the bottom hoop from the center of the cage.
Top hoop opening - Defines the direction of the hoop opening. If you select Open Left or
Open Right, you need to define the side outlet width and extension distances.
Side outlet width - Enter the width of the cage side opening.
Side outlet extension - Enter the length of the side outlet extension.
Sizes Tab
The bars, rungs, hoops, and cage bars rows allows the selection of different components to be
used with the ladder.
Type - Select the member type.
Data file - Select the data file to use. The data files that display are controlled by the
SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration settings.
Size - Select the member section size from the data file selected.
Details - Click the three-dots button to activate the Details dialog box. Using the Details dialog
box, you can define annotations, offsets, rotations, and mirror the section.
Short annotation - Enter a description for the short annotation of the member. This annotation
is used in bill of material reports.
Long annotation - Enter a description for the long annotation of the member. This annotation is
used in bill of material reports.
X offset - Specify the member offset along the X-axis.
Remember that the base point is not always located at the centroid of the member.
Y offset - Specify the member offset along the Y-axis.
Rotation angle - Enter a rotation value in degrees for the member.
Mirror - Select to mirror the member about its base point.

 Place a ladder interactively (on page 306)
 Place a ladder using key-ins (on page 306)
 Place a ladder with a cage (on page 306)

Steel Draw Panel
Place a ladder interactively

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Ladder .
You can also type SLADDER in the command line.
The Ladder dialog box displays.
2. Optionally, click Browse, and then open the ladder configuration to place.
3. Select the Position tab.
4. Select the Specify On-screen option for the start and end points.
5. If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Dimension, Cage, and Size tabs.
6. Click OK.
7. If you edited properties, click Yes to save your changes for reuse. Click No to place the
ladder as defined but not to save the ladder properties for reuse.
8. Define the location of the ladder bottom.
9. Define the location of the ladder top.
Place a ladder using key-ins

3. Select the Position tab.
4. Clear the Specify On-screen option for the start and end points.
5. Enter the ladder start and end points using the X, Y, and Z boxes. The bottom of the ladder
is defined on the left. The top of the ladder is defined on the right.
6. If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Dimension, Cage, and Size tabs.
7. Click OK.
The ladder is placed in the drawing.
Place a ladder with a cage

3. Select the Cage tab.
4. Select the Caged ladder option.
5. If needed, edit the ladder properties on the Position, Dimension, and Size tabs.
6. Click OK.
The ladder is placed in the drawing.

Steel Draw Panel
Handrail
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Hand Rail
Steel toolbar: Hand Rail
Plant menu: Steel > Hand Rail

Command line: SHRAIL
Creates handrails in the drawing using specified corner points of the handrail or a polyline or 3D
polyline that defines the path of the handrail. You are prompted to specify the offset direction
after the points have been picked, or the polyline has been selected.
Dimensions Tab
Post below platform (+/-) - Enter the distance to place the hand rail above or below the
platform to which it is attached to.
Platform offset dist (+/-) - Enter the distance to offset the hand rail. The hand rail can be offset
away from or over the platform.
Start/end offset - Enter the distance from the end of the hand rail to place the post or
stanchion. This distance applies to both ends of the hand rail.
Max post spacing - Enter the maximum distance between the post or stanchions.
Spacing distance - Enter the vertical spacing between the rails. Use Add and Remove to
change the number of rails.
Sizes Tab
The top rail, intermediate rail, bottom rail, and post can have different components for the hand
rail.
SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration file.
 Place hand rail by points (on page 308)
 Place hand rail by polyline (on page 308)

Steel Draw Panel
Place hand rail by points

1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Hand Rail .
You can also type SHRAIL in the command line.
The Hand Rail dialog box displays.
2. Optionally, click Browse, and then open a different hand rail configuration to place.
3. Edit the hand rail properties on the Dimension and Sizes tabs.
hand rail as defined but not to save the hand rail properties for reuse.
6. Specify the starting location for the hand rail.
7. Continue placing vertex points for the hand rail path.
8. Right-click, and then select Enter.
9. Identify the path side that is away from the platform.
Place hand rail by polyline

1. Place a polyline or 3D polyline in the drawing that defines the hand rail path.
2. On the Steel Draw panel, click Hand Rail .

You can also type SHRAIL in the command line.
The Hand Rail dialog box displays.
3. Optionally, click Browse, and then open a different hand rail configuration to place.
4. Edit the hand rail properties on the Dimension and Sizes tabs.
5. Click Select line.
hand rail as defined but not to save the hand rail properties for reuse.
7. Select the polyline in the drawing.
8. Identify the path side that is away from the platform.
Stair
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Draw > Stair
Steel toolbar: Stair
Plant menu: Steel > Stair

Command line: SSTAIR
Creates stairs in the drawing by specifying the top point of the stair and then a base elevation.

Steel Draw Panel
Position Tab
Top point - Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates for the top of the stairs. You can click Specified
On-screen to select a point in the drawing.
Base elevation - Enter the elevation at the bottom of stringer. You can click Specified On-
screen to select a point in the drawing.
Rotation angle - Enter the rotation in degrees. You can click Specified On-screen to define the
rotation in the drawing.
Dimension Tab
Tread
Boxes are disabled until the top point and bottom elevation are entered in the Position Tab. The
software then calculates initial values based on the top point and bottom elevation.
Changes made to Recalculates
(A) Total rise (C) Rise
(B) Riser count (C) Rise, (E) Run
(C) Rise (A) Total rise
(D) First rise (C) Rise
(E) Run (F) Total run
(F) Total run (E) Run
(A) Total rise - Enter the distance between the bottom elevation and the top point.
(B) Riser count - Enter the number of risers (steps or treads) in the stair.
(C) Rise - Enter the distance between from the top of one riser to the top of the next riser.
(D) First rise - Enter the distance from the bottom elevation to the top of the first riser.
(E) Run - Enter the depth of the riser (if you were standing in front of the stair).
(F) Total Run - Enter the total length (measured horizontally) of the stair.
Stringer
Width - Enter the inside distance between the two stringers.
(H) Top extend - Enter the distance between the stringer end and the riser.
(J) Top clear - Enter the distance between the top of the stringer and the top point defined for
stair.
(K) Base extend - Enter the distance between the stringer end and the edge of the first riser.
(M) Base clear - Enter the distance between the bottom of the stringer and the bottom elevation
point.
Miscellaneous
(N) Stair offset - Enter the offset distance from the top stair location point.
(P) Angle - Enter the stair angle measured from horizontal.

Steel Draw Panel
Sizes Tab
You can define different components to use for the riser and the stringer.
SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 40) variable in the configuration file.
1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Stair .

You can also type SSTAIR in the command line.
The Stair dialog box displays.
2. Using the Specify On-screen button or the X, Y, and Z boxes, define the top point for the
stairs.
3. Using the Specify On-screen button or the Z box, define the base elevation for the stairs.
4. Using the Specify On-screen button or the Angle box, define the rotation for the stairs.
5. Select the Dimension tab.
6. Review and edit the tread and stringer properties as needed. Refer to Dimension Tab if
needed.
7. Select the Sizes tab.
8. Define the components sizes for the treads and the stringers.
9. Click OK.

SECTION 20
Steel Edit Panel

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit
Cope - Cuts a member back to other members. For more SCOPE

information, see Steel - Cope (on page 312).
Miter - Cuts two coplanar members back to one another. For more SMITER
information, see Miter (on page 312).
Cut - Cuts members by a plane that you define. For more SCUT
information, see Cut (on page 313).
Union - Joins two members. For more information, see Union (on SUNION
page 314).
Local Edit - Edits a selected member. For more information, see SCEDIT
Edit (on page 314).
Global Edit - Edits the annotation, description, part number, and SGCEDIT
material of multiple components. For more information, see Global
Edit (on page 319).
Global Edit All - Edits multiple components of the same member SGCEDITALL
shape. For more information, see Global Edit All (on page 319).
Annotate Component - Places the long or short annotation of the SCOMPANOT

component in the drawing. For more information, see Annotate
Component (on page 321).
Convert Solid - Converts components to solids. For more SCONVERTSOLID

information, see Convert Solid (on page 322).
Layer Change - Moves steel solid or center lines to a new layer. For SLAYERCHANGE /
more information, see Layer Change (on page 322). SSETEXIST /
SREMOVEEXIST
Selection Control - Toggles the display of grips on and off. For SELECTCONTROL
more information, see Select Control (on page 323).
Auto Cope - Turns on or off the automatic coping of members. For SAUTOCOPE
more information, see Auto Cope (on page 323).

Steel Edit Panel
Steel - Cope
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Cope
Steel toolbar: Cope
Plant menu: Steel > Cope

Command line: SCOPE
Copes steel members to other steel members. You can place bolted coping or welded coping.
Bolted coping is controlled by SteelCopeBoltDistance (on page 40) and provides a gap between
the coped member and the boundary member. Welded cope is controlled by
SteelCopeWeldDistance (on page 40) and provides a gap between the coped member and the
boundary member. You can:
 Cope a single member to another single member that provides the cope boundary.
 Cope many members to many other members.
 A member that crosses another member is cut into two separate members.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cope .

You can also type SCOPE in the command line.
2. Select the members to cope. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
3. Select the members to cope against. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
4. Select bolted or welded cope.
Bolt - Copes the members with the offset specified in the SteelCopeBoltDistance startup
variable.
Weld - Copes the members with the offset specified in the SteelCopeWeldDistance startup
variable.
Miter
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Miter
Steel toolbar: Miter
Plant menu: Steel > Miter

Command line: SMITER
Miters two structural pieces to fit each other. The two structural pieces must be in the same
plane and have connected member ends. You miter multiple member pairs in each command
pass.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Miter .

You can also type SMITER in the command line.
2. Select the members to miter.
3. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
The software miters the selected members.

Steel Edit Panel
Cut
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Cut
Steel toolbar: Cut
Plant menu: Steel > Cut

Command line: SCUT
Cuts steel members along a plane that you define by an existing line or by points placed in the
drawing. The software updates the lengths, weight, and other affected properties of the cut
members. You cannot cut plate members with this command.
Line - Defines the plane using the two end points of the line and its extrusion direction (the Z-
axis of the plane the line was drawn in).
Points - Defines the plane using three points you pick in the drawing.

 Cut members by line (on page 313)
 Cut members by three-point plane (on page 313)
Cut members by line

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cut .
You can also type SCUT in the command line.
2. Select Line.
3. Select the line to use to define the plane.
4. Select the members to cut.
5. Right-click or press ENTER to cut the members.
Cut members by three-point plane

1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Cut .
You can also type SCUT in the command line.
2. Select Points.
3. Pick three points in the drawing to define the cutting plane.
4. Select the members to cut.
5. Right-click or press ENTER to cut the members.

Steel Edit Panel
Union
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Union
Steel toolbar: Union
Plant menu: Steel > Union

Command line: SUNION
Joins two or more steel members into one member. The members must have the same
properties for:
 Member size (W10x30 for example)
 Insertion location
 Centerline location
 Rotation angle
 Data file
 Short annotation
 Long annotation
 Description
 Material
 Part number
In addition, the two center lines must meet each other but not intersect or overlap.
Curved members cannot be joined with straight members.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Union .

You can also type SUNION in the command line.
2. Select the first member to join.
3. Select the second member to join.
4. Continue to select members. When you are finished, right-click or press ENTER to join the
members.
Edit
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Edit
Steel toolbar: Edit
Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Local Edit

In CADWorx Steel Professional, Local Edit is located under Steel menu > Utility >
Component Edit > Local Edit.
Command line: SCEDIT
Edits the properties of steel shapes and plates in the drawing. You can start this command from
the command line, the command icon, or by double-clicking the object you want to edit.

Steel Edit Panel

location.
the component.
channel.

Steel Edit Panel

yourself.
distance.

placed.
Draw Plate Dialog Box

Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the
text in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text

Steel Edit Panel
Part Member - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself
variable.
data file header.
Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. Select Manual Update to enter the value yourself.
Insert Location - Select the centerline location for the plate. This option is only available when
editing an existing plate in the model.
Pick Points - Click to define the plates by its corners.
Select Lines - Click to define the plate using an existing closed polyline shape.
Select Curves - Click to define the plate using an existing closed curved shape.
Base Plate Dialog Box

Details
Short annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
Part number - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself
variable.
data file header.

Steel Edit Panel
Weight - Displays the weight of the plate. The software automatically subtracts the material
weight removed by any holes from the plate weight. Select Manual Update to enter the value
yourself.
Plate Dimensions
Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle for the plate placement.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset from the plate centroid.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset from the plate centroid.
Hole Dimensions
On/Off - Select this option to place holes in the base plate. Clear this option to place a plate
without holes.
Row count - Enter the number of hole rows.
Row spacing - Enter the distance between the hole rows measured from the center of the
holes.
Column count - Enter the number of hole columns.
Column spacing - Enter the distance between the hole columns measured from the center of
the holes.
Diameter - Enter the diameter of the hole.
Rotation - Enter the angle at which to rotate the hole rows and columns within the base plate.
Slotted length - Enter a distance to create an elongated hole. This distance is measured from
the hole center.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Pick Point - Click to place the base plate.

Steel Edit Panel
Global Edit
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Global Edit
Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Global Edit
In CADWorx Steel Professional, Global Edit is located under Steel menu > Utility >
Component Edit > Global Edit.
Command line: SGCEDIT
Edits short annotation, long annotation, description, part number, and material for multiple
components at one time. Changes to any or all of the edit boxes are made to each selected
component. Leave the edit boxes blank for those properties you do not want to edit.
Steel Global Edit Dialog Box

Short Annotation - Defines the short annotation name. Generally, this is the member name up
to the first "X" character (for example, W10 is the short annotation name for W10X30).
Long Annotation - Defines the long annotation name (for example, W10X30).
Part Member - Specifies the part number for the component.
Material - Specifies the material for the component.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Global Edit .
You can also type SGCEDIT in the command line.
2. Select the members to edit. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
The Steel Global Edit dialog box displays.
3. Edit the appropriate property boxes. Leave blank the properties that you do not want to
change.
4. Click OK.
Global Edit All

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Global Edit All
Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Global Edit All
In CADWorx Steel Professional, Global Edit All is located under Steel menu > Utility >
Component Edit > Global Edit All.
Command line: SGCEDITALL
Edits multiple components of the same member shape. After selecting multiple components or
maybe your entire drawing, you can filter the component to edit by member shape.


Steel Edit Panel
location.
the component.
channel.

Steel Edit Panel

yourself.
distance.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Global Edit All .
You can also type SGCEDITALL in the command line.
2. Select the members to edit. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
The Steel Global Edit dialog box displays.
3. Select the member shapes you want to edit. You can select more than one group to edit,
although you edit the groups one at a time.
4. Click OK.
5. Edit the member properties as needed. See Draw Steel Dialog Box for more information
about this dialog.
6. Click OK.
The software displays the number of components that were updated.
7. If you selected more than one group, the Component Edit dialog box displays the next
group.
8. Edit the member properties as needed.
9. Click OK.
Annotate Component
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Annotate Component
Command line: SCOMPANOT
Places the short or long annotations of selected steel members in the drawing.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Annotate Component .

You can also type SCOMPANOT in the command line.

Steel Edit Panel
2. Select the component to annotate. Type Auto to have the software automatically determine
the annotation rotation and location. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
3. Select Long to place the defined long annotation.
or
Select Short to place the defined short annotation.
4. Define the annotation starting location.
5. Define the annotation rotation.
Convert Solid
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Convert Solid
Command line: SCONVERTSOLID
Creates the solid representation of component. When you have deleted the solid representation
and have been modeling using only centerlines, this command is used to re-create the solid
cross-section representation of the component.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Convert Solid .

You can also type SCONVERTSOLID in the command line.
2. Select the components to convert. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
The software creates the solids.
Layer Change
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Layer Change
Command line: SLAYERCHANGE / SSETEXIST / SREMOVEEXIST
Edits the existing flag for steel members and changes layers for steel solid and centerline
graphics.
The software automatically moves steel plates and base plates centerlines to whichever
layer is chosen for the corresponding solid.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Layer Change .
You can also type SLAYERCHANGE in the command line.
2. Select All to select all components in the drawing.
-or-
Select Select to manually select steel members. Press ENTER or right-click when you are
finished.
3. Select Yes to change the solid layer of the selected components.
4. Select the new layer, and then click OK.
5. Select Yes to change the centerline layer of the selected components.
6. Select the new layer, and then click OK.

Steel Edit Panel
Select Control
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Select Control
Command line: SELECTCONTROL
Toggles whether grip points are displayed on solids. To change the length of pipe or steel, you
can grip stretch the pipe or steel centerline. However, it may be difficult to select the center line
endpoint grip for steel shapes when solid grip points are on. Turning off the solid grip points with
this toggle makes it easier to grip stretch components.
Auto Cope
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel Edit > Auto Cope
Steel toolbar: Auto Cope
Plant menu: Steel > Auto Cope

Command line: SAUTOCOPE
Toggles the automatic coping of members on or off. When two members are coped and this
feature is on, the software automatically reapplies the cope when one of the members changes.
Select this command again to turn off the automatic coping feature.

SECTION 21
Steel BOM / DB Panel

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM DB
Steel BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to SBOMSETUP
any style or layout that you need. For more information, see Steel
BOM Setup (on page 325).
Cut Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each SBOMCUT
piece of steel with a length and a tag. For more information, see
Cut Steel Bill of Material (on page 327).
Total Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one SBOMTOTAL
tag for a total length of steel in each size. For more information,
see Total Steel Bill of Material (on page 329).
Single Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with SBOMSINGLE
each selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see
Single Steel Bill of Material (on page 331).
Export Steel BOM - Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to SBOMEXPORT
an external file format that you specify. For more information, see
Export Steel Bill of Material (on page 333).
Setup Live Database - Links the drawing to an external database. SLIVEDB
For more information, see Setup Live Database Steel (on page
334).
Export Steel Database - Exports steel components to Microsoft SDBFGEN
Access or Microsoft Excel. For more information, see Export Steel
(on page 335).
Import Steel Database - Imports and draws CADWorx steel SDBFIN
components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. For
more information, see Import Steel (on page 335).
Audit Steel Database - Compares the database with the drawing SDBAUDIT
displaying any differences between the two. For more information,
see Audit Steel Database (on page 336).
Synchronize Steel Database - Checks all components in the SSYNC
drawing and updates them according to the current value within
the database tables. For more information, see Synchronize Steel
Database (on page 337).
Export Steel Model - Exports the steel model to CAESAR II, SEXPORT
Robobat, or CIS/2 files. For more information, see Export Steel
Model (on page 337).
Import Steel Model - Imports a CIS/2 file into the current drawing. SIMPORT
For more information, see Import Steel Model (on page 338).
C.G. Generator - Calculates the center of gravity for selected SCG
steel members. For more information, see CG Generator (on page
338).

Steel BOM Setup

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM / DB > Setup
Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Setup

Command line: SBOMSETUP
box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide user
specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of different
entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order.
Bill of Material lengths are based on DIMLFAC, DIMDEC, and DIMLUNIT.
Steel Bill of Material Setup Dialog Box

BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can include in
the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.
the columns. Use Sort Order to define the sort order.
Sort Order - Controls the sort order and accumulation of steel components in the BOM. For
more information, see Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 327).



1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Setup .
You can also type SBOMSETUP in the command line.
The Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays.
2. To add a property to the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns Available
list.
3. To remove a property from the BOM, double-click the property in the BOM Columns
Selected list.
4. Click OK.

4. Click OK.

column.
5. Click OK.

2. Click Sort Order.
The Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Control Setup dialog box displays.

to A.
6. Click OK on the Steel BOM Sort Order dialog box.
7. Click OK on the Steel Bill of Material Setup dialog box.
Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box

Controls the sort order of the BOM. Columns that you place in the BOM Columns Selected list
are used to sort the BOM starting with the top column, then the second column, and so forth.
Use Move Up and Move Down to change the order in which the BOM is sorted.
This dialog box also controls the accumulation of steel components. For example, if two
members have different Short Annotation values and you do not want these to accumulate,
Short Annotation would have to be added to the BOM Columns Selected list.
BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a steel member that you can use to sort
the BOM. These columns can be used to sort using Add.
BOM Columns Selected - Shows all the columns that have been selected for sorting and their
sort order from top to bottom.
Column Sort - Controls additional sorting on each selected column. Ascending means sorting
from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z.
Move Up and Move Down - Defines the sort order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM
Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to sort that column before other columns. Click
Move Down to sort the column after columns higher in the list.
Cut Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM / DB > Cut
Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Cut
Command line: SBOMCUT
Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece of steel with a length and a tag. Identical
items are accumulated in the quantity column. For example, if you select two W14X74
components that are both 120 feet long, the BOM looks like this:
BILL OF MATERIALS
MARK QTY LONG ANNOTATION LENGTH WEIGHT
1 2 W14X74 120.00 1480.00
TOTAL WEIGHT: 1480.00

The steel component could have been converted with the Existing option.
tags.


1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Cut .
You can also type SBOMCUT in the command line.
5. Select the steel components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you
are finished.


1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Cut .
You can also type SBOMCUT in the command line.
are finished.
Total Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM / DB > Total
Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Total
Command line: SBOMTOTAL
Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of steel in each size.
Identical long annotation items are accumulated in the length column. For example, if you select
two W14X74 components that are both 120 feet long, the BOM looks like this:
BILL OF MATERIALS
1 1 W14X74 240.00 1480.00
The component could have been converted with the Existing option.
tags.



1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Total .
You can also type SBOMTOTAL in the command line.
are finished.


1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Total .
You can also type SBOMTOTAL in the command line.
are finished.
Single Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM / DB > Single
Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Run > Single
Command line: SBOMSINGLE
schedule. For example, if you select two W14X74 components that are both 120 feet long, the
BOM looks like this:
BILL OF MATERIALS
1 1 W14X74 120.00 740.00
2 1 W14X74 120.00 740.00
The component could have been converted with the Existing option.
tags.



1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Single .
You can also type SBOMSINGLE in the command line.
are finished.


1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Single .
You can also type SBOMSINGLE in the command line.
are finished.
Export Steel Bill of Material

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM / DB > Export
Plant menu: Steel > Bill of Material > Export
Command line: SBOMEXPORT
Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an external file format that you specify. The
schedule for the Bill of Material is defined using Steel BOM Setup (on page 325). CADWorx can
export the Bill of Material schedules to:
 Access file (*.mdb)
 Excel file (*.xls)
 Text file (*.txt)
 HTML file (*.htm)
When exporting data to Microsoft Excel, numeric data is exported as text and is preceded by a
single quote. This single quote prevents you from totaling the column in Excel. To correct this in
Excel, select the column and then select Data > Text To Columns. Step through the wizard
selecting the Delimited option and Tab as the Delimiter check box. This changes the data from
text to numbers. In Imperial/Inch settings, length is exported in feet and inches, which cannot be
totaled in Excel. To export length in decimal format, change the current AutoCAD Dimension
Style settings Primary Units format to decimal.
1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Export .

You can also type SBOMEXPORT in the command line.
2. Specify if you want a Cut, Total, or Single BOM.
3. Select the objects to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.
4. In the Save as type box, select the file format that you want.
5. Type the file name, and specify the folder location.
6. Click Save.

Setup Live Database Steel

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM / DB > Setup
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Setup
Command line: SLIVEDB
CADWorx supports a fully functional live external database. Use this command to define the
database settings that are saved to the configuration file listed. When a drawing is opened and a
configuration file is located in the same folder, the drawing initializes according to that
configuration file using a live database or not.
 When a component is deleted from the drawing and there is a live database active, that
component is marked for deletion in the database. When the drawing is closed, if the
drawing is not saved the item is not deleted from the database. If the drawing is saved, then
the item is deleted from the database.
 When a component or a group of components are copied from a drawing to a new drawing
that uses the same live database, the copied components are duplicated in the live database
with the new drawing name.
 When a component or a group of components are cut from a drawing and placed in another
drawing that uses the same live database, the components duplicate in the live database
with the new drawing name. When the old drawing is saved and closed any duplicate items
from the first drawing are deleted from the live database because they are no longer on the
first drawing.
 All changes to live database settings take effect in the next drawing session.
On/Off - Turns the live database system on and off. When on, all components drawn are
updated instantaneously to the database. Changes can be made in the drawing or in the
database. When off, all CADWorx component information is stored only within the drawing.
Database Type - Select the type of database to use as the live database. Depending on the
type chosen, the path to the database or schema is displayed.
Access Path - Defines the Microsoft Access database information. Click Create Table to create
the PIPE table in the database when creating a new database. Click Select File to specify an
existing database.
SQL Server Database Name and Schema - Defines the Microsoft SQL Server database
information. You must have already created the ODBC schemas (refer to the installation guide
for help). Type the database name in the Database box. Type the ODBC schema name in the
Schema box, either Plant_SQL_SERVER or Steel_SQL_SERVER.
Oracle Schema - Defines the Oracle database information. Type the ODBC schema name in
the Schema box.
Startup Dialog Options - Sets the database option on CADWorx startup.
 No dialog (new drawings are in Live DB) - Select to place new drawings automatically in
the database. Selecting this option requires that a new drawing be named and saved
immediately on creation. Drawings that use a live database must be in the same folder with
the appropriate configuration file.
 No dialog (new drawings are not in Live DB) - Select to not add new drawings to the
database. You can add drawings to the live database later using this command.
 Show dialog - Select to display a dialog box on which you can choose to use a database or
not.
Existing components in drawings can be added to the database by SDBFGEN. For more
information, see Export Steel (on page 335).

Export Steel
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Export
Command line: SDBFGEN
Exports CADWorx steel information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
the dialog display the file name and folder in use.

You can also type SDBFGEN in the command line.
2. Select the steel components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when
you are finished.
or
6. Click OK.
Import Steel
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM / DB > Import
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Import
Command line: SDBFIN
Imports and draws CADWorx steel components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
This command is not available when you are using a live database.
Use the Export Steel (on page 335) command to create the Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel
file to import.

1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Import .

You can also type SDBFIN in the command line.
2. Browse to and select the file to import.
3. Click Open.
The Select Drawings for Import dialog box displays.
5. Click OK.
Audit Steel Database

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM / DB > Audit
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Audit
Command line: SDBAUDIT
option to delete this component in the database or to simply ignore it.
1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Audit .

You can also type SDBAUDIT in the command line.
2. Browse to and select the file to audit against the drawing.
3. Click Open.
The message Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database displays.
The software prompts you to Apply to all.
6. Click Yes to apply to all.
OR
Click No to ignore.

Synchronize Steel Database

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM / DB > Synchronize
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Synchronize
Command line: SSYNC
are in the model but are not in the database. You need to use Setup Live Database Steel (on
page 334) before using this command.
SHORT_ANNOTATION, LONG_ANNOTATION, DESCRIPTION, PART_NUMBER, and
MATERIAL fields in the STEEL table. Changing any other column value does not have any
effect on the drawing.
1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize .

You can also type SSYNC in the command line.
Export Steel Model

Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Export
In CADWorx Steel Professional, Export is located under Steel menu > Utility > Export.
Command line: SEXPORT
Exports selected CADWorx steel components to one of three data format: CIS/2, CAESAR II, or
Robobat. The export to CIS/2 requires installing the "ST-Runtime" in [Product
Folder]\System\struntime.msi.

You can also type SEXPORT in the command line.
2. Select the steel components to export. Right-click or press ENTER when you are finished.
The Select Export Output File Type dialog box displays.
3. Select the file type to save in the Save as type box.
4. Specify the folder and file name, and then click Save.
If you selected CAESAR II, a prompt displays.
5. Enter the starting node number for the CAESAR II file.
6. Enter the node increment value.

Import Steel Model

CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM / DB > Import
Plant menu: Steel > Utility > Import
In CADWorx Steel Professional, Export is located under Steel menu > Utility > Import.
Command line: SIMPORT
Imports a CIS/2 data file and creates CADWorx steel components. The import requires that the
CADWorx steel parametric data file be available for the components that are being imported
from the CIS/2 file. This command requires installing the "ST-Runtime" from [Product
Folder]\System\struntime.msi.
1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Import .
You can also type SIMPORT in the command line.
2. Select the file to import.
3. Click Open.
CG Generator
CADWorx Steel tab: Steel BOM / DB > C.G. Generator
Steel toolbar: C.G. Generator
Plant menu: Steel > C.G. Generator

Command line: SCG
Calculates the center of gravity (CG) of the steel members (including plates) in a drawing. You
must select the members for which to calculate the center of gravity.
To combine center of gravity reports for piping and steel components, take the weight
summations and add them together. Then take each separate moment (ft-lb) X, Y, Z and add
them together separately. To find the new X centroid location, divide the total X moment by the
total weight. To find the new Y and Z centroid location, divide them by the total weight.
1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click C.G. Generator .

You can also type SCG in the command line.
2. Select the members to cope. Type All in the command line to select all the members in
drawing. Press ENTER or right-click when you are finished.
3. Select Yes to save the center of gravity report to a text file. Provide the file name and folder
information if you choose to save the report.
4. Select Yes to view the weight summation in the command area.
5. Select Yes to place a smaller round marker in the drawing indicating the calculated center of
gravity.

SECTION 22
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel

CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB
HVAC Shapes - Places HVAC and cable tray shapes in the HVAC
drawing. For more information, see HVAC (on page 340).
HVAC Shapes Catalog - Places HVAC shapes and cable tray HVACC
shapes that are defined in a data file library. For more information,
see HVAC Shapes Catalog (on page 342).
User Shape - Places a component using a custom user shape. HUSER

For more information, see User Shape (on page 345).
Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD HGENERIC

object in the drawing. For more information, see Generic Attach
(on page 348).
Edit - Edits HVAC or cable tray shapes. For more information, see HCEDIT
Edit (on page 350).
GC Edit - Edits global HVAC component data. For more HGCEDIT

information, see GC Edit (on page 350).
HVAC BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to HBOMSETUP

any style or layout that you need. For more information, see HVAC
BOM Setup (on page 351).
Cut HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing HBOMCUT

each piece of HVAC with a length and a tag. For more information,
see Cut HVAC Bill of Material (on page 354).
Total HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one HBOMTOTAL
tag for a total length of HVAC in each size. For more information,
see Total HVAC Bill of Material (on page 355).
Single HVAC BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with HBOMSINGLE

each selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see
Single HVAC Bill of Material (on page 357).
Data Remove - Removes CADWorx data from components. For HDATAREMOVE

more information, see Data Remove (on page 358).

Layer Change - Changes the solid and centerline layers HLAYERCHANGE

associated with components. For more information, see Layer
Change (on page 358).
DB Generate - Exports CADWorx HVAC information to a HDBFGEN

DB Generate (on page 359).
DB In - Imports and draws CADWorx HVAC components from a HDBFIN

DB In (on page 360).
Audit HVAC Database - Maintains the database for each HDBAUDIT

component in the drawing that has data attached. For more
information, see Audit HVAC Database (on page 360).
Synchronize HVAC Database - Checks all components in the HSYNC

drawing and updates them according to the current value in the
database. For more information, see Synchronize HVAC Database
(on page 361).
HVAC
CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > HVAC Shapes
Plant menu: HVAC > Shapes
Command line: HVAC
Places HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing. Double-click an existing HVAC shape to
modify the parameters.
Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing.
Select Shape - Lists the available shapes. Select a shape from the list to place it in the drawing.
The Dimensions values update to match the selected shape.
Dimensions - Displays a dimensioned preview of the selected shape. Type dimension values
for the drawing in the A through K boxes. All dimensions are in the current units set. Dimension
boxes that are not required are disabled.
Options
Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the shape wall. This value is required when the Inside
dimensions box is selected or the shape is Hollow or Open top.
Inside Dimensions - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the Thickness value
added to all the necessary dimensions in the A through K boxes. If this option is cleared, the
dimensions of the shape do not include the Thickness value.
Solid - Indicates that the software draws the shape as a solid. This is the default setting.
Hollow - Indicates that the software draws the shape as hollow.

Open top - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the top open. You cannot use this
option with oval shapes.
Open bottom - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the bottom open. You cannot
use this option with oval shapes.
Creating a large number of HVAC shapes with the Hollow or Open top options in a
single drawing can significantly increase the drawing size.
Details
Long annotation - Specifies the long annotation description for the shape.
Part number - Specifies the part number for the shape.
Tag - Specifies the tag description for the shape.
There is no automatic method for creating long annotation, part number, tag, or weight.
Select lines - Places the square straight or oval straight shape along an existing polyline in the

Controls parameters for modifying HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing.
Select Shape - Lists the available shapes. Select a shape from the list to place it in the drawing.
The Dimensions values update to match the selected shape.
Options
Details



 Add an HVAC shape to the drawing (on page 342)
 Modify an HVAC shape (on page 342)
Add an HVAC shape to the drawing

1. Click HVAC Shapes . Alternatively, type HVAC on the command line, and press ENTER.
The Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape dialog box displays.
2. Select the shape to place from the Select Shape list.
The preview and dimensions for that shape display in the Dimensions boxes.
3. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements.
5. Select the first point for the shape.
6. Select the end point for the shape.
Modify an HVAC shape

1. Double-click an HVAC shape in the drawing.
The Component Edit dialog box displays the parameters associated with the shape.
2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC (on
page 340).
3. Click Apply.
The software changes the parameters of the shape.
HVAC Shapes Catalog

CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > HVAC Shapes Catalog
Command line: HVACC
Places HVAC shapes and cable tray shapes that are defined in a data file library. Double-click
an existing HVAC shape to modify the parameters.

Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape Dialog Box

Select Data File - Specifies the data file that contains the components to place. The list
contains all the data files located in the folder defined by the HVACLibraryDirectory (on page 34)
startup variable. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder.
CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units.
Select Type - Specifies the shape to place. The list contains the folders defined by the
HVACLibraryDirectory (on page 34) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.INI file specifying
the shape type in that folder (Square Straight, Oval Straight, and so forth).
Part Name - Specifies the part name for the shape.
Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the MATERIAL= value
in the data file header.
Area - Specifies the area of the shape.
Manual - Indicates that the software uses the manual override value rather than the value from
the catalog.

Component Edit Dialog Box (Catalog)

Select Data File - Specifies the data file that contains the components to place. The list
contains all the data files located in the folder defined by the HVACLibraryDirectory (on page 34)
startup variable. You can have a mix of metric and imperial data files in the same folder.
CADWorx automatically converts the selected data file to the proper drawing units.
Select Type - Specifies the shape to place. The list contains the folders defined by the
HVACLibraryDirectory (on page 34) startup variable. In each folder is a Type.INI file specifying
the shape type in that folder (Square Straight, Oval Straight, and so forth).
Options
Details
Part Name - Specifies the part name for the shape.
Material - Specifies the material for the component. The default value is the MATERIAL= value
in the data file header.
Area - Specifies the area of the shape.
Manual - Indicates that the software uses the manual override value rather than the value from
the catalog.

 Place an HVAC shape from the catalog (on page 345)
 Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog (on page 345)

Place an HVAC shape from the catalog

1. Click HVAC Shapes Catalog . Alternatively, type HVACC on the command line, and
press ENTER.
The Draw HVAC/Cable Tray Shape dialog box displays.
2. Select the data file to use from the Select Data file list.
The software populates the Select Type list with the available types.
3. Select the type of shape to use from the Select Type list.
The software populates the Select Member list with the available members.
4. Select the member to use from the Select Member list.
The preview and dimensions for that shape display in the Dimensions boxes.
5. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC
Shapes Catalog (on page 342).
Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog

2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see HVAC
Shapes Catalog (on page 342).
3. Click Apply.
User Shape
CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > User Shape
Command line: HUSER
Places a component using a custom user-defined shape. You select the component to draw
based on an existing user-shape DWG file. The extrusion direction and distance is based on
points picked or a line selected in the drawing. You can edit the roll angle along with the
standard annotations.
For user shapes to work, an ASCII file named Type.INI must be in the same folder as the user
shape drawing files. The Type.INI file must have TYPE=USER as the first line in the file. The
folder (...\CADWorx\Plant\\HVAC\) contains the user shape drawing files.

Shown below are the parameters stored in a user-created .DWG file that can be used to create
a user shape. The user shape profile must be a closed polyline or an AutoCAD Region entity.
After you select the shape from the dialog box, you can pick points or select a line to determine
the extrusion length.
The default insert location for the user shape is 0,0,0. To specify a different insert location, add
an AutoCAD POINT entity to the profile .DWG to locate the insert point.
User Shapes Dialog Box

Controls parameters for placing user-defined shapes in the drawing.

Roll Angle - Specifies the roll angle about the placement line for the shape. Do not use
AutoCAD commands (ROTATE, MIRROR, 3DROTATE) to change the roll angle of the shape.
The roll angle of the shape can only be set from the User Shapes dialog box.

Controls parameters for modifying user-defined shapes in the drawing.
Roll Angle - Specifies the roll angle about the placement line for the shape.
Manual Update - Indicates that the software uses the manual override value rather than the
value from the drawing.

 Place a user-defined HVAC shape (on page 348)
 Modify a user-defined HVAC shape (on page 348)

Place a user-defined HVAC shape

1. Click User Shape . Alternatively, type HUSER on the command line, and press ENTER.
The HVAC User Shapes dialog box displays.
2. Select the folder that contains the Type.INI data file to use from the Select Directory list.
The software populates the Select Member list with the available shapes.
3. Select the shape to use from the Select Member list.
The preview and details for that shape display in the Details boxes.
4. Set up the shape parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see User
Shape (on page 345).
Modify a user-defined HVAC shape

2. Change the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see User Shape
(on page 345).
3. Click Apply.
Generic Attach
CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Generic Attach
Command line: HGENERIC
information on a beam and have it correctly reflect the center of gravity, draw a centerline and
pick MIDpoint, NEArest to the end of the centerline, or the exact location.
Generic Attach (Create/Edit) Dialog Box

Controls parameters for attaching information to generic AutoCAD objects.
Long Annotation - Specifies the long annotation for the component, such as W6X25.
Description - Specifies the description for the component, such as Wide Flange.

Short Annotation - Specifies the short annotation for the component, such as W6.
Part number - Specifies the part number for the component, such as 12345.
Material - Specifies the material for the component, such as ASTM A-36.
Length - Specifies the length of the component. Any real number is valid.
Weight - Specifies the weight of the component. Any real number is valid.
attached.
point.
gravity point.
to zero.
to zero.
to zero.

 Place a generic attachment in the drawing (on page 349)
 Modify a generic attachment
Place a generic attachment in the drawing

1. Click Generic Attach . Alternatively, type HGENERIC on the command line, and press
ENTER.
The Generic Attach (Create) dialog box displays.
2. Set up the attachment parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see
3. Click Attach.
4. Select the non CADWorx object to which to attach the information.

Specify the Bill of Material Mark Point and the Center of Gravity Location
The Generic Attach (Edit) dialog box displays.
6. Click OK.
Edit
CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Edit
Command line: HCEDIT
Edits HVAC or cable tray shapes. This command displays the same dialog box that was used to
place the shape. You cannot change the object shape using this command. For more
information, see HVAC (on page 340).
GC Edit
CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > GC Edit
Command line: HGCEDIT
Edits global HVAC component data.
HVAC Global CEdit Dialog Box

Controls parameters for editing global HVAC component data.
Alter solid - Specifies whether the way the components are drawn can be changed.
Open Bottom - Indicates that the software draws the shape with the bottom open. You cannot

Edit HVAC components globally

1. Click GCEdit . Alternatively, type HGCEDIT on the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select the objects to edit, and press ENTER.
The HVAC Global CEdit dialog box displays.
3. Set up the parameters to meet your requirements. For more information, see GC Edit (on
page 350).
4. Click OK.
The software applies the parameters to the selected components.
HVAC BOM Setup

CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Setup
Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Setup
Command line: HBOMSETUP
box, you can specify column widths, provide the schedule direction (up or down), provide user-
specified headings for columns, allow alignment of columns, and the selection of different
entries into the schedule. You can arrange the columns in any order.
Table Setup Tab

BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a HVAC component that you can include
in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.
Columns Selected lists.
the columns. Use Sort Order Setup tab to define the sort order.

Sort Order Setup Tab

BOM Columns Available - Lists all the information on a HVAC component that you can include
in the BOM. These columns can be added to any schedule template in any order using Add.
Columns Selected lists.
the columns. Use Sort Order Setup tab to define the sort order.


1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Setup . Alternatively, type HBOMSETUP in
the command line, and press ENTER.
The HVAC Bill of Material Setup dialog box displays.
2. To add a property to the BOM, select the property in the BOM Columns Available list, and
then click Add.
3. To remove a property from the BOM, select the property in the BOM Columns Selected
list, and then click Remove.
4. Click OK.


4. Click OK.

column.
5. Click OK.

2. Select the Sort Order Setup tab.
to A.
6. Click OK.

Cut HVAC Bill of Material

CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Cut
Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Cut
Command line: HBOMCUT
Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each HVAC component with a length and a tag.
tags.



1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Cut . Alternatively, type HBOMCUT in the
3. Type the placement angle for the tag, and press ENTER.
5. Select the HVAC components to include in the BOM. Right-click or press ENTER when you
are finished.

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Cut . Alternatively, type HBOMCUT in the
are finished.
Total HVAC Bill of Material

CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Total
Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Total
Command line: HBOMTOTAL
Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for a total length of HVAC components in
each size. Identical long annotation items are accumulated in the length column.
tags.



1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Total . Alternatively, type HBOMTOTAL in
are finished.

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Total . Alternatively, type HBOMTOTAL in
are finished.

Single HVAC Bill of Material

CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Single
Plant menu: HVAC > Bill of Material > Run > Single
Command line: HBOMSINGLE
schedule.
tags.



1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Single . Alternatively, type HBOMSINGLE
in the command line, and press ENTER.
are finished.

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Single . Alternatively, type HBOMSINGLE
in the command line, and press ENTER.
are finished.
Data Remove
CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Data Remove
Command line: HCDATAREMOVE
Removes CADWorx data from components.
Remove CADWorx data from components

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Data Remove . Alternatively, type
HDATAREMOVE in the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select the objects from which to remove the CADWorx data, and press ENTER.
A dialog box displays asking if you are sure that you want to remove the data.
3. Click Yes.
The software removes the CADWorx data from the selected components.
Layer Change
CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Layer Change
Command line: HLAYERCHANGE
Changes the solid and centerline layers associated with components.

Change the layers associated with HVAC components

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Layer Change . Alternatively, type
HLAYERCHANGE in the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select the objects to change, and press ENTER.
3. If you want to change the solid layer, type Y in the command line, or select Yes from the
popup menu.
The Please select Layer dialog box displays.
4. Select the layer with which to associate the solid part of the component, and click OK.
5. If you want to change the centerline layer, type Y in the command line, or select Yes from
the popup menu.
The Please select Layer dialog box displays.
6. Select the layer with which to associate the centerline of the component, and click OK.
The software changes the layers.
DB Generate
CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > DB Generate
Command line: HDBFGEN
Exports CADWorx HVAC information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
Select Database Type Dialog Box

Controls parameters for exporting CADWorx HVAC component information.
the dialog display the file name and directory in use.
Directory - Displays the location of the database file.
Access File - Displays the name of the database file.
Excel File - Displays the name of the database file.

Export CADWorx HVAC data

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click DB Generate . Alternatively, type
HDBFGEN in the command line, and press ENTER.
2. Select the HVAC components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when
you are finished.
or
6. Click OK.
DB In
CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > DB In
Command line: HDBFIN
Imports and draws CADWorx HVAC components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel
file. This command is not available when you are using a live database.
Use the DB Generate (on page 359) command to create the Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel
file to import.
Import CADWorx HVAC data

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click DB In . Alternatively, type HDBFIN in the
2. Select the file to import.
3. Click Open.
The records dialog box displays.
5. Click OK.
Audit HVAC Database

CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Audit
Command line: HDBAUDIT
option to delete this component in the database or to ignore it.

Audit the HVAC database

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Audit . Alternatively, type HDBAUDIT in the
2. Select the file to audit against the drawing.
3. Click Open.
Checking objects in this drawing with rows in the database.
Synchronize HVAC Database

CADWorx HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Synchronize
Command line: HSYNC
are in the model but are not in the database.
SHORT_ANNOTATION, LONG_ANNOTATION, DESCRIPTION, PART_NUMBER, and
MATERIAL fields in the HVAC table. Changing any other column value does not have any effect
on the drawing.
Synchronize the HVAC database

1. On the HVAC Draw / BOM / DB panel, click Synchronize . Alternatively, type HSYNC in

SECTION 23
Toolbars
In This Section
Accessing and Docking the Toolbars ............................................ 362
Aliases and Command Names ...................................................... 363
Connecting to components ............................................................ 363
Compass ........................................................................................ 363
Plane versus Isometrics view modes ............................................ 363
3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling .................................................. 363
Buttweld ......................................................................................... 364
Flanges .......................................................................................... 395
Flgd/BW Valves ............................................................................. 409
Lined .............................................................................................. 423
Fiberglass ...................................................................................... 428
Sanitary .......................................................................................... 446
Victaulic ......................................................................................... 481
Threaded/Socket ........................................................................... 485
Thrd/SW Valves ............................................................................. 518
Gaskets, Etc. ................................................................................. 532
Pipe Ends ...................................................................................... 534
Restraints ....................................................................................... 534
Misc................................................................................................ 535
Operators ....................................................................................... 542
Line Numbers ................................................................................ 542
UCS ............................................................................................... 543
Steel ............................................................................................... 544
Settings .......................................................................................... 546
Palettes .......................................................................................... 548
Accessing and Docking the Toolbars

Toolbars duplicate commands available on the CADWorx Plant I and CADWorx Plant II tabs.
You may find it useful to open toolbars containing frequently-used commands when screen
space for the tab is limited.
To open a Plant toolbar, click Plant > Toolbars, and select the needed toolbar. You can also
open an alternate set of toolbars from View tab > Windows panel > Toolbars > PIPEALT,
PIPEFLY, or PIPERIB.
To dock a toolbar, drag it to any edge of the window. Press CTRL to drag a toolbar without
docking it. You can then drag a toolbar off of the window space.
The AutoCAD Toolbar command opens the Customize User Interface dialog box. You
can choose any needed toolbars for AutoCAD or CADWorx Plant.

Toolbars
Aliases and Command Names

Ribbon, toolbar, and menu commands have a command name that you can type in the
command line.
A command alias is an abbreviation that you type at the command line instead of typing the
entire command name. Command aliases created for Plant are delivered in the [Product
Folder]\Plant\Support\Flow_alt.pgp file.
You can change alias names but should avoid conflicts with aliases already defined in the .pgp
file for AutoCAD.
Connecting to components
In connecting to components, Piping Rules effect the behavior of prompts when set to No or
Show Options. If selecting a component from a palette or toolbar, the selected component
prompts you if unable to derive information from the surrounding components due to the piping
rules. When the rules are set to Automatic, the process is simplified for connecting components
to appropriate valued objects. For instance, when inserting a flange to a pipe, if both have the
same size and specification you are not prompted and the flange inserts automatically. For more
information, see Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 49) or all other Piping Rules (on page
47). Prompts depend on the settings you have chosen for the piping rules. Also, you may be
prompted in certain situations based on the components of the model. Most of the components
are built to work as smart objects. They connect using the previous information of the last point
of a component. If you change sizes while working with a component, you are prompted
accordingly. In addition, you may not receive prompts based on the actions of connection to
components. Prompts depend on the actions you take, and some prompts appear only when not
connecting to a previous component.
Compass
Enables 360 degree navigation for placement of components. You can turn the compass on and
off in Setup (on page 25). You are also provided with the option to change the color. When the
compass is turned on the screen displays a circle around the components when they are pulled
into the drawing space.
Plane versus Isometrics view modes

When plotting components using Plane views, some prompts appear differently when working in
3D Solids then when plotting components in Isometric views. This is based on the directional
limitations of those views. The prompts do not differ when you are working in 2D Double Line or
2D Single Line. All commands in the following sections are based off the isometrics view for all
modes of modeling.
3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling

The CADWorx option for working in 3D modeling and 2D modeling is set up in the CADWorx
Plant Setup dialog box. All commands on the toolbars work in both modes, however some
commands are ideally designed for working in 3D mode versus working in 2D mode. The
commands are grouped according to which commands are better suited for either 3D modeling
or 2D modeling. You can use the commands as needed, but in 3D modeling some of the
commands better suited for 2D have the same response as those better suited for 3D. For more
information, see Setup (on page 25) and CADWorx Plant Setup Dialog Box.

Toolbars
Buttweld
Plant menu: Toolbars > Buttweld
The commands on the Buttweld toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus
2D Modeling (on page 363).
Pipe - Places a butt-welded pipe component. For more PIPW

information, see Pipe (on page 368).
Plan 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in the 90LR

X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 LR Ell (on page
368).
Plan 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in the 90SR

X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 SR Ell (on page
369).
Plan 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. For 45LR
more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 370).
Plan 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow in 90RD

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 Reducing Ell
(on page 370).
Plan Tee - Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane. For more TESW
information, see Plan Tee (on page 371).
Plan Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee in the X-Y TERW
plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Tee (on page
372).
Plan 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return 18LR
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 180 LR
Return (on page 372).
Plan 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return 18SR
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 180 SR
Return (on page 373).
Conc Reducer - Places a concentric reducer component in CONC

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Conc Reducer (on
page 373).
Ecc Reducer - Places an eccentric reducer component in the ECC

X-Y plane. For more information, see Ecc Reducer (on page
374).

Toolbars
Cap - Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For more CAPW
information, see Cap (on page 374).
Plan Cross - Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y CRSW

plane. For more information, see Plan Cross (on page 375).
Plan Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross in CRRW

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing
Cross (on page 375).
Plan Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee in the X-Y plane. LATW
For more information, see Plan Lateral (on page 376).
Miters - Places a mitered pipe component in the X-Y plane. MPIP

For more information, see Miters (on page 376).
Rolled Pipe - Places a free-form pipe component, such as a SPIP

hose or flexible connection. For more information, see Rolled
Pipe (on page 377).
Adjustable Bend - Places an adjustable pipe bend. For more BENT

information, see Adjustable Bend (on page 378).
90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow with the end R90LR
rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more
information, see 90 LR Ell (on page 379).
90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow with the R90SR

end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more
information, see 90 SR Ell (on page 380).
45 LR Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow with the end rolled at a R45LR

45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more information,
see 45 LR Ell (on page 381).
Tee - Places a tee with the branch rolled at a 45 degree angle RTESW
from the X-Y plane. For more information, see Tee (on page
381).
Plan 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y 11LR
plane. For more information, see Plan 11.25 Ell (on page 382).
Plan 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. 22LR
For more information, see Plan 22.5 Ell (on page 382).
Plan Wye - Places a wye in the X-Y plane. For more YB

information, see Plan Wye (on page 383).

Toolbars
The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.
Side 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow normal H90LR

to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90 LR Ell (on
page 383).
Side 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow H90SR

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 90
SR Ell (on page 384).
Side 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y H45LR

plane when the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Side 45 Ell (on page 384).
Vert 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y V45LR

plane when the previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Vert 45 Ell (on page 385).
Side 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow H90RD

Reducing Ell (on page 385).
Side Tee - Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the HTESW
X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Tee (on page 386).
Vert Tee - Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X- VTESW
Y plane. For more information, see Vert Tee (on page 386).
Side Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the HTERW
branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Side Reducing Tee (on page 387).
Vert Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the VTERW
main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert
Reducing Tee (on page 387).
Side 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return H18LR
normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Side 180 LR Return (on page 388).
Vert 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return V18LR
normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 180 LR Return
(on page 388).
Side 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return H18SR
normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Side 180 SR Return (on page 389).

Toolbars
Vert 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return V18SR
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 180 SR Return
(on page 389).
Side Cross - Places a four-way straight cross with the branch HCRSW
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Cross
(on page 390).
Side Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross HCRRW

with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Side Reducing Cross (on page 390).
Vert Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross with VCRRW

the main branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Vert Reducing Cross (on page 391).
Side Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee in the X-Y plane HLATW
with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information,
see Side Lateral (on page 391).
Vert Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee with the main VLATW
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert
Lateral (on page 392).
Side 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the H11LR
X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 11.25 Ell (on page
392).
Vert 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the V11LR
X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 11.25 Ell (on page
393).
Side 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y H22LR
plane. For more information, see Side 22.5 Ell (on page 393).
Vert 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y V22LR
plane. For more information, see Vert 22.5 Ell (on page 394).
Side Wye - Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches HYB
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Wye
(on page 394).
Vert Wye - Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the VYB
branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Vert Wye (on page 395).

Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Pipe
Buttweld toolbar: Pipe
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tubing
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Pipe
Command line: PIPW
You can also now use PIPW1 for buttweld piping, PIPF1 for socket weld or threaded
piping, and PIPFL1 for flanged piping, to draw singular pipe. PIPW starts the pipe router.
Places a pipe component in the X-Y plane.
Center - Places the pipe along the center of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis
Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis
Place a pipe
1. Click a pipe component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
3. Click to select an ending point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
The pipe component is drawn.
Plan 90 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 LR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 LR Ell

Command line: 90LR
Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point.
Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.

Toolbars
Place a 90 degree plan elbow

1. Click a 90 degree plan elbow component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, or select an option. The system prompts vary based on the
selection.
3. Click in the direction of the corner.
4. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow.
The elbow component is drawn.
Plan 90 SR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 SR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 SR Ell

Command line: 90SR
Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in the X-Y plane.

selection.

Toolbars
Plan 45 Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Plan 45 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 45 Ell

Command line: 45LR
Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan elbow

1. Click a plan elbow command.
2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
Plan 90 Reducing Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 Reducing Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 Reducing Ell

Command line: 90RD
Places a 90 degree reducing elbow in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end. For this component, this
option switches to the reducing side.

Toolbars
Place a 90 degree reducing plan elbow

1. Click a 90 degree reducing plan elbow component command.
2. To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select otherEnd.
Plan Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Tee

Command line: TESW
Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane.
Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.
Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.
Place a plan tee

1. Click a plan tee command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the main of the tee.
4. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee.
The tee component is drawn.

Toolbars
Plan Reducing Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Plan Reducing Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Reducing Tee
Command line: TERW
Places a straight reducing tee in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan tee
Plan 180 LR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 180 LR Return
Command line: 18LR
Places a 180 degree long radius return in the X-Y plane.
Place a 180 degree plan return

1. Click a 180 degree plan return component command.
3. Click in the direction of the bend of the return.
4. Click in the direction of the end of the return.
The return component is drawn.

Toolbars
Plan 180 SR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 180 SR Return
Command line: 18SR
Places a 180 degree short radius return in the X-Y plane.
Place a 180 degree plan return

1. Click a 180 degree plan return component command.
4. Click in the direction of the end of the return.
Conc Reducer
Buttweld toolbar: Conc Reducer
Victaulic toolbar: Conc Reducer

Command line: CONC
Places a concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point.
Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point.
If you are connecting to another component where the large end is the same size as the
last component, press ENTER to attach to the last component drawn.
Place a concentric reducer

1. Click a concentric reducer component command.
2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the small end of the reducer.
The reducer component is drawn.

Toolbars
Ecc Reducer
Buttweld toolbar: Ecc Reducer
Victaulic toolbar: Ecc Reducer

Command line: ECC
Places an eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the flat side of the reducer in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the flat side of the reducer in the negative Z direction.
Place an eccentric reducer

1. Click an eccentric reducer component command.
or
Select Small end, and press ENTER.
3. Click in the direction of the other end of the reducer.
4. To place the flat side in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the flat side.
or
To place the flat side in the Z direction, select Up or Down.
Cap
Buttweld toolbar: Cap
Victaulic toolbar: Cap

Command line: CAPW
Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
Cap end - Places the top of the cap at the start point.
Place a cap
1. Click a cap component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the cap.
The cap component is drawn.

Toolbars
Plan Cross
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Cross

Command line: CRSW
Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.
Branch - Places the branch of the cross at the start point.
Place a plan cross

1. Click a four-way straight cross command.
3. Click in the direction of the cross.
The cross component is drawn.
Plan Reducing Cross

Buttweld toolbar: Plan Reducing Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Reducing Cross

Command line: CRRW
Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane.
Branch - Places the reducing branch of cross tee at the start point.
Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the cross.
Place a plan reducing cross

1. Click a four-way plan reducing cross command.

Toolbars
Plan Lateral
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Lateral
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Lateral
Command line: LATW
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main.
Branch - Places the branch of the lateral at the start point.
Place a plan lateral

1. Click a plan lateral command.
3. Click in the direction of the main of the lateral.
4. Click in the direction of the branch of the lateral.
The lateral component is drawn.
Miters
Buttweld toolbar: Miters
Command line: MPIP
Places a mitered pipe component in the X-Y plane. The pipe is placed on a 2D polyline created
with Polyline . A miter is placed on the pipe at each vertex of the polyline. For more
information, see PLINE in AutoCAD Help.
This command can also be used to create pipe with bends. For more information, see
CHAMFER in AutoCAD Help.
Mitered pipe cannot be placed on a 3D polyline created with 3D Polyline . For more
information, see 3DPOLY in AutoCAD Help.

Toolbars
Place a mitered pipe

1. On the Draw panel of the Home tab, click Polyline .
2. Draw the needed polyline.
3. Click Miters .
4. Select the polyline.
The mitered pipe component is drawn.
Rolled Pipe
Buttweld toolbar: Rolled Pipe
Command line: SPIP
Places a free-form pipe component, such as a hose or flexible connection. The pipe is placed on
a 2D polyline created with Polyline and edited with the Fit or Spline options of Edit
Polyline . For more information, see PLINE and PEDIT in AutoCAD Help.
Fit Example
Spline Example
Rolled pipe cannot be placed on a 3D polyline created with 3D Polyline . For more
information, see 3DPOLY in AutoCAD Help.

Toolbars
Place a rolled pipe

1. On the Draw panel of the Home tab, click Polyline .
2. Draw the needed polyline.
3. On the Modify panel, click Edit Polyline .
5. Select Fit or Spline.
6. Click Rolled Pipe .
Adjustable Bend
Buttweld toolbar: Adjustable Bend
Command line: BENT
Places a pipe bend based on the selected method: Enter radius, Trimmed elbow, or Select
arc.
Enter radius - Places a pipe bend by typing a radius, and then selecting the bend center, start,
and end points in a counterclockwise direction. This is the most common type of adjustable
bend.
 Degree - Defines the total angle of the bend from the start point. For example, if the start
point is at 91°, and the value for Degree is 180°, the end point is at 271° and the total angle
of the bend is 180°.
 Angle - Defines the angle of the bend as the value minus the angle defined by the start point
from the positive X-axis. For example, if the start point is at 91°, and the value for Angle is
180°, the end point is at 180° and the angle of the bend is 79°.
 Tangent length - Defines straight lengths of pipe at each end of the bend. This is frequently
required for machine bending. You can type a value of 0.
Trimmed elbow - Places an elbow by selecting the center of the bend arc, the start point, and
the end point.
 Short radius - Defines a short radius elbow according to the current specification.
 Long radius - Defines a long radius elbow according to the current specification.
Select arc - Places a pipe bend on an arc created with an arc command. For more information,
see Draw Arcs in AutoCAD Help.
 Tangent length - Defines straight lengths of pipe at each end of the bend. This is frequently
required for machine bending. You can type a value of 0.

Toolbars
Place an adjustable bend
Enter Radius
1. Click Adjustable Bend on the Buttweld toolbar in the Miters drop-down. Alternatively,
type BENT on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Type a radius on the command line, and then press ENTER.
3. Select a center point.
4. Select a first direction.
5. Select a second direction.
6. Type a Tangent length on the command line, and then press ENTER.
The adjustable bend displays in the drawing.
Select Arc
1. Draw an AutoCAD arc.
3. Click Select Arc.
4. Select the arc in the drawing.
5. Type a Tangent length on the command line, and then press ENTER.
Trimmed Elbow
2. Select Trimmed Elbow.
3. Select a corner point.
4. Select a first direction.
5. Select a second direction.
6. Select Long radius or Short radius.
90 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: 90 LR Ell
Command line: R90LR
Places a 90 degree long radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y
plane.

Toolbars

Up - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the positive Z direction.
Down - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.
 This command is only available for welded fittings.

 The elbow centerline is out-of-plane. You must use an AutoCAD UCS command to obtain
the proper plane before modifying the elbow. For more information, see UCS in AutoCAD
Help.
Place a 90 degree rolled elbow

1. Click a 90 degree rolled elbow component command.
90 SR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: 90 SR Ell
Command line: R90SR
Places a 90 degree short radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y
plane.

Help.

1. Click a 90 degree rolled elbow component command.

Toolbars
45 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: 45 LR Ell
Command line: R45LR
Places a 45 degree elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane.
This command is only available for welded fittings.

Help.

1. Click 45 LR Ell .
Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Tee
Command line: RTESW
Places a tee with the branch rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane.
Up - Rotates the branch of the tee 45 degrees in the positive Z direction.
Down - Rotates the branch of the tee 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.
This command is only available for welded fittings.
Place a rolled tee

1. Click a rolled tee command.
5. Select Up or Down.

Toolbars
Plan 11.25 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 11.25 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 11.25 Ell

Command line: 11LR
Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan elbow

Plan 22.5 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Plan 22.5 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 22.5 Ell
Command line: 22LR
Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan elbow


Toolbars
Plan Wye
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Wye
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Wye
Command line: YB
Places a wye in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and the branches of the wye.
Branch - Places the branch of the component at the start point.
Place a plan wye

1. Click a plan wye command.
3. Click in the direction of the wye.
The wye component is drawn.
Modeling in 2D
Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only
in a 2D drawing.
Side 90 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 LR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 LR Ell

Command line: H90LR
Places a 90 degree long radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.

Toolbars
Place a side or vertical elbow

1. Click a side or vertical elbow component command.
Side 90 SR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 SR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 SR Ell

Command line: H90SR
Places a 90 degree short radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane.

Side 45 Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Side 45 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 45 Ell
Command line: H45LR
Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or
next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.

Toolbars

Vert 45 Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Vert 45 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Vert 45 Ell
Command line: V45LR
next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.
Side 90 Reducing Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 Reducing Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 Reducing Ell

Command line: H90RD
Places a 90 degree reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Small - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point.

Toolbars
Place a side reducing elbow

1. Click a side reducing plan elbow component command.
2. To optionally place the reducing end first, right-click and select Small.
Side Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Side Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Side Tee
Command line: HTESW
Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.
Place a side tee

1. Click a side tee component command.
Vert Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Vert Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Tee

Command line: VTESW
Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at
the start point by default.

Toolbars
Place a vertical tee

1. Click a vertical tee component command.
Side Reducing Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Side Reducing Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Side Reducing Tee

Command line: HTERW
Places a straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side tee

Vert Reducing Tee

Buttweld toolbar: Vert Reducing Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Reducing Tee

Command line: VTERW
Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is
placed at the start point by default.

Toolbars

Side 180 LR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Side 180 LR Return
Command line: H18LR
Places a 180 degree long radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y
plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the return at the center point of the arc of the return.
Up - Places the return bend in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the return bend in the negative Z direction.
Place a 180 degree side return

1. Click a 180 degree side return component command.
Vert 180 LR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 180 LR Return
Command line: V18LR
Places a 180 degree long radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal
to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the return direction in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the return direction in the negative Z direction.

Toolbars
Place a 180 degree vertical return

1. Click a 180 degree vertical return component command.
Side 180 SR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Side 180 SR Return
Command line: H18SR
Places a 180 degree short radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y
plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the return bend in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the return bend in the negative Z direction.
Place a 180 degree side return

1. Click a 180 degree side return component command.
Vert 180 SR Return

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 180 SR Return
Command line: V18SR
Places a 180 degree short radius return normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also
normal to the X-Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the return direction in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the return direction in the negative Z direction.

Toolbars
Place a 180 degree vertical return

1. Click a 180 degree vertical return component command.
Side Cross
Buttweld toolbar: Side Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Side Cross

Command line: HCRSW
Places a four-way straight cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side cross

1. Click a four-way straight side cross command.
Side Reducing Cross

Buttweld toolbar: Side Reducing Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Side Reducing Cross

Command line: HCRRW
Places a four-way reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side reducing cross
1. Click a four-way side reducing cross command.

Toolbars
Vert Reducing Cross

Buttweld toolbar: Vert Reducing Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Reducing Cross

Command line: VCRRW
Places a four-way reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the cross
is placed at the start point by default.
Branch - Places the reducing branch of the cross tee at the start point.
Place a vertical reducing cross

1. Click a four-way vertical reducing cross command.
Side Lateral
Buttweld toolbar: Side Lateral
Victaulic toolbar: Side Lateral

Command line: HLATW
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.
Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.
Place a side lateral

1. Click a side lateral component command.

Toolbars
Vert Lateral
Buttweld toolbar: Vert Lateral
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Lateral

Command line: VLATW
Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is
Place a vertical lateral

1. Click a vertical lateral component command.
Side 11.25 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 11.25 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 11.25 Ell

Command line: H11LR
Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or


Toolbars
Vert 11.25 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 11.25 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Vert 11.25 Ell
Command line: V11LR
Side 22.5 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Side 22.5 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 22.5 Ell

Command line: H22LR
Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or

Toolbars
Vert 22.5 Ell

Buttweld toolbar: Vert 22.5 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Vert 22.5 Ell

Command line: V22LR

Side Wye
Buttweld toolbar: Side Wye
Victaulic toolbar: Side Wye

Command line: HYB
Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. This command is
typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and branches of the wye.
Place a side wye

1. Click a side wye command.
3. Click in the direction of the wye main.

Toolbars
Vert Wye
Buttweld toolbar: Vert Wye
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Wye
Command line: VYB
Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. This
command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a vertical wye

1. Click a vertical wye command.
3. Click in the direction of the wye branches.
Flanges
Plant menu: Toolbars > Flanges
Weld Neck - Places a weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. For FLGW
more information, see Weld Neck Flange (on page 396).
Slip On - Places a slip-on flange in the X-Y plane. For more FLGO
information, see Slip-On Flange (on page 398).
Blind - Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane. For more FLGB
information, see Blind Flange (on page 399).
Socket Weld - Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. FLGS
For more information, see Socket Type Flange (on page 400).
Threaded - Places a threaded flange in the X-Y plane. For FLGT

more information, see Threaded Flange (on page 401).
Lap Joint - Places a lapped-joint flange in the X-Y plane. For FLGL
more information, see Lap Joint Flange (on page 403).
Stub End - Places a stub-end coupling component in the X-Y STB

plane. For more information, see Stub End (on page 403).

Toolbars
Long Weld Neck - Places a long weld neck component in the LWN
X-Y plane. For more information, see Long Weld Neck (on
page 404).
Reducing Slip On - Places a reducing slip on flange in the X- FLRO

Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Slip-on Flange
(on page 404).
Reducing Threaded - Places a reducing threaded flange in FLRT

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Threaded
Flange (on page 406).
Reducing Weld Neck - Places a reducing weld neck flange in FLRW

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Weld Neck
Weld Neck Flange

Flanges toolbar: Weld Neck
Command line: FLGW
Places a weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto
Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 206). Gaskets can also be added
to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion
Rule (on page 48).
last point - Starts the plain end of the flange at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Buttweld end - Starts the flange at the buttweld end. This option appears when the previously
placed component (such as another flange) would logically take the face end as the start point
for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite
direction.
Face end - Starts the flange at the face end. This option appears when the previously placed
component (such as a pipe) would logically take the butt-welded end as the start point for the
flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.

 Place a flange on a pipe (on page 397)
 Place a flange that mates with another flange (on page 397)

Toolbars
Place a flange on a pipe

1. Place a pipe component.
Place a pipe (on page 368)
2. Click a flange component command.
3. Click to select a starting point at an end of the pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect
to the last point.
The flange component is drawn.
Flanges do not have a bolt or gasket automatically added unless the proper piping
rule is set. You must also have a set of flanges for this to occur. For more information, see
Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 48), Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 49), or Auto
Gasket (on page 206).
.
For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 363).
Place a flange that mates with another flange

1. Place a pipe and a flange.
Place a flange on a pipe (on page 397)
3. Click to select a starting point at the end of the existing flange. Alternatively, press ENTER
to connect to the last point.
The flange component is drawn with the face mating to the face of the existing flange.
rule is set. For more information, see Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 48), or Apply
Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 49).

Toolbars
Slip-on Flange
Flanges toolbar: Slip On
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Flange

Command line: FLGO
Places a slip-on flange in the X-Y plane. If Auto Gasket is turned on, then a gasket is also
placed on the flange. For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 206).
component.
Slip on end - Starts the flange at the slip-on end. This option appears when the previously
direction.
component (such as a pipe) would logically take the slip-on end as the start point for the flange.
Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.


to the last point.
.

Toolbars

Blind Flange
Flanges toolbar: Blind
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Blind Flange

Lined toolbar: Lined Blind Flange
Command line: FLGB
Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane.
Place a flange
2. Click to select a starting point. This must be another flange component; otherwise, the
system prompts you to add another flange. If prompted, select a flange from the list, and
skip step 3.
If you selected a Stub End or a Long Weld Neck the system prompts you to define
the length. Type the length as needed, and skip step 3.
3. Click to select the direction of the flange.
Some of the system prompts you may receive are based on the settings you have
defined in the piping rules for Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 49) and Default Flange
Insertion Type.

Toolbars
Socket Type Flange

Flanges toolbar: Socket Weld
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flange

Command line: FLGS
Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto
Rule (on page 48).
Socket end - Starts the flange at the Socket end.
Face end - Starts the flange at the face end.


to the last point.
.

Toolbars

Threaded Flange
Flanges toolbar: Threaded
Command line: FLGT
Places a threaded flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto
Rule (on page 48).
Thread end - Starts the flange at the threaded end.
Face end - Starts the flange at the face end.


Toolbars

to the last point.
.


Toolbars
Lap Joint Flange

Flanges toolbar: Lap Joint
Command line: FLGL
Places a lapped-joint flange in the X-Y plane.
Place a flange
2. Click to select a starting point. This must be another flange component; otherwise, the
system prompts you to add another flange. If prompted, select a flange from the list, and
skip step 3.
If you selected a Stub End or a Long Weld Neck the system prompts you to define
the length. Type the length as needed, and skip step 3.
3. Click to select the direction of the flange.
Some of the system prompts you may receive are based on the settings you have
defined in the piping rules for Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 49) and Default Flange
Insertion Type.
Stub End
Flanges toolbar: Stub End
Command line: STB
Places a stub-end coupling component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 206). Gaskets can also
be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
Insertion Rule (on page 48).
Length - Defines the length of the stub-end. If no length is defined, the default value from the
current specification is used.
Plan end - Starts the stub at the plain end.
Face end - Starts the stub at the face end.
Place a stub or weld neck

1. Click a stub or weld neck component command.
2. If needed, select Length and type a length for the component.
3. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to
the last point.
The component is drawn.

Toolbars
Long Weld Neck

Flanges toolbar: Long Weld Neck
Command line: LWN
Places a long weld neck component in the X-Y plane.
Length - Defines the length of the stub-end. If no length is defined, the default value from the
current specification is used.
Plan end - Starts the stub at the plain end.
Face end - Starts the stub at the face end.
Place a stub or weld neck

1. Click a stub or weld neck component command.
2. If needed, select Length and type a length for the component.
3. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to
the last point.
Reducing Slip-on Flange

Flanges toolbar: Reducing Slip On
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Flange
Command line: FLRO
Places a reducing slip-on flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 206). Gaskets can also be
added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
component.
Reducing end - Starts the flange at the reducing end. This option appears when the previously
direction.
component (such as a pipe) would logically take the reducing end as the start point for the


Toolbars

to the last point.
.


Toolbars
Reducing Threaded Flange

Flanges toolbar: Reducing Threaded
Command line: FLRT
Places a reducing threaded flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.
direction.


to the last point.
.

Toolbars

Reducing Weld Neck Flange

Flanges toolbar: Reducing Weld Neck
Command line: FLRW
Places a reducing weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
component.
direction.


Toolbars

to the last point.
.


Toolbars
Flgd/BW Valves
Plant menu: Toolbars > Flgd/BW Valves
 The commands on the Flgd/BW Valves toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling
versus 2D Modeling (on page 363).
 It is possible to add multiple pressure and ratings to valves in the Specification Editor. For
more information, see New and Edit Component Pane in the CADWorx Spec Editor User's
Guide.
 If you draw a valve with multiple ratings in CADWorx Plant and then attach a flange, the
software prompts you when the flange and the valve rating do not match. You can select
Yes to override and insert the flange. Optionally, select No, and then insert a flange with a
matching rating.
Gate - Places a gate valve component in the X-Y plane. For GATF
more information, see Gate Valve (on page 411).
Ball - Places a ball valve component in the X-Y plane. For BALF
more information, see Ball Valve (on page 411)
Globe - Places a globe valve component in the X-Y plane. For GLBF
more information, see Globe Valve (on page 412).
Plug - Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. For PLUF
more information, see Plug Valve (on page 413).
Check - Places a check valve component in the X-Y plane. CHKF

For more information, see Check Valve (on page 413).
Butterfly - Places a butterfly valve component in the X-Y BFYF

plane. For more information, see Butterfly Valve (on page
414).
Diaphragm - Places a diaphragm valve and flange gasket DIAF

component in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Diaphragm Valve (on page 415).
Rotary - Places a rotary valve component in the X-Y plane. ROTF

For more information, see Rotary Valve (on page 415).
Dual Check - Places a dual check valve and flange gasket DCHF
components in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Dual
Check Valve (on page 416).

Toolbars
Control - Places a control valve component in the X-Y plane. CNTF

For more information, see Control Valve (on page 416).
3 Way Plan - Places a three-way valve component in the X-Y 3VF

plane. For more information, see 3-Way Plan Valve (on page
417).
4 Way Plan - Places a four-way valve component in the X-Y 4VF

plane. For more information, see 4-Way Plan Valve (on page
418).
Relief Side - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve in the RELF

X-Y plane. For more information, see Relief Side Valve (on
page 418).
Angle Top - Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. ANGF
For more information, see Angle Top Valve (on page 419).
3 Way Side - Places a three-way valve component with the H3VF

valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see 3-Way Side Valve (on page 420)
3 Way Vertical - Places a three-way valve component with V3VF

the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
3-Way Vertical Valve (on page 420).
4 Way Side - Places a four-way valve component with the H4VF

valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. For. more
information, see 4-Way Side Valve (on page 421)
Relief Top - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the HRELF
relief end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Relief Top Valve (on page 421)
Pressure Top - Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with VRELF

the pressure end normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Pressure Top Valve (on page 422).
Angle Side - Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. HANGF
For more information, see Angle Side Valve (on page 422).

Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Gate Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Gate
Command line: GATF
Places a gate valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Ball Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Ball
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Ball Valve

Command line: BALF
Places a ball valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.

Toolbars
Place a valve
Globe Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Globe
Command line: GLBF
Places a globe valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Plug Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Plug
Victaulic toolbar: Sanitary Plug Valve
Command line: PLUF
Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.
Center - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
Check Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Check
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Check Valve

Command line: CHKF
Places a check valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.

Toolbars
Place a valve
Butterfly Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Butterfly
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Butterfly Valve

Command line: BFYF
Places a butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Diaphragm Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Diaphragm
Command line: DIAF
Places a diaphragm valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
component.
Place a valve
Rotary Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Rotary
Command line: ROTF
Places a rotary component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto
Rule (on page 48).
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Dual Check Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Dual Check
Command line: DCHF
Places a dual check valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
component.
Place a valve
Control Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Control
Command line: CNTF
Places a control valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
component.
Length - Specifies the length of the valve.
Center - Places the valve at its center.

Toolbars
Place a valve
3-Way Plan Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Plan
Command line: 3VF
Places a three-way valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
last point - Starts the plain end of the component at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the valve.
Branch - Places the branch of the valve at the start point.
Place a 3-way plan valve

1. Click a three-way valve command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press
ENTER to connect to the last point and skip the next step.
3. Click in the direction of the main of the valve. This prompt only appears when you are not
connecting to a component in the model.
4. Click in the direction of the branch of the valve.

Toolbars
4-Way Plan Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 4 Way Plan
Command line: 4VF
Places a four-way valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
component.

1. Click a four-way plan valve command.
ENTER to connect to the last point.
3. Click in the direction of the valve.
Relief Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Relief Side
Command line: RELF
Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve in the X-Y plane.
Length - Defines the length of the pressure side and the relief side of the valve.
Pressure - Places the pressure end of the valve at the start point.
Relief - Places the relief end of the valve at the start point.

Toolbars
Place an angle valve

1. Click an angle or relief valve component command.
4. Click in the direction of the branch or relief end of the valve.
Angle Top Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Angle Top
Command line: ANGF
Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using


Toolbars
Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
3-Way Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Side
Command line: H3VF
Places a three-way valve component with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. You can
place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on
page 206). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components
by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 48).
component.
Up - Places the branch of the valve in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch of the valve in the negative Z direction.
Place a 3-way side valve

1. Click a three-way side valve component command.
3. Click in the direction of the main of the valve.
3-Way Vertical Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 3 Way Vertical
Command line: V3VF
Places a three-way valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. You can place
gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page
206). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by
setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 48).
component.
Place a 3-way vertical valve

1. Click a three-way vertical valve component command.

Toolbars
4-Way Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: 4 Way Side
Command line: H4VF
Places a four-way valve component with the valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. You can
place gaskets on flange sets using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on
page 206). Gaskets can also be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components
by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 48).
component.
1. Click a four-way side valve command.
Relief Top Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Relief Top
Command line: HRELF
Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the X-Y plane.
Relief - Places the relief end at the start point.
Place an angle side valve

1. Click an angle or relief side valve component command.

Toolbars
Pressure Top Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Pressure Top
Command line: VRELF
Places a 90 degree pressure relief valve with the pressure end normal to the X-Y plane.

Angle Side Valve

Flanged Valves toolbar: Angle Side
Command line: HANGF
Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using


Toolbars
Lined
Plant menu: Toolbars > Lined
The commands on the Lined toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
Lined Pipe - Places a flanged and lined pipe component in PIPFL

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lined Pipe (on page
426).
Lined 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree flanged and lined 90FL

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 90
Degree Elbow Plan (on page 437).
Lined 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined 45FL

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged 45
Degree Elbow Plan (on page 438).
Lined Tee Plan - Places a flanged and lined tee in the X-Y TEFL
plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on page
438).
Lined Reducing Tee Plan - Places a flanged and lined TERE

reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Reducing Tee Plan (on page 456).
Lined Concentric - Places a flanged and lined concentric CNFL

reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Flanged Concentric Reducer (on page 439).
Lined Eccentric - Places a flanged and lined eccentric ECFL

see Lined Eccentric Reducer (on page 426).
Lined Wye Plan - Places a flanged and lined wye in the X-Y YFL
plane. For more information, see Lined Wye Plan (on page
427).
Lined Cross Plan - Places a four-way flanged and lined cross CRSE
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Plan (on
page 456).
Lined Reducing Cross Plan - Places a four-way flanged and CRRE

lined reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Cross Reducing Plan (on page 457).

Toolbars
Lined Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined LATE

lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral
Plan (on page 457).
Lined Spacer - Places a lined spacer in the X-Y plane. For BLD
more information, see Bleed Ring or Spacer (on page 538).
Lined Reducing Flange - Places a lined reducing flange in FLRO

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Slip-on
Lined Blind Flange - Places a lined blind flange in the X-Y FLGB
plane. For more information, see Blind Flange (on page 399).
Lined 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree flanged and lined H90FL

elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side (on page 444).
Lined 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined H45FL

Lined 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined V45FL

Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 445).
Lined Tee Side - Places a flanged and lined tee with the HTEFL
Flanged Tee Side (on page 445).
Lined Tee Vert - Places a flanged and lined tee with the main VTEFL
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged
Tee Vertical (on page 446).
Lined Reducing Tee Side - Places a flanged and lined HTERE

reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Reducing Tee Side (on page 471)
Lined Reducing Tee Vert - Places a flanged and lined VTERE

reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Reducing Tee Vertical (on page 472).

Toolbars
Lined Wye Side - Places a flanged and lined wye on the X-Y HYFL
plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Lined Wye Side (on page 427).
Lined Wye Vert - Places a flanged and lined wye normal to VYFL
the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane
For more information, see Lined Wye Vert (on page 428).
Lined Cross Side - Places a four-way flanged and lined cross HCRSE
with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Cross Side (on page 472).
Lined Reducing Cross Side - Places a four-way flanged and HCRRE

lined reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-
Y plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Side (on
page 472).
Lined Reducing Cross Vert - Places a four-way flanged and VCRRE

lined reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Cross Reducing Vertical (on page
473).
Lined Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined HLATE

lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z
plane. For more information, see Lateral Side (on page 473).
Lined Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree flanged and lined VLATE

lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Lateral Vertical (on page 474).
 The specification for lined pipe components is delivered in the <Units>_Lined_Specs.prj file
in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder.
 The FLGS column in the flanged component data files controls placement of flanges. A
value of 1 places a flange on the first end of the component. 2 places a flange on the second
end. 3 places flanges on both ends. 4 places a flange on the branch end of a tee or wye.
Other combinations of flanges are based on adding these values. For example, if the flanges
are needed on all ends of a tee, use 1 + 2 + 4 = 7.

Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Lined Pipe
Lined toolbar: Lined Pipe
Command line: PIPFL
Places a flanged and lined pipe component in the X-Y plane.
Flanged end - Places the flanged end of the pipe at the start point. This option is used when the
pipe has a flange on one end.
Plain end - Places the plain end of the pipe at the start point. This option is used when the pipe
has a flange on one end.
Length - Defines the length of the pipe. If no length is defined, the length is based on the start
and end points.
Place a pipe
Lined Eccentric Reducer

Lined toolbar: Lined Eccentric
Command line: ECFL
Places a flanged and lined eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
This command reverses the main and reduction sizes automatically after execution.

or
or

Toolbars
Lined Wye Plan

Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Plan
Command line: YFL
Places a flanged and lined wye in the X-Y plane.
Branch - Places the branch of the wye at the start point.
otherEnd - Places the component at the other end of the start point.
Place a plan wye

Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Lined Wye Side

Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Side
Command line: HYFL
Places a flanged and lined wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane.
This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Place a side wye


Toolbars
Lined Wye Vert

Lined toolbar: Lined Wye Vert
Command line: VYFL
Places a flanged and lined wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-
Y plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.

Fiberglass
Plant menu: Toolbars > Fiberglass
The commands on the Fiberglass toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
Pipe - Places a fiberglass pipe component. For more PIPF

information, see Fiberglass Pipe (on page 431).
FRP Bell 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket 90S

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan
Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow (on page 432).
FRP Bell 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket 45S

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 433).
FRP Bell Tee Plan - Places a straight threaded/socket tee TESS

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan (on page 433).
FRP Bell Conc w/Hub - Places a threaded/socket SWGCS

concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer (on
page 434).

Toolbars
FRP Bell Ecc w/Hub - Places an eccentric SWGES

threaded/socket reducer component in the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer
(on page 434).
FRP Bell Cross Plan - Places a four-way threaded/socket CRSS

straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan (on page 435).
FRP Bell Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree LATS

threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan (on page
435).
FRP Bell Full Clpg Plan - Places a coupling in the X-Y CPS
plane. For more information, see Coupling (on page 436).
FRP Cap - Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y CAPS

plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Cap (on
page 436).
FRP Bush/Insert - Places a bushing in the X-Y plane. For BUSS

more information, see Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing (on
page 436).
Sock-O-Let - Places a sock-o-let in the X-Y plane. For SOL

more information, see Sock-O-Let (on page 437).
FRP Blind Flange - Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane. FLGB
For more information, see Blind Flange (on page 399).
FRP Flange - Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. FLGS
For more information, see Socket Type Flange (on page
400).
FRP Flanged 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree flanged 90FL

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged
90 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 437).
FRP Flanged 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree flanged 45FL

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged
45 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 438).
FRP Flanged Tee Plan - Places a flanged tee in the X-Y TEFL
plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on
page 438).
FRP Flanged Concentric - Places a flanged concentric CNFL

see Flanged Concentric Reducer (on page 439).

Toolbars
FRP Bell 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket H90S

Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow (on page 439).
FRP Bell 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket H45S

Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side (on page 440).
FRP Bell 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to V45S

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket
45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 440).
FRP Bell Tee Side - Places a straight threaded/socket tee HTESS

with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side (on
page 441).
FRP Bell Tee Vert - Places a straight threaded/socket tee VTESS

with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert (on
page 441).
FRP Bell Cross Side - Places a four-way straight HCRSS

threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Straight
Cross Side (on page 442)
FRP Bell Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree HLATS

threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in
the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see
Threaded/Socket Lateral Side (on page 442).
FRP Bell Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree VLATS

threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Threaded/Socket Lateral
Vert (on page 442).
FRP Bell Full Clpg End - Places a full coupling end VCPS
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Full
Coupling End (on page 443).
Saddle in Vertical - Places a soc-o-let with the main VSOL

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Saddle
in Vertical (on page 443).
FRP Flanged 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree flanged H90FL


Toolbars
FRP Flanged 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree flanged H45FL

FRP Flanged 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree elbow V45FL

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert (on page 445).
FRP Flanged Tee Side - Places a flanged tee with the HTEFL
Flanged Tee Side (on page 445).
FRP Flanged Tee Vert - Places a flanged tee with the VTEFL
main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Flanged Tee Vertical (on page 446).
You must set the <Units>_FRP_Specs.prj default specification that is supplied with CADWorx
for the icons to work on the toolbar.
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Fiberglass Pipe
Fiberglass toolbar: Pipe
Command line: PIPF
Ends - Specifies the end options for the starting and ending of the pipe.
 Threaded
 Bevel
 Plain
Center - Places the pipe along the center of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.

Toolbars
Place a fiberglass pipe

2. Click to select a starting point, or type the required coordinates in the command line, and
press ENTER.
3. Click to select an ending point, or type the required coordinates in the command line, and
press ENTER.
4. If prompted for an end type, type the required end type on the command line, and press
ENTER.
Plan Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 90 Ell Plan
Command line: 90S
Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow in the X-Y plane.
Start - Places the start point of the component at the default.

selection.

Toolbars
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Plan
Command line: 45S
Place a plan elbow
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Plan
Command line: TESS
Places a straight threaded/socket tee in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan tee


Toolbars
Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Conc w/Hub
Command line: SWGCS
Places a threaded/socket concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.

Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Ecc w/Hub
Command line: SWGES
Places an eccentric threaded/socket reducer component in the X-Y plane.

or
or

Toolbars
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Cross Plan
Command line: CRSS
Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan cross
Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Plan
Command line: LATS
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane.


Toolbars
Coupling
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Full Clpg Plan
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Coupling

Command line: CPS
Places a coupling in the X-Y plane.
Place a coupling
1. Click a coupling command.
3. Click in the direction of the coupling.
The coupling component is drawn.
Threaded/Socket Cap
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Cap
Command line: CAPS
Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
Place a cap
Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bush/Insert
Command line: BUSS
Places a bushing in the X-Y plane.
Large end - Places the large end at the start point of the component.
Small end - Places the small end at the start point of the component.
Place a bushing
1. Click a bushing component command.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the bushing.
The bushing component is drawn.

Toolbars
Sock-O-Let
Fiberglass toolbar: Sock-O-Let
Command line: SOL
Places a sock-o-let in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan sock-o-let

1. Click a sock-o-let component command.
3. Click to select the direction of the sock-o-let.
The software draws the sock-o-let component on the model.
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 90 Ell Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined 90 Ell Plan

Command line: 90FL
Places a 90 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.

selection.

Toolbars
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Plan
Command line: 45FL
Places a 45 degree flanged elbow in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan elbow
Flanged Tee Plan

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Plan
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Strainer
Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Plan
Command line: TEFL
Places a flanged tee or strainer in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the component at the centerline intersection of the main and the branches of
the component.
Branch - places the start point at the branch of the component.
Place a plan flanged tee

1. Click a plan flanged tee command.

Toolbars
Flanged Concentric Reducer

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Concentric
Lined toolbar: Lined Concentric
Command line: CNFL
Places a flanged concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.

Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 90 Ell Side
Command line: H90S
Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane.


Toolbars
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Side
Command line: H45S
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when
the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.

Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Vert

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell 45 Ell Vert
Command line: V45S


Toolbars
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Side
Command line: HTESS
Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side tee

Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Tee Vert
Command line: VTESS
Places a straight threaded/socket tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the
tee is placed at the start point by default.


Toolbars
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Cross Side
Command line: HCRSS
Places a four-way straight threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side cross

Threaded/Socket Lateral Side
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Side
Command line: HLATS
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z
plane.
Threaded/Socket Lateral Vert
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Lateral Vert
Command line: VLATS
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of
the lateral is placed at the start point by default.

Toolbars

Full Coupling End

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Full Clpg End
Command line: VCPS
Places a full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the coupling in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the coupling in the negative Z direction.
Place a coupling end

1. Click a coupling end component command.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the coupling.
Saddle in Vertical
Fiberglass toolbar: Saddle in Vertical
Command line: VSOL
Places a soc-o-let with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at
Up - Places the top of the soc-o-let in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the top of the soc-o-let in the negative Z direction.
Place a vertical soc-o-let

1. Click a vertical soc-o-let component command.
The soc-o-let component is drawn.

Toolbars
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 90 Ell Side
Lined toolbar: Lined 90 Ell Side
Command line: H90FL
Places a 90 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Side
Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Side
Command line: H45FL
Places a 45 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the
previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.


Toolbars
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged 45 Ell Vert
Lined toolbar: Lined 45 Ell Vert
Command line: V45FL
Places a 45 degree flanged elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the
previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.
Flanged Tee Side

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Side
Victaulic toolbar: Side Strainer
Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Side
Command line: HTEFL
Places a flanged tee or strainer with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the strainer at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.
Place a side flanged tee
1. Click a side flanged tee component command.

Toolbars
Flanged Tee Vertical

Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Flanged Tee Vert
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Strainer

Lined toolbar: Lined Tee Vert
Command line: VTEFL
Places a flanged tee or strainer with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the strainer
is placed at the start point by default.
Place a vertical strainer

1. Click a vertical flanged tee component command.
Sanitary
Plant menu: Toolbars > Sanitary
The commands on the Sanitary toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
Sanitary Tubing - Places a butt-welded sanitary tubing PIPW

component. For more information, see Pipe (on page 368).
Sanitary 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree elbow in the X-Y 90EN

plane. For more information, see Sanitary 90 Ell Plan (on page
453).
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree reducing 90RE

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 90
Reducing Ell Plan (on page 454).
Sanitary 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow in 45EN

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 45 Ell Plan
(on page 455).

Toolbars
Sanitary Tee Plan - Places a straight sanitary tee in the X-Y TESE
plane. For more information, see Sanitary Tee Plan (on page
455).
Sanitary Reducing Tee Plan - Places a sanitary reducing tee TERE

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Reducing Tee
Plan (on page 456).
Sanitary Cross Plan - Places a four-way sanitary cross in the CRSE

X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Plan (on page
456).
Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan - Places a four-way sanitary CRRE

reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Cross Reducing Plan (on page 457).
Sanitary Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral in LATE

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Lateral Plan (on
page 457).
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan - Places a 45 degree LARE

sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan (on page
458).
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan - Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow 22EN
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary 22.5 Ell
Plan (on page 458).
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan - Places an 11.25 degree sanitary 11EN

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary
11.25 Ell Plan (on page 459).
Sanitary U-Bend Plan - Places a 180 degree u-bend in the X- UBEN

Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary U-Bend Plan (on
page 459).
Sanitary Concentric - Places a sanitary concentric reducer CONCE

Sanitary Concentric (on page 460).
Sanitary Eccentric - Places a sanitary eccentric reducer ECCE

Sanitary Eccentric (on page 460).
Sanitary Stub - Places a sanitary stub coupling component in STUE

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Stub (on
page 461).

Toolbars
Sanitary Wye Plan - Places a sanitary wye in the X-Y plane. YE

For more information, see Sanitary Wye Plan (on page 461).
Sanitary Cap - Places a sanitary pipe cap in the X-Y plane. CAPE
For more information, see Sanitary Cap (on page 462).
Sanitary Nut/Coupling - Places a sanitary nut/coupling in the NUTE

X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Nut/Coupling
(on page 462).
Sanitary Gate Valve - Places a sanitary gate valve GATE

Sanitary Gate Valve (on page 463).
Sanitary Ball Valve - Places a sanitary ball valve component BALE

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary Ball
Valve (on page 463).
Sanitary Globe Valve - Places a sanitary globe valve GLBE

Sanitary Globe Valve (on page 464).
Sanitary Plug Valve - Places a sanitary plug valve PLUE

Sanitary Plug Valve (on page 464).
Sanitary Check Valve - Places a sanitary check valve CHKE

Sanitary Check Valve (on page 465).
Sanitary Butterfly Valve - Places a sanitary butterfly valve BFYE

Sanitary Butterfly Valve (on page 465).
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan - Places a sanitary 3-way valve 3VE

Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan (on page 466).
Sanitary Angle Valve Plan - Places a 90 degree sanitary ANGE

angle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Sanitary Angle Valve Plan (on page 466).
Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve - Places a one-port pneumatic AIR1

actuator air valve. For more information, see Sanitary Multi 1
Port Valve (on page 467).

Toolbars
Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve - Places a two-port pneumatic AIR2

Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve - Places a three-port pneumatic AIR3

Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side - Places a 90 degree reducing H90RE

Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side (on page 469).
Sanitary 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow H45EN

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary
45 Ell Side (on page 469).
Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical - Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow V45EN

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary
45 Ell Vertical (on page 470).
Sanitary Tee Side - Places a straight sanitary tee with the HTESE
Sanitary Tee Side (on page 470).
Sanitary Tee Vertical - Places a straight sanitary tee with the VTESE
main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Sanitary Tee Vertical (on page 471).
Sanitary Reducing Tee Side - Places a sanitary reducing tee HTERE

with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Reducing Tee Side (on page 471)
Sanitary Reducing Tee Vertical - Places a sanitary reducing VTERE

tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Reducing Tee Vertical (on page 472).
Sanitary Cross Side - Places a four-way sanitary cross with HCRSE

the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Cross Side (on page 472).
Sanitary Reducing Cross Side - Places a four-way sanitary HCRRE

reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Side (on
page 472).

Toolbars
Sanitary Cross Reducing Vertical - Places a four-way VCRRE

sanitary reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Cross Reducing Vertical (on page
473).
Sanitary Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral in HLATE

the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For
more information, see Lateral Side (on page 473).
Sanitary Lateral Vertical - Places a 45 degree sanitary lateral VLATE

with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Lateral Vertical (on page 474).
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side - Places a 45 degree HLARE

sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in
the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more information, see Sanitary
Lateral Reducing Side (on page 474).
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical -Places a 45 degree VLARE

sanitary reducing lateral with the main normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Sanitary Lateral Reducing
Vertical (on page 475).
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side - Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow H22EN
normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run is
horizontal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side (on page 475).
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical - Places a 22.5 degree elbow V22EN

vertical to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary
22.5 Ell Vertical (on page 476).
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side - Places an 11.25 degree sanitary H11EN

elbow normal to the X-Y plane when the previous or next run
is horizontal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side (on page 476).
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical - Places an 11.25 degree elbow V11EN

vertical to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary
11.25 Ell Vertical (on page 477).
Sanitary U-Bend Side - Places a 180 degree u-bend normal HUBEN

to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Sanitary U-Bend Side (on page 477).

Toolbars
Sanitary U-Bend Vertical - Places a 180 degree u-bend VUBEN

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary U-Bend
Sanitary Wye Side - Places a sanitary wye on the X-Y plane HYE
with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Sanitary Wye Side (on page 478).
Sanitary Wye Vertical - Places a sanitary wye normal to the VYE

X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Sanitary Wye Vertical (on page 479).
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side - Places a 3-way valve H3VE

component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side (on page 479).
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical - Places a sanitary 3-way V3VE

valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical (on page
479).
Sanitary Angle Valve Side - Places a 90 degree sanitary HANGE

angle valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Sanitary Angle Valve Side
(on page 480).
Sanitary fitting components can have many end types, such as butt-welded, flanged, ferrule,
coupling, hub, square, bull, and a simple engagement used with threaded and socket-welded
piping. The end types can also vary for each end of a fitting, as shown in the examples below.

Toolbars
The available end types are defined by the selected specification, and the prompts for each
command reflect the end type used. Available end types are shown below.
End types are delivered in the files End1.dwg through End17.dwg in the [Product
Folder]\Plant\Support folder.
The multi-port valves have special port controls in the data files. Listed below are all the port
types available for these valves. When all three ports are specified in the data file, all three ports
are drawn on the drawing. When only one or two ports are required, place 0 in the last port
entries and this supplies either a one or two port valve.

Toolbars
CADWorx end types are exported to ISOGEN as shown in the following table.
CADWorx End Type ISOGEN End Type
0 PL (Plain)
1 BW (Butt weld)
2 FL (Flanged)
3 LN (Liner/Nut)
4 LN (Liner/Nut)
5 MP (Male Part)
6 MP (Male Part)
7 MP (Male Part)
8 MP (Male Part)
9 CL (Clamped)
10 CL (Clamped)
11 CL (Clamped)
12 CL (Clamped)
13 CL (Clamped)
14 SW (Socket Weld)
15 SC (Screwed)
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Sanitary 90 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Ell Plan
Command line: 90EN
Places a 90 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point.
The end type is defined by the current specification.

Toolbars

selection.
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan
Command line: 90RE
Places a 90 degree sanitary reducing elbow in the X-Y plane.


Toolbars
Sanitary 45 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Plan
Command line: 45EN
Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan elbow
Sanitary Tee Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Plan
Command line: TESE
Places a straight sanitary tee in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the tee at the start point.
Place a plan tee

Toolbars
Reducing Tee Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Plan
Command line: TERE
Places a reducing tee in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the tee at the start point.
Place a plan tee

Cross Plan
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined Cross Plan

Command line: CRSE
Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane.
Center - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the cross at the start point.
Branch1 - Places the first branch of the cross at the start point.
Branch2 - Places the second branch of the cross at the start point.

Toolbars
Place a plan cross

Cross Reducing Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Plan

Command line: CRRE
Places a four-way reducing cross in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the cross at the start point.
Place a sanitary plan reducing cross

1. Click Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan .
4. Click in the direction of the branch end.
Lateral Plan
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Plan

Command line: LATE
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point.
Branch - Places the branch end of the lateral at the start point.

Toolbars

Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan
Command line: LARE
Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point. The end type is defined by the
current specification.

Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan
Command line: 22EN
Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.

Toolbars
Place a plan elbow

Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan
Command line: 11EN
Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan elbow
Sanitary U-Bend Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Plan
Command line: UBEN
Places a 180 degree u-bend in the X-Y plane. The bend also has a branch the projects up or
down in the Z direction.
Middle - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the
Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.

Toolbars
Place a sanitary u-bend

1. Click Sanitary U-Bend Plan .
3. Click in the direction of the bend.
4. Click in the direction of the end of the bend.
The bend component is drawn.
Sanitary Concentric
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Concentric
Command line: CONCE
Places a sanitary concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
Large end - Places the large end of the reducer at the start point.
Small end- Places the small end of the reducer at the start point.
Sanitary Eccentric
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Eccentric
Command line: ECCE
Places a sanitary eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
Large end - Places the large end of the reducer at the start point.
Small end- Places the small end of the reducer at the start point.

Toolbars

or
or
Sanitary Stub
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Stub
Command line: STUE
Places a sanitary stub coupling component in the X-Y plane.
Plan end - Places the plan end at the start point.
Face end - Places the face end at the start point.
Place a coupling
1. Click a coupling component command.
3. Click in the direction of the end of the coupling.
Sanitary Wye Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Plan
Command line: YE
Places a sanitary wye in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Places the end of the wye at the start point. The end type is defined by the current
specification.

Toolbars
Place a plan wye

Sanitary Cap
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cap
Command line: CAPE
Places a sanitary pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
Place a cap
Sanitary Nut/Coupling
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Nut/Coupling
Command line: NUTE
Places a sanitary nut/coupling in the X-Y plane.
Place a coupling

Toolbars
Sanitary Gate Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Gate Valve
Command line: GATE
Places a sanitary gate valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the
Place a valve
Sanitary Ball Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Ball Valve
Command line: BALE
Places a sanitary ball valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Sanitary Globe Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Globe Valve
Command line: GLBE
Places a sanitary globe valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Sanitary Plug Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Plug Valve
Command line: PLUE
Places a sanitary plug valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Sanitary Check Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Check Valve
Command line: CHKE
Places a sanitary check valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Sanitary Butterfly Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Butterfly Valve
Command line: BFYE
Places a sanitary butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan
Command line: 3VE
Places a sanitary three-way valve component in the X-Y plane.
component.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the valve at the start point.
Sanitary Angle Valve Plan

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Angle Valve Plan
Command line: ANGE
Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve in the X-Y plane.


Toolbars
Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve
Command line: AIR1
Places a one-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane.
Up - Places the valve actuator in the positive Z direction.
Place a multi-port valve

1. Click a multi-port valve component command.
3. To place the valve actuator in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the actuator.
or
To place the valve actuator normal to the X-Y plane, select Up.
4. Type a value to rotate the valve about the actuator body axis.

Command line: AIR2
Places a two-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane.

or

Command line: AIR3
Places a three-port pneumatic actuator air valve with the actuator in or normal to the X-Y plane.

Toolbars

or
Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Sanitary 90 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Ell Side
Command line: H90EN
Places a 90 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Plan end - Places the plan end of the elbow at the start point.


Toolbars
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side
Command line: H90RE
Places a 90 degree sanitary reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
ENgagement end - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point.
Sanitary 45 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Side
Command line: H45EN
Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
FErrule end - Places the ferrule end of the elbow at the start point.


Toolbars
Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical
Command line: V45EN
Places a 45 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the
previous or next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.
Sanitary Tee Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Side
Command line: HTESE
Places a straight sanitary tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
FErrule End - Places the other end of the tee at the start point.
Place a side tee

Toolbars
Sanitary Tee Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tee Vertical
Command line: VTESE
Places a straight sanitary tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is

Reducing Tee Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Side
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Side
Command line: HTERE
Places a reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Plan end - Places the plan end of the tee at the start point.
Place a side tee


Toolbars
Reducing Tee Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Tee Vertical
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Tee Vert
Command line: VTERE
Places a reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at

Cross Side
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Side
Lined toolbar: Lined Cross Side
Command line: HCRSE
Places a four-way straight cross with the branches normal to the X-Y plane.
Flanged - Places the flanged end of the cross at the start point.
Place a side cross
Cross Reducing Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Reducing Cross Side
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Side
Command line: HCRRE
Places a four-way reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Flanged - Places the flanged end of the cross at the start point.

Toolbars
Place a sanitary side reducing cross

1. Click Sanitary Reducing Cross Side .
4. Click in the direction of the <type> end of the branch.
Cross Reducing Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Reducing Vertical
Lined toolbar: Lined Reducing Cross Vert
Command line: VCRRE
Places a four-way reducing cross with the main normal to the X-Y plane.
ENgagement branch end point - Places the engagement branch at the start point.
Place a vertical reducing cross

1. Click a four-way vertical reducing cross command.
Lateral Side
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Side
Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Side
Command line: HLATE
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.
coupLing End - Places the coupling end of the lateral at the start point.


Toolbars
Lateral Vertical
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Vertical
Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Vert
Command line: VLATE
Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is

Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side
Command line: HLARE
Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z
plane.
coupLing end - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point.


Toolbars
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical
Command line: VLARE
Places a 45 degree sanitary reducing lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center
of the lateral is placed at the start point by default.

Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side
Command line: H22EN
Places a 22.5 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the


Toolbars
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical
Command line: V22EN
FErrule end - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by
the current specification.
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side
Command line: H11EN
Places an 11.25 degree sanitary elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the
FErrule End - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by

Toolbars
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical
Command line: V11EN
FErrule end - Places the other end of the elbow at the start point. The end type is defined by

Sanitary U-Bend Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Side
Command line: HUBEN
Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane. This
command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.
Center - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend.
<Type> End - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the
Place a sanitary side or vertical u-bend

1. Click Sanitary U-Bend Side or Sanitary U-Bend Vertical .
5. Click in the direction of the branch.

Toolbars
Sanitary U-Bend Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary U-Bend Vertical
Command line: VUBEN
Places a 180 degree u-bend normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to the X-Y
plane. This command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Center - Places the bend at the center point of the arc of the bend.
<Type> End - Places the other end of the bend at the start point. The end type is defined by the
Place a sanitary side or vertical u-bend

1. Click Sanitary U-Bend Side or Sanitary U-Bend Vertical .
5. Click in the direction of the branch.
Sanitary Wye Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Side
Command line: HYE
Places a sanitary wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. This
command is typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
Place a side wye


Toolbars
Sanitary Wye Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Wye Vertical
Command line: VYE
Places a sanitary wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane.
This command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.

Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side
Command line: H3VE
Places a three-way valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
component.
ENgagement end - Places the engagement end of the valve at the start point.

Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical
Command line: V3VE
Places a sanitary three-way valve component with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center
of the valve is placed at the start point by default.
FErrule branch end point - Places the ferrule end of the valve at the start point.

Toolbars

Sanitary Angle Valve Side

Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Angle Valve Side
Command line: HANGE
Places a 90 degree sanitary angle valve component with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
ENgagement end - Places the engagement end of the valve at the start point.


Toolbars
Victaulic
Plant menu: Toolbars > Victaulic
The commands on the Victaulic toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
Pipe - Places a victaulic pipe component. For more PIPW

information, see Pipe (on page 368).
Plan 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in 90LR

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 LR Ell
(on page 368).
Plan 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in 90SR

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90 SR Ell
(on page 369).
Plan 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane. 45LR

For more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 370).
Plan 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow 90RD

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 90
Side 90 Reducing Ell - Places a 90 degree reducing elbow H90RD

Plan 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow in the X-Y 11LR
plane. For more information, see Plan 11.25 Ell (on page
382).
Plan 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y 22LR
plane. For more information, see Plan 22.5 Ell (on page
382).
Plan Tee - Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane. For more TESW
information, see Plan Tee (on page 371).
Plan Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee in the TERW

X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Tee
(on page 372).
Plan Cross - Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y CRSW

plane. For more information, see Plan Cross (on page
375).

Toolbars
Plan Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross CCRW

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing
Cross (on page 375).
Plan Wye - Places a wye in the X-Y plane. For more YB

information, see Plan Wye (on page 383).
Plan Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane. LATW

For more information, see Plan Lateral (on page 376).
Plan Strainer - Places a strainer in the X-Y plane. For TEFL

more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on page 438).
Conc Reducer - Places a concentric reducer component in CONC

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Conc Reducer
(on page 373)
Ecc Reducer - Places an eccentric reducer component in ECC

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Ecc Reducer (on
page 374).
Victaulic Cap - Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane. For CAPW
more information, see Cap (on page 374).
Victaulic Coupling - Places a coupling in the X-Y plane. CPS

For more information, see Coupling (on page 436).
Victaulic Flange - Places a flange in the X-Y plane. For FLGO

more information, see Slip-On Flange (on page 398).
Victaulic Butterfly Valve - Places a butterfly valve BFYF

Butterfly Valve (on page 414).
Victaulic Check Valve - Places a check valve component CHKF

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Check Valve
(on page 413).
Victaulic Ball Valve - Places a ball valve component in the BALF

X-Y plane. For more information, see Ball Valve (on page
411).
Victaulic Plug Valve - Places a plug valve component in PLUF

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plug Valve (on
page 413).

Toolbars
Side 90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow H90LR

LR Ell (on page 383).
Side 90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow H90SR

SR Ell (on page 384)
Side 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y H45LR

plane. For more information, see Plan 45 Ell (on page 370).
Vert 45 Ell - Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y V45LR

plane. For more information, see Vert 45 Ell (on page 385).
Side 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to H11LR

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 11.25 Ell (on
page 392).
Vert 11.25 Ell - Places an 11.25 degree elbow normal to V11LR

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 11.25 Ell (on
page 393).
Side 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the H22LR
X-Y plane. For more information, see Side 22.5 Ell (on
page 393).
Vert 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X- V22LR
Y plane. For more information, see Vert 22.5 Ell (on page
394).
Side Tee - Places a straight tee with the branch normal to HTESW
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Tee (on
page 386).
Vert Tee - Places a straight tee with the main normal to the VTESW
X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Tee (on page
386).
Side Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with HTERW

the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Side Reducing Tee (on page 387).
Vert Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with VTERW

the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Vert Reducing Tee (on page 387).

Toolbars
Side Cross - Places a four-way straight cross with the HCRSW

Side Cross (on page 390).
Side Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross HCCRW

with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Side Reducing Cross (on page 390).
Vert Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross VCRRW

with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Vert Reducing Cross (on page 391).
Side Wye - Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the HYB
branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Side Wye (on page 394).
Vert Wye - Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the VYB
branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Vert Wye (on page 395).
Side Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane HLATW

with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane. For more
information, see Side Lateral (on page 391).
Vert Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral with the main VLATW

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert
Lateral (on page 392).
Side Strainer - Places a strainer with the branch normal to HTEFL

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Side
(on page 445).
Vert Strainer - Places a strainer with the main normal to VTEFL

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee
You must use one of the Victaulic default specifications that are supplied with CADWorx for the
icons to work on the toolbar.
This toolbar provides components manufactured by Victaulic Corporation. The Victaulic
specifications and data files have been provided by Victaulic and can be used to draw
components supplied by this company. The specifications supplied are for AWWA, IPS, 304,
316, and PFCS type components.

Toolbars
Threaded/Socket
Plant menu: Toolbars > Thrd/SW Fittings
The Command Line column in the table below shows the command for the socket
weld component and the equivalent threaded component. Use the Threaded and Socket
Weld commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 24) to switch between these two
modes.
The commands on the Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D
mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling
Thrd/SW Pipe - Places a threaded/socket pipe component. For PIPF

more information, see Thrd/SW Pipe (on page 490).
Nipple - Places a pipe nipple in the X-Y plane. For more NIP
information, see Nipple (on page 491).
Tube - Attaches tubing to any 2D or 3D polyline. For more TUBE

information, see Tube (on page 492).
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket 90S/90T

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 90
Ell Plan (on page 493).
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree 90SS/90ST

threaded/socket street elbow in the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan (on page 493).
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket 45S/45T

elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW 45
Ell Plan (on page 494).
Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree 90RS/90RT

threaded/socket reducing elbow in the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan (on page 495).
Thrd/SW Tee Plan - Places a threaded/socket straight tee in TESS/TEST

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Tee Plan
(on page 495).
Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan - Places a straight threaded/socket TERS/TERT

reducing tee in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan (on page 496).
Thrd/SW Conc Swage - Places a concentric reducer swage in SWGC

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Conc
Swage (on page 496).

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Ecc Swage - Places an eccentric reducer swage in SWGE

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Ecc Swage
(on page 497).
Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub - Places a concentric reducer with SWGCT

threaded hub in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub (on page 497).
Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub - Places an eccentric reducer with SWGET

threaded hub in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub (on page 498).
Thrd/SW Cap - Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y CAPS/CAPT

plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Cap (on page 498).
Thrd/SW Cross Plan - Places a four-way threaded/socket CRSS/CRST

straight cross in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Cross Plan (on page 499).
Thrd/SW Lateral Plan - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket LATS/LATT

lateral in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
Lateral Plan (on page 499).
Thrd/SW Plug - Places a threaded/socket plug in the X-Y PLGT

plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Plug (on page 500).
Thrd/SW Bush/Insert - Places a threaded/socket bushing in BUSS/BUST

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Bush/Insert
(on page 500).
Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket full CPS/CPT

coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
Full Clpg Plan (on page 500).
Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket half HCPS/HCPT

coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
Half Clpg Plan (on page 501).
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan - Places a threaded/socket CPRS/CPRT

reducing coupling in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan (on page 501).
Weld in Plan - Places a weldolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For WOL
more information, see Weldolet Weld in Plan (on page 502).
Thrd in Plan - Places a threadolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For TOL
more information, see Threadolet Thread in Plan (on page
502).

Toolbars
SW in Plan - Places a sockolet fitting in the X-Y plane. For SOL

more information, see Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan (on page
502).
EOL-Weld in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane EOLW

on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Weld in
Plan (on page 503).
EOL-Thrd in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane EOLT

on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Thread in
Plan (on page 503).
EOL-SW in Plan - Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane EOLS

on a plan elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet Socket
Weld in Plan (on page 503).
LOL-Weld in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y LOLW

plane. For more information, see Latrolet Weld in Plan (on
page 504).
LOL-Thrd in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y LOLT

plane. For more information, see Latrolet Thread in Plan (on
page 504).
LOL- SW in Plan - Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y LOLS

plane. For more information, see Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan
(on page 504).
Weld in Plan - Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The NOLP
branch end of the fitting is plain. For more information, see
Nipolet Weld in Plan (on page 505).
Thrd in Plan - Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The NOLT
branch end of the fitting is threaded. For more information, see
Nipolet Thread in Plan (on page 505).
Thrd/SW Union - Places a threaded/socket union in the X-Y UNS/UNT

plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Union (on page
505).

Toolbars
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket H90S/H90T

Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side (on page 506).
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side - Places a 90 degree H90SS/H90ST

threaded/socket street elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side (on page
506).
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket H45S/H45T

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side (on page 507).
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket V45S/V45T

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert (on page 507).
Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side - Places a 90 degree H90RS/H90RT

threaded/socket reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side (on page 508).
Thrd/SW Tee Side - Places a threaded/socket straight tee HTESS/HTEST

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
Tee Side (on page 508).
Thrd/SW Tee Vert - Places a threaded/socket straight tee with VTESS/VTEST

the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Tee Vert (on page 509).
Thrd/SW Tee Red Side - Places a straight threaded/socket HTERS/HTERT

reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW Tee Red Side (on page 509).
Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert - Places a threaded/socket reducing VTERS/VTERT

straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert (on page 510).
Thrd/SW Cross Side - Places a four-way straight HRCSS/HCRST

threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Thrd/SW Cross Side (on page 510).
Thrd/SW Lateral Side - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket HLATS/HLATT

lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.
For more information, see Thrd/SW Lateral Side (on page 510).

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Lateral Vert - Places a 45 degree threaded/socket VLATS/VLATT

lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW Lateral Vert (on page 511).
Thrd/SW Full Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket full VCPS/VCPT

coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Thrd/SW Full Clpg End (on page 511).
Thrd/SW Half Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket half VHCPS/VHCPT

coupling component end normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW Half Clpg End (on page 512).
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End - Places a threaded/socket VCPRS/VCPRT

reducing coupling end normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End (on page 512).
Weld in Vertical - Places a weldolet fitting normal to the X-Y VWOL

plane. For more information, see Weldolet Weld in Vertical (on
page 512).
Thrd in Vertical - Places a threadolet fitting normal to the X-Y VTOL

plane. For more information, see Threadolet Thread in Vertical
(on page 513).
SW in Vertical - Places a sockolet fitting normal to the X-Y VSO:

plane. For more information, see Sockolet Socket Weld in
EOL-Weld in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y HEOLW

plane on a side elbow. For more information, see Elbowlet
Weld in Side (on page 514).
EOL-Weld in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y VEOLW

Weld in Vertical (on page 514).
EOL-Thrd in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y HEOLT

Thread in Side (on page 514).
EOL-Thrd in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y VEOLT

Thread in Vertical (on page 515).
EOL-SW in Side - Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y HEOLS

Socket Weld in Side (on page 515).

Toolbars
EOL-SW in Vert - Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y VEOLS

Socket Weld in Vertical (on page 516).
LOL-Weld in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of HLOLW

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Weld in Side
(on page 516).
LOL-Thrd in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of HLOLT

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Thread in
Side (on page 516).
LOL- SW in Side - Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the HLOLS

X-Y plane. For more information, see Latrolet Socket Weld in
Side (on page 517).
Weld in Vertical - Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y VNOLP

plane. The branch end of the fitting is plain. For more
information, see Nipolet Weld in Vertical (on page 517).
Thrd in Vertical - Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y VNOLT

plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded. For more
information, see Nipolet Thread in Vertical (on page 518).
The arrow in the lower right corner of a command button indicates a fly-out menu with
additional commands available.
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Thrd/SW Pipe
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Pipe
Command line: PIPF
If the drawing environment is set to threaded, the piping component has threaded ends.
If the drawing environment is set to a socket weld, the piping component has plain ends.
 Threaded - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears
when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec
Panel (on page 24).
 Bevel - Used when working with welded components.
 Plain - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when
the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel
(on page 24).

Toolbars
Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Place a threaded/socket pipe

4. If you receive a prompt for end types, type the option on the command line and press
ENTER.
Nipple
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Nipple
Command line: NIP
Places a pipe nipple in the X-Y plane.
Length - Defines the length of the fitting component.
Close - Reads the close distance as specified in the data file.
 Threaded - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears
when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec
Panel (on page 24).
 Bevel - Used when working with welded components.
 Plain - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when
the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel
(on page 24).
Place a nipple
1. Click Nipple . Alternatively, type NIP on the command line and then press ENTER.
2. Click to select a starting point.
3. Click to select an ending point.
4. Specify the end option for the start of the component.
5. Specify the end option for the end of the component.
The end options default depends on which options you have set.
The pipe nipple is drawn.

Toolbars
Tube
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Tube
Command line: TUBE
Attaches tubing to any 2D or 3D polyline. Different radii can be placed at each vertex of the
polyline, or you can define a common radius for all corners.
Use the Router command on the RT Panel (on page 212) for useful 3D polyline
routing capabilities.
Tubing uses the pipe component entry within the CADWorx Plant specifications. Pipe and tubing
can be used concurrently. Tubing can occupy a range of 1/8” – 1/2”, whereas regular pipe can
occupy 3/4” and above. Tubing can be set up as an optional component, or the specification can
be set up to only handle tubing.
After tubing is placed in the drawing, other components can be inserted into it. Like normal
piping, tubing also automatically breaks. Even after a component is inserted, the tubing remains
as one piece. When edited with CEDIT, the tubing attached to a single polyline also acts as one
piece.
Grouping is controlled by the PICKSTYLE environmental variable, which must be turned
on for the tubing to act as one piece. Alternatively, you can use the CADWorx GROUPTOG
command to turn the AutoCAD grouping control on or off. For more information, see Group
On/Off (on page 165).
Enter corner radius - Defines the radius to be used at each vertex.
Manual - Places individual radii at each corner of the selected polyline. The software pauses at
each vertex so that the radius can be defined. A rubber-banded line back to the actual vertex is
shown in the drawing.
 Tubing is exported to a live database, and appears in the CADWorx Bill of Material as one
piece.
 Tubing is exported to the CADWorx ISOGEN isometric generator and appears in the
ISOGEN material list.
 Tubing is not exported to CAESAR II.
 Tubing can be stretched only at the end point of the tube run by using the square grip point.
You can also use the plus grip points to route pipe from the tubing.
Place tubing
1. Click Tube . Alternatively, type TUBE on the command line and then press ENTER.
2. Type the required radius.
3. Select the 2D or 3D polyline.
The tubing is attached.

Toolbars
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan

Command line: 90/S90T
Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point.

selection.
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan
Command line: 90SS/90ST
Places a 90 degree street elbow in the X-Y plane.
Female - Places the female end of the elbow first.
Male - Places the male end of the elbow first.
Female end direction - Specifies the direction of the female end of the elbow.
Male end direction - Specifies the direction of the male end of the elbow.

Toolbars
Place a 90 degree street plan elbow
1. Click Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan . Alternatively, type 90SS on the command line and
then press ENTER.
If the drawing environment is set to threaded mode, type 90ST on the command line.
2. To optionally place the male end first, right-click and select Male.
3. Pick a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
5. Click in the direction of the male end of the elbow.
If the male end is placed first, the system prompts you for placement of the female
end.
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan
Command line: 45S/45T
Place a plan elbow


Toolbars
Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan
Command line: 90RS/90RT
Places a 90 degree threaded/socket reducing elbow in the X-Y plane.

Thrd/SW Tee Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Plan
Command line: TESS/TEST
Places a threaded/socket straight tee in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan tee


Toolbars
Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan
Command line: TESS/TERT
Places a threaded/socket straight reducing tee in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan tee
Thrd/SW Conc Swage

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Conc Swage
Command line: SWGC
Places a concentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane.
Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point
Large end type - Specifies the end type connection at the large end of the swage.
Small end type - Specifies the end type connection at the small end of the swage.
Place a concentric reducer swage

1. Click Thrd/SW Conc Swage . Alternatively, type SWGC on the command line and then
press ENTER.
4. Specify the end type connection at the large end of the reducer.
Type the required alpha description.
5. Specify the end type connection at the small end of the reducer.

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Ecc Swage

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Ecc Swage
Command line: SWGE
Places an eccentric reducer swage in the X-Y plane.
Large end type - Specifies the end type connection at the large end of the swage.
Small end type - Specifies the end type connection at the small end of the swage.
Place an eccentric reducer swage

1. Click Thrd/SW Ecc Swage . Alternatively, type SWGE on the command line and then
press ENTER.
3. Click in the direction of the small end of reducer.
or
5. Specify the end type connection at the large end of the reducer.
Type the required alpha description.
6. Specify the end type connection at the small end of the reducer.
Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub
Command line: SWGCT
Places a concentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane.


Toolbars
Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub
Command line: SWGET
Places an eccentric reducer with threaded hub in the X-Y plane.

or
or
Thrd/SW Cap
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cap
Command line: CAPS/CAPT
Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
Place a cap

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Cross Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cross Plan
Command line: CRSS/CRST
Places a four-way threaded/socket straight cross in the X-Y plane.
Place a plan cross

Thrd/SW Lateral Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Plan
Command line: LATS/LATT
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane.


Toolbars
Thrd/SW Plug
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Plug
Command line: PLGT
Places a plug in the X-Y plane.
Cap end - Places the cap end of the component at the start point.
Place a plug
1. Click a plug component command.
3. Click to select the end point.
The plug component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Bush/Insert
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Bush/Insert
Command line: BUSS/BUST
Places a bushing in the X-Y plane.
Place a bushing
1. Click a bushing component command.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the bushing.
The bushing component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan
Command line: CPS/CPT
Places a coupling in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the component at the centerline.

Toolbars
Place a coupling
Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan
Command line: HCPS/HCPT
Places a half coupling in the X-Y plane.
Plan end - Places the start point at the plan end.
Place a coupling
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan
Command line: CPRS/CPRT
Places a reducing coupling in the X-Y plane.
Large - Places the large end at the start point.
Middle - Places the start point of the component at the centerline.
Small - Places the small end at the start point.
Place a coupling

Toolbars
Weldolet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Plan
Command line: WOL
Places a weldolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.
Place a plan fitting

1. Click a plan fitting component command.
3. Click in the direction of the branch end of the fitting.
The fitting component is drawn.
Threadolet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Plan
Command line: TOL
Places a threadolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: SW in Plan
Command line: SOL
Places a sockolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.


Toolbars
Elbowlet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Plan
Command line: EOLW
Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is butt welded.
Place a plan elbowlet fitting

1. Click a plan elbowlet command.
4. Click in the direction of the butt weld end of the fitting.
Elbowlet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Plan
Command line: EOLT
Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is threaded.

Elbowlet Socket Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Plan
Command line: EOLS
Places an elbowlet fitting in the X-Y plane on a plan elbow. The end of the fitting is socket
welded.


Toolbars
Latrolet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Weld in Plan
Command line: LOLW
Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.
Place a plan latrolet fitting

1. Click a plan latrolet command.
3. Click in the direction of the main end of the fitting.
Latrolet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Thrd in Plan
Command line: LOLT
Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-SW in Plan
Command line: LOLS
Places a lateral 45 degree fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.


Toolbars
Nipolet Weld in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Plan
Command line: NOLP
Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.

Nipolet Thread in Plan

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Plan
Command line: NOLT
Places a nipolet fitting in the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

Thrd/SW Union
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Union
Command line: UNT
Places a threaded/socket union in the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the component at the centerline intersection of the union.


Toolbars
Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side
Command line: H90S/H90T
Places a 90 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Corner - Places the start point at the corner of the elbow.
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Pipe 90 Street Ell Side
Command line: H90S/H90ST
Places a 90 degree street elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Male - Starts the elbow at the male end point of the selected component.
Male end direction - Specifies the direction of the male end of the elbow.
Place a 90 degree side street elbow
1. Click Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan . Alternatively, type H90SS on the command line and
then press ENTER.
If the drawing environment is set to threaded mode, type H90ST on the command line.
2. To optionally place the male end first, right-click and select Male.
3. Pick a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.

Toolbars
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side
Command line: H45S/H45T
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when
the previous or next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.

Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert
Command line: V45S/V45T


Toolbars
Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side
Command line: H90RS/H90RT
Places a 90 degree threaded/socket reducing elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
Small - Places the reducing end of the elbow at the start point.

Thrd/SW Tee Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Side
Command line: HTESS/HTEST
Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side tee


Toolbars
Thrd/SW Tee Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Vert
Command line: VTESS/VTEST
Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at

Thrd/SW Tee Red Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Side
Command line: HTERS/HTERT
Places a threaded/socket straight reducing tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side tee


Toolbars
Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert
Command line: VTERS/VTERT
Places a straight reducing tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is

Thrd/SW Cross Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cross Side
Command line: HCRSS/HCRST
Places a four-way straight threaded/socket cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side cross

Thrd/SW Lateral Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Side
Command line: HLATS/HLATT
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z
plane.

Toolbars

Thrd/SW Lateral Vert

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Lateral Vert
Command line: VLATS/VLATT
Places a 45 degree threaded/socket lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of
the lateral is placed at the start point by default.

Thrd/SW Full Clpg End

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Full Clpg End
Command line: VCPS/VCPT
Places a full coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.


Toolbars
Thrd/SW Half Clpg End

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Half Clpg End
Command line: VHCPS/VHCPT
Places a half coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.

Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End
Command line: VCPRS/VCPRT
Places a reducing coupling end normal to the X-Y plane.

Weldolet Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Vertical
Command line: VWOL
Places a weldolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.

Toolbars
Place a vertical fitting

1. Click a vertical fitting component command.
Threadolet Thread in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Vertical
Command line: VTOL
Places a threadolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

Sockolet Socket Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: SW in Vertical
Command line: VSOL
Places a sockolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket welded.


Toolbars
Elbowlet Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Side
Command line: HEOLW
Places an elbowlet fitting with in the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting is
butt welded.
Place a side elbowlet fitting

1. Click a side elbowlet component command.
Elbowlet Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Weld in Vert
Command line: VEOLW
Places an elbowlet fitting normal to the X-Y plane on a side elbow. The branch end of the fitting
is butt welded.
Place a vertical elbowlet fitting

3. Click in the direction of the buttweld end of the fitting.
Elbowlet Thread in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Side
Command line: HEOLT
threaded.

Toolbars

Elbowlet Thread in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-Thrd in Vert
Command line: VEOLT
is threaded.

Elbowlet Socket Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Side
Command line: HEOLS
socket welded.


Toolbars
Elbowlet Socket Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: EOL-SW in Vert
Command line: VEOLS
is socket welded.

Latrolet Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Weld in Side
Command line: HLOLW
Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt
welded.
Place a side latrolet fitting

1. Click a side latrolet component command.
Latrolet Thread in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-Thrd in Side
Command line: HLOLT
Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

Toolbars

Latrolet Socket Weld in Side

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: LOL-SW in Side
Command line: HLOLS
Places a lateral fitting 45 degrees out of the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is socket
welded.

Nipolet Weld in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Weld in Vertical
Command line: VNOLP
Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is butt welded.


Toolbars
Nipolet Thread in Vertical

Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd in Vertical
Command line: VNOLT
Places a nipolet fitting normal to the X-Y plane. The branch end of the fitting is threaded.

Thrd/SW Valves
Plant menu: Toolbars > Thrd/SW Valves
The Command Line column in the table below shows the command for the socket
weld component and the equivalent threaded component. Use the Threaded and Socket
Weld commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 24) to switch between the two
modes.
The commands on the Thrd/SW Valves toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D
mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling
Thrd/SW Gate - Places a threaded or socket weld gate valve in GATS/GATT

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Gate (on
page 521).
Thrd/SW Ball - Places a threaded or socket weld ball valve in BALS/BALT

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Ball (on
page 521).
Thrd/SW Globe - Places a threaded or socket weld globe valve GLBS/GLBT

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Globe (on
page 522).
Thrd/SW Plug - Places a threaded or socket weld plug valve in PLUS/PLUT

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Plug (on
page 522).

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Check - Places a threaded or socket weld check CHKS/CHKT

valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
Check (on page 523).
Thrd/SW Needle - Places a threaded or socket weld needle NEDS/NEDT

Needle (on page 523).
Thrd/SW Diaphragm - Places a threaded or socket weld DIAS/DIAT

diaphragm valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Diaphragm (on page 524).
Thrd/SW Rotary - Places a threaded or socket weld rotary ROTS/ROTT

Rotary (on page 524).
Thrd/SW Dual Check - Places a threaded or socket weld dual DCHS/DCHT

check valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Dual Check (on page 525).
Thrd/SW Control - Places a threaded or socket weld control CNTS/CNTT

Control (on page 525).
Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan - Places a threaded or socket weld three- 3VS/3VT

way valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
3 Way Plan (on page 526).
Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan - Places a threaded or socket weld four- 4VS/4VT

way valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW
4 Way Plan (on page 526).
Thrd/SW Relief Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 RELS/RELT

degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to the X-
Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Relief Top (on
page 531).
Thrd/SW Angle Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 ANGS/ANGT

degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Angle Top (on page 527).
Thrd/SW Gage - Places a threaded or socket weld gage valve GAGS/GAGT

in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Gage (on
page 528).
X-Body Gate BW - Places a butt weld X-body style gate valve EGAB
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate BW
(on page 528).

Toolbars
X-Body Gate Thrd - Places a threaded X-body style gate valve EGAT
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate Thrd
(on page 529).
X-Body Gate SW - Places a socket weld X-body style gate EGAS

valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate
SW (on page 529).
Thrd/SW 3 Way Side - Places a threaded or socket weld three- H3VS/H3VT

way valve with the valve branch normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Thrd/SW 3 Way Side (on page 530).
Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical - Places a threaded or socket weld V3VS/V3VT

three-way valve with the main normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical (on page 530).
Thrd/SW 4 Way Side - Places a threaded or socket weld four- H4VS/H4VT

way valve with the valve branches normal to the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Thrd/SW 4 Way Side (on page 530).
Thrd/SW Relief Side - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 HRELS/HRELT

degree relief valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW Relief Side (on page 527).
Thrd/SW Pressure Top - Places a threaded or socket weld 90 VRELS/VRELT

degree pressure relief valve with the pressure end normal to
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Thrd/SW Pressure
Top.
Thrd/SW Angle Side - Places a threaded or socket weld angle HANGS/HANGT

Angle Side (on page 531).
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Gate
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Gate
Command line: GATS/GATT
Places a threaded or socket weld gate valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Thrd/SW Ball
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Ball
Command line: BALS/BALT
Places a threaded or socket weld ball valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Globe
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Globe
Command line: GLBS/GLBT
Places a threaded or socket weld globe valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Thrd/SW Plug
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Plug
Command line: PLUS/PLUT
Places a threaded or socket weld plug valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Check
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Check
Command line: CHKS/CHKT
Places a threaded or socket weld check valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Thrd/SW Needle
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Needle
Command line: NEDS/NEDT
Places a threaded or socket weld needle valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Diaphragm
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Diaphragm
Command line: DIAS/DIAT
Places a threaded or socket weld diaphragm valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Thrd/SW Rotary
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Rotary
Command line: ROTS/ROTT
Places a threaded or socket weld rotary valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Dual Check

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Dual Check
Command line: DCHS/DCHT
Places a threaded or socket weld dual check valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
Thrd/SW Control
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Control
Command line: CNTS/CNTT
Places a threaded or socket weld control valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Length - Specifies the length of the component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan
Command line: 3VS/3VT
Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Branch - Places the branch of the valve at the start point. The end type is defined by the current
specification.

Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan
Command line: 4VS/4VT
Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve in the X-Y plane.
component.

1. Click a four-way plan valve command.
ENTER to connect to the last point.

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Relief Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Relief Side
Command line: RELS/RELT
Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree relief valve in the X-Y plane.
Relief - Places the relief end of the valve at the start point.
Place a relief side valve

1. Click a relief valve component command.
4. Click in the direction of the relief end of the valve.
Thrd/SW Angle Top

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Angle
Command line: ANGS/ANGT
Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane.
Place an angle top valve

1. Click an angle valve component command.
4. Click in the direction of the branch end of the valve.

Toolbars
Thrd/SW Gage
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Gage
Command line: GAGS/GAGT
Places a threaded or socket weld gage valve in the X-Y plane
component.
 To pick the outlet locations of the gage valve, use the MIDpoint of OSnap command and
then pick the sides on the outlet end.
 Because there is no way to accurately locate the outlets in 3D, first draw the component in
2D and then use the CONVERTSOLID command to convert the valve component to 3D
solids.
Place a valve
X-Body Gate BW
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW X-Body Gate BW
Command line: EGAB
Places a butt weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
X-Body Gate Thrd

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: X-Body Gate Thrd
Command line: EGAT
Places a threaded X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve
X-Body Gate SW
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW X-Body Gate SW
Command line: EGAS
Places a socket weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane.
component.
Place a valve

Toolbars
Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Thrd/SW 3 Way Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Side
Command line: H3VS/H3VT
Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve with the valve branch normal to the X-Y
plane.
component.

Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical
Command line: V3VS/V3VT
Places a threaded or socket weld three-way valve with the main normal to the X-Y plane.
component.
Thrd/SW 4 Way Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW 4 Way Side
Command line: H4VS/H4VT
Places a threaded or socket weld four-way valve with the valve branches normal to the X-Y
plane.
component.

Toolbars

1. Click a four-way side valve command.
Thrd/SW Relief Top

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Relief Top
Command line: HRELS/HRELT
Places a threaded or socket weld 90 degree pressure relief valve with the relief end normal to
the X-Y plane.
Relief - Places the start point at the relief end.
Place a relief top valve

1. Click a relief valve component command.
Thrd/SW Angle Side

Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Angle Side
Command line: HANGS/HANGT
Places a threaded or socket weld angle valve in the X-Y plane.

Toolbars

Gaskets, Etc.
Plant menu: Toolbars > Gaskets, Etc.
Tick Mark - Creates a dimension tick mark. For more TICK

information, see Tick Mark (on page 229).
Standard - Places standard stud bolts at the selected STDBOLT

location. For more information, see Standard (on page 210).
Non Standard - Places non standard stud bolts at the NONSTDBOLT

selected location. For more information, see Non Standard (on
page 210).
Automatic - Sizes and places stud bolts automatically at each AUTOBOLT

gasket. For more information, see Automatic (on page 207).
Gasket - Places a gasket. For more information, see Gasket GAS

(on page 532).
Weld Gap - Creates weld gaps For more information, see WELD
Weld Gap (on page 533).
Gasket
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Gasket
Command line: GAS
Places a gasket. The gasket is composed of two different entities. First is an inserted block that
is located at the insert point. Another inserted block is placed on the other side of the gasket.
The GASR contains Xdata information for Bill of Materials extraction. GASL is a plain insert
without information. When you use mode conversion to convert components to another mode in
a Z-plane position, the GASL insert is destroyed. When you convert the single GASR insert in
the proper X and Y planes, both sides of the gasket are created again.
The shape of the gasket allows for other uses, as explained below.

Toolbars
The half circle on the outer portion of both inserts allow for easy picking for dimensioning. For
example, when dimensioning, select Osnap, CENter of, and pick the center of circle which is the
exact corner of the face of flange). You should find that it is relatively easy to select the center of
the circle from a zoomed out view.
For placing a flange face against the gasket, you can select Osnap, ENDpoint of, and select the
side of the gasket to place the flange perfectly in position. This provides a method of placing the
flange when the last point option is no longer available.
This routine is also used for ring type joints. The data files for rings have an extra column
indicating the ring number. The gasket routine senses this additional column and adds this ring
number to the bill of materials description. The distance between the faces of adjoining flanges
(under compression) are used in this file instead of the actual depth of the ring.
Insert a gasket
1. Click Gasket .
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to
select the last point of the previously-placed component.
3. Click in the required direction.
The software inserts a gasket at the selected location.
The same procedure can be used to place ring type joints. The data files for rings have
an extra column, which indicates the ring number. The gasket routine senses this additional
column, and adds this ring number to the Bill of Materials description. The distance between the
faces of adjoining flanges (under compression) is used in this file instead of the actual depth of
the ring.
You can set the software to automatically add Gaskets when needed by changing the
Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 48) in Piping Rules under Setup .
Weld Gap
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Weld Gap
Command line: WELD
Creates weld gaps for detailed pipe fabrication. Weld gaps are controlled by the currently
defined specification and are placed according to size and/or schedule.
last point - Places the weld gap at the last point of the previously-created component.
Each specification has data files that provide different thicknesses.
Define a weld gap

1. Click Weld Gap .
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to
select the last point of the previously-placed component.
3. Click in the required direction.
The software creates a weld gap.
Use Osnap > Insert and select any portion of the weld gap symbol to start a new pipe or
component from the weld gap
You can set the software to automatically add Gaskets when needed by changing the
Apply Weld Insertion Rule (on page 48) in Piping Rules under Setup .

Toolbars
Pipe Ends
Plant menu: Toolbars > Pipe Ends
Flange O.D. - Inserts a graphical representation of a flange ENDFLG

O.D. For more information, see Flange O.D. (on page 246)
Plain End - Inserts a graphical representation of the plain end ENDPLAIN

of a pipe. For more information, see Plain End (on page 246).
Hidden End - Inserts a graphical representation of the hidden ENDHIDDEN

end of a pipe. For more information, see Hidden End (on page
247).
Pipe End - Inserts a graphical representation of the pipe end ENDPIPE

of a pipe. For more information, see Pipe End (on page 247).
Restraints
Plant menu: > Toolbars > Restraints
The types of restraints used with CADWorx Plant are listed in the table below.
Translational - Creates a translational-type restraint. For TRANSLATIONAL

more information, see Translational (on page 254).
Anchor - Creates an anchor-type restraint. For more ANCHOR

information, see Anchor (on page 255).
Spring Hanger - Creates a spring hanger-type restraint. For SPRING

more information, see Spring Hanger (on page 255).
Rotational - Creates a rotational-type restraint. For more ROTATIONAL

information, see Rotational (on page 256).
Snubber - Creates a Snubber-type restraint. For more SNUBBER

information, see Snubber (on page 256).
Guide - Creates a Guide-type restraint. For more information, GUIDE

see Guide (on page 257).
The restraint is used in the bi-directional link with CAESAR II. The position of the restraint is
important for the evaluation of the stress model within CAESAR II. For example, you can
position a rotational restraint at any vector.

Toolbars
Restraints appear on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify the symbol shape that
appears on the output drawing by editing the restraint drawing file. These drawing files are
delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. If necessary, a restraint symbol can be re-
drawn as a three-dimensional shape. In these instances, you must maintain the base of the
restraint at 0,0,0 and the direction of the restraint at 0 degrees.
 The CAESARIITolerance (on page 33) variable is useful when the bi-directional process
encounters a problem locating a restraint along a pipe line, especially if the pipe line is
sloped.
 All supports drawn using the Restraint commands in CADWorx Plant are exported as guides
to ISOGEN. To export a different symbol to ISOGEN, use the ISOGEN Data dialog box (on
page 71) to change the SKEY. Acceptable SKEY values are ANCH, DUCK, GUID, SKID,
SPRG, and HANG. For information about the sample ISOGEN shapes used with these
SKEYS, see the ISOGEN Symbol Keys Reference Guide, which is delivered as a PDF file to
the [Product Folder]\ISOGEN\Isogen_Utils folder.
 You can also use the ISOGEN Data dialog box to change the support direction.
Misc
Plant menu: Toolbars > Misc
Use the Threaded and Socket Weld commands on the Setup Size/Spec
Panel (on page 24) to switch between these two modes for SW/Thrd Plan and SW/Thrd Side.
The commands on the Misc toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
Flanged Plan - Places a flanged pipe component in the X-Y STRF

plane. For more information, see Flanged Plan (on page 537).
SW/Thrd Plan - Places a socket weld/ threaded strainer STRT

SW/Thrd Plan (on page 538).
Create - Creates symmetrical or nonsymmetrical user shape USERCREATE

components. For more information, see User Shapes (on
page 166).
User Shape 1 - Places user created shape 1 in the X-Y plane. USE1
For more information, see User Shapes (on page 166).

Toolbars
Bleed Ring - Places a bleed ring in the drawing in the X-Y BLD
plane. For more information, see Bleed Ring or Spacer (on
page 538).
Spec Bld Side - Places a blind spectacle in the drawing SPCT

normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Spectacle
Blind Side (on page 539).
Reinforcing Pad - Inserts information indicating a REINFPAD

reinforcement pad. For more information, see Reinforcing Pad
(on page 253).
Reinforcing Saddle - Inserts information indicating a REINFSAD

reinforcement saddle. For more information, see Reinforcing
Saddle (on page 253).
Expansion Joint - Places an expansion joint in the drawing in EXPF

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Expansion Joint (on
page 539).
Rigid Element - Places a CAESAR II element in the drawing. ELEMENT

For more information, see Rigid Element (on page 540).
Generic Attach - Attaches information to any generic GENERIC

Stop Sign - Places ISOGEN stop sign symbols in the STOPSIGN

drawing. For more information, see Stop Sign (on page 119).
Flanged Side - Places a flanged pipe component normal to HSTRF

the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged Side (on
page 540).
SW/Thrd Side - Places a socket weld/ threaded strainer HSTRT

component normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see SW/Thrd Side (on page 541).
Spec Bld Vert - Places a blind spectacle with the main normal VSPCT
to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Spectacle Blind
The arrow in the lower right corner of the button indicates a flyout for more options.

Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Flanged Plan
Misc toolbar: Flanged Plan
Command line: STRF
Places a flanged pipe component in the X-Y plane.
Length of basket side - Specifies the length of the basket side of the component.
Main end - Specifies the direction of the second point.
Branch end - Specifies the direction of the branch end of the pipe.
Place a plan flange pipe

1. Click Flanged Plan . Alternatively, type STRF, and press ENTER.
2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.
3. Select a main end direction.
4. Select branch direction.
The flanged plan pipe is placed.
Auto Routing from the strainer lateral

1. Select the strainer in the drawing.
2. Click the grip point to autoroute from the lateral.

The piping component list displays.
3. Select Pipe or Nipple.
The sizes list for the pipes or nipples displays.
4. Select the size.
The pipe or nipple displays in the drawing with a Tap Connection automatically added.

Toolbars
SW/Thrd Plan
Misc toolbar: SW/Thrd Plan
Command line: STRT
Places a socket weld/threaded strainer component in the X-Y plane.
otherEnd - Place the start point of the component at the other end.
Main end - Specifies the direction of the second point.
Branch end - Specifies the direction of the branch end of the pipe.
Place a side socket weld threaded pipe

1. Click SW/Thrd Plan . Alternatively, type STRT, and press ENTER.
3. Select a main end direction.
4. Select branch direction.
The plan socket weld/threaded pipe is placed.
Bleed Ring or Spacer

Misc toolbar: Bleed Ring
Lined toolbar: Lined Spacer
Command line: BLD
Places a bleed ring or spacer in the X-Y plane.
Length - Specifies the length of the bleed ring.
Place a bleed ring

1. Click Bleed Ring . Alternatively, type BLD, and press ENTER.
The bleed ring is placed.

Toolbars
Spectacle Blind Side

Misc toolbar: Spec Bld Side
Command line: SPCT
Places a blind spectacle normal to the X-Y plane.
Open - Places the start point at the open end.
Close - Places the start point at the closed end.
Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the blind spectacle.
Place a side blind spectacle

1. Click Spec Bld Side . Alternatively, type SPCT, and press ENTER.
2. Type T for thickness, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
thickness, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.
The side blind spectacle is placed.
Reinforcing Saddle
Miscellaneous toolbar: Reinforcing Saddle
Command line: REINFSAD
Attaches a reinforcement saddle to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement
saddle is represented by the alpha-identifier S. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that
is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.
For more information, see Insert a reinforcement saddle (on page 254).
Expansion Joint
Misc toolbar: Expansion Joint
Command line: EXPF
Places an expansion joint in the X-Y plane.
Length - Specifies the length of the expansion joint.
Place an expansion joint

1. Click Expansion Joint . Alternatively, type EXPF, and press ENTER.
The expansion joint is placed.

Toolbars
Rigid Element
Misc toolbar: Rigid Element
Command line: ELEMENT
Places a CAESAR II element in the drawing.
Used with CAESAR II (pipe stress analysis software) when a rigid component is required. This is
convenient when using a rigid from the base of a pump to the pump discharge piping, or placing
a rigid as a structural member that might be supporting the pipe.
When using the CAESAR II bi-directional link or importing a stress input file, rigids can be
automatically placed. These rigids are used by the bi-directional link and should not be modified
in any manner. They can be moved with a piping system, but they need to remain in their
relative location. They are often used when the length of a CAESAR II component does not
match the components contained within CADWorx.
These elements are represented with a polyline that has pointed ends. Specify where rigid
elements display from the LayerByLineNumber (on page 36) configuration setting.
Place a rigid element

1. Click Rigid Element . Alternatively, type ELEMENT, and press ENTER.
3. Select a second point.
The rigid element is placed.
Modeling in 2D
in a 2D drawing.
Flanged Side
Misc toolbar: Flanged Side
Command line: HSTRF
Places a pipe component normal to the X-Y plane.
Down - Places the branch direction in the negative the Z direction.

Toolbars
Place a side flange pipe

1. Click Flanged Side . Alternatively, type HSTRF, and press ENTER.
The side flanged pipe is placed.
SW/Thrd Side
Misc toolbar: SW/Thrd Side
Command line: HSTRT
Places a socket weld/threaded strainer component normal to the X-Y plane.
Place a side socket weld/threaded pipe

1. Click SW/Thrd Side . Alternatively, type HSTRT, and press ENTER.
The socket weld threaded pipe is placed.
Spectacle Blind Vertical

Misc toolbar: Spec Bld Vert
Command line: VSPCT
Places a vertical blind spectacle side in the X-Y plane.
Open - Places the start point at the open end.
Close - Places the start point at the closed end.
Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the blind spectacle.

Toolbars
Place a vertical blind spectacle

1. Click Spec Bld Vert . Alternatively, type VSPCT, and press ENTER.
2. Type T for thickness, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
thickness, follow the prompts back to this step for the start point.
The blind spectacle is drawn.
Operators
Plant menu: Toolbars > Operators
Top Works Add - Adds top works to a valve already drawn in TOPWORKSADD
the model. For more information, see Top Works Add (on
page 188).
Top Works Change - Changes the orientation of or deletes TOPWORKSCHANGE
top works already associated with a valve. For more
information, see Top Works Change (on page 189).
Line Numbers
Plant menu: Toolbars > Line Numbers
Line Number Setup - Modifies any line number configuration. NUMBERSETUP
For more information, see Setup (on page 138).
Line Number Assign - Assigns new or different line numbers NUMBERASSIGN
to existing components. For more information, see Assign (on
page 141).
Line Number Annotate - Labels components with existing NUMBERANNOTATE
line numbers. For more information, see Annotate (on page
142).
Line Number By - Sets the line number from one of three NUMBERSET
sources: a P&ID project, the current drawing, or a selected
component. For more information, see Set (on page 139).
Line Number Count - Sets the present line number count NUMBERCOUNT
value. For more information, see Count (on page 140).
Line Number Increment - Increases the line number count NUMBER+
value. For more information, see Increment (on page 141).
Line Number Decrement - Decreases the line number count NUMBER-
value. For more information, see Decrement (on page 141).

Toolbars
UCS
Plant menu: Toolbars > UCS
Flat - Places the current user coordinate system in the flat VIEWFLAT
position. For more information, see Flat (on page 260).
North - Places the current user coordinate system in the north VIEWNORTH
position. For more information, see North (on page 261).
South - Places the current user coordinate system in the VIEWSOUTH

south position. For more information, see South (on page
262).
East - Places the current user coordinate system in the east VIEWEAST
position. For more information, see East (on page 263).
West - Places the current user coordinate system in the west VIEWWEST
position. For more information, see West (on page 262).
Next - Toggles through each of the Point and Shoot UCS UCSNEXT
positions. For more information, see UCS Next (on page 261).
UCS Object - Orients the UCS according to an object you UCS

select. For more information, see UCS Object (on page 263).
Compass - Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates COMPASS

the Point and Shoot orientation. For more information, see
Compass (on page 261).
This Compass command is only available in CADWorx
Plant Professional.

Toolbars
Steel
Plant menu: Toolbars > Steel
Wide Flange - Places a wide flange shape. For more WSHAPE

information, see Wide Flange Shapes (on page 268).
Channel - Places a channel shape. For more information, see CSHAPE

Channel Shapes (on page 269).
Angle - Places an angle shape. For more information, see LSHAPE

Angle Shapes (on page 270).
Double Angle - Places a double angle shape. For more 2LSHAPE

information, see Angle Double Shape (on page 279).
Tee - Places a tee shape. For more information, see Tee TSHAPE
Flat Bar - Places a flat bar shape. For more information, see FBSHAPE
Flat Bar Shapes (on page 274).
Round Bar - Places a round bar shape. For more information, RBSHAPE
see Round Bar Shapes (on page 275).
Structural Pipe - Places a pipe shape. For more information, PSHAPE

see Pipe Shapes (on page 272).
Structural Tubing - Places a rectangular tube shape. For TSSHAPE

more information, see Tube Shapes (on page 273).
Z Shape - Places a zee shape. For more information, see Z ZSHAPE

Channel Lip - Places a channel shape with a lip. For more CLIPSHAPE
information, see Channel Shape with Lip (on page 276).
Angle Lip - Places an angle shape with a lip. For more LLIPSHAPE
information, see Angle Shape with Lip (on page 277).
Plate - Places plates in the drawing. For more information, SPLATE

see Plate (on page 281).
Base Plate - Places base plates in free space or at the end of SBPLATE
a member. For more information, see Base Plate (on page
283).

Toolbars
Cope - Cuts a member back to other members. For more SCOPE

information, see Steel - Cope (on page 312).
Cut - Cuts members by a plane that you define. For more SCUT
information, see Cut (on page 313).
Miter - Cuts two coplanar members back to one another. For SMITER
more information, see Miter (on page 312).
Union - Joins two members. For more information, see Union SUNION
(on page 314).
Local Edit - Edits a selected member. For more information, SCEDIT

see Edit (on page 314).
Set Size by Component - Sets the steel size by selecting an COMP2STEEL

existing component in the model. For more information, see
Set Size by Component (on page 288).
Auto Cope - Turns on or off the automatic coping of SAUTOCOPE

members. For more information, see Auto Cope (on page
323).
Frame Creation - Creates intelligent frames that they can use SFRAME
to build structural steel models. For more information, see
Steel - Frame Creation (on page 301).
Ladder - Places ladders, with or without cages, in the SLADDER

drawing. For more information, see Ladder (on page 304).
Stair - Places stairs in the drawing. For more information, see SSTAIR
Stair (on page 308).
Hand Rail - Places hand rails in the drawing. For more SHRAIL
information, see Handrail (on page 307).

Toolbars
Settings
Plant menu: Toolbars > Settings
Setup - Defines all CADWorx settings within the current SETUP

drawings. For more information, see Setup (on page 25).
Specification - Specifies a drawing specification file. For SETSPEC

more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page
43).
Main Size - Specifies main and reduction sizes. For more SETSIZE
Size - Specifies the main and reduction size by selecting a COMP2SIZE

component. For more information, see Size (on page 58).
Spec - Specifies the current specification by selecting a COMP2SPEC

component. For more information, see Spec (on page 58).
Size-Spec - Specifies the main size, reduction size, and COMP2SIZESPEC

specification by selecting a component. For more information,
see Size-Spec (on page 59).
Line - Sets the current line number to match that of a COMP2LINE

component that you select. For more information, see Line (on
page 143).
All - Specifies the main size, reduction size, specification, and COMP2ALL
line number by selecting a component with the needed values.
For more information, see All (on page 59).
Settings - Displays the current drawing settings. For more CURRENT

information, see Settings (on page 83).
2D Double Line - Converts selected components to 2D CONVERTDOUBLE

double line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert
(on page 79) and 2D Double Line (on page 80).
2D Single Line - Converts selected components to 2D single CONVERTSINGLE

line mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on page
79) and 2D Single Line (on page 80).
3D Solids - Converts selected components to 3D solid mode. CONVERTSOLID

For more information, see Mode Convert (on page 79) and 3D
Solids (on page 80).

Toolbars
Convert Isometric - Converts selected components to CONVERTISO

isometric mode. For more information, see Mode Convert (on
page 79) and Convert Isometric (on page 80).
Threaded - Specifies the threaded fitting mode for hub-based —

components. For more information, see Threaded (on page
82).
Socket Weld - Specifies the socket welded fitting mode for —

hub-based components. For more information, see Socket
Weld (on page 82).
Local Edit - Modifies the properties of an existing component. CEDIT

For more information, see Local Edit (on page 68).
Xref Component Edit - Views sizes or information within the XCEDIT

component XREF. For more information, see Xref Edit (on
page 83)
Global Edit - Modifies the properties of multiple components. GCEDIT

For more information, see Global Edit (on page 77).
Auto Connect - Turns automatic connection on or off. For CONNECTOG

more information, see Auto Connect (on page 164).
Zoom Lock - Allows zooming in paper space only. For more ZOOMLOCK
information, see Zoom Lock (on page 205).
Optional Items - Places a component when the component SPECOPTION

type in the specification has an optional component. For more
information, see Optional Items (on page 57).
Group On/Off - Turns on or off the grouping of the centerline GROUPTOG

of the component with the accompanying graphics. For more
information, see Group On/Off (on page 165).
Selection Control - Toggles the display of grips on and off. SELECTCONTROL

For more information, Select Control (on page 323).
Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawings

Toolbars
Palettes
Plant menu: Toolbars > Misc
Spec View - Filters the available components based on the SPECVIEW

size and specification settings. For more information, see
Spec View Palette (on page 85).
Line View -Isolates components based on their line number or LINEVIEW

their specification. For more information, see Line View
Insulation View - Creates a data file in which you can add, INSULATIONVIEW
modify and remove insulation configurations that can be
applied to CADWorx components. For more information, see
Insulation View Palette (on page 97).
Clash View - Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD 3D CLASHVIEW

solids in the current drawing as well as any attached XREF
drawings. For more information, see Clash View Palette (on
page 107).
Pipe Support Modeler Report - Generates a report of all pipe PIPESUPPORTREPORT

supports found in the selection or in the entire model. For
more information, see Pipe Support Report (on page 103).
Discontinuity View - Checks for different types of modeling DISCONTINUITYVIEW

issues. For more information, see Discontinuity View Palette
(on page 101).
P&ID View - Links data between the Plant and P&ID table in a PIDVIEW
project database. For more information, see P&ID View

APPENDIX A
Specification and Data Files

CADWorx Plant specification files (.prj) are delivered in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder.
You can relocate these files to other local or network folders:
 Change the location of the Spec folder by modifying the SpecificationDirectory (on page 39)
variable stored in the current configuration settings.
Editing Component Data Files

CADWorx Plant uses a component data text file to determine the correct dimensions of
components. When you select a component, the software checks the current specification,
retrieves data from the correct data file, and draws the component.
Use the Spec Editor to create new data files for components and the needed component
sizes. The data file structure that is required for each component is provided in the DataFile.tbl
file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. This file is used to generate template data. For
more information, see the Spec Editor documentation delivered with CADWorx.

APPENDIX B
AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant

In This Appendix
Modifying a User Profile ................................................................ 550
Creating a Base Profile .................................................................. 551
Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant 551
Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database ......... 553
Modifying a User Profile

You can run CADWorx Plant from any network or local folder by manually creating or modifying
a user profile and modifying the search paths in the profile.
CADWorx runs within AutoCAD by using the AutoCAD user profile command line switch, /P. A
user profile shortcut is created when Plant is installed. For example, if AutoCAD is installed in
the C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD folder, a shortcut is created for CADWorx Plant. The
value of Target on the Shortcut tab of the Properties dialog box for the shortcut is:
"C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD\acad.exe" /P "Profile Name"
Manually create a profile by modifying the support file search paths and the template file
location.
1. In Plant, click Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box appears.
2. On the Files tab, expand Support File Search Path in the Search paths, file names, and
file locations list.
The [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder is listed first, as shown in the example below.
The acad.rx file is in the support folder. AutoCAD uses acad.rx to load the Plant menus,
toolbars, and panels.
3. Select the folder name and type the new folder path.
4. Manually create the new support folder and copy the acad.rx file to this folder.

5. On the Files tab, expand Template Settings > Drawing Template File Location.
The [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder is listed first, as shown in the example below.
6. Select the folder name and type the new folder path.
7. Click OK.
To set up a profile for another user login on the same computer, run Start > All
Programs > CADWorx > Plant > Setup Profile - Plant.
Creating a Base Profile

To create a base profile, you can copy the AutoCAD icon or Plant icon, and specify a profile.
This profile is based on the default AutoCAD profile.
1. Make a copy of the Plant shortcut on the desktop.
2. Right-click the shortcut and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.
3. On the Shortcut tab, replace the value after /P in Target with the new profile name. For
example:
"C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AutoCAD - English\acad.exe" /P UserBase
You can use any name that is not used on the Profile tab of the Options dialog box
(Tools > Options) in AutoCAD. Use quotes around the profile name if it contains spaces.
4. Click OK.
5. Double-click the shortcut to start the software.
AutoCAD creates a new profile based on the software defaults.
Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with

CADWorx Plant
You can run CADWorx Plant and the standalone version of CADWorx Equipment
simultaneously within the same AutoCAD session. This is necessary when equipment created
with Equipment needs to be modified while in the Plant drawing session.
1. In Plant, click Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. On the Files tab, expand the Support File Search Path item.

3. Click Add, and browse to the CADWorx Equipment support directory. An example is shown
in the figure below.
4. Close CADWorx Plant.

5. Start Windows Explorer and browse to the CADWorx Plant support directory (for example,
C:\CADWorx Version\ Plant\Support).
6. Locate the file acad.rx file, and open it using a text editor.
7. Type CADWorxEquipment.arx into this file below the entry for CADWorxPlant.arx.
If CADWorxEquipment.arx is above CADWorxPlant.arx, CADWorx Plant tool tips do

not function.
8. Start CADWorx Plant.
CADWorx Equipment starts simultaneously.
9. If the Equipment menu does not load, run the LOADMENUEQUIP command.

Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live

Database
This following AutoCAD commands are monitored by CADWorx for live external database
synchronization. When any of the commands are used, CADWorx automatically updates a live
external database.
Erase and Undo Commands

These commands remove and restore graphic entities and mark rows in the database. If a
CADWorx component is deleted from the drawing, the row from the database is deleted when
the drawing file is closed.
 ERASE
 U
 UNDO
 REDO
 MREDO
 OOPS
 BLOCK
 -WBLOCK
 EXPLODE
 CUTCLIP
 GROUP
Copy Commands
These commands add new graphic entities to the model.
 COPY
 BREAK
 ARRAY
 GRIP_COPY
 GRIP_MIRROR
 EXPLODE
 MIRROR
 PASTECLIP
 PASTEORIG
 DROPGEOM
Move Commands
These commands move the graphic entities in the model.
 MOVE
 GRIP_STRETCH
 STRETCH
 DROPGEOM

APPENDIX C
Update History
Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2014 SP1
 You can view ISOGEN continuation graphics by setting the
ISOGENContinuationGraphicsCount variable. For more information, see
ISOGENContinuationGraphicsCount (on page 35).
 Updated the Nozzle Generic Attach command to improve the overall application of the
option. For more information, see Nozzle Generic Attach (on page 191).
 You can now use alpha characters in the spool, mark, and sheet number in the ISOGEN
Data dialog box. For more information, see ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 71).
 You can now turn off updates for Custom Data, and Line Number in the Apply Change
Data Rule. For more information, see Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box (on page 52).
SP1 Improvements
 Improved the Change Specification command to provide you a list of components in the
case of multiple matching components. For more information, see Change Specification (on
page 66).
 Updated the Pipe Support Palette to reflect the new Specification Editor Pipe Support
changes and the use of dynamic pipe supports. This option also enables new pipe supports
on tees. For more information, see Support Modeler Palette (on page 91).
 Tees can now be converted to crosses after routing by using the grip point on the main of
the tee.
 Reducers can now have branches routed from the side with the added grip point.
 Multiple components can now move simultaneously by using the MOVECOMPONENT
command. For more information, see Continue Routing (on page 214).
 Tubing can now be stretched only by using the square grip point at the end point of the tube
run. Also pipe can be routed from an existing tube. For more information, see Tube (on page
492).
 Center of Gravity has now been updated. All center of gravity calculations can be completed
within a single dialog box. For more information, see C.G. Generator (on page 161).
 Generic Attach has been updated to include the BOM Mark Point and the CG Location,
enabling you to select a point for the Center of Gravity. For more information, see Generic
Attach (on page 193) and Steel - Generic Attachment (on page 288).

Update History
 OrthoGen capability has been added to CADWorx. For more information, see OrthoGen
Panel (on page 135).
 Gaskets, Bolts, and Welds have been enhanced for appearance. They now appear as they
would in a real world environment when in enhanced mode.
 There have been ISOGEN identifiers added to the ISOGEN Export Options for user shapes.
For more information, see ISOGEN Export Options (on page 172).
 You can now set a minimum spacing rule for the O-Lets. For more information, see Apply O-
let Minimum Spacing Rule (on page 53).
 You can now have custom data that is attached to components appear in the data. You can
also isolate components based on this custom data. A Custom Data button has been added
to the Component Edit dialog box and the Global CEdit dialog box. For more information,
see Local Edit (on page 68), Global Edit (on page 77), Component Custom Data Dialog Box
(on page 76) and Custom Data Dialog Box (on page 78).
 You can now review changes you have made to a database when you synchronize by
setting the SyncOnStartUp variable to Synchronize with Changes Review. For more
information, see SyncOnStartUp (on page 41) and Synchronize Pipe Database (on page
159).
 You can now set the Routing Mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup. For more information,
Setup (on page 25).
 You can now isolate the reverse of the selected items in the CADWorx Line View palette.
You can also manage your isolation in the Line View Isolation Properties Manager added
to the CADWorx Line View palette. You can set the file created in the Line View Isolation
Properties Manager to a default by setting it in the LineViewIsolationSettingsFile
variable. This also allows you to isolate based on custom data. For more information, see
Line View Palette (on page 89), Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 89),
Line View Isolation Properties Manager (on page 91), and LineViewIsolationSettingsFile (on
page 38).
 You can now break pipes into segments and change segmented pipe to non-segmented
pipe. For more information, see Join Pipe (on page 165) and Break Pipe (on page 191).
 You can now change the elevation of placed piping in the drawing. For more information,
see Change Elevation (on page 197).
 You can now generic attach for nozzles using the ENGENERIC command. For more
information, see Nozzle Generic Attach (on page 191).
 You can now enable the RepeatFile in ISOGEN which enables start and split locations for
consecutive ISOGEN outputs. Set the ISOGENSetting variable to control the import of the
repeat file data. The number of sheets is then added to the ISOGEN Data dialog box. For
more information, see ISOGENSetting (on page 35) and ISOGEN Out (on page 113).
 Intersecting piping components can now be converted. Options are presented to you when a
piping component crosses another component. If you selected None from the list, you can
use the CONVERTINTERSECTEDPIPINGS command to convert the intersecting piping. For
more information, see Convert Intersected Piping (on page 82).

Update History
Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 R2
 You can now convert CADWorx legacy drawings using
CONVERTCADWORXLEGACYDWGS. For more information, see Convert Legacy Drawing
(on page 53) and CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications Dialog Box (on page
54).
 You can now review drawings for legacy components using
REVIEWLEGACYCOMPONENTS. For more information, see Find Legacy Components
 You can now have CADWorx automatically add couplings between components with the
Apply Auto Coupling Rule. For more information, see Apply Auto Coupling Rule (on page
50) in Piping Rules (on page 47).
 You can now have CADWorx automatically check the line number when inserting
components in a line with the Apply Line Number Rule. For more information, see Apply
Line Number Rule (on page 51) in Piping Rules (on page 47).
 You can now decide which items CADWorx automatically updates when using the Change
Size, Change Spec, or automatic update of data options with the Apply Change Data
Rule. For more information, see Apply Change Data Rule (on page 52).
 You can now have CADWorx audit your data on startup to check for removed XDATA using
AuditDataOnStartup variable. For more information, see AuditDataOnStartup (on page 30).
 You can now see which components have had XDATA removed by using the
CWSHOWNOXD command. For more information, see Show Removed XDATA (on page
30).
 You can now restore XDATA to components that have had XDATA removed by using the
CWADDXD command. For more information, see Restore XDATA (on page 30).
Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 R1

 You can display help by typing MANUAL on the command line. For more information, see
Online Help (on page 22).
 You can now select your drawing environment type by the Drawing Prototype variable. For
more information, see Drawing Prototype (on page 29).
 You can now convert components into 3D Enhanced mode. For more information, see
Convert to 3D enhanced (on page 81).
 You can now update the project data of components in your drawing by using the
CONVERTFROMPRJDATA command. For more information, see Convert from project data
(on page 81).
 You can now change CADWorx Components to AutoCAD 3D solids with xdata by using the
CWEXPLODE command. For more information, see CWexplode (on page 82).
 You can now edit the assembly path of an assembly using the ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS
command. For more information, see Edit an assembly path (on page 111).
 You can now redefine connection points for a user shape by using the EDITUSERSHAPE
command. For more information, see Edit by redefining connection points (on page 172).

Update History
 You can now use the PIPW1 (Buttweld pipe), PIPF1 (Socket Weld or Threaded pipe), and
PIPFL1 (Flanged pipe) commands to draw single pipe components. For more information,
see Pipe (on page 368).
 ElbowCenterLines are only available in 2D and Isometric modes. For more information, see
ElbowCenterLine (on page 34).
 Detail information has been added to LayerByLineNumber. For more information, see
LayerByLineNumber (on page 36).
 You can now reload a project file after changes have been made by clicking Reload File.
For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 43).
 You can now stop xdata from appearing in the bill of materials or components by using the
CONVERTEXISTING command. This command was previously known as the EXIST
command. For more information, see Convert Existing (on page 81).
 You can now refresh your project from changes made to your selected specification by
clicking Reload*.prj File. For more information, see Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View
Palette) (on page 85).
 You can now reload the global file by right clicking and selecting Reload Global File. For
more information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 109).

 You can now change the size of components by using the CHANGESIZE command. For
more information, see Change Size (on page 59).
 You can now change the specification of components by using the CHANGESPEC
command. For more information, see Change Specification (on page 66).
 You can now create assemblies using the CADWorx Assembly Manager. For more
information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 109).
 You can now auto route all components using the ROUTE command. For more information,
see Auto Route (on page 212).
 You can now set Piping Rules for CADWorx. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 47) in Setup (on page 25).
 Toolbars (on page 362) contain more information on how to model in 3D Modeling versus
2D Modeling (on page 363), Plane versus Isometrics view modes (on page 363), the
Compass (on page 363), and on Connecting to components (on page 363) for the new
features in CADWorx.
 You can now change the variable setting in the Configuration Settings in CADWorx Plant
Setup. For more information, see Configuration Settings (on page 28).
 You can now set your specification and size in the CADWorx Plant Setup. For more
 You can now update your configuration layers in CADWorx Plant Setup. For more
information, see Configuration Layers (on page 44).
 CADWorx now incorporates a new Spec Editor program. For more information see Editor
(on page 59) or the CADWorx Spec Editor Users Guide.
 Updated all panels and toolbars to reflect changes throughout the software.

Index
Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule • 50
2 Apply Bolt Insertion Rule • 49
Apply Branch Table Rule • 49
2D Double Line • 80 Apply Change Data Rule • 52
2D Panel • 202 Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box • 52
2D Representation • 202 Apply End Type Rule • 48
2D Representation Hidden • 203 Apply Flange Insertion Rule • 49
2D Single Line • 80 Apply Gasket Insertion Rule • 48
Apply Line Number Rule • 51
3 Apply O-let Minimum Spacing Rule • 53
3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling • 363 Apply Pipe End Prep Rule • 50
3D Solids • 80 Apply Pipe Healing Rule • 49
3-Way Plan Valve • 417 Apply Pipe Length Rule • 48
3-Way Side Valve • 420 Apply Size Rule • 47
3-Way Vertical Valve • 420 Apply Skew Pipe Maximum Angle • 53
Apply Specification Rule • 47
Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View
4 Palette) • 99
45 LR Ell • 381 Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule • 49
4-Way Plan Valve • 418 Apply Weld Insertion Rule • 48
4-Way Side Valve • 421 Arrow • 238
Assembly View Palette • 109
9 Assign • 141
90 LR Ell • 379 Assign line numbers • 142
90 SR Ell • 380 Audit HVAC Database • 360
Audit Pipe Database • 159
Audit Steel Database • 336
A Audit the HVAC database • 361
Accessing and Docking the Toolbars • 362 AuditDataOnStartup • 30
Add a user shape to a specification • 187 Auto Connect • 164
Add an HVAC shape to the drawing • 342 Auto Cope • 323
Add or remove properties from BOM • 146, Auto Gasket • 206
326, 352 Auto Route • 212
Adjust a dimension to match a pipe • 200 Auto Routing from the strainer lateral • 537
Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension • Auto Weld • 208
200 AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant • 550
Adjustable Bend • 378 AutoDimensionBox • 30
Aliases and Command Names • 363 Automatic • 207, 223
All • 59
AlphaSizeControl • 29 B
Anchor • 255
Angle Double Shape • 279 Ball Valve • 411
Angle Shape with Lip • 277 Base Plate • 283
Angle Shapes • 270 Bill of Material Setup • 145
Angle Side Valve • 422 Bleed Ring or Spacer • 538
Angle Top Valve • 419 Blind Flange • 399
Annotate • 142 Bolt • 206
Annotate Component • 321 BoltRoundControl • 32
Apply Auto Coupling Rule • 50

Index
BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box Change the layer associated with an object
• 148 • 249
BomBoltControl • 31 Change the layers associated with HVAC
BomScheduleDirection • 31 components • 359
BomScheduleSpacing • 31 Change the size automatically • 60
BomTagGridFactor • 31 Change the size manually • 61
BomTagOptimize • 32 Change the size of a model with branch
BomTagRadiusFactor • 32 connections automatically • 62
BomTagSpacingFactor • 32 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes
Box • 203 automatically • 61
Break by Length • 191 Change the size of a reducer and the pipes
Break by Number • 191 manually • 62
Break Pipe • 191 Change the specification automatically • 67
Butterfly Valve • 414 Change the specification manually • 67
Buttweld • 364 Change the specification of a model with
Buttweld LR • 218 branches automatically • 68
Buttweld SR • 218 Channel Shape with Lip • 276
Buttweld Valves • 409 Channel Shapes • 269
Check Valve • 413
C Clash View Palette • 107
Compass • 261, 363
C.G. Generator • 161 Component • 227
CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Component Custom Data Dialog Box • 76
Specifications Dialog Box • 54 Conc Reducer • 373
CADWorxMaterial • 32 Configuration Layers • 44
CAESARIIMaterial • 33 Configuration Settings • 28
CAESARIIMemory • 33 Connecting to components • 363
CAESARIITolerance • 33 Continue Routing • 214
CAESARIIVersion • 33 Control Valve • 416
Cap • 374 Conventions • 16
Center Line • 53 Convert a component to a different mode •
CG Generator • 338 80
Change • 226 Convert Existing • 81
Change Elevation • 197 Convert from project data • 81
Change elevation by BOP • 198 Convert Intersected Piping • 82
Change elevation by entering the elevation Convert Isometric • 80
value • 198 Convert Legacy Drawing • 53
Change elevation by Pick • 198 Convert Solid • 322
Change elevation by TOP • 199 Convert to 3D enhanced • 81
Change Layer • 249 Coordinates • 228
Change position and direction of generic Count • 140
nozzle • 193 Count weld gaps automatically • 210
Change Size • 59 Coupling • 436
Change Specification • 66 Create a 2D representation • 203
Change tee sizes automatically • 63 Create a 2D representation with hidden
Change tee sizes manually • 64 lines • 203
Change text alignment in columns • 147, Create a 2D single line user shape • 185
326, 353 Create a 2D user shape • 183
Change the BOM sorting and accumulation Create a 3D user shape • 182
• 147, 326, 353 Create a new frame configuration • 302
Change the column order • 147, 326, 353 Create a user shape file • 170
Change the Elevation • 226 Create a user shape from a block • 180
Create a user shape from a polyline • 178

Index
Create a user shape from points • 176 E

Create an assembly • 110
East • 263
Creating a Base Profile • 551
Ecc Reducer • 374
Cross Plan • 456
Edit • 204, 314, 350
Cross Reducing Plan • 457
Edit a frame configuration • 303
Cross Reducing Side • 472
Edit an assembly • 110
Cross Reducing Vertical • 473
Edit an assembly path • 111
Cross Side • 472
Edit an existing user shape • 171
Custom Data Dialog Box • 78
Edit by redefining connection points • 172
Custom Data Tab (CADWorx Spec View
Edit HVAC components globally • 351
Palette) • 88
Edit Pipe Support Features • 95
Cut • 313
Editing Component Data Files • 549
Cut BOM using Automatic placement • 149,
Editor • 59
328, 355
Elbow Centerline • 200
Cut BOM using Manual placement • 149,
ElbowCenterLine • 34
329, 355
Elbowlet Socket Weld in Plan • 503
Cut HVAC Bill of Material • 354
Elbowlet Socket Weld in Side • 515
Cut members by line • 313
Elbowlet Socket Weld in Vertical • 516
Cut members by three-point plane • 313
Elbowlet Thread in Plan • 503
Cut Pipe Bill of Material • 148
Elbowlet Thread in Side • 514
Cut Steel Bill of Material • 327
Elbowlet Thread in Vertical • 515
CWexplode • 82
Elbowlet Weld in Plan • 503
Elbowlet Weld in Side • 514
D Elbowlet Weld in Vertical • 514
Data Remove • 358 Elevation • 227, 237
DataBaseCodesISOGEN • 33 Enable curved piping in Plant isometrics •
DB Generate • 359 117
DB In • 360 Enable the Repeatability return report • 115
Decrement • 141 End Type Information • 134
Define a weld gap • 533 Enter User Name and Password Dialog Box
Delete a layer • 250 • 156
Delete an assembly from the Assembly Expansion Joint • 539
Manager • 111 Export an entire drawing to a VUE file • 220
Delete Bill of Material • 154 Export CADWorx HVAC data • 360
Delete Layer • 249 Export Pipe • 156
Detail • 234 Export Pipe Bill of Material • 153
Diaphragm Valve • 415 Export selected objects to a VUE file • 221
Dim Adjustment • 199 Export Steel • 335
Dimension Panel • 222 Export Steel Bill of Material • 333
DimensionsExcludedSlope • 34 Export Steel Model • 337
DimensionsExistingISOGEN • 34 Export to VUE • 220
Discontinuity View Palette • 101 Extract batch ISOGEN files • 118
Display only the layer associated with an Extract ISOGEN files • 115
object • 251 Extract piping component files • 124
Dots • 243
Draw non-pipe components • 86 F
Draw pipe components • 86
Fiberglass • 428
Drawing Prototype • 29
Fiberglass Pipe • 431
Dual Check Valve • 416
Find Legacy Components Dialog Box • 56
Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) • 90
FittingWidth • 34
Flange O.D. • 246

Index
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan • 438 Insert a drawing into the project • 106
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side • 444 Insert a flange O.D. • 246
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert • 445 Insert a gasket • 533
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan • 437 Insert a hidden end • 247
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side • 444 Insert a pipe end • 247
Flanged Concentric Reducer • 439 Insert a pipe support • 93
Flanged Plan • 537 Insert a plain end • 247
Flanged Side • 540 Insert a reinforcement pad • 253
Flanged Tee Plan • 438 Insert a reinforcement saddle • 254
Flanged Tee Side • 445 Insert a tee support • 94
Flanged Tee Vertical • 446 Insert an assembly into the drawing • 111
Flanges • 395 Insert an elbow support • 93
Flat • 260 Insert multiple pipe supports • 95
Flat Bar Shapes • 274 Insert Tag • 154
Flgd/BW Valves • 409 Instrument • 236
Frame Annotation • 303 Insulation View Palette • 97
Full Coupling End • 443 ISO • 241
ISO Flag • 200
G ISO Text • 229
ISOGEN Batch • 118
Gasket • 532 ISOGEN Data Dialog Box • 71
Gaskets, Etc. • 532 ISOGEN Export Options • 172
Gate Valve • 411 ISOGEN Information • 125
GC Edit • 350 ISOGEN Out • 113
Generate a CAESAR II input file • 189 ISOGEN Panel • 112
Generic Attach • 193, 348 ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure •
Global Edit • 77, 319 125
Global Edit All • 319 ISOGEN Start Point • 120
Globe Valve • 412 ISOGEN Supplemental • 119
Graphics / Pipe Ends • 230 ISOGENContinuationGraphicsCount • 35
Group On/Off • 165 ISOGENDefaultStyle • 35
Guide • 257 ISOGENSetting • 35
Isolate Layer • 251
H
Handrail • 307 J
Height • 229 Join by Run • 166
Hidden End • 247 Join by Segment • 166
Horizontal • 223 Join Pipe • 165
Horizontal with Tail • 225
HVAC • 340
HVAC BOM Setup • 351 L
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel • 339 Label components with line numbers • 142
HVAC Shapes Catalog • 342 Ladder • 304
HVACLibraryDirectory • 34 LanguageFile • 35
Lap Joint Flange • 403
I Lateral Plan • 457
Lateral Side • 473
Import CADWorx HVAC data • 360 Lateral Vertical • 474
Import Pipe • 158 Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan • 504
Import Pipe Bill of Material • 153 Latrolet Socket Weld in Side • 517
Import Steel • 335 Latrolet Thread in Plan • 504
Import Steel Model • 338 Latrolet Thread in Side • 516
Increment • 141

Index
Latrolet Weld in Plan • 504 Modify multiple components • 78

Latrolet Weld in Side • 516 Modifying a User Profile • 550
Layer Change • 322, 358 Moveline • 216
Layer Off • 250 MVSetup • 23
Layer On • 250
LayerByLineNumber • 36 N
Layers Dialog Box • 109
Layers Panel • 248 Nipolet Thread in Plan • 505
Line • 143 Nipolet Thread in Vertical • 518
Line Isolate • 143 Nipolet Weld in Plan • 505
Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Nipolet Weld in Vertical • 517
Palette) • 89 Nipple • 491
Line Numbering System Dialog Box • 138 Non Standard • 210
Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup North • 261
Dialog Box • 87 Nozzle Generic Attach • 191
Line Numbers • 542
Line View Isolation Properties Manager • 91 O
Line View Palette • 89 Obsolete Commands • 21
Lined • 423 Offset Tap • 120
Lined Eccentric Reducer • 426 Online Help • 22
Lined Pipe • 426 Operators • 542
Lined Wye Plan • 427 Optional Component Dialog Box • 57
Lined Wye Side • 427 Optional Items • 57
Lined Wye Vert • 428 Options Dialog Box • 108
LineNumberSystem • 38 OrthoGen Launch • 135
LineViewIsolationSettingsFile • 38 OrthoGen Out • 135
Link components • 106 OrthoGen Panel • 135
LNum Panel • 137
Local Edit • 68
Loft • 292
P
Long Weld Neck • 404 P&ID View Palette • 103
Palettes • 548
Palettes Panel • 84
M PCF In • 124
Match an object's layer • 251 PCF Out • 123
Match Layer • 250 Pipe • 368
Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Pipe BOM / DB Panel • 144
Palette) • 104 Pipe End • 247
Material List Definition • 125 Pipe Ends • 534
Misc • 245, 535 Pipe Shapes • 272
Misc Panel • 163 Pipe Support Report • 103
Miter • 312 PipeDescriptionCat • 38
Miters • 376 PipeSupportSetting • 39
Mode Convert • 79 Piping Rules • 47
Modeling in 2D • 383, 420, 427, 439, 468, Place a 180 degree plan return • 372, 373
506, 530, 540 Place a 180 degree side return • 388, 389
Modeling in 3D • 368, 411, 426, 431, 453, Place a 180 degree vertical return • 389,
490, 520, 537 390
Modify a component • 70 Place a 3-way plan valve • 417, 466, 526
Modify a user-defined HVAC shape • 348 Place a 3-way side valve • 420, 479, 530
Modify an HVAC shape • 342 Place a 3-way vertical valve • 420, 480, 530
Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog • Place a 45 degree rolled elbow • 381
345 Place a 4-way plan valve • 418, 526

Index
Place a 4-way side valve • 421, 531 Place a plan reducing cross • 375
Place a 90 degree plan elbow • 369, 432, Place a plan sock-o-let • 437
437, 454, 493 Place a plan tee • 371, 372, 433, 455, 456,
Place a 90 degree reducing plan elbow • 495, 496
371, 454, 495 Place a plan wye • 383, 427, 462
Place a 90 degree rolled elbow • 380 Place a plug • 500
Place a 90 degree side street elbow • 506 Place a relief side valve • 527
Place a 90 degree street plan elbow • 494 Place a relief top valve • 531
Place a base plate • 285 Place a rigid element • 540
Place a base plate with holes • 285 Place a rolled pipe • 378
Place a bleed ring • 538 Place a rolled tee • 381
Place a bushing • 436, 500 Place a rotational restraint • 256
Place a cap • 374, 436, 462, 498 Place a sanitary plan reducing cross • 457
Place a concentric reducer • 373, 434, 439, Place a sanitary side or vertical u-bend •
460, 497 477, 478
Place a concentric reducer swage • 496 Place a sanitary side reducing cross • 473
Place a coupling • 436, 461, 462, 501 Place a sanitary u-bend • 460
Place a coupling end • 443, 511, 512 Place a section graphic • 234
Place a detail graphic • 235 Place a side blind spectacle • 539
Place a fiberglass pipe • 432 Place a side cross • 390, 442, 472, 510
Place a flange • 399, 403 Place a side elbowlet fitting • 514, 515
Place a flange on a pipe • 397, 398, 400, Place a side flange pipe • 541
402, 405, 406, 408 Place a side flanged tee • 445
Place a flange that mates with another Place a side lateral • 391, 442, 473, 474,
flange • 397, 399, 401, 402, 405, 407, 511
408 Place a side latrolet fitting • 516, 517
Place a frame in the drawing • 303 Place a side or vertical elbow • 384, 385,
Place a gasket automatically • 207 392, 393, 394, 439, 440, 444, 445, 468,
Place a gasket manually • 207 469, 470, 475, 476, 477, 506, 507
Place a generic attachment in the drawing • Place a side reducing cross • 390
195, 349 Place a side reducing elbow • 386, 469, 508
Place a guide • 257 Place a side socket weld threaded pipe •
Place a ladder interactively • 306 538
Place a ladder using key-ins • 306 Place a side socket weld/threaded pipe •
Place a ladder with a cage • 306 541
Place a miscellaneous graphic • 246 Place a side tee • 386, 387, 441, 470, 471,
Place a mitered pipe • 377 508, 509
Place a multi-port valve • 467, 468 Place a side wye • 394, 427, 478
Place a nipple • 491 Place a snubber • 256
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the Place a spring hanger • 255
drawing • 188 Place a stub or weld neck • 403, 404
Place a nozzle generic attachment • 192 Place a symmetrical user shape in the
Place a pipe • 368, 426 drawing • 188
Place a plan cross • 375, 435, 457, 499 Place a tap • 124
Place a plan elbow • 370, 382, 433, 438, Place a threaded/socket pipe • 491
455, 459, 494 Place a translational restraint • 254
Place a plan elbowlet fitting • 503 Place a user-defined HVAC shape • 348
Place a plan fitting • 502, 505 Place a valve • 411, 412, 413, 414, 415,
Place a plan flange pipe • 537 416, 417, 463, 464, 465, 521, 522, 523,
Place a plan flanged tee • 438 524, 525, 528, 529
Place a plan graphic • 236 Place a vertical blind spectacle • 542
Place a plan lateral • 376, 435, 458, 499 Place a vertical elbowlet fitting • 514, 515,
Place a plan latrolet fitting • 504 516

Index
Place a vertical fitting • 513, 517, 518 Plan 180 LR Return • 372
Place a vertical lateral • 392, 443, 474, 475, Plan 180 SR Return • 373
511 Plan 22.5 Ell • 382
Place a vertical reducing cross • 391, 473 Plan 45 Ell • 370
Place a vertical soc-o-let • 443 Plan 90 LR Ell • 368
Place a vertical strainer • 446 Plan 90 Reducing Ell • 370
Place a vertical tee • 387, 388, 441, 471, Plan 90 SR Ell • 369
472, 509, 510 Plan Cross • 375
Place a vertical wye • 395, 428, 479 Plan Lateral • 376
Place a weld dot graphic • 244 Plan Reducing Cross • 375
Place a weld symbol graphic • 241 Plan Reducing Tee • 372
Place an adjustable bend • 379 Plan Tee • 371
Place an anchor • 255 Plan Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow •
Place an angle side valve • 421, 422, 480, 432
532 Plan Wye • 383
Place an angle top valve • 527 Plane versus Isometrics view modes • 363
Place an angle valve • 419, 466 Plate • 281
Place an arrow head graphic • 239 Plug Valve • 413
Place an eccentric reducer • 374, 426, 434, Point and Shoot UCS • 258
461, 498 Preface • 16
Place an eccentric reducer swage • 497 Pressure Top Valve • 422
Place an elevation graphic • 238 Previous • 251
Place an expansion joint • 539
Place an HVAC shape from the catalog • R
345
Place an instrument graphic • 237 Read a CAESAR II input file • 197
Place an isometric symbol graphic • 243 Re-associate the Components • 200
Place an offset tap • 123 Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer
Place automatic dimensions • 223 Off command • 250
Place component annotation • 227 Reducing Slip-on Flange • 404
Place component elevation annotation • 228 Reducing Tee Plan • 456
Place coordinates • 228 Reducing Tee Side • 471
Place hand rail by points • 308 Reducing Tee Vertical • 472
Place hand rail by polyline • 308 Reducing Threaded Flange • 406
Place horizontal dimensions • 223 Reducing Weld Neck Flange • 407
Place horizontal tailed dimensions • 225 Reinforcing Pad • 253
Place nonstandard stud bolts • 211 Reinforcing Saddle • 253, 539
Place plate by closed polyline • 282 Relief Side Valve • 418
Place plate by curves • 283 Relief Top Valve • 421
Place plate by points • 282 Remove CADWorx data from components •
Place rotated dimensions • 225 358
Place standard stud bolts • 210 Restore XDATA • 30
Place stud bolts automatically • 207 Restraints • 534
Place stud bolts manually • 208 Restraints Panel • 252
Place tick marks • 229 Rigid Element • 540
Place tubing • 492 Rolled Pipe • 377
Place vertical dimensions • 224 Rotary Valve • 415
Place vertical tailed dimensions • 226 Rotated • 225
Place weld gaps automatically • 209 Rotational • 256
Place weld gaps manually • 209 Round Bar Shapes • 275
Plain End • 246 Route from a generic nozzle • 193
Plan • 235 Route skewed pipe • 215
Plan 11.25 Ell • 382 Router • 216

Index
Router commands • 217 SaveLastProfileUsed • 39

RT Panel • 212 Section • 233
Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Select Control • 323
Fabricator with CADWorx Plant • 551 Select Item Dialog Box • 157
Set • 139, 224
S Set Layer • 249
Set line numbers based on a component •
Saddle in Vertical • 443 140
Sanitary • 446 Set line numbers based on a P&ID project •
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan • 459 140
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side • 476 Set line numbers based on the current
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical • 477 drawing • 140
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan • 458 Set Size by Component • 288
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side • 475 Set Specification & Size Dialog Box • 44
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical • 476 Set Specification and Size • 43
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan • 466 Set the active layer • 249
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side • 479 Set the current line number to that of a
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical • 479 component • 143
Sanitary 45 Ell Plan • 455 Set the Elevation • 224
Sanitary 45 Ell Side • 469 Set the line count value • 141
Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical • 470 Settings • 83, 546
Sanitary 90 Ell Plan • 453 Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View
Sanitary 90 Ell Side • 468 Palette) • 98
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan • 454 Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette)
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side • 469 • 87
Sanitary Angle Valve Plan • 466 Setup • 23, 25, 138
Sanitary Angle Valve Side • 480 Setup Live Database • 155
Sanitary Ball Valve • 463 Setup Live Database Steel • 334
Sanitary Butterfly Valve • 465 Setup short description column for material
Sanitary Cap • 462 list with text wrapping • 116
Sanitary Check Valve • 465 Setup Size/Spec Panel • 24
Sanitary Concentric • 460 Shapes • 264
Sanitary Eccentric • 460 Show Removed XDATA • 30
Sanitary Gate Valve • 463 Side 11.25 Ell • 392
Sanitary Globe Valve • 464 Side 180 LR Return • 388
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan • 458 Side 180 SR Return • 389
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side • 474 Side 22.5 Ell • 393
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical • 475 Side 45 Ell • 384
Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve • 467 Side 90 LR Ell • 383
Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve • 467 Side 90 Reducing Ell • 385
Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve • 467 Side 90 SR Ell • 384
Sanitary Nut/Coupling • 462 Side Cross • 390
Sanitary Plug Valve • 464 Side Lateral • 391
Sanitary Stub • 461 Side Reducing Cross • 390
Sanitary Tee Plan • 455 Side Reducing Tee • 387
Sanitary Tee Side • 470 Side Tee • 386
Sanitary Tee Vertical • 471 Side Threaded/Socket 90 Degree Elbow •
Sanitary U-Bend Plan • 459 439
Sanitary U-Bend Side • 477 Side Wye • 394
Sanitary U-Bend Vertical • 478 Single BOM using Automatic placement •
Sanitary Wye Plan • 461 152, 332, 358
Sanitary Wye Side • 478 Single BOM using Manual placement • 152,
Sanitary Wye Vertical • 479 333, 358

Index
Single HVAC Bill of Material • 357 SteelCopeWeldDistance • 40

Single Line Steel • 293 SteelLibraryDirectory • 40
Single Pipe Bill of Material • 151 SteelNeutralAxis • 40
Single Steel Bill of Material • 331 SteelPartNumberFile • 41
SingleLineWidth • 39 SteelRoundControl • 41
Size • 58 SteelRoundUnit • 41
Size-Spec • 59 SteelToolTipSetting • 41
SKEY Information • 126 Stop Sign • 119
Slip-on Flange • 398 Stub End • 403
Snubber • 256 Support Directory • 23
Socket Type Flange • 400 Support Modeler Palette • 91
Socket Weld • 82, 219 SW/Thrd Plan • 538
Sock-O-Let • 437 SW/Thrd Side • 541
Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan • 502 Synchronize HVAC Database • 361
Sockolet Socket Weld in Vertical • 513 Synchronize Pipe Database • 159
South • 262 Synchronize Steel Database • 337
Spec • 58 Synchronize the HVAC database • 361
Spec Editor • 87 SyncOnStartUp • 41
Spec View Palette • 85 System In • 196
Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View System Out • 189
Palette) • 85 System Prompts • 232
Special Monitored Commands Used With a System Visibility • 201
Live Database • 553 SystemMeasure • 42
Specification and Data Files • 549
Specification and Size • 57 T
SpecificationDefaultProject • 40
SpecificationDirectory • 39 Tag Location • 154
Specify the Bill of Material Mark Point and Tag Toggle Bill of Material • 154
the Center of Gravity Location • 196 Tap • 124
Specify the weld dot size for a single line Technical Support • 17
pipe • 165 Tee • 381
SpecSizeOverride • 40 Tee Shapes • 271
Spectacle Blind Side • 539 TemplateDatabaseFile • 42
Spectacle Blind Vertical • 541 Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan • 526
Spring Hanger • 255 Thrd/SW 3 Way Side • 530
Stair • 308 Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical • 530
Standard • 210 Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan • 526
Start a new route • 214 Thrd/SW 4 Way Side • 530
Startup Defaults • 23 Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan • 494
Startup Variables • 28 Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side • 507
Steel • 544 Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert • 507
Steel - Cope • 312 Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan • 493
Steel - Frame Creation • 301 Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side • 506
Steel - Generic Attachment • 288 Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan • 495
Steel Bolts • 285 Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side • 508
Steel BOM / DB Panel • 324 Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan • 493
Steel BOM Setup • 325 Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side • 506
Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Thrd/SW Angle Side • 531
Dialog Box • 327 Thrd/SW Angle Top • 527
Steel Draw Panel • 280 Thrd/SW Ball • 521
Steel Edit Panel • 311 Thrd/SW Bush/Insert • 500
Steel Shapes Panel • 264 Thrd/SW Cap • 498
SteelCopeBoltDistance • 40 Thrd/SW Check • 523

Index
Thrd/SW Conc Swage • 496 Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan • 433

Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub • 497 Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side • 441
Thrd/SW Control • 525 Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert • 441
Thrd/SW Cross Plan • 499 Threadolet Thread in Plan • 502
Thrd/SW Cross Side • 510 Threadolet Thread in Vertical • 513
Thrd/SW Diaphragm • 524 Tick Mark • 229
Thrd/SW Dual Check • 525 Toolbars • 362
Thrd/SW Ecc Swage • 497 ToolTipSetting • 42
Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub • 498 Top Works Add • 188
Thrd/SW Full Clpg End • 511 Top Works Change • 189
Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan • 500 TopWorksSetting • 42
Thrd/SW Gage • 528 Total BOM using Automatic placement •
Thrd/SW Gate • 521 151, 330, 356
Thrd/SW Globe • 522 Total BOM using Manual placement • 151,
Thrd/SW Half Clpg End • 512 331, 356
Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan • 501 Total HVAC Bill of Material • 355
Thrd/SW Lateral Plan • 499 Total Pipe Bill of Material • 150
Thrd/SW Lateral Side • 510 Total Steel Bill of Material • 329
Thrd/SW Lateral Vert • 511 Translational • 254
Thrd/SW Needle • 523 Tube • 492
Thrd/SW Pipe • 490 Tube Shapes • 273
Thrd/SW Plug • 500, 522 Turn off a layer • 250
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End • 512 Turn off the zoom lock • 205
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan • 501 Turn on all layers • 251
Thrd/SW Relief Side • 527 Turn on the zoom lock • 205
Thrd/SW Relief Top • 531
Thrd/SW Rotary • 524 U
Thrd/SW Tee Plan • 495
Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan • 496 UCS • 543
Thrd/SW Tee Red Side • 509 UCS Next • 261
Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert • 510 UCS Object • 263
Thrd/SW Tee Side • 508 UCS Panel • 258
Thrd/SW Tee Vert • 509 Union • 314
Thrd/SW Union • 505 Un-Isolate Layer • 251
Thrd/SW Valves • 518 Unlink components • 106
Threaded • 82, 219 Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View
Threaded Flange • 401 Palette) • 106
Threaded/Socket • 485 Update History • 554
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan • UseObjectsFromXrefs • 43
433 User Shape • 290, 345
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side • User Shapes • 166
440
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Vert • V
440 Vert 11.25 Ell • 393
Threaded/Socket Cap • 436 Vert 180 LR Return • 388
Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer • 434 Vert 180 SR Return • 389
Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer • 434 Vert 22.5 Ell • 394
Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing • 436 Vert 45 Ell • 385
Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan • 435 Vert Lateral • 392
Threaded/Socket Lateral Side • 442 Vert Reducing Cross • 391
Threaded/Socket Lateral Vert • 442 Vert Reducing Tee • 387
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan • 435 Vert Tee • 386
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Side • 442

Index
Vert Wye • 395

Vertical • 224
Vertical with Tail • 226
Victaulic • 481
View Clip • 258
VUE Panel • 220
W
Weld • 240
Weld Gap • 533
Weld Neck Flange • 396
Weld Size • 165
Weld Total • 209
WeldDotSize • 43
WeldGapToDB • 43
Weldolet Weld in Plan • 502
Weldolet Weld in Vertical • 512
West • 262
What's New in Plant • 20
Wide Flange Shapes • 268
X
X-Body Gate BW • 528
X-Body Gate SW • 529
X-Body Gate Thrd • 529
XREF Edit • 83
Z
Z Shapes • 278
Zoom Factors • 205
Zoom Lock • 205

CADWorxPlantUsersGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CADWorxPlantUsersGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CADWorxPlantUsersGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CADWorx

Plant User's Guide

Version 2015 SP1 (15.0)

August 2014 / February 2015

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 2

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 3

Setup Size/Spec Panel .............................................................................................................................. 24

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 4

Modify multiple components ........................................................................................................... 78

Palettes Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 84

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 5

Edit an assembly path .................................................................................................................. 111

ISOGEN Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 112

OrthoGen Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 135

LNum Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 137

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 6

Pipe BOM / DB Panel ............................................................................................................................... 144

Misc Panel ................................................................................................................................................ 163

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 7

Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing ........................................................................... 188

Bolt ............................................................................................................................................................ 206

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 8

Place stud bolts manually ............................................................................................................. 208

RT Panel ................................................................................................................................................... 212

VUE Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 220

Dimension Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 222

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 9

Place component elevation annotation ........................................................................................ 228

Graphics / Pipe Ends............................................................................................................................... 230

Layers Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 248

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 10

Restraints Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 252

UCS Panel................................................................................................................................................. 258

Steel Shapes Panel .................................................................................................................................. 264

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 11

Angle Shape with Lip .................................................................................................................... 277

Steel Draw Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 280

Steel Edit Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 311

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 12

Steel BOM / DB Panel .............................................................................................................................. 324

HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel ................................................................................................................ 339

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 13

Total HVAC Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 355

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 14

Sanitary ............................................................................................................................................... 446

Specification and Data Files ................................................................................................................... 549

AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant ................................................................................................... 550

Update History ......................................................................................................................................... 554

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 558

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 15

Convention Type of Information

[CD-DRIVE] The CD-ROM drive on your computer. Substitute your CD-ROM

Command Line Items that need to be typed in or appear at the AutoCAD

User Responses User responses to command prompts.

Commands CADWorx and AutoCAD commands.

Options Command line options.

CAPITALS AutoCAD system variables or keywords.

CADWorx Plant User's Guide 16